tarbelaassessment.pdf
Short Description
Download tarbelaassessment.pdf...
Description
TARBELA 4TH EXTENSION HYDROPOWER PROJECT
Prepared by Independent Consultants ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL ASSESSMENT August 2011
Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority (WAPDA)
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Contents List of Acronyms .......................................................................................................... xi 1
2
3
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1
Background ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2
The Proposed Project .................................................................................. 1-1
1.3
The Environmental and Social Assessment ................................................. 1-3
1.4
Composition of Study Team ....................................................................... 1-5
Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework................................................... 2-1 2.1
General ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2
Pakistan ...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3
2.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 2-1 2.2.2 Environmental Legislation .............................................................. 2-1 2.2.3 National Environmental Guidelines and Policies ............................. 2-6 2.2.4 National Environmental Quality Standards ...................................... 2-7 2.2.5 Environment Regulatory Authorities ............................................... 2-8 International Treaties and Conventions ....................................................... 2-9
2.4
World Bank .............................................................................................. 2-10
2.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................... 2-10 2.4.2 World Bank Environmental and Social Guidelines ........................ 2-10 2.4.3 Operational Policies (OPs) of the World Bank .............................. 2-10 2.4.4 Applicable World Bank Policies ................................................... 2-12 2.4.5 Compliance Status with Pakistani and World Bank Policies .......... 2-13 Project Description ............................................................................................. 3-1 3.1
Tarbela Dam Project Overview ................................................................... 3-1
3.2
Objectives of 4th Extension Project ............................................................ 3-1
3.3
Salient Features .......................................................................................... 3-1
3.4
Project Components.................................................................................... 3-1
3.5
3.4.1 Intake Arrangement......................................................................... 3-4 3.4.2 Penstock Connection to Tunnel 4 .................................................... 3-6 3.4.3 Proposed Powerhouse ..................................................................... 3-8 3.4.4 Mechanical and Electrical Plant ...................................................... 3-8 3.4.5 Switchyard .................................................................................... 3-10 3.4.6 Transmission Lines ....................................................................... 3-11 3.4.7 Tailrace ......................................................................................... 3-11 Other Components .................................................................................... 3-11 3.5.1 Labor Camps................................................................................. 3-11 3.5.2 Construction Materials .................................................................. 3-12
WAPDA August 2011
ii
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
4
5
6
3.6
3.5.3 Waste Generation and Disposal ..................................................... 3-13 Program for Development......................................................................... 3-14
3.7
3.6.1 Construction Method of Tunnel 4 Raised Intake ............................ 3-14 Summary of Project Cost .......................................................................... 3-18
Need for Project and Analysis of Alternatives................................................... 4-1 4.1
Need for Project ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2
4.1.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-1 4.1.2 Regional Context ............................................................................ 4-1 4.1.3 National Context ............................................................................. 4-2 4.1.4 Demand Trends ............................................................................... 4-3 Assessment of Alternatives ......................................................................... 4-9
4.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-9 4.2.2 Without Project Option ................................................................... 4-9 4.2.3 Site Alternatives.............................................................................. 4-9 4.2.4 Alternatives for the Powerhouse ...................................................... 4-9 4.2.5 Alternatives for the Intake ............................................................. 4-15 4.2.6 Coffer Dam Option ....................................................................... 4-17 4.2.7 Alternatives for the Switchyard ..................................................... 4-17 4.2.8 Alternatives for the Type of Cement.............................................. 4-18 4.2.9 Method of Excavation and Drilling ............................................... 4-18 Stakeholder Consultations ................................................................................. 5-1 5.1
Introduction ................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2
Objectives .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3
Identification of Stakeholders ..................................................................... 5-1
5.4
5.3.1 Primary Stakeholders ...................................................................... 5-2 5.3.2 Secondary Stakeholders .................................................................. 5-2 Consultation Process................................................................................... 5-2
5.5
5.4.1 Stakeholder Consultation during the Scoping Phase ........................ 5-3 5.4.2 Stakeholder Consultation during Detailed Assessment .................... 5-3 5.4.3 Consultation with Institutional Stakeholders.................................... 5-4 5.4.4 Consultation with Community Representatives ............................... 5-4 5.4.5 Grass Roots Consultation ................................................................ 5-5 5.4.6 Consultation Workshops ................................................................. 5-5 Gender Consultations ................................................................................. 5-6
5.6
Consultations during Project Execution ...................................................... 5-8
5.7
Information Disclosure ............................................................................... 5-8
Environmental and Social Baseline.................................................................... 6-1 6.1
WAPDA August 2011
Overview .................................................................................................... 6-1
iii
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
6.2
Physical Environment ................................................................................. 6-1
6.3
6.2.1 Physiography .................................................................................. 6-1 6.2.2 Land Use......................................................................................... 6-3 6.2.3 Climate ........................................................................................... 6-3 6.2.4 Temperature .................................................................................... 6-3 6.2.5 Rainfall ........................................................................................... 6-4 6.2.6 Humidity......................................................................................... 6-4 6.2.7 Evaporation..................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.8 Geology .......................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.9 Seismology ..................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.10 Soil ................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.11 Soil Analysis ................................................................................... 6-8 6.2.12 Rock Stability and Landslides ....................................................... 6-10 6.2.13 Sedimentation ............................................................................... 6-10 6.2.14 Hydrology ..................................................................................... 6-10 6.2.15 Flooding ....................................................................................... 6-14 6.2.16 Surface Water Quality ................................................................... 6-14 6.2.17 Ground Water Quality ................................................................... 6-15 6.2.18 Air Quality .................................................................................... 6-16 6.2.19 Noise ............................................................................................ 6-16 6.2.20 Traffic and Transport .................................................................... 6-17 Biological Environment ............................................................................ 6-20
6.4
6.3.1 Wetlands and biodiversity ............................................................. 6-20 6.3.2 Significance of Tarbela Reservoir for Bird Migration .................... 6-20 6.3.3 Significance of Ghazi-Barotha Lake .............................................. 6-20 6.3.4 Protected Areas/ Game Reserves ................................................... 6-21 6.3.5 Hunting and Other Threats ............................................................ 6-21 6.3.6 Nature Conservation ..................................................................... 6-21 6.3.7 Terrestrial Flora ............................................................................ 6-21 6.3.8 Terrestrial Fauna ........................................................................... 6-23 6.3.9 Fish and Fisheries ......................................................................... 6-26 Social-economic Baseline ......................................................................... 6-27 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 6.4.8
WAPDA August 2011
Overview ...................................................................................... 6-27 Administrative Setup..................................................................... 6-28 Demography and Population ......................................................... 6-28 Economic Conditions .................................................................... 6-29 Social Infrastructure and Services ................................................. 6-31 Grazing ......................................................................................... 6-39 Cultural Heritage........................................................................... 6-39 Tourism and Recreation ................................................................ 6-40
iv
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
7
8
6.4.9 Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) and Social Organizations ................................................................................ 6-40 6.4.10 Poverty Status ............................................................................... 6-40 6.4.11 Gender Issues in the Project Area .................................................. 6-40 6.4.12 Tarbela Legacy ............................................................................. 6-44 Other Relevant Non-project Related Issues ...................................................... 7-1 7.1
Risk of Earthquakes .................................................................................... 7-1
7.2
Risk of Flooding ......................................................................................... 7-1
7.3
Climate Change .......................................................................................... 7-2
Significant Environmental Impacts of the Project and their Mitigations ........ 8-1 8.1
General ....................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2
Assessment of Effects and Significance ...................................................... 8-1
8.3
8.2.1 Magnitude ....................................................................................... 8-1 8.2.2 Sensitivity ....................................................................................... 8-2 8.2.3 Assigning Significance.................................................................... 8-3 8.2.4 Mitigation and Enhancement Measures ........................................... 8-3 8.2.5 Uncertainty ..................................................................................... 8-3 Summary of Assessed Impacts.................................................................... 8-4
8.4
Impacts during Pre-construction Stage ...................................................... 8-10
8.5
8.4.1 Land Use Change .......................................................................... 8-10 8.4.2 Preparation of Facilities for Contractor(s) and Labor Force ........... 8-10 8.4.3 Hindrance and Damages during Mobilization and Transport of Materials ....................................................................................... 8-12 Impacts during Construction Stage ........................................................... 8-12 8.5.1 Changed Topography/Land Form .................................................. 8-12 8.5.2 Reduced Irrigation Releases due to closure of Tunnel 4 and Tunnel 3 ................................................................................. 8-13 8.5.3 Reduced Power Generation ........................................................... 8-14 8.5.4 Impacts on Surface Water Quality ................................................. 8-14 8.5.5 Impact of Noise on Workers and Residential Areas ....................... 8-15 8.5.6 Risk of Landslides and Collapse of Slope during Construction ...... 8-16 8.5.7 Hindrance and Road Damage by Transport of Materials over Land ...................................................................................... 8-17 8.5.8 Disturbance of Fauna and Quality of Habitat by Increased Human Activities .......................................................................... 8-18 8.5.9 Soil and Water Pollution by Solid and Hazardous Wastes and Waste Effluents from Labor Camps and Construction Yards ....................................................................... 8-18 8.5.10 Impacts of Emissions of Gasses and Dust on Air Quality .............. 8-19 8.5.11 Removal of Natural Vegetation ..................................................... 8-19
WAPDA August 2011
v
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
8.6
Impacts during Operation and Maintenance .............................................. 8-20 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5 8.6.6
9
Potential Impacts on Irrigation Water Releases ............................. 8-20 Risks of Landslides during Extreme Weather Conditions .............. 8-20 Operational Noise from New Power Station .................................. 8-20 Bird Collision with Transmission Cables....................................... 8-20 Increased Maintenance Activities .................................................. 8-20 Reduced Power Generation during Closure of Low Level Intake Tunnel 3 and 4.................................................................... 8-21 Potential Social Impacts and their Mitigations ................................................. 9-1 9.1
General ....................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2
Summary of Assessed Impacts.................................................................... 9-1
9.3
Impacts during Pre-Construction Stage ....................................................... 9-4
9.4
9.3.1 Land Impacts .................................................................................. 9-4 Impacts and Opportunities during Construction Stage ................................. 9-4
9.5
9.4.1 Employment Opportunities during Construction.............................. 9-4 9.4.2 Construction Workers’ Rights ......................................................... 9-5 9.4.3 Prevention of Social Conflicts and Environmental Degradation: Development of Workers’ Code of Conduct .................................... 9-6 9.4.4 Increased Health and Safety Risks................................................... 9-7 9.4.5 Construction Disturbances and Possible Conflicts with Local Population ....................................................................................... 9-8 Social Assistance Program .......................................................................... 9-9
9.5.1 Community Development Assistance .............................................. 9-9 9.5.2 Addressing the Social Legacy of Previous Projects ....................... 9-10 10 Cumulative and Induced Impacts .................................................................... 10-1 10.1 Cumulative Impact of Investments in the Indus Basin Water System ........ 10-1 10.2 Plans for Storage Reservoirs ..................................................................... 10-1 10.3 Impact Downstream and on Delta and Coastal Zone ................................. 10-2 10.4 Preparation of a Master Plan for the Left Bank of Indus, Delta and Coastal Zone ............................................................................. 10-2 10.5 Sediment Management Plan for the Basin and Tarbela ............................. 10-3 10.6 Improving Irrigation Efficiencies .............................................................. 10-3 10.7 Role of Project in Cumulative Impacts...................................................... 10-3 10.8 Possible Induced Impact ........................................................................... 10-4 11 Environmental and Social Management Plan ................................................. 11-1 11.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 11-1 11.2 Objectives of ESMP ................................................................................. 11-1 11.3 Institutional Arrangements........................................................................ 11-1 WAPDA August 2011
vi
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
11.3.1 Inclusion of ESMP in Contract Documents ................................... 11-1 11.3.2 Implementation Responsibility ...................................................... 11-2 11.3.3 Construction: Establishment of Environmental and Social Management Unit ......................................................................... 11-2 11.3.4 Operation: The WAPDA Environment Cell .................................. 11-3 11.3.5 Consultant’s Environment and Social Monitor .............................. 11-4 11.3.6 Contractor’s Environment and Social Supervisor(s) ...................... 11-4 11.4 Capacity Building and Institutional Strengthening .................................... 11-4 11.4.1 Training and Awareness ................................................................ 11-4 11.4.2 Strengthening of WEC .................................................................. 11-5 11.4.3 Additional Capacity Building ........................................................ 11-6 11.5 Panel of Experts ....................................................................................... 11-6 11.6 Communication ........................................................................................ 11-6 11.7 Management and Monitoring Activities .................................................... 11-7 11.7.1 Structure of the Mitigation Plans ................................................... 11-7 11.7.2 Compliance Monitoring .............................................................. 11-23 11.7.3 Monitoring Predicted Effects....................................................... 11-23 11.7.4 Internal Audits ............................................................................ 11-27 11.7.5 External Audits (Third Party Validation) ..................................... 11-27 11.7.6 Management Reviews ................................................................. 11-27 11.8 Record Keeping ...................................................................................... 11-27 11.8.1 Monitoring Records .................................................................... 11-27 11.8.2 Complaints Records .................................................................... 11-28 11.8.3 Information Sources .................................................................... 11-28 11.8.4 Non-Compliance Report ............................................................. 11-29 11.8.5 Monthly Internal Reports ............................................................ 11-29 11.9 Grievance Mechanism ............................................................................ 11-29 11.9.1 Grievance Logging...................................................................... 11-30 11.10 Adequacy of Environmental and Social Management ............................. 11-31 11.11 Cost Estimates for Environmental Management and Monitoring............. 11-35
Annexes Annex A:
Consultation Details
Annex B:
List of Flora and Fauna
Annex C:
Environmental Code of Practice
Annex D:
IFC/WBG EHS Guidelines
WAPDA August 2011
vii
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
List of Table Table 2.1: Triggering the World Bank Policies ................................................... 2-12 Table 2.2: Compliance of Project with GoP Legislation and WB Safeguard Policies ................................................................................ 2-13 Table 3.1: Salient Features of the Project .............................................................. 3-3 Table 3.2: Estimated Cost of the Project .............................................................. 3-19 Table 4.1: Predicted Growth in Electrical Demand (DISCO-WISE Load Forecast (MW)) ............................................................................ 4-4 Table 4.2: Existing Installed Capacity of PEPCO System as of 30 June 2010 ...... 4-6 Table 4.3: Current Generating Capacity and Shortfall in Pakistan ..................... 4-9 Table 4.4: Criteria of the Alternative Site Locations ........................................... 4-12 Table 5.1: Main Activities during Consultation Process ....................................... 5-2 Table 5.2: Summary of Stakeholders’ Concerns/Recommendations .................... 5-7 Table 6.1: Average Monthly Relative Humidity (%) ............................................. 6-5 Table 6.2: Soil Analysis of Project Area ................................................................. 6-9 Table 6.3: Mean Monthly Flow Releases from Tarbela Reservoir (Mm3) ......... 6-11 Table 6.4: Historical Irrigation Releases from Tunnel 4 (Mm3) ......................... 6-12 Table 6.5: Historical Irrigation Releases from Tunnel 5 (Mm3) ......................... 6-13 Table 6.6: Surface Water Quality of Project Area .............................................. 6-15 Table 6.7: Standards Adopted by WAPDA.......................................................... 6-15 Table 6.8: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results ........................................... 6-16 Table 6.9: Baseline Noise Monitoring Results ...................................................... 6-17 Table 6.10: Average Daily Traffic in the Project Area .......................................... 6-19 Table 6.11: Game Reserves in Haripur district ..................................................... 6-21 Table 6.12: Ghazi Area Forest Statement .............................................................. 6-22 Table 6.13: Faunal Species at the Various Project Areas Surveyed ..................... 6-25 Table 6.14: Tarbela Dam Reservoir Characteristics ............................................. 6-26 Table 6.15: Estimated Numbers of Households and Population in Project Area ......................................................................................... 6-28 Table 6.16: Livestock in the Swabi and Haripur district ...................................... 6-30 Table 6.17: Health Facilities in the Swabi and Haripur Districts ......................... 6-34 Table 6.18: Availability of Health Facilities in the Project Area........................... 6-34 Table 6.19: Educational Facilities in the Swabi and Haripur Districts................. 6-35 Table 6.20: Education Facilities available in the Project Area ............................. 6-36 Table 6.21: Source of Drinking Water by Locality (%) ........................................ 6-37 WAPDA August 2011
viii
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 6.22: Level of Formal Education of Literate Female Respondents ............. 6-41 Table 6.23: Occupational Status of Women Respondents ..................................... 6-42 Table 6.24: Health Facilities Availed by Women in Last Year ............................. 6-42 Table 6.25: Most Common Diseases Prevailing in the Project Area ..................... 6-43 Table 6.26: Pressing Needs of Women ................................................................... 6-43 Table 6.27: Women’s Preference for Skill Development ....................................... 6-44 Table 8.1: Parameters for Determining Magnitude............................................... 8-2 Table 8.2: Criteria for Determining Sensitivity ..................................................... 8-2 Table 8.3: Assessment of Impact Significance........................................................ 8-3 Table 8.4: Significance of Environmental Impacts ................................................ 8-5 Table 9.1: Significance of Social Impacts ............................................................... 9-2 Table 11.1: Environmental and Social Trainings .................................................. 11-5 Table 11.2: Environmental Mitigation and Monitoring Plan – Construction (and Decommissioning) ....................................................................... 11-8 Table 11.3: Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan – Operation..... 11-22 Table 11.4: Monitoring of Predicted Effects ........................................................ 11-25 Table 11.5: Grievance Classification Criteria ...................................................... 11-30 Table 11.6: Stakeholders’ Concerns/Recommendations and their Redressal .... 11-31 Table 11.7: Cost Estimates for Management and Monitoring Activities ............ 11-35
List of Figures Figure 1.1: Tarbela Location Map ........................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1.2: Project Area and Location of Main Project Components .................... 1-4 Figure 2.1: Pakistan EIA Process............................................................................. 2-3 Figure 3.1: Satellite View of Tarbela Dam .............................................................. 3-2 Figure 3.2: Hydro Scheme Schematic ...................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3.3: Option 2 Section (a) ............................................................................... 3-5 Figure 3.4: Geologic Section along Centre-line of Tunnel 4.................................... 3-6 Figure 3.5: Penstock Connection and Powerhouse Location .................................. 3-7 Figure 3.6: Alternate Powerhouse Locations........................................................... 3-8 Figure 3.7: Transversal Section View of Powerhouse through Unit Axis .............. 3-9 Figure 3.8: Longitudinal Section View of Powerhouse with Three 450 MW Units ........................................................................................ 3-9 Figure 3.9: Excavation Sequence for Tunnel 4 Raised Intake .............................. 3-15 Figure 3.10: Construction Program of Intake Option 2.......................................... 3-16 WAPDA August 2011
ix
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Figure 3.11: Tentative Construction Program (Downstream Area)....................... 3-17 Figure 4.1: Breakdown of Hydropower Projects Within the Indus River Basin ... 4-1 Figure 4.2: Pakistan Energy Consumption per Capita ........................................... 4-2 Figure 4.3: Predicted Increase in System demand and Generating Capability ..... 4-7 Figure 4.4: Powerhouse Locations Considered ..................................................... 4-10 Figure 4.5: Powerhouse Locations Considered ..................................................... 4-11 Figure 4.6: Plan View of Intake Excavation Area for Tunnel 4 and Possible Location for Tunnel 3 Intake ................................................ 4-16 Figure 4.7: Coffer Dam Plan .................................................................................. 4-17 Figure 6.1: The Project Area and Sampling / Survey Locations ............................ 6-2 Figure 6.2: 5 Year Average Monthly Temperatures (oC) in the Project Area (2006-10)........................................................................................ 6-4 Figure 6.3: Mean Monthly Rainfall (2006-2010) in the Project Area ..................... 6-4 Figure 6.4: Mean Monthly Evaporation in the Project Area (cm) ......................... 6-5 Figure 6.5: Mean Monthly Flow Releases (2006-2010) from Tarbela Reservoir (Mm3) .................................................................................. 6-11 Figure 6.6: Releases from Tarbela Reservoir (Mm3) ............................................ 6-12 Figure 6.7: Location Map of Traffic Count Stations ............................................. 6-18 Figure 6.8: Social Survey Villages .......................................................................... 6-32 Figure 6.9: Social Infrastructure of the Project Area ........................................... 6-33 Figure 8.1: Project Construction Facilities ............................................................ 8-11
WAPDA August 2011
x
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
List of Acronyms AC
Alternating Current
AIS
Air Insulated Substation
asl
Above sea level
ASR
Alkali Silica Reaction
BCM
Billion cubic meters
BOD
Biological Oxygen Demand
BP
Bank Procedures (World Bank)
CITES
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species
CLO
Community Liaison Officer
cm
Centimeter
DC
Direct Current
DCO
District Coordination Officer
DISCOs
Distribution companies
EA
Environmental Assessment
ECA
Employment of Child Act
ECP
Environmental Code of Practice
EHS
Environment, Health, and Safety
EIA
Environmental Impact Assessment
EMP
Environmental Management Plan
EPA
Environment Protection Agency
EPD
Environmental Protection Department
ERP
Emergency Response Plan
ES
Environment Specialist
ESA
Environmental and Social Assessment
ESM
Environment and Social Monitor
ESMP
Environmental and Social Management Plan
ESMU
Environmental and Social Management Unit
ESS
Environment and Social Supervisor
FESCO
Faisalabad Electric Supply Company
WAPDA August 2011
xi
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
FOS
Factor of Safety
GBHPP
Ghazi Barotha HydroPower Project
GBTI
Ghazi Barotha Taraqiati Idara
GENCOs
Thermal power generation companies
GEPCO
Gujranwala Electric Power Company
GIKIEST
Ghulam Ishaq Khan Institute of Engineering, Science and Technology
GIS
Gas Insulated Substation
GoP
Government of Pakistan
GT Road
Grand Trunk Road
Ha
Hectare
HESCO
Hyderabad Electric Supply Company
HLSZ
Hazara Lower Seismic Zone
HSE
Health Safety and Environment
HSES
Health Safety, Environment and Social
IEE
Initial Environmental Examination
IESCO
Islamabad Electric Supply Company
IFC
International Finance Corporation
IUCN
International Union for Conservation of Nature
KESC
Karachi Electric Supply Company
Km
Kilometer
KPI
Key Performance Indicator
KP
Khyber Pakhtunkhwa
LESCO
Lahore Electric Supply Company
LOS
Law of Seas (UN Convention)
m
Meter
MAF
Million acre feet
MCT
Main Central Thrust
MEA
Multilateral Environmental Agreements
MEPCO
Multan Electric Power Company
mm
millimeter
WAPDA August 2011
xii
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Mm3
Million cubic meters
MMP
Mott MacDonald Pakistan
MSDS
Material Safety Data Sheet
MW
Megawatt
NCS
National Conservation Strategy
NEQS
National Environmental Quality Standards
NGO
Non-Governmental Organization
NTDC
National Transmission and Dispatch Company
OPs
(World Bank) Operational Policies
OPC
Ordinary Portland Cement
Pak-EPA
Pakistan Environment Protection Agency
PAPs
Project Affected Persons
PEPA
Pakistan Environmental Protection Act
PEPC
Pakistan Environmental Protection Council
PEPCO
Pakistan Electric Power Company
PEPO
Pakistan Environmental Protection Ordinance
PKR
Pakistan Rupees
POPs
Persistent Organic Pollutants
PPE
Personal protective equipment
PPIB
Private Power and Infrastructure Board
ppm
parts per million
QESCO
Quetta Electric Supply Company
RAP
Resettlement Action Plan
RBC
Reinforced Brick Concrete
RCC
Reinforced Cement Concrete
Rpm
Rotations per minute
RSA
Rapid Social Appraisal
SA
Social Assessment
SCARP
Salinity Control and Reclamation Project
SIMF
Social Impact Management Framework
WAPDA August 2011
xiii
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
SMO
Soil Monitoring Section
SS
Social Scientist
TDP
Tarbela Dam Project
TESCO
Tribal Electric Supply Company
TJV
Tarbela Joint Venture
TMP
Traffic Management Plan
T4CJV
Tarbela 4th Extension Joint Venture
T4HP
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project
UNFCCC
United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change
VCC
Village Conservation Committees
WAPDA
Water and Power Development Authority
WB
World Bank
WBG
World Bank Group
WEC
WAPDA Environmental Cell
WHO
World Health Organization
WWF
World Wildlife Fund for Nature
WAPDA August 2011
xiv
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
1 Introduction 1.1
Background
The Tarbela Dam is one of the largest earth-fill dam constructions in the world. The dam is situated on the Indus River in the province of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa (KP) at a distance of about 70 kilometers (km) NW of Islamabad and about 50 km upstream of the city of Attock (see Figure 1.1). The reservoir behind the dam is almost 100 km long and measures 260 km² when completely filled. The live storage capacity of the reservoir was initially 11.9 billion m³, but this has been reduced due to siltation during 35 years of operation to 6.8 billion m³. The Tarbela Dam is 2,743 m long, 143 m high above the river bed and has two spillways cutting through the left bank and discharging into a side valley. At the right bank there are four tunnels, each of about 900 m length as bypass for irrigation releases and/or power generation. Tunnel 5 used for irrigation releases is situated at the left bank. In three of the four tunnels on the right bank the water can be used for both irrigation and for power generation. Tunnel 4 is exclusively designed for irrigation supply. The Tarbela Dam Project (TDP) was developed during the seventies of the last century in the framework of the Indus Basin Water Master Plan. Initially the main purpose of TDP was to supply irrigation water to the densely populated agricultural areas in Punjab and Sindh. Then, starting in the mid-eighties power generation capacity was added in three subsequent hydro-electrical project extensions, installing a total of 3,478 mega watts (MW) generating capacity on respectively Tunnel 1 (four turbines), Tunnel 2 (six turbines) and Tunnel 3 (four turbines). So far there is no allowance for power generation on Tunnel 4, which is exclusively used for irrigation. For the project 120 villages along the Indus were submerged and a total of 96,000 persons had to be resettled and 33,200 hectares (ha) of land acquired. The Ghazi Barotha HydroPower Project (GBHPP) is a run-of-river project situated downstream and not far from Tarbela on the Indus. Near Ghazi town, which is situated seven kilometers downstream of Tarbela, water is diverted through a 52 km long canal to Barotha village (near Attock) where the power complex is located with a generating capacity of 1,450 MW of electricity. After passing through the powerhouse, the diverted water is returned to the Indus. The construction started in 1995 and the project was completed in 2003. With the construction of GHBP the water level in the Indus below the Tarbela dam has been raised and hence areas along the river have been flooded. A total of 4,770 ha of land were acquired for the construction of this project.
1.2
The Proposed Project
The Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project (T4HP) has been proposed to add generating capacity on Tunnel 4. The demand for power in the country is rapidly increasing with eight percent per year and there are frequent periods with load shedding all over the country. Currently there is an estimated shortfall of 7,311 MW in winter and 3,347 MW in summer. The construction of a new hydropower plant at Tarbela with 1,410 MW additional generating capacity would enable maximum utilization of the available power potential and make an important contribution to the overall power supply in the country.
WAPDA August 2011
1-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Figure 1.1:
WAPDA August 2011
Tarbela Location Map
1-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
The project is considered to be very attractive and a “low risk- high reward” operation aimed at providing over 3,871 GWh annually of least-cost low-carbon renewable energy. This is so attractive because the dam, storage reservoir and tunnel are already constructed and water supply is assured. Another important advantage in development of T4HP is that it will be free of resettlement and litigation problems, which are often major causes of delay in hydroelectric projects. Environmental and social issues are relatively minor, since most of the infrastructure is already in place. Basic infrastructure and other facilities like offices, labor camps and residential accommodation are largely available and only have to be renovated and possibly expanded against modest cost. The installation of additional generating capacity will not influence the irrigation release capacity of the dam.
1.3
The Environmental and Social Assessment
Potential adverse effects of the T4HP project are described in the present Environmental and Social Assessment (ESA) report. Possible mitigating measures to offset, reduce or compensate these impacts are included in the Environmental and Social Management Plan. The project will be implemented on the right bank of the Indus River in a limited area concentrated around the inlet and outlet of tunnel 4 of the Tarbela Dam. Direct and indirect impacts of the project will mainly occur in the immediate surrounding (few km) with the exception of some borrow areas and quarries for construction materials situated at larger distance. For safety reasons an area of 5 km upstream and 10 km downstream of the dam has been studied during the ESA (see Figure 1.2 for the Project Area and location of various Project components). Most negative environmental and social impacts of the project will be experienced during the period of construction, and will mostly be temporary and reversible in nature. Negative impacts during operation and maintenance of the project will be very limited. Cumulative and induced impacts of the project are not expected since the water regime of the Indus downstream of Tarbela will not change. Generally, during operation the environmental and economic benefits will be very substantial through the production of clean and cheap low-carbon hydro power. This is especially true when compared with alternative means of generating electricity through thermal power stations (coal, oil, gas fired). The direct adverse social impacts of the project are also expected to be relatively minor. Most of these impacts will occur during construction and are associated with the contractors operations and the interaction of the work force with the local communities. The previous Tarbela project (1968-1976) and the Ghazi Barotha project (1995-2003) involved huge land acquisition and resettlement operations. In a number of cases the compensation and resettlement of affected families has not been solved for a variety of reasons. The Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority (WAPDA) has indicated that the current project offers an opportunity to address the so-called resettlement legacy from the previous projects.
WAPDA August 2011
1-3
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Figure 1.2: Project Area and Location of Main Project Components
WAPDA August 2011
1-4
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
1.4
Composition of Study Team
WAPDA engaged a team of two independent consultants - Mr. Reitse Koopmans and Mr. Mohammad Omar Khalid – to assess the environmental as well as social impacts of the project, to prepare the environmental and social management plan, and to compile the main ESA report as well as the present Summary ESA report. The baseline data collection, project description compilation, stakeholder consultations, and initial impact assessment was carried out by a team from the Design Consultants, led by Mr. Azmat Beg (environment) and Dr. Ashraf Bodla (environment, ecology) supported by Ms. Marina Maxwell (environment), Mr. Rana Mohammad Saleem (sociology), Mr. Abdul Hafiz (sociology), Ms. Yasmeen Taher (gender), Mr. Zafar Iqbal (economist), Mr. Omer Rasheed (environment), Mr. Mohammad Dawood Khan (environment), Ms. Afia Hussain (environment), Ms. Ujala Saleem (environment), Dr. Muhammad Aleem Chaudhry (wildlife), Mr. Waseem Ahmed Khan (wildlife), Dr. Zaheer-ud-Din Khan (flora), Mr. Muhammad Ajaib (flora), Dr. Mohammad Sharif Mughal (fisheries), and Mr. Tahir Omer (fisheries). The resettlement legacy has been studied by a team composed of Mr. Zafar Iqbal, Mr. Omer Rasheed, Mr. Asif Iqbal, Mr. Rana Mohammad Saleem, Dr. Ashraf Bodla, and Mr. M. Chaudhry and supported by Ms. Marielle Rowan.
WAPDA August 2011
1-5
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
2 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework 2.1
General
This Chapter provides an overview of the legislative structure and environmental assessment process in Pakistan as well as a list of key environmental legislation applicable to hydro power projects. It also provides an overview of World Bank and other relevant international requirements including identification of applicable World Bank Operational Policies and applicable World Bank Group Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines.
2.2
Pakistan
2.2.1 Overview The enactment of comprehensive legislation on the environment, covering multiple areas of concern is an ongoing phenomenon in Pakistan. The basic policy and legislative framework for the protection of the environment and overall biodiversity in the country is now in place. The legislation contains many laws in the form of Acts and Ordinances which have a direct or indirect relevance in the layout, design, construction and operation of the Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project. This summary of relevant Pakistan legislation is structured as follows:
Environmental Regulatory Authorities;
Environmental Legislation;
National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS); and
National Environmental Guidelines and Policies.
In accordance with the Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (PEPA) 1997 and the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (Pak-EPA) IEE/EIA Regulations 2000, an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is required for hydroelectric power projects exceeding a generation capacity of 50 MW and with transmission lines with a capacity of more than 11 kV. The Project will generate 1,350 MW, therefore an EIA for this project is mandatory.
2.2.2 Environmental Legislation Environmental Protection Act, 1997
PEPA 1997 is the basic legislative tool empowering the government to frame regulations for the protection of the environment. The Act is applicable to almost all environmental parameters pertaining to air, water, soil and noise pollution, and handling of hazardous wastes, as well as to the social and socioeconomic aspects. The Act provides the framework for: protection and conservation of species, wildlife habitats and biodiversity; conservation of renewable resources; establishment of standards for the quality of the ambient air, water and land; establishment of Environmental Tribunals; appointment of Environmental Magistrates; and Initial Environmental Examination (IEE) and EIA approval. Penalties have been prescribed for those who contravene the Act. The key features of the Act have a direct bearing on the proposed project requirement for an IEE and EIA for development projects. The PakEPA has delegated the power of review and approval of environmental assessments to the
WAPDA August 2011
2-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
provincial EPAs. The following are the key features of the Act that have a direct bearing on the Project area:
Section 11 (Prohibition of Certain Discharges or Emissions) states that “Subject to the provisions of this Act and the rules and regulations made there under, no person shall discharge or emit, or allow the discharge or emission of, any effluent or waste or air pollutant or noise in an amount, concentration or level which is in excess of the NEQS”.
Section 12-I (IEE and EIA) requires that “No proponent of a project shall commence construction or operation unless he has filed with the Federal Agency an IEE or, where the project is likely to cause an adverse environmental effect, an EIA, and has obtained from the Federal Agency approval in respect thereof.”
Section 12-2b (Review of IEE and EIA). The Federal Agency shall review the EIA report and accord its approval subject to such conditions as it may deem fit to impose, or require that the EIA be re-submitted after such modifications as may be stipulated or rejected, the project as being contrary to environmental objectives.
Section 14 (Handling of Hazardous Substances) requires that “Subject to the provisions of this Act, no person shall generate, collect, consign, transport, treat, dispose off, store, handle, or import any hazardous substance except (a) under a license issued by the Federal Agency and in such manner as may be prescribed; or (b) in accordance with the provisions of any other law for the time being in force, or of any international treaty, convention, protocol, code, standard, agreement, or other Instrument to which Pakistan is a party.” Enforcement of this clause requires the EPA to issue regulations regarding licensing procedures and to define ‘hazardous substance.’
Section 15 (Regulation of Motor Vehicles). Subject to provision of this clause of the Act and the rules and regulations made there under, no person shall operate a motor vehicle from which air pollutants or noise are being emitted in an amount, concentration or level which is in excess of the NEQS, or where the applicable standards established under clause (g) of subsection (1) of Section-6 of the Act.
Section 17 (Penalties). Whoever contravenes or fails to comply with the provisions of section 11, 12, 13, or section 16 or any order issued there under shall be punishable with fine which may extend to one million rupees, and in the case of a continuing contravention or failure, with an additional fine which may extend to one hundred thousand rupees for every day during which such contravention or failure continues: Provided that if contravention of the provisions of section 11 also constitutes contravention of the provisions of section 15, such contravention shall be punishable under sub-section (2) only.
Section 18 (Offences by Bodies Corporate). Where any contravention of this Act has been committed by a body corporate, and it is proved that such offence has been committed with the consent or connivance or is attributed to any negligence on the part of any director, partner, manager, secretary or other officer of the body corporate, such director, partner, manager, secretary or other officer of the body corporate, shall be deemed guilty of such contravention along with the body corporate and shall be punished accordingly.
WAPDA August 2011
2-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
PAK-EPA, IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000
The EPA prepared the regulations during 2000 for “Review of IEE and EIA” under the powers conferred upon it by the PEPA. These Regulations categorize development projects for IEE and EIA into two schedules: Schedules I and II. Projects are classified on the basis of the expected degree and magnitude of environmental impacts. The projects listed in Schedule-I include those where the range of environmental issues is comparatively narrow and the issues can be understood and managed through less extensive analysis in the form of an IEE, whereas the projects listed in Schedule-II are those which are likely to cause significant adverse impacts and hence require extensive analysis in the form of an EIA. Figure 2.1 below provides an outline of the EIA process in Pakistan. Figure 2.1:
Pakistan EIA Process The EIA with PEPA (Reg.8 (2Xa) Schedule IV Application Form with receipt 30,000Rs) 10 Days
PEPA confirms acceptability of EIA
PEPA publicises EIA in national press
EIA displayed in Public Place
Day 1
PEPA requests revision of EIA Listing further studies and discussion required
PEPA requests specified additional information
Proponent submits revised EIA or additional information
Where to view EIA
Day 10
EIA circulated in Government
Public Hearing Location & time (min 30 days hence)
DG’s Expert Committee
Sector Advisory Committee
Site Inspection Committee
>Day 40
PEPA Review of EIA PEPA collate tabulate & consider all comments
PEPA Decision on EIA (Schedule VI) 18
Chloride Meq/L
10
< 1,500
1,500-3,000
>3,000
EC MicroSiemens/cm*
By comparing surface water quality results with the standards set by WAPDA it is concluded that all parameters measured in these water samples fall within the required water quality standards defined for the Project.
6.2.17 Ground Water Quality Ground water is available in the entire project area although its depth varies i.e. it is shallow upstream of the Ghazi Barrage and deep downstream of the Ghazi Barrage. This difference is due to high surface water levels in the Ghazi barrage pond and the Tarbela Dam reservoir which are the main source of seepage. Ground Water samples were collected from various locations and sent to chemical and microbiological laboratories of SGS Pakistan (Pvt.) Limited for analysis. These samples were collected from the following locations:
Right Bank (WAPDA) Colony;
Tubewell, Pehur Hamlet;
Ghazi City TMA Office; and
WAPDA August 2011
6-15
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Sobra City Tubewell #6 (WAPDA Left Bank Colony).
The water samples collected were analyzed for their suitability for drinking purpose and all necessary physical, chemical and biological parameters. The test results show that all samples are generally fit for drinking with two exceptions;
The sample from Ghazi city TMA office shows a slightly raised Arsenic value (0.015 mg/L) against WHO standards of 0.01 mg/L. This is however within the Pakistan NEQS of ≤ 0.05.
Total Bacterial Colony Count were exceeding permissible limit in all samples. (Total Colony Count was too numerous to count).
6.2.18 Air Quality As there is limited industry in the area air quality is generally good. Air emissions in the area are generated by vehicle movement and are not very since the project area lies in a remote area. However there is increased concentration of dust due to the poor condition of some roads and tracks. At the site of the project there is no permanent monitoring station, nor in the wider project area. In order to collect baseline information monitoring of ambient air quality was carried out at following locations:
Ghazi Market;
Topi-By Pass; and
Outlet from Tunnel No.4 by Tarbela Powerhouse.
The ambient air quality was monitored at each of these locations continuously for 24 hours. During the monitoring priority pollutants i.e. carbon monoxide (CO), nitrogen dioxide (NO2), sulfur dioxide (SO2) and particulate matter (PM10) were monitored and the results are provided in Table 6.8. It is evident that concentrations of all ambient air quality parameters are within the limit of NEQS and within the World Bank and World Health Organization (WHO) standards. Table 6.8:
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results NO2 mg/m3
Sample Point
24 hr Avg.
SO2 ug/m3
NEQS
WHO(a)
24 hr Avg.
NEQS
CO mg/m3 World
24 hr
Bank
Avg.
NEQS
PM10 ug/m3 World
24 hr
Bank
Avg.
NEQS
World Bank
1.
8.42
80
150
0.67
120
20
4.00
5
-
47.89
250
50
2.
4.57
80
150
0.43
120
20
3.57
5
-
100.35
250
50
3.
5.15
80
150
0.44
120
20
3.46
5
-
85.78
250
50
(a)
WHO guidelines for Europe (1987)
6.2.19 Noise Noise levels exceeding 85 dB are harmful to human health. Excessive noise level damages the eardrum and very high noise levels damage human lungs. Continuous exposure to excessive noise causes depression and can damage the nervous system. Noise pollution in the project area is mainly attributable to traffic as there are no industries or other noise sources present in the area. Traffic from vehicles plying in the area is also very low. The sound levels were monitored at the same locations as the
WAPDA August 2011
6-16
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ambient air quality was monitored using a portable, digital sound meter. The daily average monitoring results are provided Table 6.9 below. The noise levels measured at different locations ranged from 45.2- 66.5 dB, the upper reading being above the NEQS limits. The readings measured at relatively busy locations are exceeding World Bank Standards. The maximum noise level monitored was generated by vehicular traffic at the Ghazi market. Table 6.9: Sample
Baseline Noise Monitoring Results NEQS (dB)
World Bank Standard (dB)
Residential(a)
Residential
Noise Monitoring Results (dB)
Point Day
Day
Day
Night
Day (Avg)
Night (Avg)
1
65
55
55
45
61
51
2
65
55
55
45
57
51
3
65
55
55
45
62
52
Source: SGS Noise Monitoring Report (a)
Effective from 1 July 2010 up to 30 June 2012, thereafter the NEQS will align with the World Bank Standards
6.2.20 Traffic and Transport The Project is located in a remote area where traffic density is low. A considerable increase in vehicular movement is expected during the Project. A traffic count survey was conducted in the Project area at the locations shown in Figure 6.7 along with the various access roads. The associated traffic count, including daily averages is shown in Table 6.10. The results of the survey concluded that:
Roads leading to Swabi, Topi, and the WAPDA Right Bank Colony are the busiest;
The Peak hours of traffic are between 08.00 and 10.00 hrs and 13.00 to 16.00 hrs; and
Traffic on the roads between 22.00 and 08.00 hrs is extremely low.
WAPDA August 2011
6-17
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Figure 6.7:
WAPDA August 2011
Location Map of Traffic Count Stations
6-18
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 6.10:
Average Daily Traffic in the Project Area Roads(b)
Mode of Transport A
B(b)
C
D
E
F
G(a)
H
I
J
K
119
7
19
204
589
722
20
395
330
283
383
Motorcycle / Rickshaw
1,429
1,017
739
482
962
879
117
2,110
1,167
1,766
1,577
Cars / Pickups / Taxis
3,535
2,054
1,387
932
1,031
812
252
4,372
1,813
3,077
3,064
745
226
530
151
155
146
194
1,967
631
1,492
982
38
67
33
33
39
7
61
198
80
191
95
2 Axel
69
16
17
14
14
2
4
105
86
287
268
3 Axel
16
0
4
33
22
28
0
32
64
64
99
4 Axel
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
18
11
25
5 Axel
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
4
4
2
Tractor
60
2
3
11
5
16
0
96
127
81
123
122
0
6
11
14
15
1
116
147
168
195
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
28
25
40
48
Average Daily Traffic
6,134
3,389
2,739
1,872
2,832
2,627
649
9,431
4,492
7,464
6,861
Total PCUs(c)
7,322
3,201
2,879
3,004
5,625
6,085
922
12,943
7,553
11,023
10,947
Animal Drawn
Minibuses / wagons Buses Trucks
Trailers
Tractors
Tractor Trolley Others
(b)
Traffic on roads B and G are counted on Tuesday and Thursday respectively as this traffic is assumed to be almost constant
(c)
PCU = Passenger Car Units
WAPDA August 2011
6-19
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
6.3
Biological Environment
6.3.1 Wetlands and biodiversity Part of the project area consists of wetlands. Wetlands cover approximately 9.7% or 7,800,000 ha of the total area of Pakistan. Wetlands in the country are mainly found along the Indus River and some other rivers and in the floodplains. The Indus valley forms the main wetland artery in the country. These include the Tarbela Reservoir, the Ghazi Barotha pond, the Chashma barrage pond and further downstream other water bodies and reedlands along the River Indus towards the Indus Delta. Wetlands are characterized by a large biodiversity. Their significance is attributable to the wide diversity of species that they support. In all, eighteen threatened species of wetlands dependent mammals are found in the country, twenty threatened bird species are supported by Pakistan's wetlands in addition to twelve reptiles and two endemic species of amphibians. Pakistan's wetlands also support between 191-198 indigenous freshwater fish species, including fifteen endemics and a total of 788 marine and estuarine fish species.
6.3.2 Significance of Tarbela Reservoir for Bird Migration Significance of the Tarbela and Ghazi-Barotha wetlands is not so much for its exceptional biodiversity, since dam, reservoir and head pond downstream are man-made structures constructed in a period with little attention for environmental protection and ecology. However its location between the rich Indus delta and the mountain and alpine eco-regions of Pakistan makes these wetlands a great attraction for migrating birds like ducks, pelicans, cormorants, herons, egrets, bitterns, cranes, flamingo, teals, mallards, gadwalls and pigeons. Tarbela reservoir, although deep (average depth 64 m, maximum depth 137 m) with comparative low diversity of primary producers, provides a resting place for a variety of migratory fowls during their travel to Chashma and Taunsa (both Ramsar sites), the Uchhali wetlands in the Salt Range and to other wetlands in Sindh and Balochistan. The famous route for these birds from Siberia to various destinations in Pakistan over Karakorum, Hindu Kush, and Suleiman Ranges along Indus River down to the delta is known as International Migratory Bird Route Number 4; it is known as the Indus Flyway and is one of the busiest routes in the world. According to estimates based on regular counts between 700,000 and 1,200,000 birds arrive in Pakistan through Indus Flyway every year. The birds start migration on this route in November; February is the peak time and by March they start to fly back home. These periods may vary depending upon weather conditions in Siberia and or Pakistan. Some extinguishing species like whiteheaded duck, houbara bustard and Siberian crane also travel on this route.
6.3.3 Significance of Ghazi-Barotha Lake The Ghazi Barrage pond downstream of the Tarbela Dam is a shallow water body. Due to high water velocity the lake does not support enough nutrition to attract water birds. Human interference is another factor that detracts the avifauna from this water pond. The creeks and pools, developed due to fluctuating water releases from Tarbela Reservoir, down-stream of the Ghazi Barrage to Attock Gorge also provide resting and feeding habitat to a variety of sedentary as well as migratory birds.
WAPDA August 2011
6-20
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
6.3.4 Protected Areas/ Game Reserves There are no protected areas designated in the Project site. The nearest protected area is the Totalai Game Reserve in Buner district, located about 20-25 km from Tarbela. In addition, there are however five game reserves in the Haripur district as shown in Table 6.11. In order to hunt in these game reserves, a permit must be issued by the relevant authorities of the Haripur district, as identified in Table 6.11. All of these are located between 30 and 40 km from the Project site. Table 6.11:
Game Reserves in Haripur district
Name
Declared by
Raqs-e-Sardaran
Chief Minister
Mang
Chief Minister
Bagra
Chief Conservator Wildlife
Village Hasham Khan
Chief Conservator Wildlife
Kalinjer
Chief Conservator Wildlife
Source: Forestry Department Haripur
6.3.5 Hunting and Other Threats The Tarbela Reservoir up to 5 km upstream and the Ghazi Barrage Pond area is prohibited for any hunting activity. However, the rest of the reservoir area is unprotected and hunting is practiced during the migration season of water fowls, particularly near the entry point of the Indus River i.e. in the Khalabut area. The other threat to this wetland is from siltation, boating and fishing. The shallow wetlands downstream of the Ghazi Barrage are also un-protected and easily accessible and consequently are under hunting pressure during the winter season.
6.3.6 Nature Conservation Five Village Conservation Committees (VCC’s) have been established for the conservation of floral and faunal species found around the Tarbela Reservoir by the Wildlife Department of the Haripur District, these are found in:
Nara;
Khalabat;
Kag;
Dhenda; and
Beer.
6.3.7 Terrestrial Flora The study area forms a part of the Centro-Asiatic Territory within the Nubo-Sindhian geobotanical region. Physiognomically, the plant cover comprises four growth forms:
Annual Herbs;
Perennial Grasses;
Perennial Shrubs; and
Perennial Trees.
WAPDA August 2011
6-21
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Annual Herbs
Herbs including short grasses and short leaved forbs appear in the spring after the rains. Their growth activity is restricted to the brief moist period which lasts for about 48 weeks during which they complete their life cycle and set seeds before the dry period starts. These have high ecological amplitude and grow on a variety of ecologically different sites. Both the grasses and herbs grow in abundance in the spring season. Perennial Grasses
Perennial grasses grow in monsoon season. Most of them are non-palatable to livestock, only few including Cynodon dactylon, and Cenchrus ciliaris are palatable. Perennial Shrubs
Perennial shrubs generally form the cover of hill slopes. They include Zizyphus nummularia, Lantana camara, Justicia adhatoda, and Cannabis sativa. The shrubs of Zizyphus nummularia provide browse for the goats in all seasons, while others are nonpalatable. Perennial Trees
The important perennial trees are Acacia nilotica, Acacia modesta, and Zizyphus mauritiana. The former is used for timber whereas the latter two species provide browse and fuel wood. The vegetation pattern of the Project area is closely related to the topographic features of the area. This is derived from the fact that both vegetation and soil overtime have largely been influenced by the nature of the sediments, drainage characteristics as well as the prevailing climatic conditions of the region. Due to varied geographical features, the Project area is rich in variety of flora but has no orchard, game reserves and other environmentally sensitive places. The land use pattern of the Ghazi Forest Sub-division is provided in Table 6.12 which reveals that terrestrial flora is mainly composed of grasses (range land) and scrub (shrubs and scattered tress). This land use pattern is representative of areas surrounding the project. Table 6.12:
Ghazi Area Forest Statement
Description Forest
Area (acres) 3,163.15
Shrubs and Bushes
18,938.45
Range Land
42,991.25
River beds Water bodies Total
3.37 16,591.11 114,405.05
Source: Sub-division Forestry Department, Ghazi
Vegetation Sampling
Depending on the species composition and habitat characteristics, Quadrat or Belt Transect Methods were used for vegetation sampling in addition to species assessment on a visual basis. In addition to gathering the secondary data, collected with reference to Swabi and Haripur Districts and GBHHP, a vegetation survey was carried out during February to March 2011. WAPDA August 2011
6-22
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
The sampling was carried out in the following locations:
Powerhouse (slopes);
Downstream end point (Topi);
Labor area downstream;
Upstream: Main Tarbela spill way (harbor area);
Vegetation at upstream end point;
Borrow area (Gandaf);
Borrow area (Dara);
Downstream near WAPDA rest house; and
Vegetation of agriculture lands villages and road sides.
Vegetation Analysis
The survey recorded 133 plant species among which 31 are trees, 6 climbers, 25 shrubs, 63 herbs and 8 grasses. An overall species list is provided in Annex B. The most dominant plants growing in the study area are: Dalbergia sissoo (Shesham), Acacia modesta (Phulai), Leucaena leucocephala (Velati Kikar), Grewia villosa (Dhaman), Dodonaea viscose(Sanatha) , Justicia adhatoda (Bakar), Lantana camara (Punchphulai), Buddleja asiatica (Banna), Themeda anathera(Bahari ghass), Erioscirpus comosus (babya). The Project area is well known for production of natural medicinal plants. The plants and their medicinal uses are presented in Annex B. There were no endangered, rare or vulnerable plant species, as per IUCN Red-List, found in the Project area. The vegetation patterns observed at different localities is outlined in Annex B, in addition to the planted species found in the Project area. The aesthetic value of the Project area can be further enhanced by cultivation of a variety of shade, ornamental and fragrant plant species. In Annex B lists some of the plant species recommended for planting in the Project area locations.
6.3.8 Terrestrial Fauna Previous field surveys
The wildlife areas in the Project comprise of the riverine and dry sub-tropical, semievergreen scrub forests. Terrestrial fauna of the area have also been studied previously during execution of the GBHPP. The study areas for the Project and the GBHPP are quite different. The area of influence for the Project is much smaller in extent than the study areas for the GBHPP. During the two field surveys conducted for GBHPP during 1990 and 1991, 63 species of birds and three species of mammals were recorded inhabiting the Project area from Ghazi downstream up to the Haro River, the site of the power station close to the Barotha village. The third study (November 2002 to May 2003) was confined to the floodplains only, including the islands and open river water starting from Ghazi and downstream up to the confluence of Indus with River Kabul near the Attock Bridge, excluding the Attock Gorge. During the monthly surveys of the riverine forests (belas) on the islands and along the river banks 63 birds (including resident and migratory) were recorded while the presence of 12 mammals and a few reptiles were confirmed by analysis of their different WAPDA August 2011
6-23
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
signs including footprints, faecal material, burrows/dens and also by interviewing the locals. Only three mammals were recorded during 1990 and 1991 whilst 12 species were identified during 2002-2003. Neither the smooth-coated Otter (Lutrogaleperspicillata) or Common Otter (Lutralutra ) were reported for the area. The Wild Boar and Asiatic Jackal were the most common among the mammals, being widely distributed in the belas where enough cover was available to provide shelter. Among the reptiles, at a few places the presence of freshwater turtles was evident although they were only observed once. Similarly, the presence of snakes was also reported but none was observed or recorded. Indian Monitor Lizards were recorded twice although these would usually be more prevalent. Study from Literature
In addition to the birds recorded from the Project area (floodplains only), a number of species are reported from the literature (TJ Roberts, Birds of Pakistan, Vol.1 & 2.1991, 1992) which can be expected in this area or they use the Indus River for passage migration. A complete listing of the species recorded during these previous studies and other expected species is contained in Annex B. From all the birds on this list, only one species i.e. White-eyed Pochard (Aythyanyroca) is listed on the IUCN Red List in the Lower Risk category, near threatened (LR/nt). This species was not however reported in any of the surveys conducted for the project, but reportedly use the same Indus Flyway Route for migration. The common birds include the House Crow, House Sparrow, Common Myna and Bank Myna. These species are associated with the belas, which have enough tree cover. The other species of such belas are Spotted Little Owlet, Common Cuckoo, Black Winged Kite, Black Kite, Red Vented Bulbul, White Cheeked Bulbul, Hoopoe, Collard Dove, Little Brown Dove, Red Turtle Dove and Common Starling. Similarly, the belas occupied with the Saccharumgrass, are the habitat for Warblers, Black Drongo, Grey and Black Partridges, Indian Silver Bill, Bee-eaters, Indian Tailor Bird, Indian Baya, Pied Bush Chat, Rose-ringed Parakeet, Black Redstart, Indian Tree-pie and Jungle Babbler. The oxbow lakes, seasonal marshes, river channels and stony belas with less vegetative cover are the main habitat for the migratory waterfowl which spend winter in this habitat or are the passage migrants in such areas. These include different species of Anatidae, Herons, Egrets, Gulls, Cormorants, Terns, Grebes, and many species of waders. White Breasted Kingfisher and Pied Kingfisher are the species of such habitats. The preference of birds in these different habitats is because of their life style and food habits. Results of present field surveys
During the present study in the Project area 12 mammal, 52 bird and 12 herp species were recorded as compared to the 12 mammal species, 121 bird species expected and only a small number of herp species reported from the areas surveyed for the GBHPP in the years 1990-1991 and 2002-2003. None of the species recorded during the surveys are included in the IUCN Red Data Book. The Ferruginous duck (near threatened) was however reported to pass through the Indus River corridor during surveys for the GBHPP, although this species was not observed in the surveys. The wildlife and wildlife habitat studies conducted for the Project were undertaken in the following areas: WAPDA August 2011
6-24
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Proposed powerhouse site;
Up to five km upstream of Tarbela Dam structure;
Up to 10 km downstream of Tarbela Dam structure;
Up to two km on the left and right side along the Indus River; and
Borrow areas near Gandaf
Wildlife data was collected on the basis of:
Wildlife areas stated above and ecosystem functions;
Large and small mammals;
Birds; and
Herps (Reptiles and Amphibians).
Table 6.13 describes the faunal species identified at different Project areas during the survey. Table 6.13:
Faunal Species at the Various Project Areas Surveyed
Location
Faunal Species • Large mammals: Asiatic jackal, common red fox, grey mongoose, jungle cat and wild boar;
Powerhouse area
• Small mammals: long-eared hedgehog, house bat, house rat, house mouse, northern palm squirrel; and • Herps: Indus Valley toad, common tree lizard, spotted barn gecko, common house gecko, Agrore Valley agama, rugose spectacled lacerta. • Large mammals: jungle cat and grey mongoose, wild boar;
Downstream of the dam
• Small mammals: house rat, house mouse, crested porcupine; and
site
• Herps: Indus Valley toad, Agrore Valley agama, black rock agama, spotted barn gecko, fat-tailed gecko, common house gecko, common tree lizard. Mallards and dabbling duck.
Reservoir
• Large mammals: jungle cat, grey mongoose and wild boar;
Upstream slopes
• Small mammals: Indian gerbil, house rat, house mouse; and • Herps: Agrore Valley agama, black rock agama, rugose spectacled lacerta, Bengal monitor lizard. • Large mammals: grey mongoose and wild boar;
Borrow areas
• Small mammals: desert hare and northern palm squirrel, Indian gerbil, house rat, house mouse; and • Herps: fat-tailed gecko, spotted barn gecko, Bengal monitor lizard, common tree Lizard, rugose spectacled lacerta.
A full listing of the faunal species found in the Project area is provided in Annex B. There were no endangered, threatened or vulnerable faunal species, as per IUCN Red List, found in Project area. Bird species identified are also included in Annex B. No endangered, rare or vulnerable bird species were observed in the Project area. Bird Nesting Habitat
While surveying the area it was evident that there was no shortage of nesting habitat available. The areas of impact are almost identical and provide all type of nesting and feeding areas for the birds recorded in the area that are considered to have migrated to the area.
WAPDA August 2011
6-25
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
The bird nesting areas in the Project area include:
Trees and shrubs;
Barren stony slopes, boulders, fissures or hollows in boulders and the foot of steeper cliffs;
Rock edges, rock clefts or cavities;
Logs and eroded roots of trees;
Rodent burrows;
Crevices in the ground;
Ground scrapes in the lee of a bush or grass clumps; and
Brood parasites - some birds, e.g cuckoos, are known as brood parasites and infiltrate the nests of crows and other birds to lay their eggs. The crows hatch the cuckoo’s eggs and feed the babies until they fledge from the nests.
6.3.9 Fish and Fisheries Aquatic Life:
The prominent aquatic life of Indus at Tarbela includes fish, phytoplankton’s (e.g spirogyra) and zooplanktons (e.g paramecium) benthic insects, larvae of mayfly, caddis fly mosquito larvae, dragon fly, stone fly and water mite. Fish
According to the Fisheries department of KP, the dominant specie is Cepanous Corpio, this is a self breeding fish and a multi breeder. It breeds three times a year and has many newborn which survive easily. Raho, Grass carp, Silver carp, Mori and Thela breed in months of April to July. Mallah and Masher are decreasing day by day due to their feeding habits. These species live in flowing water but now the water is stagnant due to construction of dam. Trout does not breed in the Tarbela Reservoir as it is only present due to flooding from snowy peaks and is found rarely. Cat fish like singhara, malhi, soul and snake head are all carnivore species of the Indus River. Some important characteristics of Tarbela Reservoir are provided in Table 6.14. A list of common fish species found in the reservoir is given in Annex B. Table 6.14:
Tarbela Dam Reservoir Characteristics
Parameter
Description
Water area at maximum reservoir level
25,900 ha
Reservoir level Storage at maximum (Mm3) 3
Storage at minimum (Mm ) Maximum Depth (m) Drawdown (m) Type of Reservoir Type of water
WAPDA August 2011
10,762 4,770 137.00 76.00 V-Shaped Melted snow
6-26
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Parameter Water temperature (°C) pH
Description 11-28 7.0-9.5
Conductivity (MicroSiemens /cm) Habitual type
180-280 Oligotrophic
Fisheries
No fisheries activity in the private sector was found within or in the nearby vicinity of the Project area. However WAPDA developed fish cultivation in the Tarbela Reservoir to produce fish protein to meet the increasing demands of the growing population of Pakistan. The fisheries are now managed by the fisheries department of the KP. The principle of reservoir fishery management at Tarbela was to stock fish seed hatcheries in order to rear fish up to a marketable size. Presently fishing rights for the Tarbela Reservoir lie with the KP Province and revenue generated from the fisheries sector is about PKR 0.5 million per year. Furthermore there are hundreds of fishermen being employed by fishing contractors in the fishery business. Around 13,000 anglers visit these reservoirs for recreation per annum. In July 1997 the WAPDA Fisheries Department introduced Chinese Carp into the Tarbela Reservoir for the following reasons:
Its reproduction rate is high (almost throughout the year);
It has a wide ranging diet (such as detritus, phytoplankton’s, and zooplanktons); and
The existing natural fish species in the reservoir are minor and of less commercial value although they do represent a good ecosystem.
In Annex B, more detail of the endemic and exotic species of the Tarbela and Ghazi Barrage Reservoirs is given. There have also been cases of Chinese Carp escaping into the Sirhin River from the Ponds in Sirhin valley, ending up in Tarbela Reservoir. The introduction of Chinese Carp, Sole and Toffee was to utilize the resources of the Tarbela Reservoir and also because most of the endemic species are small and of no commercial importance, apart from the Mahasher. July and August are the close season for catching fish. The annual production of fish during 2009-2010 was 67 metric tons. Any fishing is prohibited from 5 km upstream to 3 km downstream of the dam as there are security issues.
6.4
Social-economic Baseline
6.4.1 Overview The social baseline describes the existing situation in the Project area and the potential population that will be affected by the Project. As this is an extension of the original Tarbela Project, there will not be resettlement and social issues directly associated with the Project. However, there are some legacy issues around resettlement that are attributable to the original Tarbela Project and this has therefore been included in the social baseline. The direct Project area is already owned by WAPDA. The indirect WAPDA August 2011
6-27
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project area falls between the districts of Haripur and Swabi of the KP Province of Pakistan. To establish a socio economic baseline, primary and secondary data was collected on the prevailing socio-economic conditions including social and physical infrastructure in Project area.
6.4.2 Administrative Setup The administrative setup of the Swabi and Haripur districts is similar to the other districts of the province. District administration is headed by the District Coordination Officer (DCO) who is assisted by District heads of other departments in his / her pursuits. The main District departments include: administration; judiciary; police; education; health; communication and works; agriculture; forest; irrigation; telecommunication; and livestock and fisheries. The head of each District department is responsible for the performance of his department and is generally designated as the Deputy Director or District Officer.
6.4.3 Demography and Population Population
The District Population Census Reports, 1998 stated that population of the Swabi District was 1.027 million while, that of Haripur district was 0.692 million with average annual growth rate of 2.96 and 2.08 respectively. The estimated present population of the Swabi and Haripur districts, is 1.47 million and 0.91 million respectively representing an annual average growth rate of 2.8 and 2.2 respectively. Main construction activities for the Project will remain confined to the Right Bank of the Indus River. Table 6.15 presents basic characteristics of the population in Project area. This shows that the estimated total population of the Project area is 36,250 with 4,387 households hence the average household size is 8.26. Table 6.15:
Estimated Numbers of Households and Population in Project Area
Settlements
Households (No.)
Estimated Population (No.)
16
150
WAPDA Right Bank Colony
750
5,000
Mohallah Zakoo, Topi
300
2,100
1,200
13,000
170
1,200
Darra Mohat
160
1000
Kukar Chawa
35
250
Ghari Meera
456
4000
Sobra City
150
1050
Ghazi Hamlet, Ghazi
600
3500
Qazi pur
550
5000
4,387
36,250
Right Bank Burj (Khabbal)
Pehur Hamlet ,Topi Pontian Left Bank
Totals Source:
ESA survey 2011
WAPDA August 2011
6-28
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Ethnicity and Tribes of the Districts
Being on the route of the conquerors of Central India, the tribes and castes of the districts are a multitude of various races from the north. The key tribe in the Swabi district is Yousaf zai, an off-shoot of Pathans. Resident in the District Razars are: Rajars; Utman; Jadoon; Gadoon; and Khatak. In the Haripur district the Punjabis and Kashmiris are in the majority as compared to Pathans. The key tribes and castes include: Tareen; Dilazak;Tarkheli; Gujar; Awan; Mishwani; Pathan; Gakhar; Jdoon; Sayyed; Tanoli; and Turks. The majority of the people in the Project area are Pakhtun with the other key tribes, baradaries or castes in the Project area being: Awan; Yousaf Zai; Syed; Mughal; Mashwani; Bafanda; and some working classes (artisans). In addition in the Hazara region there are three main districts: Mansehra; Abbotabad; and Hari Pur. Generally the residents of these districts are called “Hazrawal”. Language
Pushto is the dominant language spoken in the Swabi district by 96% of the population. Punjabi, Sraiki and Urdu are the other, minor languages spoken. The mother tongue spoken in the Haripur district is predominately “Hindko” with the other languages spoken being similar to the Swabi district. Within the Project area, the majority of the people speak “Pashto” and ”Hindko” however, in the Right Bank Colony people also speak Urdu and “Saraiki”. Religion
According to the Population Census of 1998, about 97% of the population of the Swabi and Haripur districts is Muslim, while the remaining 3% of the population consist of minorities such as “Ahmadis”, Christians, Hindus and other scheduled castes. Scheduled castes are the depressed and low rank classes as declared by the Scheduled Castes (Declaration) Ordinance, 1957. All people belong to the Muslim “Sunni “school of thought. There are many religious institutions in Swabi where students from all over the province are seeking religious education.
6.4.4
Economic Conditions
Occupation / Livelihood
The main occupation of the inhabitants of the Swabi district is agriculture and people are mostly landless tenants. However, a few educated people are engaged in Government or private service. The livelihood of the local population of the district mainly depends on agriculture and livestock rearing. The livestock serves as an income source which they sell to meet their needs. The people of the district live a simple life including the standard of their clothing and their diet. Unemployment, lack of potable water, basic health and education facilities, electricity and roads are the major issues for the people of the district. Similarly, in Haripur district agriculture remains the main occupation of its inhabitants. The proportion of people serving in the Government sector is higher due to the existence of the Pakistan Telecommunication Industry in Haripur as well as the Hazara Fertilizer Factory. There are also a large number of people serving in the Armed Forces.
WAPDA August 2011
6-29
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Most of the people in the Project area are dependant upon labor. They work in nearby cities, Gadoon industrial estate, Karachi and abroad. As there is no agricultural land available within the hamlets of the Right Bank Colony, small businesses, shop keeping and private or government service are the other occupations of the people in the Project area. Income
Under the prevailing socio-economic conditions in the districts, the income of an average household is very low. However, a small number of the people had larger incomes. According to the social impact assessment survey, the majority of the people in the Project area belong to the low income group. The average monthly income ranged between PKR 5,000 to PKR 7,000. This implies that the majority of people in the Project area live below poverty line although residents of the Right Bank Colony have a better living standard as many are WAPDA employees. Livestock
Livestock is a prestigious symbol and an additional source of income for the farming community, besides providing milk, ghee and meat. Information relating to livestock in the Swabi and Haripur districts is presented in Table 6.16 below and indicates that, among dairy animals, cattle and sheep are more prevalent in the Swabi district. In the Haripur district, there are more buffalo and goats than in the Swabi district. Among load carrying animals, donkeys are the highest in number (53,837), followed by horses, (3,928) and mules (485) with load carrying animals higher in number in the Swabi district when compared to the Haripur district. Table 6.16:
Livestock in the Swabi and Haripur district District
Item
Swabi
Haripur
Total
Cattle
170,507
96,388
266,895
Buffalo
71,118
93,799
16,491
Sheep
15,660
10,327
25,987
Goat
93,302
149,982
243,284
Camel
821
423
1,244
Horse
2,658
1,270
3,928
265
221
485
34,754
19,083
53,837
813,820
596,471
1,410,291
Mule Donkey Poultry Source:
Livestock Census, 1998, Agricultural Census Organization, NWFP
Industry
An industrial estate established in 1988 is situated at Gadoon in the Swabi district. However, with the withdrawal of incentives available to the industrial estate, a large number of industries have been abandoned. The main industries remaining are cement, cigarette, tanneries and flour mills. There are no industries of major importance within the Project area.
WAPDA August 2011
6-30
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
In the Haripur district, Hattian Industrial Estate was established in 1985. Industrialization has mostly brought structural, positive changes in the socio-economic conditions of the district, including the establishment of a large number of chemical industries, cotton, fiber, textiles, telephone Industries of Pakistan and brick plants which are functioning now in the district. Credit Availability
Credit plays important role in the lives of the poor and lower middle class families in Project area. There are two major source of credit, institutional and non institutional. The availability of institutional credit is very limited in the Project area mainly due to a lack of knowledge and also the high rate of interest charged on loans. The main users of non institutional credit are shop keepers and relatives of well-off families in the settlements. These loans are mainly used for domestic and social needs such as marriages, birth ceremonies, funerals, health and education. Banking
Banking services are available in the Tarbela colonies on the Left Bank for WAPDA employees. The residents of the surrounding areas have to go to Topi and Ghazi for banking services although it is considered that sufficient banking facilities are available at these places.
6.4.5 Social Infrastructure and Services Overview
The baseline data provided in the following sections mainly represent data collated from the District Census Report of Swabi and Haripur, 1998. Any other data for the Project area has been collected during field survey work. The villages for which social survey work was undertaken are shown below in Figure 6.8 whilst the social infrastructure of the Project Area is depicted in Figure 6.9.
WAPDA August 2011
6-31
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Figure 6.8:
WAPDA August 2011
Social Survey Villages
6-32
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Figure 6.9:
WAPDA August 2011
Social Infrastructure of the Project Area
6-33
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Health Facilities
The health facilities available within the jurisdiction of the Districts Swabi and Haripur are shown in Table 6.17 below. Table 6.17:
Health Facilities in the Swabi and Haripur Districts District
Health Facility Swabi Hospitals
Haripur 3
3
41
39
Dispensaries
8
12
Rural Health Centers
2
5
Mother and Child Health Centers
3
2
Basic Health Unit
Source:
District Census Report of Swabi and Haripur, 1998
The above table shows that health facilities available in both Districts are more or less similar with minor variation depending on the distance to the source of service. Swabi district has a greater number of basic health centers whilst Haripur district has a greater number of dispensaries and rural health centers. It is evident from the above information that hospitalization, rural health centers and mother/child centers are rare in both the Districts. The health facilities for the Project area are provided below in Table 6.18. Due to the poor living conditions of the population, particularly in Project areas where there are unhygienic living conditions and lack of potable water, there are many diseases, the most common diseases prevalent in the area are malaria, diarrhea, hepatitis and skin diseases. Table 6.18:
Availability of Health Facilities in the Project Area
Village
Facility
Status
Right Bank Burj (Khabbal)
Nil
Nil
WAPDA Right Bank Colony
Hospital
Lack of x-Ray and Laboratory facilities. Lack of medical staff.
Mohallah Zakoo, Topi
Civil Hospital
Lack of x-Ray and Laboratory facilities. Lack of medical staff and Medicines.
Pehur Hamlet ,Topi
Dispensary
Lack of medical staff and Medicines.
Pontian
Nil
Nil
Darra Mohat
Nil
Nil
Kukar Chawa
Nil
Nil
Ghari Meera
Nil
Nil
Sobra City
Hospital
Adequate
Left Bank
WAPDA August 2011
facilities
are
6-34
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Village
Facility
Status available in the hospital
Ghazi Hamlet
Lack of medical staff and
Dispensary
Medicines. Qazipur
Lack of medical staff and
Dispensary
Medicines.
Source: ESA survey 2011.
Education Facilities
The Swabi district is blessed with a higher standard institution named the Ghulam Ishaq Khan Institute of Engineering, Science and Technology (GIKIEST) situated at Topi. Apart from this institute, there is also a Polytechnique Institute and a Commerce College in the district. In the Haripur district there is a Post Graduate College, a Poly Technique Institute and a Commerce College. All of these facilities are mainly for males, the details of those attending these educational facilities who are inhabitants of the districts are provided in Table 6.19. This data has been taken from the 1998 census data and not all data was available for both districts, there are therefore some gaps in the table. Table 6.19:
Educational Facilities in the Swabi and Haripur Districts
Institute
Swabi District
Haripur District
Male
Female
Total
Male
Female
Total
Degree College
2
1
3
1
1
2
Inter College
1
-
1
1
-
2
Elementary College
1
-
1
1
-
1
Higher Secondary
-
-
-
4
3
7
High School
65
21
86
63
15
78
Middle School
51
25
76
56
27
83
Primary School
496
388
864
656
251
907
20
-
20
-
-
-
Mosque School
76
-
-
-
-
Community and
-
14
-
-
-
School
Elementary Primary School
Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) Model School
Source: Dis1rict Census Report of Swabi and Haripur, 1998.
Like health facilities, education facilities in the Project area are not considered satisfactory. The overall picture of educational facilities in Project area is provided in Table 6.20 and it can be concluded that better education facilities are available at the WAPDA August 2011
6-35
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Right Bank Colony. There are high schools for girls and boys with qualified staff and a proper building. Science and computer laboratories are also available in the schools. Although a high school for boys and girls exists at both the hamlets and in the Topi area, there is a shortage of proper staff, furniture, science and computer laboratories. Buildings are old and are insufficient for the existing number of students. A degree level education facility is available in both the Ghazi and Topi areas. Table 6.20:
Education Facilities available in the Project Area
Village
Facility
Gender
Remarks
Primary school
Boys
Lack of Teachers staff.
Right Bank Burj (Khabbal)
Teachers often remained absent WAPDA Right Bank Colony
High school
Boys
Lack of computer facilities
High school
Girls
Lack of computer facilities
Mohallah Zakoo,
Primary school
Boys
Lack of computer facilities
Topi
Primary school
Girls
High school
Boys
Lack of Science Teachers staff,
High school
Girls
building, furniture and computers
Pontian
Primary school
Boys
Lack of computer facilities
Darra Mohat
Primary school
Boys and Girls
Upgrade of school to Middle
Primary school
Boys and Girls
Upgrade of school to Middle
High school
Boys and Girls
Lack of Science Teachers staff,
Pehur Hamlet ,Topi
Left Bank Kukar Chawa Ghari Meera Ghazi Hamlet
Nil
Furniture and computers Qazipur
Primary school
Boys and Girls
Lack of computer facilities
High school Source:
ESA survey 2011.
Literacy
A person who can read and write statements with an understanding, in any language prevalent in Pakistan, is considered as literate. The literacy ratio is measured as the number of literate people compared to the population of the age of 10 years and above. According to the population Census of1998, in the Swabi district 36% of the population are literate whereas in the Haripur district a much higher percentage of the population is literate at 53.7%. The literacy rate in the Project area is therefore lower than the national level of 57%. Housing
It is evident from the 1998 Census that in the Swabi district around two thirds (65.4%) of the households use wood as the construction material in the roofs of their buildings, while 22.6% use reinforced cement, concrete or bricks. Approximately 10% of all houses use
WAPDA August 2011
6-36
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
cement or iron sheets in the roofs. The remaining 12% of households use other materials. Separate kitchens, bathrooms and latrines are available in 58.3% of all housing units. In the Haripur district the situation was different, Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) / Reinforced Brick Concrete (RBC) was the main (45.3 %) roofing material of the households. Wood and bamboo were utilized in 39.4% with cement and bricks used in 11.7% and the remaining 3.7% using other materials. Separate kitchens, bathrooms and latrines are available for households with 48.4%, 46.1% and 41.0% respectively in the Haripur district. There is a mixture of Pacca (permanent structure with concrete roofing), Semi Pacca (brick walls but corrugated galvanized iron roofing) and Kacha (grass-thatched/mud covered) houses in the Project area apart from the Right Bank Colony where all the houses were Pacca. In total there were 80% of Pacca houses in Project area with the remaining 20% falling into the Kacha and Semi Pacca category. It was observed that all the people were living in self owned houses except on the Right Bank Colony, which is property of WAPDA. Sources of Drinking Water
The following data has been collated from the District Census Reports of Swabi and Haripur, 1998. Residents of the districts of Swabi and Haripur have access to two types of drinking water, within the house and outwith house. On an overall basis, 79.4% of households had access to a drinking water facility within the house with the remaining 20.6% having to fetch water from outwith the house. The proportion of households fetching water was higher in rural areas as compared to urban localities (22.2% versus 13.0 %). It is important to note that 61.3% of households rely on wells for drinking water and this percentage was higher (70.7%) in urban settlements when compared to rural areas (59.3%). A higher proportion of resident (55.2%) of the Haripur district had access to water within their houses as compared to outwith the house (44.8%). However, the trend is similar to that of the Swabi district. A significantly higher proportion of households in the Haripur district have access to tap water is in both urban and rural localities (91.3% and 44.1% respectively) when compared to the households of the Swabi district. Only 15.3% of households in the Swabi district had access to piped water which is considered relatively safe quality. A nominal proportion of urban households and all households in rural areas were getting drinking water from village ponds in both districts which is the most dangerous quality of water. More detail on the above information is provided below in Table 6.21. Table 6.21:
Source of Drinking Water by Locality (%) Swabi
Source
Haripur
Rural
Urban
All
Rural
Urban
All
Inside
77.8
87.0
79.4
50.4
92.2
55.2
Pipe (Nul)
11.0
10.5
10.9
44.1
91.3
49.6
Hand Pump
18.1
13.1
17,2
0.3
0.4
0.3
Well
48,7
63.4
51.3
6.0
0.5
5.3
Outwith
22.2
13.0
20.6
49.6
7.8
44.8
WAPDA August 2011
6-37
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Swabi Source
Haripur
Rural
Urban
All
Rural
Urban
All
Pipe (Nul)
4.9
2.,1
4.4
16.9
5.3
15.6
Hand Pump
1.3
0.8
1.3
0.6
0,4
0.6
Well
10.6
7.3
10.0
14.4
0.9
12.8
Pond
0.8
-
0.6
2.1
-
1.8
Others
4.6
2.8
4.3
15.6
1.2
14.0
Source: District Census Reports of Swabi and Haripur, 1998.
A tapped water supply is considered to be the most hygienic source of drinking water, which is available only in the WAPDA colonies and to a limited number of people in Project area. A water supply system is partially available in the hamlets but was dysfunctional at the time of ESA survey. At the Right Bank Topi area, the drinking water is polluted due to severe seepage problems and most of the people in the Project area use untreated water. The ground water is contaminated by sewage, especially in the Topi area. In the WAPDA Colonies drinking water is sourced by ground water pumped through deep tubewells. As described earlier, the drinking water quality sampling and analysis by SGS Pakistan (Pvt.) Limited at the WAPDA showed a Total Bacterial Colony Count that exceeded permissible limits. Sanitation
The sanitation conditions of the Haripur district are relatively better than those in the Swabi district, especially in the rural areas. Urban settlements have drainage facilities and in the WAPDA Colonies there is an improperly functioning sanitation system which limited its proper and environmentally safe use. In the hamlets and the Topi area, an open drainage system is available but there are no arrangement for the disposal of domestic solid waste and sewage. People drain out used water in open places, similarly the open dumping of solid waste is normal practice in the Project area. Electricity
According to the District Census Reports of Swabi and Haripur, 1998, the majority of houses (83.4%) are equipped with the electricity as the source of lighting, both in urban and rural areas. The Project area is connected with a nearby national grid system however, shortage of electricity and load shedding is normal practice in the area as with other parts of the country. Tele Communication
The District Census Reports of Swabi and Haripur, 1998 disclose that there are 22 telephone exchanges functioning in the Swabi district as well as one Head Post Office, 27 Sub Post Offices and 65 Branch Post Offices. In the Haripur district there are 18 telephone exchanges in operation while and one Head Post Office, 26 Sub Post Offices and 74 Branch Post Offices functioning in the district. The comparative analysis of the situation reveals that telecommunication facilities in both districts have a nominal variation.
WAPDA August 2011
6-38
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
The telecommunication services are available in and around the Project area. The services of all the mobile providers are available in the Project area. Pakistan Telecommunication Company Ltd. is also providing land lines and wireless telephone services in the area. Road Network
There is a chain of national, district and rural roads available in the Swabi district. Farms are linked to markets by a roads network. Completion of the M1 project (Motorway between Peshawar and Islamabad) has also improved links from and to the district with other cities. According to the Census of 1998 the total length of roads in the district was 335 km whereas the Haripur district is linked with the famous Shahr-e-Resham (Karakoram Highway) through Hazro road. Haripur is also linked with Taxila (Punjab) via Khanpur. A road from Haripur city leads to Ghazi and there is also a network of farms to market roads. The total length of the roads in the Haripur district is 260 km. The Tarbela Dam is approximately 110 km away from Islamabad. The Project area is linked by road directly with Islamabad and Peshawar via Motorway and Grand Trunk (GT) Roads. One can use Burhan and Swabi interchanges on the Motorway to reach Tarbela. A link road from the Grand Trunk (GT) Road leads to Tarbela. These routes can be used for the transportation of construction material. The village of Darra Mohat, located 1 km upstream of the dam site as shown in the various maps and figures contained in this report, is divided into two parts in the months of July to October every year due to rise of water in the reservoir which submerges the connecting road and people cross the river by boat.
6.4.6 Grazing The Project site is restricted and fenced to prevent grazing animals from penetrating the area. However the families living in the Right Bank Colony use the Right Bank Colony barracks as animal sheds. As these barracks are one of the options being considered for the new labor camps, so these animals may be disturbed. People living in other villages within the Project area of influence also have domestic animals but these villages are further away from the Project site. Similarly, on the Left Bank a limited number of animals are reared that graze on the open areas within the colonies. Overall there is limited grazing pressure on the wild flora growing in the Project area therefore no disturbance is expected to the grazing activity of these animals.
6.4.7 Cultural Heritage A team from the Archaeology and Museums Department of the Government of KP, Peshawar has visited the Project site and surrounding areas. They established that there are no known cultural and archaeological located in the Project area. A certificate of non-existence of any known archaeology site or objects has been issued by the concerned department. However the area has a rich cultural and historical background. Not far from Tarbela, opposite the village of Darband there is the site (Aornos or Pir Sar) where Alexander the Great and his army fought his last battle with an army of “barbarians” before returning downstream along the Indus to return to Greece. Somewhat later in time numerous Buddhist stupas were built along the Indus valley, some of them probably near Tarbela.
WAPDA August 2011
6-39
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
6.4.8 Tourism and Recreation The scenic beauty of the area including the Tarbela Dam and Reservoir has attracted a large number of both local and foreign tourists in the past and WAPDA developed viewpoints for visitors to the dam site. However, tourist activities in the Project area are now very limited due to the high security requirements as the project is considered a potential terrorist target. WAPDA has provided recreation facilities to its employees in the residential colonies. These include play grounds, sports gymnasium, ladies and gents club and a community centre in the Right Bank Colony. There is no cinema or club in Project area, as the majority of the people are religiously minded. Play grounds and others sports facilities are very limited in the Ghazi and Topi areas and people are keen to see recreational facilities for the masses of these areas, particularly for women and children.
6.4.9
Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) and Social Organizations
NGOs
The NGO sector has made enormous contributions to the economic development in Pakistan. The Ghazi Barotha Taraqiati Idara (GBTI) and Sungi Development Foundation are of note and are mentioned as they work actively in Tarbela Project area. GBTI was the project NGO for Ghazi Barotha Hydro Power project; in addition they are working with communities in the health and education sectors. Pakistan and provincial KP Rural Support Programs are also working in the Haripur and Swabi districts. Mechanism for resolving disputes
According to the ESA Survey, people have various disputes and conflicts on different issues, like other parts of the country. However, they resolve their minor disputes through the heads of families while major disputes are resolved through the Jirga (a tribal assembly of elders that make decisions by consensus). In case of serious matters, local influential politicians intervene to settle the dispute. Police and the court of law is the last option.
6.4.10 Poverty Status Taking into consideration the nature and scope of the sources of income from barani (rain fed) agriculture, livestock, employment status, investment profit, remittances from main metropolitan cities of Pakistan as well as abroad, most importantly from the analysis data gathered from the focused groups and separate discussions with men and women of the Project area; it would be safe to conclude that every second person in the Project area was living below the poverty line and earning less than $1.50 per day, per person.
6.4.11 Gender Issues in the Project Area Overview
Gender issues are gaining importance in development projects because female members of the community are generally neglected while designing, assessing and implementing such projects. Females are generally more vulnerable than male members of the society and the Project is no exception to this.
WAPDA August 2011
6-40
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
The following information was collected through Rapid Social Appraisal (RSA) and Focused Group Discussion (FGD) at village level. The RSA and FGDs were not undertaken with the male community however the overall demand chart is provided in the SIMF where the most expressed pressing needs of the male population was identified as:
Employment;
Technical education; and
Recreation activities.
Basic Sociological Characteristics of Women
All women consulted fall within the age group of 20 to 60 years old with an average age of 40 years. Of the total women consulted, 77% were married, 17% unmarried and the remaining 4% were widowed. On average a married women had 3.7 children. Literacy Status
Of the participating women, 46% were literate having received formal and/or informal education. Table 6.22 below shows that around 25.5% of literate women held a graduation degree (i.e. 4 years of schooling), whereas around 18.6% held the degree of Fellow of Arts (FA) 12 years education) and the same applied to the Master of Arts (MA) 16 years of education). This shows an overall higher level of education achievement and propensity of gaining an education among the literate women of the Project area. Table 6.22:
Level of Formal Education of Literate Female Respondents
Education Level
Respondents (No.)
Percentage (%)
Primary
2
4.6
Middle
6
14.1
Matriculation
8
18.6
FA
8
18.6
11
25.5
8
18.6
46
100
Bachelor of Arts (BA) MA Total Source:
ESA Consultation
Occupational Status
Table 6.23 below shows that around 65.6% of the women consulted are housewives and remain engaged on a full time basis in household chores including food preparation, cleaning, housekeeping, caring and rearing of children and taking care of old and sick members of the family. About 18% of the women were contributing to the household income through both indoor and outdoor activities such as teaching, dress making and shop keeping. Women are also engaged in undocumented and informal rural economy such as the raring of animals.
WAPDA August 2011
6-41
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 6.23:
Occupational Status of Women Respondents
Occupation
Respondents (No.)
Percentage (%)
House Wife
63
65.6
Teacher
12
12.5
Student
11
11.4
Dress Maker
3
3.2
Shopkeeper
2
2.1
Nothing
5
5.2
96
100.0
Total
Note: few women (2.1%) of the Right Bank Colony were members of the “women’s club”.
Role in Decision Making
Off the total participating women, 51.2% were involved in the decision making process relating to important issues such as the sale and purchase of property and the schooling and marriages of their children. However, a vast majority of women (83.3%) were of the view that, despite all the discussions around making a decision, the final decision power lies with the male head of the family. A small number of respondents (5.2%) had the right of ownership of the property. Skills
Some 41% of the participating women possessed different skills e.g. embroidery and stitching, which provided a minor source of income generation. Health Status
Table 6.24 below indicates that 49.6% of the responses received were for availing health facilities at the government health centers which include indoor hospitalization facilities. However, the availability of professional, semi-professional and occupational medical staff and the quality of related services remained an open question. There were 24% of the responses in favour of relying on private medical facilities, including paramedical practitioners. It is worth noting that the villages named as Khabbal, Darra Mohat and Kukar Chawa did not have any access to either medical practitioners or any basic health unit. Table 6.24:
Health Facilities Availed by Women in Last Year
Health Centre
Respondents (No.)
Percentage (%)
5
3.5
Dispensary
24
17
Private Doctor
34
24.3
Hospital
70
49.6
8
5.6
141
100
Basic Health Unit (BHU)
Hakeem / Practitioner Total
WAPDA August 2011
6-42
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Most Common Prevailing Diseases
Women were asked about the most common diseases prevalent in the Project area. According Table 6.25 below, the common most diseases prevalent in the Project area were: Diarrhea (32.7%); Typhoid (27.3%); Hepatitis (9.2%); Measles (6.4%); and Malaria (5%). Table 6.25:
Most Common Diseases Prevailing in the Project Area
Disease
Response (No.)
Percentage (%)
Diarrhea
72
32.7
Measles
14
6.4
8
3.6
Hepatitis
20
9.2
Typhoid
60
27.3
Tuberculosis
9
4.0
Skin Diseases
8
4.1
Eye diseases
6
2.7
Chickenpox
6
2.7
11
5.0
220
100.0
Pneumonia
Malaria Total
Pressing Needs of Women
Data was collected from the women on their “pressing needs” to disseminate the benefits of the Project to the surrounding communities. The most important needs felt by the women folk were: provision of vocational/ training facilities (25.5%); access to health facilities (24.4%); improved educational facilities (19%); and some felt their needs were comprised on basic necessities such as gas, electricity and drinking water, as depicted in Table 6.26. Table 6.26:
Pressing Needs of Women
Needs
Response* (No.)
Percentage (%)
Improvement in health facilities
44
24.4
Improvement in educational facilities
34
19.0
Vocational Training Centers
46
25.5
Lady Doctors / Maternity homes
12
6.7
Others (Gas, electricity and drinking water)
44
24.4
180
100.0
Total * There were multiple responses received
Skill Development
A majority of the women (72%) were interested in receiving training in different skill types. The skill development training required most by women is sewing (34%) followed by embroidery (29%) and handicrafts (21%). Such training could provide opportunities for income generation. Some 16% of the literate women were interested in receiving computer training. Women preference for development in their skills is given below. Table 6.27 provides the source data. WAPDA August 2011
6-43
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 6.27:
Women’s Preference for Skill Development
Skill / Training
Response* (No.)
Percentage (%)
Sewing
55
34
Embroidery
47
29
Handicrafts
34
21
Computer Course
26
16
162
100
Total
6.4.12 Tarbela Legacy The original Tarbela Dam Project acquired approximately 82,000 acres of land for construction and the large reservoir submerged 120 villages and created an unprecedented 96,000 project displaced affectees spread over a vast geographical area. Resettlement planning for the Tarbela Dam Project was based on the Pakistan Land Acquisition Act (1894 and its subsequent amendments), before the existence of international guidance, donor safeguards or Pakistan’s 2002 draft resettlement policy. In the mid 1990s, the World Bank and the Asian Development Bank made the settlement of the Tarbela Project’s outstanding social issues a pre-condition for the loan requested by the Government of Pakistan for the GBHPP. As of mid July 2010, according to WAPDA there were 40 existing, outstanding claims related to the Tarbela Dam Reservoir Project. The 40 claims include:
27 with District Courts;
10 pending with the High Court Peshawar Circuit Bench at Abbotabad; and
Three under trial at the Supreme Court/ Shariah Court in Islamabad.
Of the 40 cases, 26 were submitted by PAPs, 11 were filed by WAPDA and three related to land possession and were filed by PAP versus PAP. The total disputed amount from the Tarbela resettlement claims and related issues was PKR 182,437,263 as of June 2010, of this, PKR 13,621,218 was claimed by WAPDA in respect of recovery for over payment, an amount of PKR 168,816,045 was claimed by PAPs for compensation package enhancement, interest and compensation against land. In 2003, WAPDA deposited its share for potential compensation payments with the Government of Pakistan treasuries in various national investment schemes. The World Commission on Dams 1999 case study on Tarbela identified three main factors as to why resettlement impacts and claims were not closed out for Tarbela as follows:
Abnormal delays in the announcement of decrees in judicial cases;
The refusal of the Sindh Government to provide the balance of the 7,800 ha out of 12,000 ha which it had committed to provide to PAPs; and
WAPDA also developed 311 residential and commercial plots for allotment to eligible PAPs of Kala Dhaka in the New Darbad Township Extension Scheme. However, Kala Dhaka affectees refused to accept allotment of these plots on the plea that all 1,280 PAPs may be provided residential plots grouped in one hamlet/township. Therefore this issue remains unsettled because of non-availability of the desired number of plots. Previously the Kala Dhaka PAPs had refused to accept agricultural land in Sindh.
WAPDA August 2011
6-44
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
7 Other Relevant Non-project Related Issues 7.1
Risk of Earthquakes
The Project area is located in a part of Pakistan where earthquakes frequently occur, though usually these are not of an exceptional magnitude. Tarbela is situated in the foothills of the Himalaya and Karakorum mountains. These mountain ranges were uplifted through the collision of the Indian and Eurasian tectonic plates. The zone of the main trust between the plates is located northeast of the project site at a distance 100- 200 km in Kohistan and Kashmir. However, the influence of associated local tectonic fault breaks can continue until the project area as far as the Potwar (or Potohar) plateau, which is situated south of the project area. High incidence of seismic activity through tectonical movements of local faults can be responsible for rupture of ground surface, ground acceleration, failures of natural slopes, and ground liquefaction. The largest recent earthquake in the area was the 2005 NWFP/Kashmir earthquake with a magnitude of 7.6 on the Richter scale. More than 73,000 people were killed through this earthquake and 450,000 people made homeless. The epicenter was located at a distance of about 100 km northeast from Tarbela. The major earthquake was followed by a large number of aftershocks. The magnitude of 7.6 is exceptional (calculated frequency of once every 330 years). Most earthquakes in the area have a magnitude up to 6.4. As long as the process of mountain uplifting continues in the northern areas the project should be spared from major earthquakes with magnitudes in excess of 7. However, there is no guarantee that a local fault does not break and causes an earthquake. There is an active tectonic fault (the Darband fault) at the site which may displace by about 1.2 m. This makes the risk of failure of slopes and liquefaction of near-surface soil quite high, unless appropriate engineering measures are implemented to reduce these risks.
7.2
Risk of Flooding
Since its creation, Pakistan has faced eight severe floods. The floods of 1950, 1988, 1992 and 1998 resulted in a large number of deaths and severe loss of property, while the July 2010 floods have been described as the worst in the last eighty years. In July and August 2010 heavy monsoon rainfall in the northwest of the country caused flash and heavy riverine floods. Starting in the valleys of the Swat and Kabul rivers the flood peak after flooding large areas in KP province joined the Indus waters at Attock and travelled downstream through the densely populated irrigation areas in Punjab and Sindh and flooding large areas with around 8,000 deaths and nearly 20 million people being significantly affected through loss of housing, property, crops, and income. During these floods the Tarbela reservoir experienced a historically high peak discharge of the Indus of 23,650 m³/sec, but this was considerably below the design discharge of 42,400 m³/sec. Reservoir and dam could therefore relatively easily cope with these high floods. Through operation of the reservoir the peak outflow at Tarbela even could be reduced with some 28 percent. There was no damage at Tarbela or surrounding areas. The conclusion is that although the risk of flooding in the Indus Basin might increase in the coming years due to rising air temperature, shift in rainfall pattern and increased melting of glaciers in the upstream regions (see Section 6.3) the risk of flooding and related damage in the Tarbela area is very low.
WAPDA August 2011
7-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Floods in the northern areas of Pakistan, including the upper part of the Indus catchment are not only associated with extreme rainfall events, but they can also occur after landslides and creation of river-dams and subsequent flood waves. However these flooding events are usually restricted to tributary areas and may have impacts on the upper Indus valley, but not on Tarbela.
7.3
Climate Change
Climate change is being considered as a critical factor behind changing rainfall patterns, the visible increase in precipitation during monsoon seasons, and more frequent extremely dry periods. Also the influence of climate change on air temperature such as minimum and maximum averages and the frequency of heat waves is often mentioned. More than 13 percent of the Upper Indus Basin consists of glaciers and the melting of ice caps and retreat of glaciers is attributed to climate change. All these results have a considerable influence on the hydrology of the Indus Basin, the water availability and on the occurrence of floods and droughts. During the last decade a lot of research is carried out to study the effects of long-term climate change on precipitation, air temperatures, and droughts. Some of the main conclusions of these studies are the following:
between 1980 and 2005 the frequency of heat waves (T> 40º C) has been increased in north-western Pakistan. It is expected that there will be more frequent periods with extreme drought;
based on predictions of the International Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) scenario’s estimates have been made by the Pakistan Meteorological Service from the increase in maximum daily temperatures, which ranges from 2.8º C to 4.2º C in the year 2080 for northern Pakistan;
more heavy rainfall events during monsoon season will occur over north-western Pakistan instead of the north-east of the country. Some models calculate 25 percent more rainfall during monsoon. As a result, areas along the western rivers of the country (Indus and Kabul) will be more vulnerable to flood episodes similar to the one experienced during 2010;
water availability might increase considerably (during kharif) but not when it is required for agriculture (rabi season);
a shift has been observed in the rainfall pattern with monsoons starting 1-2 weeks earlier and winter rains confined towards February;
Recent studies have been concentrated on the effects of glacial melt. Major issues to be investigated are amongst others:
the importance of the contribution of snow and glacial melt on the hydrology of the Indus;
the observed changes in the extent of the glaciers;
the effects of climate changes on the amount of melt-water.
From these studies it has been concluded that glaciers in the Himalaya and Karakorum are receding faster than happens in any other part of the world. From digital terrain models and satellite observations it might be concluded that the reduction of the thickness of ice in the Western Himalayan glaciers ranges between 0.50 to 0.90 m per year, WAPDA August 2011
7-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
although in some areas in the Karakorum an extension and increase of glaciers has also been reported. A recent study (Immerzeel et al, 2010) suggests that 60 percent of the discharge in the Indus catchment is fed by melting of glaciers and snow. This is a very high percentage as compared to other major rivers originating in the Himalayas, such as Brahmaputra, Ganges and Yellow River. In a likely scenario of global warming based on IPPC predictions the reduction of the share of melt-water in the Indus discharge has been estimated at 8.4 percent. However this could be (over)compensated by an expected increase of the precipitation during monsoon in the area of 25 percent. The relation between climate change and hydrology is extremely complex. This is because the high variability in data on climate and hydrology, requiring long time series and proper monitoring. Moreover regional circumstances might vary considerably, especially in high mountain areas. This often leads to conflicting data. More studies and more reliable data should be collected in the coming years. In view of the importance of these data for developing reliable and accurate knowledge of the basin hydrology and on future water availability of the Indus River it is recommended that the current project contributes to these studies with a Glacial Monitoring Program (Component C4: US$ 6 million). In the ESMP more details of such a study are presented and a cost estimate is given. This program includes extensive glacial studies, including satellite monitoring and studies into the effects of glacial outbursts.
WAPDA August 2011
7-3
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
8 Significant Environmental Impacts of the Project and their Mitigations 8.1
General
Potential adverse effects of the T4HP project on ecosystems and their inhabitants, humans, animals and plants are described in this chapter. The impacts of the project on social structures and relations will be dealt with in Chapter 9. Adverse environmental impacts under the project are expected to be rather limited mainly because dam, reservoir, and power generating facilities are already in place. Construction operations will be concentrated on a limited project area concentrated around the inlet gates of Tunnels 3 and 4, the outlet of Tunnel 4, the site and steep slope above the new power house to be constructed and the existing switch yard which will be extended further downstream. The area of influence of the project is larger and covers some 5 km upstream in the Reservoir including its embankments and 10 km downstream of the dam until the two cities of Ghazi and Topi at respectively the left and the right bank. Also included are the borrow and disposal areas in the vicinity of the project and the access roads to the project.
8.2 Assessment of Effects and Significance The assessment of effects and identification of residual significance takes account of any incorporated mitigation measures adopted due to any impact of Project activities, and is largely dependent on the extent and duration of change, the number of people or size of the resource affected and their sensitivity to the change. Impacts can be both adverse and beneficial and the methodology defined below has been applied to define both beneficial and adverse impacts of the project. The criteria for determining significance are generally specific for each environmental and social aspect but generally the magnitude of each impact is defined along with the sensitivity of the receptor. Generic criteria for defining magnitude and sensitivity are summarized below:
8.2.1 Magnitude The assessment of magnitude will be undertaken in two steps. Firstly the key issues associated with the Project are categorized as beneficial or adverse. Secondly, impacts will be categorized as major, moderate, minor or negligible based on consideration of the parameters such as:
Duration of the impact;
Spatial extent of the impact;
Reversibility;
Likelihood; and
Legal standards and established professional criteria.
The magnitude of impacts will generally be identified according to the categories outlined in Table 8.1.
WAPDA August 2011
8-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 8.1:
Parameters for Determining Magnitude
Parameter
Major
Duration of impact
Moderate
Long term
Medium Term
(more than 35 years)
Lifespan of the project
Minor
Negligible
Less than project lifespan
Temporary with no detectable impact
(5 to 15 years) Spatial extent of the impact
Widespread far beyond project component site boundaries
Beyond immediate project components, site boundaries or local area
Within project components and site boundary
Specific location within project component or site boundaries with no detectable impact
Reversibility of impacts
Impact is effectively permanent, requiring considerable intervention to return to baseline
Baseline requires a year or so with some interventions to return to baseline
Baseline returns naturally or with limited intervention within a few months
Baseline remains constant
Legal standards and established professional
Breaches national limits and or international guidelines
Complies with limits given in national standards but breaches international lender guidelines in one or more parameters
Meets minimum national standard limits or international guidelines
Not applicable
Occurs under typical operating or construction conditions
Occurs under worst case (negative impact) or best case (positive impact) operating conditions
Occurs under abnormal, exceptional or emergency conditions
Unlikely to occur
criteria
Likelihood of impacts occurring
Source:
Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Volume II, Judith Petts, 1999. Blackwell Science Ltd.
8.2.2 Sensitivity The sensitivity of a receptor will be determined based on review of the population (including proximity / numbers / vulnerability) and presence of features on the site or the surrounding area. Criteria for determining sensitivity of receptors are outlined in Table 8.2 below. Each assessment will define sensitivity in relation to their topic. Table 8.2:
Criteria for Determining Sensitivity
Sensitivity Determination
Definition
Very High
Vulnerable receptor (human or terrestrial) with little or no capacity to absorb proposed changes or minimal opportunities for mitigation.
High
Vulnerable receptor (human or terrestrial) with little or no capacity to absorb proposed changes or limited opportunities for mitigation.
WAPDA August 2011
8-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Sensitivity Determination
Definition
Medium
Vulnerable receptor (human or terrestrial) with some capacity to absorb proposed changes or moderate opportunities for mitigation
Low / Negligible
Vulnerable receptor (human or terrestrial) with good capacity to absorb proposed changes or/and good opportunities for mitigation
Source: Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Volume II, Judith Petts, 1999. Blackwell Science ltd.
8.2.3 Assigning Significance Following the assessment of magnitude, the quality and sensitivity of the receiving environment or potential receptor was determined and the significance of each potential impact was established using the impact significance matrix shown below in Table 8.3. Table 8.3:
Assessment of Impact Significance Sensitivity of Receptors Very High
High
Medium
Low / Negligible
Major
Critical
Major
Moderate
Negligible
Moderate
Major
Major
Moderate
Negligible
Minor
Moderate
Moderate
Low
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Negligible
Magnitude of Impact
A great number of potential impacts can either be avoided or reduced through mitigation; however some residual environmental impacts may be unavoidable. The ESA has assessed whether residual impacts, either beneficial or adverse, remain after mitigation.
8.2.4 Mitigation and Enhancement Measures Mitigation measures are identified to address negative impacts. The following hierarchy of mitigation measures will be applied:
Mitigation / elimination through design (embedded mitigation);
Site / technology choice; and
Application of best practice.
Where appropriate, enhancement measures are identified to create new positive impacts or benefits, increase the reach of positive impacts or benefits, or distribute them more equitably.
8.2.5 Uncertainty An ESA involves prediction and thus uncertainty is an integral part. The main types of uncertainty and the ways in which they can be minimized are summarized as follows:
Uncertainty of prediction: this is important at the data collection stage and the final certainty will only be resolved once implementation commences. Research can reduce the uncertainty;
WAPDA August 2011
8-3
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Uncertainty of values: this reflects the approach taken in the ESA process. Final certainty will be determined at the time decisions are made. Improved communications and extensive negotiations would reduce this uncertainty;
Uncertainty of related decision: this affects the decision making element of the ESA process and final certainty will be determined by post evaluation. Improved coordination will reduce uncertainty.
8.3
Summary of Assessed Impacts
The project’s potential environmental impacts and their significance have been assessed using the methodology described in Section 8.2 above. A summary of these impacts and their significance is presented in Table 8.4.
WAPDA August 2011
8-4
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 8.4:
Significance of Environmental Impacts
Impacts
Land Acquisition and Land Use
Phase
Pre-construction
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Low
Minor
Significance Prior to Mitigation and
Mitigation and Enhancement Measure
Enhancement Low Adverse
Change; preparation of
• Construction camps and other construction facilities to be established on WAPDA owned land.
Residual Significance Negligible
• Re-plantation plan to be prepared and implemented.
construction facilities Contractor mobilization
Pre-construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• Contractor to prepare and implement a traffic management plan. Temporary by-pass routes. Community awareness.
Low Adverse
Topography:
Construction and
Medium
Major
Moderate Adverse
• no excessive excavation; and
Negligible
• blasting and cutting for powerhouse;
• use of alternative excavation methods wherever possible.
Decommissioning
• blasting and cutting at borrow sites; • dumping of excavation materials. Geology and Seismology:
All Phases
High
Major
Major Adverse
• risk of seismic activity.
• foundation design of the powerhouse to consider probability of earthquake at the earliest design stage;
Low Adverse
• Method Statements and Risk Assessments with particular attention to blasting material and blasting techniques; and • Emergency Preparedness Plan.
Irrigation Releases and power generation: • construction – temporary closure of existing Tunnel 4 to join with the new tunnel and for constructing the raised intake will result in the interruption of irrigation releases through tunnel 4; and • operation – the Tunnel 4 capacity will be reduced by
WAPDA August 2011
Construction:
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• connection tunnels will be carried out during the annual canal closure and periods of low demand; and
Negligible
• Releases from tunnels 1-3 and 5 will be adjusted to meet the irrigation water demands and power generation.
• the reservoir will continue to be operated to ensure meeting the irrigation water demand.
8-5
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Impacts
Phase
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior to Mitigation and
Mitigation and Enhancement Measure
Enhancement
Residual Significance
around 5%. Operation:
High
Moderate
Major Adverse
Negligible
Surface Water Quality:
Construction and
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• many sources of discharge and effluents.
De-
• Select access roads to avoid run off to river;
commissioning
• pre-treated sewage prior to discharge;
• Surface Water Monitoring Program;
Low adverse
• Wastewater Treatment Plan; • Oil and Chemical Spill Response Plan; Operation
Low
Minor
Negligible
• Waste Management Plans;
Negligible
• Store and handle all hazardous substances in accordance with their MSDS; • Install oil and water separators and settling ponds; and • Upon completion of decommissioning, disturbed areas will be contoured and revegetated to minimize the potential for soil erosion and water quality related impacts. Ground Water Quality:
Construction:
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• Ground Water Monitoring Program;
Negligible
• work within the requirements of the management plans contained within the EMMP;
• piling for foundations; • accidental spills and leakage; and
De-
• worker camp wastewater.
commissioning:
Medium
Minor
Low Adverse
• staff training; • all sanitary effluent will be treated prior to discharge; • treatment plant will conform to international standards; • drainage system will be designed so that all spills will be drained and collected in a sump for further appropriate disposal; and • Oil and chemical storage and vehicle wash and oil change facilities will be on an impermeable surface to avoid percolation. • reduce volume of material requiring disposal;
Wastes:
Construction and
• large volume of spoil;
De-
• re-use where possible;
• possible risk of erosion into the Indus River;
commissioning:
• disposal of spoil at designated depressed area;
WAPDA August 2011
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
Negligible
• only remove equipment and machinery leaving
8-6
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Impacts
• leakage, spillage from other wastes (domestic and hazardous); and
Phase
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior to Mitigation and Enhancement • Waste Management Plans; and
Low
Minor
Negligible
• Excavated Material Disposal Plan. • Demolition material disposal plan
• disposal of demolition material.
• Risk of landslide resulting from excavation and blasting activities.
Residual Significance
infrastructure in place for re-use for other purposes; Operation:
• camp wastes
Landslides:
Mitigation and Enhancement Measure
Construction:
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• slope stabilization;
Low Adverse
• extraction from top down; • use of pre-designed support systems; De-
Low
Minor
Negligible
commissioning:
• use cushion blasting in confined areas; • Method Statements and Risk Assessments with particular attention to blasting material and blasting techniques; and • include in Emergency Preparedness Plan.
Soil and Erosion:
Construction:
Medium
Minor
Low Adverse
• loss of topsoil from land clearance; • soil contamination from hazardous construction materials; and
Negligible/
• re-vegetation, especially of slopes, of fast-growing indigenous species;
Positive
• road edge buffer replanting;
Decommissioning
• storage and use of hazardous materials;
Low
Minor
Negligible
Beneficial
• Tree Plantation Plan; and • decommissioning would be followed by contouring and re-vegetation.
• fish mortality from river turbidity • surface disturbance from machinery and demolition. Air Quality:
Construction and
• dust on site from site works and vehicle movements.
De-
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• covering standing material and transported material to prevent dust blows;
Negligible
• washing of construction vehicles;
commissioning
• specific and agreed routes for traffic; • speed limits; and • turn off engines when idle.
Noise:
Construction and
• vehicle movement;
De-
• restricting / limiting timing of blasting activity;
• operating machinery;
commissioning
• fitting applicable construction machinery with mufflers;
WAPDA August 2011
Medium
Major
Moderate Adverse
Ambient noise:
Low Adverse
8-7
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Impacts
Phase
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior to Mitigation and
Mitigation and Enhancement Measure
Enhancement
Residual Significance
• maintaining and powering down all plant items when not in use;
• blasting
• avoid unnecessary revving of vehicle engines; • use quietest work methods and plant items where practicable;
• power plant operation Operation Low
Minor
Negligible
• provision of noise barriers at excessive noise producing areas (such as blasting sites); and • informing the communities of activities taking place such as blasting. • provision of PPE i.e. ear muffs and plugs; • provision of vibration absorbing gloves; • instruction in the proper use of equipment; • frequent breaks;. 10 minutes per hour; and • manage and properly design all blasting activities.
Landscape and Visual Intrusion:
Construction and
• Construction:
De-
− excavation works;
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• Landscape Plan.
Positive Beneficial
commissioning
− new buildings; and − new roads. • Operation:
Operation
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Beneficial
Construction and
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
− new planting and landscape restoration.
Traffic and Transport: • delivery of construction materials, particularly for the powerhouse;
• Traffic Management Plan
Negligible/low
De-
• Provision of by pass routes
adverse
commissioning
• Minimizing the duration of right bank road closure
• construction of temporary access roads; • transport of construction labor;
WAPDA August 2011
8-8
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Impacts
Phase
Receptor
Impact
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior to Mitigation and
Mitigation and Enhancement Measure
Enhancement
Residual Significance
• closure of right bank road • additional traffic to remove demolished material; and • transport of decommissioning labor. Increased activities affecting Fauna / Wildlife / Vegetation:
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• avoid positioning spoil in areas used by fauna;
Negligible
• provide corridors for animal movement;
• disruption to areas that are currently used by wild fauna including birds/migratory birds.
• relocation of species; and • no illegal hunting or poaching.
Flora / Vegetation:
Construction and
• loss of vegetation leads to soil erosion.
De-
Medium
Major
Major Adverse
commissioning
• avoid dumping material in vegetated areas;
Positive
• re-provide plantations in open spaces and practice watershed management;
Beneficial
• enhance flora environment by planting fruit trees and ornamental shrubs; • use fast-growing species; and • use grasses to assist slope and soil stability
Fish:
Potentially All
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• during Monsoon runoff will be diverted to adjacent depressions and from there to river after settling.
Negligible
Construction and
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
• attaching markers/balls with the cables
Negligible
• monsoon increases turbidity which affect fish growth and survival Bird collision with transmission cables
Operation
WAPDA August 2011
8-9
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
8.4
Impacts during Pre-construction Stage
8.4.1 Land Use Change The power plant and auxiliary infrastructure will be built entirely on WAPDA-owned land that is uninhabited and exclusively used by WAPDA. The area is characterized by restricted access and is not open for the general public. Hence no land acquisition or resettlement of affected persons is expected for the project. However it would be possible that some land may have to be leased on temporary bases (e.g. five years) for the erection of batching plant, workshops and stores, for borrow and disposal areas and for the accommodation of the construction force. There will be no significant change to the present land use of the area. Areas that will change include the new powerhouse, the extended switchyard, a temporary batching plant and disposal areas, as shown in Figures 1.2 and 8.1, for excavated material that is not reused in construction for the project. Also a part of the road to Right Bank Colony may have to be realigned. Mitigation Attempts will be made to establish all these facilities within the area owned by WAPDA. In the unlikely event that land or property is required for temporary facilities, it will be purchased or leased on commercial basis.
8.4.2 Preparation of Facilities for Contractor(s) and Labor Force Some minor adverse impacts might be associated with the preparation and refurbishing of the project offices, labor camps, construction yards, and stores. As much as possible existing structures such as barracks used in earlier projects will be used. Most of these facilities will require some reconstruction and refurbishing activities. Access roads will have to be upgraded and vegetation around these buildings will have to be cleared to create sufficient space. Also land has to be cleared and prepared for a batching plant, workshops and stores for materials and equipment. Mitigation The removal of vegetation and trees would be mitigated by preparing a proper landscaping plan and a budget for future tree planting and landscaping measures to be implemented after completion of the project. The plan will be prepared during the first year of the construction, and will be provided to the Supervision Consultants/environmental monitoring unit for review and approval. These activities would be monitored by the Environmental and Social Monitoring Unit (ESMU) (discussed later in the document).
WAPDA August 2011
8-10
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Figure 8.1:
WAPDA August 2011
Project Construction Facilities
8-11
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
8.4.3
Hindrance and Damages during Mobilization and Transport of Materials
Traffic and transportation impacts will start during the mobilization of the contractor and will continue during the entire construction period. The Project is implemented in a remote area and existing traffic density and volume is not high however, when mobilization and construction commences, traffic intensity will rise significantly as a result of the following activities:
The construction of the powerhouse and related infrastructure;
The construction of temporary access roads as the main Right Bank Colony road runs through where the powerhouse construction site is likely to be;
Delivery of resources (materials, plant and labor) to the work site; and
Transfer of borrowed materials from the source to the Project area.
It is estimated that during construction traffic volume on the roads leading to the Project area will increase by more than 200 additional vehicles (including trucks) per day. Heavy transport of materials will cause congestions in urban areas and along access roads to the project. Especially local roads are not designed for carrying heavy traffic and this may result in considerable damage to local roads. The impact on road safety and increased risk of accidents will be dealt with in the next chapter. Mitigation Prevention and mitigation can be achieved by preparing a traffic management plan which indicates the designated areas and access roads for vehicles and moving equipment to be used, speed limits to be applied, the possible bypass in urban centers and the responsibilities in case of repair of damages to roads. This plan would be prepared by the Contractor prior to mobilization. The need for temporary bypass road and/or access roads and traffic measures in urban centers would be established and agreed with WAPDA and local authorities. The contractor will be required to submit the TMP to the Supervision Consultants/ESMU/WAPDA Environmental Cell (WEC) for their review and approval before the plan is implemented.
8.5
Impacts during Construction Stage
8.5.1
Changed Topography/Land Form
The potential areas where topography will change as a result of blasting, cutting, excavation and dumping activities include the new powerhouse site, penstock route, intake area, part of the road connecting the existing powerhouse with Right Bank Colony, borrow sites and dumping sites for excavated material. Different types of construction materials will be required in implementing the project. Some of these can be obtained by dredging or excavating material (e.g. fine and coarse sands) from the Indus river bed and sand banks at suitable locations. Other materials will be taken from quarries and borrow pits (e.g. rip rap, material for stone pitching and rock). Borrow materials would be obtained (as much as possible) from licensed quarries and borrow areas. Where necessary, appropriate restoration of the borrow area such as recontouring would be carried out, and no deep ditches would be left behind. Material excavated by the project, and of suitable grade can also qualify as a source of construction material to be (re)used in the project (e.g. quartzites and other durable WAPDA August 2011
8-12
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
rocks). Other excavated materials of poor construction quality estimated at 1.5 million m³ will have to be disposed at suitable sites, e.g. in nearby disused quarries or borrow pits. The total quantity of material to be excavated from the powerhouse site, the intakes and slope excavations is estimated at 900,000 m3. The Project has been designed to use most of the excavated material in the construction of a raised platform for the switchyard in the Ghazi-Barotha lake bed. Any remaining spoil will be deposited in a depression not far from the powerhouse on the Right Bank. Disposal of these materials may create environmental impacts such as an increase in dust pollution, landscape degradation, erosion and an increase in sedimentation of the Ghazi barrage pond and the Barotha powerhouse head pond. Mitigation To reduce the adverse impacts of deposition of excavated material the emphasis will be on reducing the volume of material requiring disposal as far as possible. Remaining material will be disposed in an environmentally sound manner. Disposal sites will be properly filled, shaped and reworked and where feasible planted with trees. Borrow materials would be obtained (as much as possible) from licensed quarries and borrow areas. Where necessary, appropriate restoration of the borrow area such as re-contouring would be carried out, and no deep ditches would be left behind. Contractors would follow the guidelines presented in the ECP 7, Borrow Areas Development and Operation.
8.5.2
Reduced Irrigation Releases due to closure of Tunnel 4 and Tunnel 3
There will be no impact on water availability for downstream areas, since the other tunnels can easily supply the water needed for irrigation. During construction, Tunnel 4 will be out of use in three different periods. The longest closure will be when at the downstream end of Tunnel 4 the power branch has to be connected to the tunnel. During construction of the power off take the tunnel will be out of use for an estimated period of about 12 months. Potential impact of insufficient release of irrigation water, especially during the critical period of May- June could be shortages of irrigation water in agriculture further downstream with reduced crop yields and risk of soil salinity and other problems. Two closures of each three months will be needed during construction of the raised intakes for respectively Tunnel 4 and Tunnel 3. During most of the construction time of these inlets the lower intake can be used, provided that there are no ongoing construction works at the outlet site of the tunnel. Once the raised inlets are completed both tunnels will be taken out of use in order to connect the shaft of the inlet to the tunnel. For each inlet there will be a closure needed of three months. But this will happen in two consecutive years. First the connection of the inlet of Tunnel 4 will be made and in the next winter the new inlet of Tunnel 3 will be connected. After connection it is possible to operate both inlets (the low and the raised) independently, depending of the level of the reservoir. Mitigation It is expected that with proper management during the closure period the irrigation releases from tunnel 4 entirely could be taken over by the other Tunnels 1, 2, 3, and 5. This can be done by increasing the operating hours from these tunnels as required. From historic discharge data over the period 2000- 2010 it appeared that Tunnel 4 is used only for limited periods (5-80 hours/month) in the period May – July. Tunnel 5 operates only WAPDA August 2011
8-13
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
during part of the months and has sufficient extra capacity to releases more water for irrigation. The same might be concluded for the other tunnels. This also can be shown by comparing the maximum release capacity of the Tunnels 1, 2, 3 and 5 which is together over 4900 m³/s against a peak demand for irrigation which lies between 3000- 4000 m³/s in the months of June- July. Then, with a fully filled reservoir also water is spilled from the spillway, which becomes available for irrigation. The closure of the tunnel 3 and 4 during construction of the raised intakes could be carried out in a period when the demand for irrigation water is low, which is during winter. In this way the impact on irrigation releases will be minimal. The conclusion is that all three closures will have no effect on the overall irrigation releases of the Tarbela Reservoir. There will be no difference in water availability for agriculture.
8.5.3 Reduced Power Generation Power generation will not directly be influenced by the construction works, unless priority has to be given to irrigation releases though the other tunnels in view of the fact that Tunnel 4 cannot be used for irrigation releases. It is not expected that there will be a major reduction of power generation during construction. However during the closure of Tunnel 3 for a period of three months there will be no power generation possible through this tunnel. It is possible that there might be some relatively small impact on total power production when Tunnels 1 and 2 have insufficient capacity to make up for the difference. Mitigation Mitigation is possible by increasing power production in other tunnels.
8.5.4 Impacts on Surface Water Quality During construction water quality and flow in the areas immediately upstream and downstream of the inlet and outlet gates might change. Chemicals, cement, and solids used in construction activities in the tunnels might accidentally be spilled in the reservoir and/or the water downstream of the dam and affect aquatic flora and fauna, including fish and turtles. The construction activities themselves could also have an impact on the quality of the surface water, especially on water from the Tarbela Reservoir and the Ghazi Barotha lake. The most important potential causes are the following:
Increased water turbidity as a result of construction/dismantling of coffer dams and/or dredging;
Runoff from crushed and ground rock material from drilling and blasting;
Run off from dampening systems to control dust emissions;
Waste water effluents and sewage water from workshops and construction workers camps;
Accidental spillage of hazardous and toxic materials such as: batteries, explosives, acids, paints, fuel, oil, lubricants and chemicals;
Dumping of spoil material;
Contamination through polluted drainage water emissions in the river during monsoon.
WAPDA August 2011
8-14
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Construction of coffer dams (one or two are envisaged) can potentially cause increased water turbidity adversely affecting the aquatic life particularly fish. Contamination of the surface water of the River would need to be avoided since this could have an impact on fish and aquatic life, but also on water quality of a number of tubewells used for the domestic water supply of the residential areas of the WAPDA colonies as well as by the nearby communities of Topi and Ghazi. Mitigation Detailed instructions and guidelines are given in the Environmental Code of Practices (ECP) for the Contractor (see Annex C), which will be part of the general conditions of all the contracts for the T4HP project. Work sites and access roads will be carefully selected so that surface runoff does not enter the river. At construction camps sewage will be pre-treated prior to discharge by installation of septic tanks or a pilot activated treatment plant at sewage generating sources. A sewage collection system is also envisaged to avoid the spillage of sewage in open areas. These will be included within the Wastewater Treatment Plan (which will be submitted to the ESMU/WEC for their review and approval). In order to mitigate water quality impacts in line with Pakistani and World Bank Standards, pre-treatment will be required to maintain net biological oxygen demand (BOD) levels, nutrients (phosphates and nitrates) and pathogens (faecal coliforms) below the standards for effluent discharges to surface waters. Accidental spills and leakages that may occur during construction at both ends of Tunnel 4 would be avoided by taking proper safety measures, such as the construction of bunds around oil tanks and storages of chemicals. The contractor(s) will be required to take appropriate measures according to the ECP 2, Fuels and Hazardous Goods Management, ECP 3, Water Resources Management and ECP 4, Drainage Management to avoid and contain any spillage and pollution of the water resources both upstream and downstream of the dam. Strict monitoring of the water quality is required (ECPs are provided in Annex C).
8.5.5 Impact of Noise on Workers and Residential Areas The construction of the new powerhouse and the associated works at the right bank will require blasting, excavation and reshaping of the steep river terrace slope behind the new powerhouse. Space for a new road alignment has to be found and this requires the removal of at least a layer of rock of about 40 meter. Noise from blasting with explosives and drilling will be resonated between the valley slopes and the dam and spread over the Ghazi-Barotha reservoir during excavation and construction works with predominant northerly winds and will reach the residential areas, including right bank and left bank WAPDA colonies, which are both situated at a distance within 2- 3 km from the construction site. Noise will also be generated from activities such as vehicular movement, excavation machinery, and concrete mixing during construction. With regards occupational exposure, construction site workers are the most likely to be exposed to the potential impact of high noise levels (85 dBA or more) and / or vibration impacts associated with the use of some construction equipment. Noise and vibration from construction activity may also disturb any wildlife in the area.
WAPDA August 2011
8-15
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Blasting with explosive is the most significant source of vibration as it can trigger landslides. Use of explosives may also disturb local population as vibration may be transplanted towards residential areas. Vibration levels during blasting are however expected to be low and within safe limits and are not expected to cause any structural damage to buildings. Mitigation Noise pollution would be restricted to day time periods and levels would be properly monitored. Workers in drilling areas would wear suitable ear protection. Noise monitoring at the residential colonies will be required, and if the noise levels at these locations are beyond the acceptable limits (WB Guidelines and NEQS), appropriate mitigation measures such as noise barriers will need to be employed. Workers will be instructed in the proper use of equipment and all blasting activities will be properly designed and managed. Noise reduction measures will be applied such as: enclosing the powerhouse within a solid structure; acoustic screening of noisy equipment; and a maintenance program for all equipment and machinery. Detailed guidelines are given in ECP 9 for Noise and Vibration management. Mitigation measures for operational noise impacts on workers will include standard occupational health and safety practices such as hearing protection.
8.5.6 Risk of Landslides and Collapse of Slope during Construction The new powerhouse to be constructed is designed between the toe of the steep slope of the river terrace and the existing infrastructure of the project. Slope stability is a critical issue in this part of the river valley as some of these slopes have collapsed in the past. The rock cut slopes of the outlet area consist of numerous benches or berms over a height of about 150 m. These slopes have posed problems in the past, when during 1981-82, large slides occurred and repair works were continued up to 1984. Currently the upper part of these slopes has developed numerous cracks indicated by the growing of grass. However, these cracks do not seem to pose an immediate threat to the existing slopes, which seem to have been stabilized. Precautionary measures shall however be required while dealing with or disturbing these cut slopes. Detailed geological rock sampling has revealed that the resistance against slope failure at the powerhouse site is somewhat better than at other places along the valley slope where the collapse occurred. The intake area has even better quality rock but also involves creating some large cut rock slopes that could be susceptible to slope failure. Extreme care needs to be exercised to protect workers and the public from the dangers of sudden landslides, which may occur during excavation and blasting works. Particularly during monsoon periods and during earthquakes there might be increased risk of such incidents. Mitigation Slope protection measures, such as rock bolts, rock anchors, safety nets and other protection measures may have to be applied including proper terracing to reduce the risk of slope failures. The penstock will be buried in a 15 m deep trench and the powerhouse has been designed with sufficient space between it and the slopes. Access would be restricted during the periods that slope stability is not yet entirely secured and guaranteed by proper safety measures. The contractor is required to include safety measures in a Health, Safety, Environment and Social (HSES) Plan. The Plan will need to be prepared before/during mobilization, and submitted to ESMU/WEC for their review and approval. WAPDA August 2011
8-16
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Prior to the construction the Contractor will submit Method Statements, conduct a Risk Assessment, and prepare an Emergency Response Plan (ERP) to ensure that all existing project infrastructures have been adequately assessed prior to any excavation activity (ERP will need to be submitted to the Supervision Consultants/ESMU for their review and approval). In particular, attention will be paid to the safety of the existing dam, tunnels and powerhouse. Use of heavy machinery, blasting material and blasting technique will be carefully considered and the methodology will contain a stability analysis for a suitable factor of safety (FOS). During excavations the concerned slopes will be stabilized and excavation started from the top then gradually working down the slope. After blasting a riser, it will be stabilized by pre-designed support systems such as shotcrete, mesh and rock bolts prior to drilling the next riser for excavation. Where there are confinement issues, cushion blasting will be the method applied. Extreme care will be taken in designing the blasting pattern and blasting will be controlled so as to avoid disturbance of nearby slopes where stability is in a critical condition. Early warning systems will be introduced that will indicate when cracks appear and allow any widening to be monitored. This system will not be of use in unpredictable scenarios, such as earthquakes. The system will use numbered, glass strips positioned strategically across key areas. These will be monitored on a weekly basis for any breakage. Should a breakage occur, the gap will be measured and monitored for any widening that will provide an early warning of a potential landslide. During the monsoon season there will be extra vigilance during excessive rainfalls to identify any potential risk of rock stability or landslide in the borrow areas.
8.5.7
Hindrance and Road Damage by Transport of Materials over Land
The powerhouse components and other equipment to be installed will be transported to the site. In addition, large quantities of concrete, sand, steel and rock and other building materials will have to be transported during construction. These transports will cause traffic congestions and hindrance on the narrow roads towards and in the project area. Many of the local roads are not designed for carrying heavy traffic and this may result in considerable damage to local roads. Closure of road between dam and WAPDA right bank colony due to excavation and construction of the powerhouse can seriously affect commuting traffic along the right bank of the Ghazi Barotha lake, which is used by WAPDA staff, workers and their families. Mitigation Guidelines to minimize and avoid hindrance and to improve safety on roads are given in ECP 13 on Road Transport and Road Traffic Management. Damage to local roads would be repaired by the contractor and where feasible bypasses will have to be used or constructed. Also associated safety hazards have to be considered, especially in the busy commercial centers of the cities of Topi and Ghazi. These impacts would be partly mitigated by preparing and implementing an adequate traffic management plan. Regular monitoring and updating of the traffic plan is required. When the road between dam and right bank colony is closed, a safe and well protected bypass would be provided and alternative transportation would be offered free of charge along the other embankment (detour of approximately 12 km). WAPDA August 2011
8-17
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
8.5.8
Disturbance of Fauna and Quality of Habitat by Increased Human Activities
Movement of people and equipment, building and construction activities is likely to disturb faunal population, especially birds, reducing the quality of habitat for wildlife. Migrating birds, especially waders will avoid the staging places, such as shallow mud flats in the Ghazi-Barotha reservoir during construction periods. Other migrating birds will react on sudden noise by flying up and away. However it is expected that they will return to the shallow banks in the river after construction works are completed. No permanent impact is expected provided their staging places are kept intact and no dredging activities are carried out downstream of the dam. Fish and aquatic fauna such as turtles will also be affected by noise during construction. Both are very sensitive for vibrations and loud noise. All fish is expected to move away from the construction areas. Mitigation Dumping of construction material would be avoided in areas which have dense vegetation. It is preferable to select suitable dumping areas in consideration of those locations which are not preferred for faunal habitation. Species will shift temporarily into the surrounding areas during project interventions and will progressively return following construction. Guidelines to be followed by the Contactor are given in ECP 10, Protection of flora, ECP 11, Protection of Fauna and ECP 12 Protection of fisheries. The Contractor would provide adequate knowledge to the workers regarding protection of flora and fauna and the ban on illegal poaching and undertaking any other hunting activity. The contractor will be responsible to control hunting and poaching by the workers.
8.5.9
Soil and Water Pollution by Solid and Hazardous Wastes and Waste effluents from Labor Camps and Construction Yards
With an expected influx of 2500 workers for implementation of the project there is a need for a proper infrastructure for solid waste management and handling and treatment of waste and sewage water. Without adequate provisions there will be a high risk of severe soil and water pollution by organic, chemical and hazardous wastes and untreated sewage water with serious health risks. Site offices, labor camps and barracks would be provided with adequate infrastructure and services in order to prevent pollution by solid waste and waste effluents. Management and disposal of all kind of wastes and waste water would need to be well organized, also to prevent conflicts with resident population accommodated in the nearby colonies. Also in the construction yards and workshops management of wastes, especially from fuels and hazardous goods is crucial to minimize impact on the environment. Mitigation The contractor(s) will be required to prepare Waste Management Plans, in accordance with the ECP 1 Waste Management, ECP 2 Fuels and Hazardous Goods and ECP 15 Construction Camp Management – before mobilization. There will be a Waste Management Plan for solid and hazardous wastes and one for wastewater. The plans will set out the designated waste disposal site(s) and associated management controls. The Plans will be submitted to ESMU/WEC for their review and approval. Monitoring of the plan implementation will also be carried out.
WAPDA August 2011
8-18
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
8.5.10 Impacts of Emissions of Gasses and Dust on Air Quality Earth moving activities, batching plant operations, vehicle and generator emissions will negatively affect air quality and dust levels. These emissions and dust is a nuisance for people and animals and can form a health hazard. The main effect on air quality during construction is caused by increased dust and emission levels from construction machinery, rock blasting, excavation, cement mixing, and road construction. The construction activities will generate airborne dust as well as CO, NOx, SOx and PM10 however, these emissions will be mainly restricted to the project site. Exhaust gasses and dust caused by moving vehicles, wind blown sand and dust from construction activities can be blown in residential areas and grazing areas and will cause a nuisance to the local population and animals. These negative impacts will mainly be restricted to the Right Bank Colony which is in close proximity to some of the construction sites and to areas adjacent to the road, excavated areas, dumping sites, labor camps and machinery parks. Mitigation Guidelines how to prevent and mitigate air quality impacts are given in ECP 8, Air Quality Management. Important is that the Contractor fits all vehicles and machinery with proper exhaust systems and emission control devices. Machinery and vehicles causing excess pollution would be banned from the project. Dust generation from construction sites would be restricted as much as possible, and water sprinkling would be carried out as appropriate. Air quality would be properly monitored, especially near the population centers and WAPDA colonies.
8.5.11 Removal of Natural Vegetation Trees and bushes will have to be removed from the construction area for the new power plant, the associated facilities and along the right bank access road. Also the vegetation of the proposed area of the extended switchyard, which is currently a wetland covered with low bushes and grasses will have to be removed to create an artificial platform within the Ghazi-Barotha lake. Some vegetation will have to be removed at sites used for borrowing materials and for disposal. Uncontrolled movement of heavy machinery used for setting up labor camps, stockyards, batching plant and other project facilities might cause considerable damage to natural vegetation. The removal of herbaceous vegetation and loosening of the top soil generally causes soil erosion. Such impacts will be primarily confined to the project sites and during initial periods of construction and need to be minimized by adopting appropriate mitigation measures. Mitigation In selecting the location for labor camps, workshops, stores and batching plant areas with thick and dense vegetation will be avoided as far as possible. A tree plantation plan would be prepared for compensation of lost trees and beautification of the landscape around the Dam. Trees would be planted at the end of the construction period. It is recommended to establish a nursery with selected tree species (a.o. medicinal trees) in the beginning of the project in order to produce sufficient quantity of 4-5 year old trees with a girth of 10 cm or more for replanting.
WAPDA August 2011
8-19
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
8.6
Impacts during Operation and Maintenance
8.6.1 Potential Impacts on Irrigation Water Releases The operation of the powerhouse on tunnel 4 will not adversely affect the irrigation releases from the Tarbela reservoir, since the reservoir will continue to be operated under its standard operating procedures through which irrigation water demands are met, depending upon the water availability in the reservoir, by operating a mix of tunnels 1-5 and the two spillways.
8.6.2 Risks of Landslides during Extreme Weather Conditions Landslides might occur during operation of the project, although these will not be a direct impact of the project, but caused by extreme weather conditions or exceptional events such as earthquakes. The location of the power house in a complex geological setting and below a steep hill consisting of rocks of variable composition requires frequent monitoring of slope stability, especially during and after extreme or abnormal weather conditions, such as heavy monsoon rains, droughts, and frost. Also the quality and adequacy of the measures to stabilize and protect the slope against gravitational gliding, subsurface flows and erosion would be inspected at regular intervals.
8.6.3 Operational Noise from New Power Station The new power station will produce noise during operation. However it is expected that this will be within acceptable limits (far below NEQS and WB standards), since adequate noise reduction measures have been applied such as: enclosing the powerhouse within a solid structure; acoustic screening of noisy equipment; and a maintenance program for all equipment and machinery. Mitigation measures for operational noise impacts on workers will include standard occupational health and safety practices such as hearing protection.
8.6.4 Bird Collision with Transmission Cables It is expected that the connection between the new powerhouse and the extended switchyard will be by 500 kV transmission lines supported by transmission towers erected within the tailrace of the tunnel outlets. The transmission cables will be hanging almost perpendicular to the flight direction of migrating bird, but only on the right side of the valley. Huge flocks of migrating birds follow the Indus valley fly-way twice a year in autumn and in spring passing the Tarbela Dam. Especially for birds with a large wingspan such as storks, cranes, herons and birds of prey there is a risk of bird collision with cables. Although it is expected that most flocks of bird follow the axis of the valley or pass along the left bank where no obstacles are found (except the high dam), the situation would be frequently monitored during migration. Mitigation to prevent or reduce the number of bird fatalities is possible by attaching markers to the cables on places where many birds are passing through the Indus valley. The proper type of markers would be determined in consultation with nature conservation organizations like IUCN or BirdLife International.
8.6.5 Increased Maintenance Activities Regular maintenance activities will be carried out. It is recommended to restrict these activities as much as possible to day time.
WAPDA August 2011
8-20
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
8.6.6
Reduced Power Generation during Closure of Low Level Intake Tunnel 3 and 4
The low level intakes of Tunnel 3 and 4 would be retained and operated till it becomes too risky to operate them any longer. Continued sedimentation might cause blockage of the tunnel gate. At this point of time in future the lower intake will be taken out of use. The tunnel part from the low level intake will have to be plugged and for this operation the tunnel has to be closed. When this operation is scheduled in winter there will be no impact on irrigation releases, but possibly there will be some impact on total power generation of the plant.
WAPDA August 2011
8-21
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
9 Potential Social Impacts and their Mitigations 9.1
General
With the existing design and the layout of the operations, based on consultations with various stakeholders, the project is not expected to have direct social safeguard impacts, such as land acquisition, involuntary resettlement and impacts upon indigenous people. The project will use the existing reservoir and tunnel. All construction operations will take place within existing fenced off WAPDA areas. There will be no additional inundation or land acquisition necessary. The likely social impacts under the project, both positive and negative will all be related to construction operations. Potential impacts or opportunities for enhancement of consequences of the project can be found in the following areas:
Employment during construction;
Possible disturbances and inconveniences to local population;
Considerations regarding health, safety and wellbeing of construction workers;
Increased exposure to risks, such as health, safety and security;
Potential opportunities to assist local communities.
Direct adverse social impacts are expected to be marginal given the nature and the design of the project. Associated social enhancement measures however could increase or distribute the benefits of the project. These measures are identified in the following sections.
9.2 Summary of Assessed Impacts 1. The project’s potential social impacts and their significance have been assessed using the methodology described in Section 8.2. A summary of these impacts and their significance is presented in Table 9.1.
WAPDA August 2011
9-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 9.1:
Significance of Social Impacts
Impacts
Phase
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior
Mitigation and Enhancement Measure
to Mitigation and
Residual Significance
Enhancement Social Legacy
Pre-
Medium
Moderate
Moderate Adverse
Medium
Moderate
Moderate beneficial
construction Employment generation
Construction
• Outstanding cases will be resolved; funds allocated in the Project cost. • Local priority preference • Workers’ code of conduct
Negligible
Major beneficial
• Occupational H+S organized and managed to international standards to address inherent Project risks and unanticipated emergencies • Monitoring of labor rights, workforce management, and working and living conditions • Labor grievance mechanism in place Operation • Safety hazards for public
Construction
Low
Medium
Moderate
Moderate
Low beneficial
Moderate adverse
• Adherence to WAPDA’s environmental management and human resource policies and procedures • Good siting of temporary accommodation
Moderate beneficial Slight adverse
• Traffic management plan addressing general access and women’s mobility • Blasting procedures in place • Safety and security actions and procedures to protect local community • Procurement strategy in Workers’ Accommodation Plan for preventing pressures on local markets for goods and services required for keeping construction labour force healthy and well • CLO active and project performance grievance mechanism in place • Implementation of social assistance program • Resettlement
Construction
-
-
No impacts predicted
• Health, Safety and Well-being of Workers
WAPDA August 2011
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate adverse
• Principles and procedures for resettlement planning identified in SIMF. • Project commitment to workers’ rights
-
Negligible
• Workers’ Code of Conduct
9-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Impacts
Phase
Sensitivity
Magnitude
Significance Prior
Mitigation and Enhancement Measure
to Mitigation and
Residual Significance
Enhancement • Health and Safety Plan and procedures
and Operation
• Workers’ Accommodation Plan • Training Program • Community health, safety, security and well-being
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate adverse
and Operation
• Traffic Management Plan (including provisions for female mobility)
Low adverse
• Equipment and personnel safeguarding activities (fencing, visitor procedures and registration, signage) • Security staff training • Safeguards and awareness raising against communicable diseases.
Respect of local cultural norms and values by work force
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate adverse
• Awareness raising program for workers
Increased load on local services and supplies
Construction
Medium
Moderate
Moderate adverse
• Contractor to procure camp supplies in a manner not affecting availability of essential commodities.
WAPDA August 2011
Low adverse Negligible
9-3
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
9.3
Impacts during Pre-Construction Stage
9.3.1 Land Impacts WAPDA owns the land where the Tunnel 4 activities will take place and the infrastructure built. The land is currently uninhabited and has low productivity value. The land required for expanding the switchyard and upgrading the access roads is also unused. No known archaeological or cultural heritage remains exist on the parcels of land intended for use. No land acquisition and resettlement impacts for the main construction site are anticipated. Site reviews and discussion within WAPDA also indicate that WAPDA has plenty of lands of its own available in the immediate and surrounding areas. These are sufficient to meet the needs of any additional land requirements. Mitigation/compensation The project is not expecting to have any land impacts such as land acquisition or lease. However, given the possibility that the contractors may propose changes in its construction operation plan, there is a remote possibility that additional lands may be required outside the control area. In this unlikely event these lands will be purchased or leased on a normal commercial basis. The SIMF provides a guideline for such planning efforts.
9.4
Impacts and Opportunities during Construction Stage
9.4.1 Employment Opportunities during Construction The total work force employed during five years of construction has been estimated at 2500 people. This includes unskilled and skilled labor, technicians and employees. For operation of the new power plant and associated facilities about 300 permanent employees will have to be recruited. Employing construction workers and other staff from the region will offer an opportunity to create local employment, increase the local skill base and provide a boost to the local economy. Local communities in the region have requested to provide employment preferences to those already living near the project. They have high expectations of the employment opportunities generated by the project. Moreover they expect an important in-migration of people from the region, the creation of new business opportunities and other economic benefits. In an area with a relatively high percentage of unemployment the project will certainly attract a number of job seekers and followers. However, the number of new business opportunities will be limited since the project area is a restricted area, which is only accessible for employees of WAPDA and related services and their families. In order not to advocate too high expectations which could lead to social unrest, it is important that the project provides adequate and realistic information on the opportunities the project would offer. This could be done through regular updates in the local newspapers and other media. For a number of jobs qualified people from other regions of Pakistan will have to be attracted. Local affected people including women should be encouraged to take up construction employment. Women can be organized in female working groups to undertake discrete construction tasks, tree planting, health services and other supporting services.
WAPDA August 2011
9-4
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Mitigation The contractors will be responsible for the hiring for the construction needs. WAPDA has developed a set of principles and requirements for the contractors to follow during construction. The contractors, as part of the construction operation plan, will develop an implementation plan for hiring for construction employment, following the abovementioned principles. The plan will detail the steps of laying down employment criteria, how employment information will be disclosed locally including job descriptions, terms of employment conditions and benefits, how preference will be given to local population, pre-job training arrangements, who would be responsible for implementing and monitoring this plan, consultations with local government and WAPDA over the implementation of this plan. This plan will be submitted to WAPDA, as part of the construction operation plan, for review and endorsement.
9.4.2 Construction Workers’ Rights The project will provide an opportunity to ensure policy and procedural consistency in the implementation of the project with international labor standards related to workers’ rights and obligations. Mitigation and enhancement measures The contractor(s) would observe and apply the following standards and requirements:
Observing statutory requirements relating to minimum age for employment of children and meeting international standards of not employing any persons under the age of 16 for general work and no persons under the age of 18 for work involving hazardous activity; The construction contractor/s would not hire people under the age of 18 on permanent contracts but would include short training activities for youth to the extent possible;
Ensuring acceptable conditions of work including by observing national statutory requirements related to minimum wages and hours of work;
Ensuring no workers are charged fees to gain employment on the Project;
Ensuring rigorous standards for occupational health and safety are in place (see below);
Having the Contractor establish a labor grievance mechanism and documenting its use for complaints about unfair treatment or unsafe living or working conditions without reprisal.
In addition to the above commitments, the Contractors are required to:
Adopt a Human Resource Policy appropriate to the size and workforce which indicates the approach for management employees (this could be part requested in the tender process);
Produce job descriptions and provide written contracts and other information that outline the working conditions and terms of employment, including the full range of benefits;
Provide health insurance for employees for the duration of their contracts;
Provide insurance for accidents resulting in disabilities or death of employees for the duration of their contracts
WAPDA August 2011
9-5
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Develop a recruitment process community employees that involves local authorities in clearly understood procedures;
Employ a community liaison officer (this could be full time or part of another post’s responsibilities);
Raise awareness prior to recruitment, clarifying the local hire policy and procedures, including identification of opportunities for women to participate in employment and training;
Report regularly on the labor force profile, including gender, and location source of workers (for instance from Swabi and Haripur Districts, from KP, from outside the Province);
Report regularly on labor and working condition key performance indicators, for instance hours worked (regular and overtime) during period and cumulatively, hours lost, number and type of accidents, near misses, site audits and meetings; trainings, and use of labor grievance mechanism;
Hold toolbox talks on workers’ rights and the labor grievance mechanisms during the construction phase;
Organize a training program and keep training registers for construction workers;
Establish Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) procedures in the overall environmental management system which provide workers with a safe and healthy work environment taking into account the inherent risks for this type of project. Details are given in ECP 17, Worker Health and Safety.
9.4.3
Prevention of Social Conflicts and Environmental Degradation: Development of Workers’ Code of Conduct
The influx of a large construction force may easily lead to social conflicts with the local population. Workers also might misbehave or get involved in illegal practices, e.g. poaching or hunting. In order to contribute to a harmonious relationship with local communities, to reduce behaviors that could lead to social conflict, and to prevent further environmental degradation a Code of Conduct will be developed for the labor force. Mitigation The Code of Conduct recognizes the provision of resources by the employer and shares responsibilities among the workers for the use of equipment, procedures and training. Typical issues to be included in a Code of Conduct are the following:
No hunting, poaching or illicit use of local natural resources;
Careful use of local natural resources and project resources, especially water, transmission line materials, fuel, fuel-wood and electricity;
Restrictions related to consumption of alcohol and drugs;
Safe driving practices;
Respect for the local community and its cultural norms in which laborers are working.
WAPDA August 2011
9-6
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
9.4.4 Increased Health and Safety Risks The T4HP project is a complicated technical project with a number of risks and hazards. The construction activities will involve operations of heavy construction machinery, vehicular traffic, excavation works and backfilling operations. These activities may pose health and safety hazards to the workers at site during the use of explosives, use of hazardous substances, lifting and handling of heavy equipment, operating machinery and electrical equipment, working near water or at height and more. Health and safety aspects will therefore need to be considered in all project activities in order to reduce the risk of accidents and illness. Mitigation Mitigation measures will include the following: Provisions to be included in contracts:
Each contractor will establish a comprehensive Health and Safety Plan aimed at preventing accidents, injuries and work-related diseases. This plan will be submitted to WAPDA and World Bank for review and approval;
Each contractor will prepare an Emergency Response Plan defining procedures to be followed during any emergency. This plan will be submitted to WAPDA and World Bank for review and approval;
All workers must be provided with and use appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE). First aid must be provided and there would be procedures in place to access appropriate emergency facilities;
Contractors will be responsible for developing procedures to address the OHS hazards. Signage related to hazards and risks must be in place at the work sites. Management procedures to address temperature stress, for instance in relation to extreme heat will be required;
Health screening of employees would be a Contractor obligation prior to laborers working on site and living in the temporary accommodation facilities. The health screening would entail normal review of physical fitness and also include a review of appropriate vaccinations. Workers would be given vaccinations where required;
Hazards require staff training. All employees need to carry out induction health and safety training prior to commencement of work. OHS issues would be part of the employee training plan. Training would include the provision of appropriate written or visual materials to reinforce learning. Where illiteracy levels are high, OHS issues need to be covered more frequently than normal in toolbox talks;
An emergency response team and plan must be identified. Training and drills based on the accident and emergency preparedness and response plan must be carried out quarterly with workers and local health authorities. Training requirements, including for emergency preparedness, will need to be updated annually;
Public awareness training and workshops on safety and health risks will be conducted for local communities prior and during construction operations.
It is essential that all personnel likely to be involved in the Project at the construction site undergo a basic training program prior to performing assigned work.
WAPDA August 2011
9-7
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Safety Plan Contractors will prepare safety plan as part of their operational plan. The safety plan will include at least the following:
Basic OHS awareness training;
Detailed briefing on the main hazards identified above;
Standard operation procedures for handling accidents related to electrocution, movement of plant equipment; falls from height, falling objects, working in confined spaces, and dealing with hazardous materials;
Importance of PPE, environmental monitoring requirements, good housekeeping, and directives for notification of proper authorities in the event of accidents (either human or release of pollutants);
Familiarization with the fire protection system and emergency response plan (basic fire fighting training);
Basic first aid, health and safety rules; and,
A regular emergency response drill for the identified hazards.
Traffic Management Plan A Traffic Management Plan will need to be produced. This plan will be submitted to WAPDA and World Bank for review. Driving behavior, such as adhering to driving and speeding laws and use of mobile phones, will be addressed in toolbox talks.
9.4.5
Construction Disturbances and Possible Conflicts with Local Population
The Project construction activities to be carried out near the local communities may cause disturbance and possible conflicts between the work force and the local population.
Due to increased use of trucks and other vehicles on the narrow roads in the project area on the access roads to the urban areas elderly people, women and children will be more exposed to dangerous situations, which may lead to traffic accidents and unrest;
There might be noise and dust pollution due to blasting, use of heavy machinery and intensive traffic;
The influx and accommodation of a relatively large work force will result in increased concerns for the safety of women and children. The mobility of women might be reduced;
Workers coming from different parts of Pakistan may have different norms and values in social behavior as compared with the resident population. In addition, migrant labor force could disturb the privacy of the local population. Miscommunications between these two groups could easily lead to social unrest.
There could be shortage of supplies in local markets and shops due to the temporary presence of a large workforce. This could be a hindrance for the local population, especially for elderly people.
People particularly women and children in the Right Bank Colony will be most affected and it is a tiny community. They will have limited access to alternative routes unless WAPDA August 2011
9-8
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
provided by the Project. Hence, the impact of the Project on women’s mobility is considered to be an adverse impact. Mitigation The Contractor will be required to develop a Traffic Management Plan. It will need to be developed in consultation with local leaders/elders of the community and include reference to mobility and access through the construction area in such a way that all females feel comfortable. Special consideration would be taken to avoid routes used by women and, if unavoidable, alternate routes would be identified for women. Blasting is another disturbance which may require attention. Effects may be seasonal and weather dependent. Nonetheless, the Contractor will need to have a monitoring system in place and as necessary procedures may be required to limit the time frame and frequency of blasting to minimize negative effects on community members and their livestock. Shortage of supplies could be mitigated by requesting Contractor to procure their supplies in a manner not significantly affecting the availability of essential commodities in the area for residents. A Project grievance mechanism will be established. The Contractor will be required to appoint someone to have community liaison officer (CLO) responsibilities to be a point of contact for stakeholders. The CLO will be responsible for logging complaints and comments and ensuring their timely investigation and response.
9.5
Social Assistance Program
The social assistance program includes enhancement activities to address community development needs and to a limited extent project legacy from previous projects. The main legacy issues focus on outstanding resettlement claims and although referenced below, they are addressed separately in a study of the situation and action plan that remain under consideration.
9.5.1 Community Development Assistance As a good practice in large infrastructure projects and a continuation of traditional practice in WAPDA operations, WAPDA has developed an out-reach program to provide social assistance to the communities in the immediate vicinity of the project construction areas. These communities have been identified and extensive consultations were carried out with the community members during the social assessment to understand their views and recommendations for the project. The consultations also covered people’s expectations, their community priorities as well as potential schemes that the project may support. After screening, the project plans to support the following community schemes from a long list of requests:
Updating the registration process so that villagers in Khabbal, Ghari Mera and Kukar Chawa have security passes to facilitate easier access to their homes;
Constructing three basic health units to improve the access of local people to dispensaries in the villages of Darra Mohat, Ghari Mera and Pontian;
Assigning WAPDA male and female medical officers already working in the WAPDA hospital to visit bi- weekly the nearby hamlets of Ghazi and Pehur where dispensaries already exist;
WAPDA August 2011
9-9
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Providing essential medicines to the existing and proposed dispensaries;
Supporting existing schools with furniture, one boys high school at Pehur Hamlet and other at Girls school at Pehur Hamlet;
Constructing a primary school at Pehur hamlet (it currently is working at the residence of Government employees);
Providing water treatment or hygienic water drinking schemes in Darra Mohat, Kukar Chawa, Ghazi Hamlet, and Topi area to minimize water born diseases in the project area;
Providing sewage schemes for the villages Ghazi Hamlet, Topi area and Pehur Hamlet;
Rehabilitation of a drainage system in the existing Drain near Topi and Pehur Hamlet;
Addressing women’s concerns including: (i) supply of equipment and teaching staff in industrial school (already exists at Right Bank Colony); (ii) recruitment of a gynecologist at Pehur and Ghazi Hamlets; (iii) upgrading of middle school to secondary level at Pehur Hamlet; (iv) provision of computer equipment for computer classes; (v) welfare bazaar in schools; (vi) sewing machines; (vii) cooking classes and English language classes in the evening.
WAPDA is exploring options of its delivering mechanisms, including contracting local NGOs. These will be further discussed and finalized in consultation with local communities. The cost of the assistance program is estimated with input from design engineers and market rates. The total cost is estimated at PKR 104 million (equivalent to US$ 1.22 million). The cost is still indicative and will be revised with detailed design information in consultation with local communities. The cost contingency is included in the overall project budget.
9.5.2 Addressing the Social Legacy of Previous Projects There is a certain social legacy of two earlier projects: (i) the Tarbela Dam Project (TDP, implemented 1968-76) and (ii) the Ghazi Barotha Hydro Power project (GBHPP, implemented in 1995-2005). These projects included a huge resettlement operation affecting 96,000 people and land acquisition and compensation for the loss of about 27,000 ha of mainly agricultural land. From both projects a number of claims are not yet solved thus far. From TDP there are still 40 outstanding claims for compensation or possession of land outstanding in different courts. For GBHPP there are 404 pending court cases regarding compensation or land possession. Some of these cases are very complex. The settlement of outstanding claims has been included as an activity to be implemented under the T4HP project. An assessment was conducted of the pending claims by the Design Consultants. It turned out that in a majority of cases the affected people are willing to resolve these cases out of court. To resolve the outstanding issues an approach has been worked out to address these claims in a speedier and better manner. A Claim Negotiation and Settlement Committee will be established with a mandate for eight months to design and implement an out of court resolution mechanism to negotiate and resolve the outstanding claims. The total costs of this operation amount to US$ 12.5 million. WAPDA August 2011
9-10
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
10
Cumulative and Induced Impacts
10.1 Cumulative Impact of Investments in the Indus Basin Water System In the second half of the twentieth century, Pakistan successfully overcame major water resources challenges and made great achievements – tackling the issues resulting from the 1947 partition of the sub-continent and division of the Indus waters, as well as from extensive water logging and salinity. Today Pakistan has the largest contiguous irrigation system in the world. However, Pakistan once again faces numerous water-related challenges. These challenges are increasing water stress, with limited additional water resources that can be mobilized, coupled with the looming threat of climate change. To meet increasing food production demands, Pakistan has been expanding the surface water supplies to the Indus Basin Irrigation system over time by capturing more water from the rivers. Post Tarbela canal diversions reached as high as 129,516 Mm3 (105 MAF). However they have declined now due to reduced storage because of sedimentation and several other factors such state of the infrastructure and a sequence of dry years. The 2001-2010 average canal diversions have now been reduced to 116,564 Mm3 (94.5MAF), and the reduction is primarily in the rabi (winter: OctoberMarch) season by about 10,608 Mm3 (8.6 MAF). This is because the diversions are close to full potential supplies of the rivers and declining water storage capacity in the reservoirs due to siltation directly affected the flows during Rabi for irrigation. Further increase is only possible with heavy investment in storage dams on the Indus River, many of which are very controversial. Also, some believe that, apart from a few years of extraordinary floods, the rivers do not have surplus water to store after meeting the ecological requirements of the delta region and coastal zone. The other source of water Pakistan has tapped is groundwater, which is recharged by the surface water system. Since the 1980s, the groundwater aquifers have supplied increasing amount of water for irrigation in areas underlain by the fresh groundwater. In Punjab, about equal amount of irrigation water comes from the groundwater wells. This resource is now reaching its limit and further withdrawals are not possible without serious mining and extraordinary cost of pumping.
10.2 Plans for Storage Reservoirs Pakistan has raised the level of the Mangla Dam on the Jhelum River. This provides about 3,269 Mm3 (2.65 MAF) of additional storage, however, this is much less than the storage lost in sedimentation of the two reservoirs: Mangla and Tarbela. Also the hydrology of Jhelum River would allow filling of this storage about four out of five years. Pakistan has been trying to build new storage for years. However, as elsewhere, building large dams is a very contentious issue in Pakistan. After a heated technical and political debate over several years, the Government announced in January 2006 that five dams4 would be constructed by 2015, with first priority given to the Diamer-Basha Dam.
4
Diamer-Basha, Kalabagh, Akhori dams on the Indus, Munda dam on the Swat river- a tributary of the Kabul river, and Kurram Tangi dam, on the Kurram river. Pakistan has been trying to build a dam on the Indus River at Kalabagh (downstream from Tarbela) for quite some time: studies have been conducted since 1953 and in 1986 the designs were completed.
WAPDA August 2011
10-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
The construction of Kalabagh Dam, located downstream of Tarbela could not proceed due to interprovincial water allocation issues, construction could not proceed. At this stage, Pakistan is focusing on the dams upstream of Tarbela, such as Diamer-Basha. It is also working on some run of the river hydropower plants upstream of Tarbela such as Dasu Hydropower Project. The dams upstream would have positive impact on Tarbela as the upstream dams would trap the sediments thus extending the life of Tarbela Reservoir. The estimates are that Basha would hold 35 years of sediment in its dead and live storage before it starts to pass down towards Tarbela. Thus it would extend the life of Tarbela Project by 35 years, as well as of the Ghazi-Brotha Power plant which relies on water supplies from Tarbela Dam. Given the construction period for the Diamer-Basha Dam, and that it has not started yet, the dam with a live storage capacity of 7,894 Mm3 (6.4 MAF) would barely make up for lost reservoir capacity. Thus the increasing average annual canal water diversions back to 129,516 Mm3 (105 MAF) in the future is unlikely.
10.3 Impact Downstream and on Delta and Coastal Zone From 1900 onwards, as the development of the Indus Basin Water System (IBWS) proceeded and extraction from the river started increasing, the delta and coastal zone have been receiving lower volumes of water, thus changing the characteristics and ecology of the area. There was a pronounced impact also after the Indus Treaty of 1960 when flood flows of three rivers-- the Ravi, Sutlej and Beas-- that ultimately discharged in Indus River were lost; these rivers were given for full use of India and there were dams and link canals built upstream in India to fully utilize this water including the flood flows (the Treaty had no provision of environmental flows from these rivers). The Indus River in Sindh, and close to the delta and sea, flows on a ridge, as is the case of many mature rivers in the world, because of a rise in sediment transport. In the case of the Indus River, embankments to contain the river were constructed in 1901. These embankments are placed about 16 km (10 miles) apart, starting from the Gudu Barrage to the sea. The Indus River meanders in a belt contained by these embankments. The original delta of the river is on its left side, around which irrigated agriculture is carried out by diverting water from the last barrage on the Indus River namely the Kotri Barrage. Thus the Indus Delta has seen a continuous change in its hydrology and ecology over the past one hundred years or so, but the impacts have become more pronounced as the canal diversions upstream increased. The interprovincial Water Accord of 1991 has a provision for ecological flows to be released downstream from Kotri Barrage, but it is not strictly followed. Water is generally released in years of floods and extraordinary quantities go down to the sea, whereas in other years flows are close to zero. Average outflow to the sea from Kotri Barrage has been about 46,626 Mm3 (37.8 MAF) mostly in summer, while minimum is zero and maximum is 113,480 Mm3 (92 MAF). The erratic flow instead of regular flow each year is less beneficial for the river and delta below Kotri Barrage.
10.4 Preparation of a Master Plan for the Left Bank of Indus, Delta and Coastal Zone Under the Sindh Water Sector Improvement Project (WSIP), the World Bank is assisting the Government of Sindh (GoSindh) to prepare a regional master plan for addressing the flooding issues and providing proper drainage to the area on the left bank of the Indus River - including the river’s delta and coastal zone - through appropriate structural and non-structural measures, measures for retention and/or safe disposal of drainage; storm WAPDA August 2011
10-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
and flood water; improvement of wetlands in the delta area and in the coastal zone; recognizing their environmental importance and considerable economic potential for local communities. These four phased studies are to be carried out in consultation with the stakeholders starting from the beginning to the end of the process covering the identification of the issues, and an analysis and design of solutions.
10.5 Sediment Management Plan for the Basin and Tarbela Under the Water Capacity Building Project (WCAP) the World Bank is also assisting the Government of Pakistan and WAPDA to understand the sediment management issues for the basin and at Tarbela Dam. This would also help to develop plans for eventual movement of sediment downstream once the reservoir is filled. The downstream area is already seeing the impact of increased sediment flow as the trap efficient of the Tarbela reservoir is reducing.
10.6 Improving Irrigation Efficiencies With increasing population and development, water demand is expected to continue to increase in the Indus Basin, which is the main food machine for Pakistan. As shown above, Pakistan has been increasing surface water diversion and also tapping groundwater both of which are reaching their limits. In the future, substantial quantities of water would only come from cutting down losses in the irrigation system, which offer a great potential source of water. The irrigation efficiency of surface system is about 3540 percent. A substantial part if the losses are in the watercourse command (over 40 percent) and with flood irrigation in the field. To address these issues, the Bank is assisting the government to start an irrigated agriculture productivity improvement program under which watercourse would be improved to reduce the delivery losses, and high efficiency irrigation system (HEIS) would be introduced such as drip irrigation. The drip systems have about 90 percent efficiency in delivering water and also the other nutrients which are washed away or leached down under flood irrigation. The program would start in Punjab and then be expanded to other provinces. This would start a new era of water conservation and productivity that would hopefully reduce pressure on scarce water resources by using the existing resources more efficiently. The estimates of the water quantity that could become available with 10 percent point increase in water efficiency in watercourse and commands is more than two dams on the Indus River.
10.7 Role of Project in Cumulative Impacts No major projects are likely to be undertaken at or around the TDP site concurrent to the T4HP. Therefore, no construction related cumulative impacts are likely to take place in the area. WAPDA is planning to undertake other hydroelectric projects on Indus River upstream of Tarbela, including Dasu and Basha dams. The construction of these projects, if carried out concurrent to the T4HP, could potentially have the following adverse cumulative impacts: i) cumulative vehicular traffic on the approach roads; ii) cumulative demand on construction materials and borrow areas; iii) cumulative demand on construction labor; and iv) cumulative safety hazards and restricted movement for the local population. However, none of these impacts are likely to take place since the sites and approach routes of these future projects are well away from Tarbela, and the country has enough resources/infrastructure catering to the construction material needs of these projects. WAPDA August 2011
10-3
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
The project would have no impact on the water releases from Tarbela Dam. As indicated earlier, the Dam would be operated in irrigation priority under overall instructions of Indus River System Authority (IRSA). The water which is currently spilled through the spillway (loses its energy in the structures downstream)5 would be diverted to the Tunnel 4 where it would pass through the three 470 MW turbines and generate electricity which would be transmitted to the unified common grid. The energy of this water, which is otherwise wasted in the spillway structure, would now be used for generating clean electricity (about 4,000 GWhs) without any greenhouse emissions for pollution. So the project helps make better use of the waters of the Indus Rivers. Any thermal plant, coal, oil or gas if installed instead of this plant would generate substantial greenhouse gases and pollution. If upstream dams materialize, the life of the Tarbela would be extended even more. Downstream, the future is making water use more efficient and timely delivery of water to maximize crop production. The Tarbela would continue to perform that role in future by storing water and releasing when it is needed.
10.8 Possible Induced Impact Analysis of the induced impacts resulting from the project clearly shows minimal impacts due mainly to the nature and scope of works. Even during the construction stage, flow regime through Tarbela remains unaffected therefore there will be no change in the river hydrology and morphology. Some localized impacts, which will be more of social disturbance nature, arising out of congested roads, localized social unrest or increased conflicts due to the migrated labor force, spread of congenial diseases including HIV and AIDS have already been addressed in the Chapter 9 and appropriate mitigation measures recommended.
5
Water released from spillway or though power house has same amount of energy. In case of spillways the structures are designed downstream to dissipate the energy of the water so that it does not scour the river bed and damage the river and the dam infrastructures. In case of powerhouse installed on a tunnels the energy is converted to electricity for much better use instead of just dissipating it unproductively.
WAPDA August 2011
10-4
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
11
Environmental and Social Management Plan
11.1 Introduction This chapter sets out the Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) for the Project. The ESMP has been prepared to ensure the implementation and monitoring of the proposed mitigation measures set out in Chapters 8 and 9. A separate document, the SIMF, has been produced to perform the same function specifically for the social issues set out in Chapter 9.
11.2 Objectives of ESMP The basic objective of the ESMP is to manage adverse impacts of project interventions in a way, which minimizes the adverse impact on the environment and people of the Project area. The specific objectives of the ESMP are to:
Facilitate the implementation of the mitigation measures identified during the present ESA and discussed in Chapters 8 and 9.
Maximize potential project benefits and control negative impacts;
Draw responsibilities for project proponent, contractors, consultants, and other members of the Project team for the environmental and social management of the Project;
Define a monitoring mechanism and identify monitoring parameters in order to: o
Ensure the complete implementation of all mitigation measures, and
o
Ensure the effectiveness of the mitigation measures.
Maintain essential ecological process, preserving biodiversity and where possible restoring degraded natural resources; and
Assess environmental training requirements for different stakeholders at various levels.
The ESMP will be managed through a number of tasks and activities and site specific management plans. One purpose of the ESMP is to record the procedure and methodology for management of mitigation identified for each negative impacts of the Project. The management will clearly delineate the responsibility of various participants and stakeholders involved in planning, implementation and operation of the Project.
11.3 Institutional Arrangements The following sections outline the institutional arrangements recommended for implementation of the ESMP.
11.3.1
Inclusion of ESMP in Contract Documents
In order to make contractors fully aware and responsible of the implications of the ESMP and to ensure its compliance, it will be ensured that environmental measures are treated appropriately and separately in the tender documentation and that payment milestones are linked to environmental performance, measured by execution of the prescribed WAPDA August 2011
11-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
environmental mitigation measures. Such a procedure would help ensure adequate assessments of project impacts are carried out during Project construction and operation phases, where a consistent approach will be expected on behalf of contractors that warrant data and information collected from monitoring programs are compared to baseline conditions. The contractor would be made accountable through contract documents and/or other agreements of the obligations and importance of the environmental and social components of the Project. They would be prepared to co-operate with the executing agency, project management unit, supervising consultants and local population for the mitigation of adverse impacts. After the ESMP’s addition in the contract documents, the contractor will become bound to implement the ESMP and to hire trained environmental management staff for implementation and effectiveness of the mitigation measures. The contractor is to bid for executing the ESMP, including the recommended mitigation measures and monitoring programs, as part of their Bill of Quantities. The contractor(s) would be required to prepare the following plans before mobilization on the basis of the ECPs (Annex C) and IFC/WBG EHS Guidelines (Annex D), and obtain approval from the Supervision Consultants/ESMU/WEC:
Traffic management plan
Pollution prevention plan
Waste disposal plan
Camp management plan (including drinking water management)
Borrow area and disposal area restoration plan
An emergency response plan,
An occupational health, public health and safety plan.
11.3.2 Implementation Responsibility It is responsibility of the proponent (WAPDA) to ensure implementation of the ESMP through consultants and contractor(s). The staff of the proponent, consultants and contractors who are responsible for ensuring the implementation of the ESMP would have the capability to handle the complexities and spirit of management strategies. Training and workshops would be arranged involving proponent, consultants and contractors to share the issues of environmental and social protection.
11.3.3 Construction: Establishment of Environmental and Social Management Unit An Environmental and Social Management Unit (ESMU) will be established, responsible for implementation of the ESMP and the SIMF. The ESMU will be specially designated for the Project and will include representative of all actors responsible for ESMP implementation. Regular environmental, health and safety obligations in the construction area will also be part of the responsibility of the ESMU. The following is the list of responsibilities to be performed by the ESMU:
Ensuring effective implementation of the ESMP and SIMF.
Overall supervision, facilitation and coordination with all the stakeholders;
WAPDA August 2011
11-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Develop procedures of damages assessment and mode of compensation during project execution;
Ensure that all contractors follow the PEPA regulations and other requirements mentioned in the construction contracts concerning dust suppression, solid waste disposal, municipal wastewater disposal, air pollution, noise and vibration, biodiversity, transport, storage and use of flammable and explosive materials;
Identify any issues of non-compliance and report these;
Suggest mechanisms to link contractor performance in relation to the ESMP to the timing of financial payments, incentives or penalties;
Interaction with the stakeholders for their concerns about the construction activities; and
Implementation of contingency plans.
The ESMU will ultimately be responsible to the WAPDA Environment Cell (WEC), taking a leadership role in the ESMU, with a senior WEC representative taking responsibility for the ESMU overall. It is important to have representation from stakeholders involved in delivering the Project, including those with contractual responsibilities. The proposed composition of the ESMU is as follows:
Senior Engineer level WAPDA officer having environmental science background;
Health, Safety, and Environment (HSE) Specialist (to be appointed by WAPDA);
Social Scientist (SS) (to be appointed by WAPDA);
Environment and Social Monitor (ESM) - Representative of Consultant (Design or Supervision); and
Environment and Social Supervisor (ESS) - Representative of Contractor.
11.3.4 Operation: The WAPDA Environment Cell The ESMU will play an important role during the construction phase, bringing together representatives from the organizations that are active on-site. During the operation period, WEC will be solely responsible for the environmental performance of the operational hydropower station. WEC was created in 1989 to take stock of Environmental Aspects of WAPDA’s Water Sector Development Projects. Two pronged objectives were focused at that time.
Strengthening, upgrading and enhancing of technical capability of environmental capability in WEC; and
Recommendation of an institutional framework and linkages that would enable effective application of this capability within WAPDA and within the national framework of environmental institutions.
Since its creation, WEC has carried out scores of IEE, EIA, Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and assessment of social and environment management of WAPDA Projects. In addition, WEC was responsible for decade long monitoring of environmental and social issues of GBHPP, including environmental water flow assessment and evaluation of various reports. WAPDA August 2011
11-3
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
The charter of WEC was chalked in its infancy to go ahead with the environmental studies of various project vis-à-vis:
to carry out various EIA and IEE of Hydropower Projects;
to take stock of implementation of EMP according to EIA;
to help project authorities to monitor the environmental parameters during feasibility design, construction and operation phase of the Projects;
to help WAPDA Authorities to facilitate in environmental auditing;
to carry out assessment of social and environment management; and
to evaluate and comment on the environmental (EIA) reports prepared by Consultants and other Agencies.
11.3.5 Consultant’s Environment and Social Monitor The Supervision Consultants (SC) will appoint an appropriately qualified specialist as the Environment and Social Monitor (ESM) at the site on a full time basis. The ESM will be responsible to ensure effective implementation of ESMP, and will supervise the contractors for this purpose. The ESM will be a part of the ESMU as described earlier.
11.3.6 Contractor’s Environment and Social Supervisor(s) The Contractor(s) will appoint adequate numbers of appropriately qualified specialist(s) as the Environment and Social Supervisors (ESSs) at the site on a full time basis. The ESS will be responsible to effectively implement the ESMP during the construction phase, will supervise the construction activities for the environmental and social aspects, and will liaise with ESM for this purpose. The ESS will be a part of the ESMU as described earlier.
11.4 Capacity Building and Institutional Strengthening 11.4.1 Training and Awareness Environmental and social trainings will help to ensure that the requirements of the ESA and ESMP are clearly understood and followed by all project personnel throughout the project period. The primary responsibility for providing training to all project personnel will be that of the ESMU. The environmental and social training program will be finalized before the commencement of the project, during the detailed design phase. The trainings will be provided to the WAPDA staff, the construction contractors, and other staff engaged for the project. Training will cover all staff levels, ranging from the management and supervisory to the skilled and unskilled categories. The scope of the training will cover general environmental awareness and the requirements of the ESA and the ESMP, with special emphasis on sensitizing the project staff to the environmental and social aspects of the area. Table 11.1 provides a summary of various aspects of the environmental and social trainings. ESMU may revise the plan during the project implementation as required. During the O&M phase of the project, these trainings will continue to be conducted by WEC for all relevant WAPDA staff.
WAPDA August 2011
11-4
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 11.1:
Environmental and Social Trainings Contents
General
environmental
Participants and
Design team;
Responsibility ESMU
Schedule Prior to the start of the
socioeconomic awareness;
Selected WAPDA
project activities.
Environmental and social sensitivity of
management staff
(To
the project area;
be
repeated
as
needed.)
Key findings of the ESA; Mitigation measures; ESMP; Social and cultural values of the area. General
environmental
and
All site personnel
ESMU
Prior to the start of the
socioeconomic awareness;
field activities.
Environmental and social sensitivity of
(To
the project area;
needed.)
be
repeated
as
Mitigation measures; Community issues; Awareness of transmissible diseases Social and cultural values. ESMP;
Construction crew
Contractor (ESS)
Prior to the start of the construction activities.
Waste disposal
(To
be
repeated
as
needed.) Road safety;
Drivers
Contractor (ESS)
Before and during the
Defensive driving;
field operations.
Waste disposal;
(To
Cultural values and social sensitivity.
needed.)
Camp operation;
Camp staff
Contractor (ESS)
be
repeated
Before and during the
Waste disposal;
field operations.
Natural resource conservation;
(To
Housekeeping.
needed.)
Restoration requirements;
Restoration teams
Waste disposal
Contractor (ESS)
as
be
repeated
as
Before the start of the restoration activities.
11.4.2 Strengthening of WEC In addition to the project-specific capacity building described above, WEC will be strengthened to actively partake in the environmental and social management of the WAPDA projects, particularly towards the effective ESMP implementation of the T4HP, as well as the ESA studies and ESMP implementation of the forthcoming hydropower projects such as Basha and Dasu dams. This will also enable WEC to be responsible for the environmental and social management of O&M phase of the T4HP and other WAPDA projects. A budget of US$ 1.06 million has been included in the Project cost for this purpose. WAPDA August 2011
11-5
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
11.4.3 Additional Capacity Building The project also includes building the capacity of WAPDA to effectively implement the project, O&M of the dams it manages and fully carrying out its mandated functions. This would include: (i) enhancing WAPDA’s capacity in planning and programming, engineering and O&M of the dams, financial management, procurement, and management of the environment and social issues; (ii) technical assistance and training in such areas as designing of dams, river training works, hydraulics, detailed designs of structures, contract administration and construction supervision, procurement, operations and management planning, asset management plans, financial management, and legal issues; and (iii) an independent panel of experts for design and construction quality and safety enhancement or any other issues that may have to be addressed during project implementation. An amount of US$ 2 million has been earmarked for this in the Project cost estimates.
11.5 Panel of Experts WAPDA will engage an independent panel of environment and social experts to advise ESMU and other project entities on all environmental and social matters including effective implementation of ESMP and SIMF, particularly on unanticipated situations, impacts, and their mitigation. The Panel will review on a regular basis the various reports and documents produced by EMU, Supervision Consultants and contractors; periodically visit the site to have first hand information on the environmental and social impacts and EMSP/SIMP implementation; and provide report to WAPDA on the overall environmental and social performance of the project. An amount of US$ 0.28 million has been included in the Project cost for this purpose.
11.6 Communication A Communication and Information Plan will be developed by WAPDA which will be based on the development of a communication strategy for different target groups (local communities, previously affected persons, local and provincial authorities, general public and press). During the project regular briefings of progress will be organized for public information and for the media. The Communication and Information Centre will also have a section where complaints and grievances can be registered and addressed. A Communication and Information Specialist will be appointed for the project. WAPDA is engaging consultant experts to develop the Communication and Information Plan. This plan is expected to be completed by end 2011 For the environmental and social management of the project, WAPDA will establish and maintain procedures for the following levels of communication:
Internal communication between the various levels and functions of the organization and between WAPDA, WEC and ESMU (ESMU to be responsible for communication with consultants and contractors relating to environmental issues);
Receiving, documenting and responding to relevant communication from external interested parties, in particular a procedure for managing environmental complaints that are received from the public or government organizations through a grievance mechanism discussed later in the Chapter; and
All complaints received by the General Plant Management would be handled in a responsive manner.
WAPDA August 2011
11-6
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
11.7 Management and Monitoring Activities This section introduces the proposed activities for managing and monitoring the potential environmental effects associated with the Project. The proposed activities are set out in two plans:
Mitigation Plan – Construction Phase (Table 11.2); and
Mitigation Plan – Operation Phase (Table 11.3).
The impacts and mitigations identified for the decommissioning phase are considered to be sufficiently similar to the construction phase to conclude that a separate ESMP for the Decommissioning Phase is not required at this stage.
11.7.1 Structure of the Mitigation Plans The Mitigation Plans for the Project are structured around the following components:
Project activities – the stage of the Project;
Impacts – identified in the environmental assessment (Chapter 8);
Actions - measures to mitigate and manage impacts;
Responsibility – the organization(s) responsible for executing the mitigation and monitoring performance indicators; and
Target completion date / periodicity – the timing of when mitigations or monitoring would be implemented.
Procedures and processes for the above would be set up prior to construction and operation of the Project. Should any changes to the Project design or methods of construction and operation take place post this assessment stage, the impacts and monitoring/mitigation measures discussed may need to be revised to reflect such changes to allow the environmental and social implications of these changes to be addressed.
WAPDA August 2011
11-7
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 11.2:
Environmental Mitigation and Monitoring Plan – Construction (and Decommissioning)
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
1
Design / preconstruction considerations
WAPDA August 2011
1.1
Slope Instability
1.2
Geology and seismology
1.3
Disposal of excavated material
1.4
Surface Water Quality
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Excavated Material Disposal Plan to include siting and detailed assessment of the suitability of the proposed excavated materials disposal site Foundations for infrastructure would comply with relevant design standards for structures in areas at risk of seismic activity. Foundation design of the towers, powerhouse, and other structures to consider the probability of earthquake at the earliest design stage. Emergency Preparedness Plan to address the response to a disaster occurring during each phase of the Project lifecycle. Identification of re-use of excavated material on site, to reduce off site effects
Design Consultants,
ESMU
All excavated materials to be disposed of in designated sites.
Before construction: during detailed designing of the Project.
Design Consultants,
ESMU
Emergency Preparedness Plan in place prior to commencement of construction.
Before construction
Design Consultants,
ESMU
All excavated materials to be disposed of in designated sites. Compliance with Waste Management Plans.
Before construction
Select access roads to avoid run-off to river.
Design Consultants
ESMU
None proposed.
Before construction
11-8
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
WAPDA August 2011
1.5
Groundwater Quality
1.6
Traffic Management
1.7
Construction camp (and other temporary facilities) site selection
1.8
Construction camp management
1.9
Waste management
1.10
Excavated material management
1.11
Fuels and hazardous substances management
Drainage system will be designed so that all spills will be drained and collected in a sump for further appropriate disposal; and Oil and chemical storage and vehicle wash and oil change facilities will be on an impermeable surface to avoid percolation A Traffic Management Plan (TMP) will be prepared in accordance with ECP 13 Site for construction camp will be selected with approval from the Supervision Consultants (SC). Areas having thick/dense vegetation will be avoided as far as possible. Construction Camp Management Plan will be prepared per ECP 14 and approval obtained from SC/ESMU. A Waste Management Plan will be prepared per ECP 1 and approval obtained from ESMU/ESM. An Excavated Material Management Plan will be prepared and approval obtained from SC and ESMU/ESM. A fuels and hazardous substances management plan will be prepared per ECP 2 and approval obtained from ESMU/ESM.
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Design Consultants
ESMU
Monitoring in accordance with Ground Water Monitoring Program. No breaches of MDSD for hazardous substances.
Before construction
Contractor
ESMU
Approved TMP
Contractor
ESMU
Approval from ESMU/ESM
Before mobilization of contractor commences Before mobilization of contractor
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization of contractor
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization of contractor
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before commencing the construction activities.
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization of contractor
11-9
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
2
Contractor Mobilization and Demobilization
WAPDA August 2011
1.12
Water resource management
1.13
Health, safety and environment (HSE) management
2.1
Traffic management
2.2
Soil Erosion and Contamination
2.3
Air Quality
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
A water resource management plan will be prepared per ECP 3 and approval obtained from ESMU/ESM. An HSE management plan will be prepared per ECP 16 and EHS Guidelines, and approval obtained from ESMU/ESM. The approved TMP will be followed
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization of contractor
Contractor
ESMU
Approved Plan
Before mobilization of contractor
Contractor
ESM; ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
During mobilization
Vehicular traffic on unpaved roads will be avoided as far as possible. Operation of vehicles and machinery close to the water channels, water reservoir will be minimized. Vehicles and equipment will not be repaired in the field. If unavoidable, impervious sheathing will be used to avoid soil and water contamination. NEQS compliance will be ensured. ECP 1 for waste management will be implemented. Construction machinery and vehicles will be kept in good working condition and properly tunned, in order to minimize the exhaust emissions, and in compliance with the NEQS. Fugitive dust emissions will be minimized by appropriate methods, such as spraying water on soil, where required and appropriate. Project vehicles will avoid passing through the
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
Throughout contractor mobilization and demobilization
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
Throughout contractor mobilization and demobilization
11-10
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
WAPDA August 2011
2.4
Noise
2.5
Public Safety
communities as far as possible. If unavoidable, speed will be reduced to 15 km/h to avoid excessive dust emissions. NEQS compliance will be ensured. ECP 8 for air quality management will be implemented. Vehicles will have exhaust mufflers (silencers) to minimize noise generation. Nighttime traffic will be avoided near the communities. Local population will be taken in confidence if such work is unavoidable. Vehicular traffic through the communities will be avoided as far as possible. Vehicle speeds will be kept low, and horns will not be used while passing through or near the communities. NEQS compliance will be ensured. ECP-9 will be enforced. Road signage will be fixed at appropriate locations to reduce safety hazard associated with project-related vehicular traffic. Project drivers will be trained on defensive driving. Vehicle speeds near / within the communities will be kept low, to avoid safety hazard and dust emissions. ECP-13 and ECP-16 will be implemented.
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports; noise measurement data.
Throughout contractor mobilization and demobilization
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports; lack of any public complaints.
Throughout contractor mobilization and demobilization
11-11
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
3
Construction workers camp: Construction and Operation
WAPDA August 2011
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
2.6
Damage to Infrastructure
All damaged infrastructure will be restored to original or better condition.
Contractor
ESMU
3.1
Soil erosion; soil and water contamination
Photographs will be taken to record the site conditions prior to the establishment of the camp. Land clearing, leveling and grading will be minimized, and carried out in a manner to minimize soil erosion. Vehicular traffic on unpaved roads will be avoided as far as possible. Operation of vehicles close to the water channels, water reservoirs will be minimized. Contractors will prepare a Waste Management Plan. For the domestic sewage, appropriate treatment and disposal system will be constructed having adequate capacity Waste oils will be collected in drums and sold to the recycling contractors. The inert recyclable waste from the site (such as cardboard, drums, and broken/used parts) will be sold to recycling contractors. The hazardous waste will be kept separate and handled according to the nature of the waste. Domestic sold waste from the camp site will be disposed off in a manner that does not
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports; lack of any public complaints. Lack of any noncompliance reports
Throughout contractor mobilization and demobilization Before and throughout the construction phase
11-12
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
WAPDA August 2011
3.2
Air Quality
3.3
Vegetation loss; threat to wildlife
cause soil contamination. The camp site area will be completely restored after completion of construction works. All temporary structures will be demolished, NEQS compliance will be ensured. ECP-1, ECP-2, ECP-3, and ECP-14 will be implemented. Generators and vehicles will be kept in good working condition and properly tunned, in order to minimize the exhaust emissions. Fugitive dust emissions will be minimized by appropriate methods, such as spraying water on soil, where required and appropriate. NEQS compliance will be ensured. ECP-8 will be implemented. Clearing natural vegetation will be avoided as far as possible. The camp will be established in a natural clearing, outside forested areas. Complete record will be maintained for any tree cutting. The camp staff will not indulge in any animal shooting, trapping, catching, or killing activities. The construction crew will be provided with LPG as cooking (and heating, if required) fuel. Use of fuel wood will not be allowed.
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
Throughout the construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
Before and throughout the construction phase
11-13
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
4
Transportation of Equipment and
WAPDA August 2011
3.4
Noise
3.5
Health and Safety
3.6
Public Safety
3.7
Social and Gender Issues
4.1
Traffic management
ECP-10, ECP-11, and ECP-12 will be implemented. Generators and vehicles will have exhaust mufflers (silencers) to minimize noise generation. NEQS compliance will be ensured. ECP-9 will be implemented. Protective fencing to be installed around the Camp to avoid any accidents. Firefighting equipment will be made available at the camps. The camp staff will be provided fire fighting training. All safety precautions will be taken to transport, handle and store hazardous substances, such as fuel. ECP-2 and ECP-16 will be implemented. Construction camps and site offices will have first aid kits Construction crew will be provided with awareness for transmissible diseases (HIV, hepatitis B and C). ECP-16 will be implemented. Construction crew will avoid entering the villages No child labor will be employed. Liaison with the community will be maintained. The approved TMP will be followed (ECP-13).
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
Throughout the construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
Before and throughout the construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
Before and throughout the construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports; lack of any complaints
Throughout the construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports
Throughout the construction phase
11-14
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Construction Material
4.3
Soil Erosion and Contamination Air Quality
4.4
Noise
4.5
Public Safety
4.6
Damaged to Infrastructure Changes to topography
4.2
5
Construction of Powerhouse, Penstock Route and Intake Area
5.1
5.2
WAPDA August 2011
Landslide
Same as Section 2.2 of this table. Same as Section 2.3 of this table. Same as Section 2.4 of this table. Same as Section 2.5 of this table. Same as Section 2.6 of this table. Changes to the topography will only occur in designated areas to accommodate defined project features. Excavation of material will be kept to a minimum. Excavated material will be managed in accordance with the Excavated Material Disposal Plan Method Statements and Risk Assessments prepared prior to any excavation activity Slope protection measures, such as rock bolts, rock anchors, safety nets and other protection measures will have to be applied including proper terracing to reduce the risk of slope failures. Attention will be paid to the safety of the existing dam, tunnels and powerhouse. Use of heavy machinery, blasting material and blasting technique will be carefully considered and
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Contractors
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor,
ESMU
Lack of any noncompliance reports Lack of any noncompliance reports Lack of any noncompliance reports Lack of any noncompliance reports Lack of any noncompliance reports Volume of spoil extracted (monitor against predictions). All excavated materials to be disposed of in designated sites.
Before construction
Number of blasting events. Method Statements and Risk Assessments produced for construction of each item of infrastructure. All excavated materials to be disposed of in designated sites. Monitoring of early warning systems.
Throughout the construction phase
Before construction Before construction Before construction
Throughout the construction phase
11-15
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
5.3
WAPDA August 2011
Soil erosion
the methodology will contain a stability analysis for a suitable factor of safety (FOS). During excavations the concerned slopes will be stabilized and excavation started exacted from the top then gradually working down the slope. After blasting a riser, it will be stabilized by predesigned support systems such as shotcrete, mesh and rock bolts prior to drilling the next riser for excavation. Where there are confinement issues, cushion blasting will be the method applied. Extreme care will be taken in designing the blasting pattern and blasting will be controlled so as to avoid disturbance of nearby slopes where stability is in a critical condition. Emergency Preparedness Plan and Early Warning System will set out response actions in the event of a landslide Other methods to be considered as alternatives to blasting Areas not used during operation will be re-vegetated, particularly slopes Borrow pits/areas to be covered Areas exposed during construction and not used for operation will be re-vegetated (‘greened’) immediately Adopt measures set out in the
Contractor
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
ESMU
Incidences of borrow pits not being covered. Compliance with the Tree Plantation Plan. All replanting to be commenced prior to operation.
Throughout the construction phase and prior to operation
11-16
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
WAPDA August 2011
5.4
Soil and water contamination
5.5
Air Quality
Tree Plantation Plan Road edge buffer re-planting Replanting to occur prior to the commencement of operation, using fast-growing native species; and grasses to assist slope and soil stability. ECP-6 will be implemented. Construction materials will be stored, used and handled appropriately. Excavated Material Disposal Plan to include measures to reduce risk of environmental pollution. Reduce risk of a pollution event through adoption of measures set out in Solid Waste Management Plan and Wastewater Treatment Plan Hazardous & toxic materials stored separately Oil and Chemical Spill Response Plan. NEQS compliance will be ensured. ECP-1, ECP-2, ECP-4, ECP-5, and ECP-7 will be implemented. Construction materials will be stored in designated areas away from sensitive receptors and covered to minimize dust on site from site construction works Construction vehicles will be sprayed with water when entering and leaving the site, covered if transporting
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Monthly auditing of management of hazardous materials against Material Safety Data Sheet
Throughout the construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Number of dustrelated complaints. Number of air quality-related complaints, Compliance with Traffic Management Plan.
Throughout construction phase
11-17
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
WAPDA August 2011
5.6
Health and Safety
5.7
Noise and Vibration
materials, adhere to speed limits, and engines will be turned off when idling. Target zero dust related complaints Target zero air quality related complaints. NEQS compliance will be ensured. ECP-8 will be implemented. Provision of respiratory protective devices for workers Designate agreed routes for traffic (set out in the Traffic Management Plan) Compliance with Occupational Health & Safety standards (See Social Impact Management Framework) Provision of insurance-backed compensation scheme for major injury or loss of life reflecting settlement sums that are consistent with national/international benchmarks. ECP-16 will be implemented. Blasting activity will be restricted to fixed times; Communities will be informed in advance of planned blasting; Construction plant producing sound in excess of 85dB will be fitted with mufflers; Noise barriers will be provided in areas where significant noise is expected (e.g. during blasting). NEQS compliance will be ensured.
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Number of respiratory protective devices issues to workers. Monitoring of compliance with Health & Safety standards (including monthly reporting of accidents).
Throughout construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Number of blasting events recorded. Evidence of providing advance warning of blasting to communities. Record of equipment used on site capable of producing over 85dB and whether equipment has been
Throughout construction phase
11-18
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
WAPDA August 2011
5.8
Irrigation Releases
5.9
Power Generation
5.10
Surface Water Quality
5.11
Landscape and Visual Intrusion
ECP-9 will be implemented. Connection of the tunnels will be carried out during the annual canal closure or periods of low demand Increase discharge from other tunnels to compensate in reduction of Tunnel 4. Close coordination will be maintained with the TDP operational staff, and tunnel closure will be planned in advance in a consultative manner. Closure of tunnel 3 will be planned in advance, in coordination and consultation with the TDP Operational staff. Surface Water Monitoring Program; Store and handle all hazardous substances in accordance with their Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS); Select access roads to avoid run off to river; Wastewater Treatment Plan including pre-treated sewage prior to discharge within the labor camps Solid Waste Management Plan Oil and Chemical Spill Response Plan. ECP-1, ECP-2, ECP-4, ECP-5, and ECP-7 will be implemented. Preparation of a Landscape Plan Adoption of Tree Plantation
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring fitted with mufflers Duration of works demonstrated to be kept to minimum and demonstrated efforts to undertake work during dates of annual closure. Irrigation releases to remain consistent during period of tunnel joining
ESMU; Contractor
ESMU
Joining of new tunnel to existing Tunnel 4
ESMU; Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Monitoring in accordance with Surface Water Monitoring Program. No breaches of MDSD for hazardous substances.
Throughout construction phase
Contractor
ESMU
Compliance with Tree Plantation Plan
Before the completion of the construction phase
Throughout construction phase
11-19
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
WAPDA August 2011
5.12
Vegetation loss
5.13
Fauna / Wildlife
5.14
Damage to infrastructure
5.15
Borrow area and borrow material
Plan New planting and landscape restoration as soon as practicable at the end of construction phase Replanting of flora/vegetation alongside new access roads Enhance flora environment by planting fruit trees and ornamental shrubs. Avoid dumping material in vegetated areas. Avoid unnecessary loss of vegetation ECP-10 will be implemented.
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
None proposed.
Throughout construction phase
Avoid positioning spoil in areas used by fauna No hunting or poaching Provide corridors for animal movement. ECP-11 and ECP-12 will be implemented.
Contractor
ESMU
Throughout construction phase
Any damaged infrastructure such as roads, bridges and culverts will be repaired Reduce the volume of material requiring disposal as far as possible. Remaining material will be disposed in an environmentally sound manner. Disposal sites will be properly filled, shaped and reworked and where feasible planted with trees. Borrow materials would be obtained (as much as possible)
Contractor
Instances of spoil being deposited in non-designated areas. Reported incidences of hunting or poaching on the Project site / in land ownership. Lack of any noncompliance reports
Contractor
Lack of any noncompliance reports
11-20
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activities
Environmental Impact/Issue
Action
Responsibility Execution
6
Decommissioning
WAPDA August 2011
6.1
Soil erosion
6.2
Surface Water Quality; air contamination; noise; and other environmental impacts.
from licensed quarries and borrow areas. Where necessary, appropriate restoration of the borrow area such as re-contouring would be carried out, and no deep ditches would be left behind. ECP-7 will be implemented. As part of decommissioning, all disturbed areas would be contoured and re-vegetated Disturbed areas will be contoured and re-vegetated to minimize the potential for soil erosion and water quality related impacts. ECP-1, ECP-2, ECP-3, ECP-4, ECP-5, ECP-8, ECP-9, ECP10, ECP-11, ECP-12, ECP-13, ECP-14, ECP-15, and ECP-16 will be implemented.
Key Performance Indicator
Timing
Monitoring
Contractor
ESMU
Contractor
ESMU
Audit areas of site that were disturbed and remain without vegetation. Audit areas of site that were disturbed and remain without vegetation.
During decommissioning
Upon completion of decommissioning
11-21
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 11.3:
Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan – Operation Impact
Project
Action
Responsibility
Indicator Execution
1
Pre-operation
Timing
Key Performance
Activities
1.1
Visual amenity
Adoption of Tree Plantation
ESMU,
Plan and Landscape Plan
Contractor
Monitoring ESMU
Compliance with Tree
Before the completion
Plantation Plan
of the construction
Compliance with
phase
Landscape Plan 2
Operation
2.1
activities
3
Operation and
3.1
Tunnels 1 to 3 increase their
TDP O&M
the irrigation flow
discharge to compensate for
staff
rate will be reduced
the 5% reduction in irrigation
during period of tunnel
by around 5%.
release from Tunnel 4.
joining
Waste
Adherence to the Waste
TDP O&M
Maintenance
Management Plan and
staff
Activities
measures put in place 3.2
WEC
Irrigation Releases-
Irrigation releases to
During operation
remain consistent
WEC
Compliance with
During operation
Waste Management Plan WEC
Noise and Vibration
Compliance with Occupational
TDP O&M
Monitoring of
During operation and
to Occupational
Health & Safety standards
staff
Workers
(See Social Impact
compliance with Health & Safety
maintenance activities
Management Framework)
standards (including monthly reporting of accidents).
WAPDA August 2011
11-22
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
11.7.2 Compliance Monitoring The compliance monitoring of the project activities is principally a tool to ensure that the environmental and social control measures identified during the ESA are strictly adhered to during the project execution. Various aspects of the ESA compliance monitoring will be to:
Systematically observe the activities undertaken by the contractors or any other persons associated with the project.
Verify that the activities are undertaken in compliance with the ESA and ESMP.
Document and communicate the observations to the concerned person(s) of the contractors, ESMU and Supervision Consultants, so that any corrective measures, if required, can be taken in a timely fashion.
Maintain a record of all incidents of environmental and social significance and related actions and corrective measures.
Maintain contact with the communities, solicit their views and concerns, and discuss them during the fortnightly meetings.
Prepare periodic reports of the environmental and social performance of project.
The mitigation plan discussed above will be used as a management and monitoring tool for compliance monitoring. Inspections will be carried out using checklists prepared by the contractor, on the basis of the Table 11.2, during the construction phase, and by the O&M staff on the basis of Table 11.3 during the O&M phase.
11.7.3 Monitoring Predicted Effects The ESA predicts the impacts of the proposed project on the basis of information available at the time of conducting the assessment and the natural processes that link various environmental and social parameters. Based on this prediction, mitigation measures are introduced such that the predicted residual effects do not exceed acceptable levels. However, there can be an element of uncertainty in such predictions, for example, due to an insufficient grasp of the processes, limitations in prediction techniques, or inadequate data on the environment. This is true for the physical, biological, as well as socioeconomic environment. Consequently, it is possible that even if the mitigation measures are implemented fully, the negative impacts of the Project could exceed predicted levels or acceptable limits. In order to address the above concerns, effects monitoring will be undertaken during the Project activities, with the overall objective of proper management of environmental and social risks and uncertainties. Broadly, effects monitoring has the following objectives:
To verify that the impacts of the proposed project are within acceptable limits, thus establishing credibility (public assurance);
To immediately warn the Project proponents (and the regulatory agencies, if required) of unanticipated adverse impact or sudden changes in impact trends so that corrective actions can be undertaken, which may include modifications in the proposed activities, or the inclusion of modified or additional mitigation measures;
To provide information to plan and control the timing, location, and level of certain project activities so that the effects are minimized; and
WAPDA August 2011
11-23
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
To facilitate research and development by documenting the effects of the proposed project that can be used to validate impact-prediction techniques and provide a basis for more accurate predictions of future projects.
The effects monitoring plan is provided in Table 11.4 below. The detailed methodologies will be developed during the detailed design phase of the Project when the specific information on field activities will be known. The effects monitoring will comprise the following:
Soil erosion;
Landslide;
Water quality;
Oil spills;
Waste;
Air quality;
Noise;
Socioeconomic aspects; and
Grievance monitoring.
ESMU may revise the effects monitoring plan during the project implementation as required.
WAPDA August 2011
11-24
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table 11.4: No
Monitoring of Predicted Effects
Monitoring parameter
Monitoring Locations
Frequency
Responsibility
Methodology/
Documentation
Resource Requirement 1
Soil erosion
Construction sites, labor
During routine monitoring
ESMU
campsites, borrow areas,
Visual observation, digital
Record
of
visual
camera
observation/photographs
Numbered, glass strips
Complete record
disposal sites 2
Landslide
Construction sites
Weekly
ESMU
positioned
strategically
across key areas Borrow areas, disposal
Weekly
ESMU
sites 3
Water quality
At
wells
water
and
surface
bodies
WAPDA
Before mobilization
ESMU
near
colonies
Visual
observations,
Record
of
visual
digital camera
observation/photographs
Laboratory
Record of sampling and
analysis/sampling bottles
analysis
Sampling bottles
Record of sampling and
and
labor campsite Selected local wells
Monthly
ESMU
analysis Selected nearby
locations surface
at
Monthly
ESMU
Sampling bottles
water
Record of sampling and analysis
bodies 4
Damage to groundwater
Construction site
During routine monitoring
ESMU
wells, watercourse 5
Oil spill
Construction workshops
site and
During routine monitoring
ESMU
oil
Visual
observations,
Solid waste
Construction site, labor
of
visual
observation/photographs
Visual
Record
observations,
digital camera
storage areas 6
Record
digital camera
of
visual
observations/ photographs
During routine monitoring
ESMU
campsite
Visual
observations,
digital camera
Record
of
visual
observations/ photographs
7
Wastewater
Labor campsite
During routine monitoring
ESMU
Sampling bottles
Record of sampling and analysis
WAPDA August 2011
11-25
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment No
Monitoring parameter
Monitoring Locations
Frequency
Responsibility
Documentation
Methodology/ Resource Requirement
8
Ambient air quality
Construction site, labor
Before mobilization
ESMU
campsite Construction site, labor
Once every two months
ESMU
campsite 9
Exhaust emissions
Construction sites, camp
During routine monitoring
ESMU
site
Ambient
air
quality
Record of sampling and
monitoring equipment
analysis
Ambient
Record of sampling and
air
quality
monitoring equipment
analysis
Visual
Record
observations,
digital camera
of
visual
observations/ photographs
10
Dust emissions
Construction sites, labor
During routine monitoring
ESMU
camp site, project roads
Visual
observations,
digital camera
Record
of
visual
observations/ photographs
11
Noise
Nearby communities
Fortnightly
or
construction
during
ESMU
Noise meter
activities
measurement
causing noise 12
Public grievance
Nearby communities
Throughout work
WAPDA August 2011
construction
Complete record of noise and
location ESMU
Complaints register
Complete record of any complaints
11-26
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
11.7.4 Internal Audits Environmental audits of the Project would be arranged once during construction phase and once at the end of the construction activities. The objective of environmental management audits is to review the effectiveness of environmental Management. Environmental auditing is generally done by an unbiased independent organization or a person having full command on the subject. For the Project, it is proposed that WEC should carry out these audits on six-monthly basis.
11.7.5 External Audits (Third Party Validation) As a minimum, throughout the first three activities, arrangements would be made specialist to carry out an independent requirements of the ESMP, on an annual under the external audit:
years of the construction works and operation for an industrial environmental management audit of the existing practices against the basis. The following aspects will be covered
the ESMP is being adequately implemented,
mitigation measures are being implemented and their effectiveness,
the compliance and effects monitoring are being conducted,
environmental and social trainings are being conducted, and
complete documentation is being maintained.
These audits would be used to re-examine the continued appropriateness of the ESMP and to provide advice on any up-dates required. Attention would be given to lessons learnt in the light of experience. In particular, consideration would be given to the monitoring programs in place to determine whether their purpose has been served and they can therefore be terminated or reduced in frequency
11.7.6 Management Reviews WAPDA Management would review the results of internal and external audits and provide commitment and resources to tackling outstanding issues. WAPDA Management would support the proposed ESMU in mechanisms to manage financial payments to contractors based on performance against the items identified in the ESMP.
11.8 Record Keeping Proper arrangements are necessary for recording, disseminating and responding to information which emerges from the various environmental monitoring and management programs. They are also necessary for rendering the environmental management system “auditable”. However, the primary focus must remain on the pragmatic control of pollution, not the creation of complex bureaucratic procedures.
11.8.1
Monitoring Records
Quantitative Physical Monitoring
The objective of quantitative physical monitoring is to ensure that the mitigation measures designed to prevent, reduce and where possible offset any significant adverse impacts on the environment are being implemented throughout the Project lifecycle.
WAPDA August 2011
11-27
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
A database would be developed by ESMU, with involvement from WEC for storing the results of the quantitative monitoring. The facility would be capable of producing tabulated weekly and monthly reports that provide the following information:
Sampling points;
Dates and times of sample collection;
Test results;
Control limits;
“Action limits” (circa 80% of the control limits) at which steps must be taken to prevent the impending breach of the control limit; and
Any breaches of the control limits, including explanations if available.
The monitoring data would be continually processed as it is received, so as to avoid a build up of data. General Site Inspections and Monitoring
A Site Inspection Checklist for recording the findings of the general site condition surveys would be developed by the respective contractors, on the basis of the Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan described in Section 10.3, during the construction phase. This would cover all the ESMP commitments as provided in Section 10.4. The Site Inspection Checklist would be supported by sketches, as necessary.
11.8.2 Complaints Records A tabulated standard form would be prepared for recording any environmental complaints that are received from the public or government organizations by whatever medium i.e. visits to the Plant, telephone calls or correspondence. The form would concisely list the following information:
Date of the complaint;
Name and contact address of the complainant;
Brief description of the complaint, with a file reference to any correspondence from the complainant;
Brief description of the action taken by the Plant Management to investigate the cause of the complaint and bring about corrective action, if justified; and
Date of reply to the complainant, with a file reference to any correspondence.
All complaints received by the Plant Management would be handled in this way
11.8.3 Information Sources A complete and up-to-date file of all relevant sources of information should be maintained by the ESMU. This file would be readily accessible and include, as a minimum, copies of the following documents:
Current environmental permits and consents;
All relevant Pakistan regulations, international guidelines and codes of practice;
Manufacturers’ MSDSs for all hazardous substances used on the plant;
Manufacturers’ operating manuals for all the environmental monitoring equipment;
WAPDA August 2011
11-28
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Current calibration certificates for all the equipment that requires calibration by an external organization; and
The latest version of this Environmental Management and Monitoring Manual.
11.8.4 Non-Compliance Report Any breaches of the acceptable standards specified, would be reported to the ESMU / WEC (dependent on project phase), using a standard form, i.e. a Non-Compliance Report (NCR). A copy of each completed NCR would be held on file by the ESMU, to be replaced by the reply copy when it is received. A record of corrective actions would also be made and tracked to their completion.
11.8.5 Monthly Internal Reports The ESMU would prepare a monthly report for issue to the Plant General Manager. These reports would normally be no more than one or two pages in length, to summarize the following:
Progress in implementing this ESMP;
Findings of the monitoring programs, with emphasis on any breaches of the control standards, action levels or standards of general site management;
Any emerging issues where information or data collected is substantially different from the baseline data reported in the Environmental Assessment;
Outstanding NCRs;
Summary of any complaints by external bodies and actions taken / to be taken; and
Relevant changes or possible changes in legislation, regulations and international practices.
11.9 Grievance Mechanism A grievance can be defined as an actual or perceived problem that might give grounds for complaint. As a general policy, WAPDA will work proactively towards preventing grievances through the implementation of impact mitigation measures and community liaison activities that anticipate and address potential issues before they become grievances. This will be the responsibility of the Project Manager, the Contractor’s Site Manager and a person designated to be responsible for stakeholder liaison (for the purposes of this document called the communication officer (CO)). Potential impacts and effects that are most likely to give rise to grievances for this Project are related to:
Distribution of employment opportunities;
Construction noise; and,
Presence of a construction labor force and the effects on neighboring villages, local services and infrastructure.
Any stakeholder (individual or organization) will be able to submit a grievance to the Project if they believe a practice is having a detrimental impact on their community, the
WAPDA August 2011
11-29
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
environment, or on their quality of life. suggestions. Grievances could include:
They may also submit comments and
Negative impacts on a person or a community (e.g. financial loss, physical harm, nuisance);
Dangers to health and safety or the environment;
Failure of WAPDA, its Contractors and their workers or drivers to comply with standards or legal obligations;
Harassment of any nature;
Criminal activity;
Improper conduct or unethical behavior;
Financial malpractice or impropriety or fraud; and
Attempts to conceal any of the above.
11.9.1 Grievance Logging The contractor will be required to log grievances are received directly and have a formal logging system. The CO will prepare a standard form to record complaints that are received from individuals or organizations by any means including site visits, telephone calls or written correspondence. In addition to the contact information and complaint details, the logging system needs to track the action taken by the contractor and Project staff to investigate the cause of the complaint and bring about corrective action if justified, as well as the date of reply to the complainant, with a file reference to any correspondence. Grievances during construction will be investigated to review validity and responsibility. In the first instance, grievances will be directed to the CO to classify according to Table 11.5 below. Table 11.5: Grievance
Grievance Classification Criteria Risk Level
Validity
Response
None or low
Unsubstantiated
CO will conduct investigation, document
Classificatio n Low
findings and provide a response Medium
Possible risk and likely a
Possible substantiation
CO and an appropriate investigation team will conduct investigation. The Site
one off event
Manager or HS Manager may decide to stop work during the investigation to allow the corrective preventive actions to be determined. The CO will provide a response. High
Probable risk and could reoccur
Probable substantiation
CO will get the contractor to organize a Major Investigation Team for prompt investigation and resolution. Work will be stopped in the affected area. The CO will provide a response.
WAPDA August 2011
11-30
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
The CO will log the receipt of a comment, formally acknowledge it, track progress on its investigation and resolution, and respond in writing with feedback to the aggrieved party. A response time of 10 working days, unless there are exceptional circumstances, would be the aim. The CO will identify an appropriate investigation team with the correct skills to review the issue raised and to decide whether it is Project related or whether it is more appropriately addressed by a relevant authority outside the Project. WAPDA will play a role in investigating the validity and responsibility for some grievances. Project staff, and outside authorities as appropriate, will also contribute to investigations as required. The investigation will aim to identify whether the incident leading to the grievance is a singular occurrence or likely to reoccur. Identifying and implementing activities, procedures, equipment and training to address and prevent reoccurrence will be part of the investigation activities. In some cases it will be appropriate for the CO to follow up at a later date to see if the person or organization is satisfied with the resolution or remedial actions. The CO will explain in writing (or where literacy is an issue, orally) the manner in which the review was carried out, the results of the review, any changes to activities that will be undertaken to address the grievance or how the issue is being managed to meet appropriate environmental and social management systems and requirements. The CO will summarize grievances in project performance reports, at least bi-annually during construction and annually during operation. The Project will aim to protect a person’s confidentiality when requested and will guarantee anonymity in annual reporting. Individuals will be asked permission to disclose their identity. Investigations will be undertaken in a manner that is respectful of the aggrieved party and the principle of confidentiality. The aggrieved party will need to recognize that there may be situations when disclosure of identity is required and the Project will identify these situations to see whether the aggrieved party wishes to continue with the investigation and resolution activities.
11.10 Adequacy of Environmental and Social Management The impact assessment covered under Chapters 8 to 9, and environmental and social management covered under Chapter 11 adequately address all the potential environmental and social impacts of the project identified during the scoping stage. In addition, most of the concerns raised and recommendations forwarded by the stakeholders consulted during the ESA and discussed in Chapter 5 (Table 5.2) have been addressed while formulating the environmental and social mitigation and enhancement measures discussed in Chapters 8 and 9. A summary of these concerns and recommendations along with the way they have been addressed is given in Table 11.6 below. Table 11.6: Stakeholders’ Concerns/Recommendations and their Redressal Suggestions/Comments
Recommended Action
Suggestions from Institutional Stakeholders 1. WAPDA should fulfill the regulatory requirements of conducting ESA of proposed project.
WAPDA August 2011
The present ESA has been conducted, submitted to KP EPA, and approval obtained (see Section 2.4.5).
11-31
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Suggestions/Comments
Recommended Action
2. The project proponents should develop organizational structure for implementation of SIMF to handle the environmental and social issues during the project implementation. 3. Possible damage to flora and fauna particularly at proposed site for power house should be addressed.
ESMU will be established to manage the environmental and social aspects of the Project (see Section 11.3.3).
4. Construction related issues like excavated material, soil erosion and hazards for local communities and labor force should be appropriately addressed during the construction activities. 5. WAPDA will ensure free mobility of women and children, especially students of girls and boys schools at WAPDA Right Bank Colony
Appropriate mitigation measures are included in the mitigation plan (see Sections 8.5 and 9.4).
6. Safe transportation of construction material
Same as above.
7. Health and safety measures for labor force
Appropriate mitigation measures are included in the mitigation plan (see Section 9.4).
8. Rights of employment in Tarbela Project for local community
Appropriate measures are included in the mitigation plan (see Section 9.4).
9. Settlements of pending issues of old affected persons of Tarbela project
The old resettlement issues pending in the courts will be settled (see Section 9.5.2).
Appropriate mitigation measures are included in the mitigation plan, particularly preparation and implementation of a tree plantation plan (see Sections 8.4.2, 8.5.8 and 8.5.11).
Appropriate mitigation measures among others in the form of preparing and implementing a traffic management plan are included in the mitigation plan (Sections 8.5 and 9.4).
Suggestions from Grass-root Stakeholders 10. Pending issues of compensation on Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha HydroPower Project.
The old resettlement issues pending in the courts will be settled (see Section 9.5.2).
11. Lack of health and education facilities in Ghazi and Pehur Hamlets.
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see Section 9.5.1).
12. Rights of employments in Tarbela project
Appropriate measures are included in the mitigation plan (see Section 9.4).
13. Problems in sewage and solid waste collection system
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see Section 9.5.1).
14. Seepage problem due to Ghazi Barrage pond
This aspect has not been addressed in ESA.
15. Polluted drinking water in the hamlets
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see
WAPDA August 2011
11-32
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Suggestions/Comments
Recommended Action Section 9.5.1).
Issues highlighted by the Consultation Workshop Participants 16. Settlement of compensation issues of old affectees of Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha;
The old resettlement issues pending in the courts will be settled (see Section 9.5.2).
17. Lack of health and educational facilities in the area, especially in the villages where old affectees of Tarbela and Ghazi Barotha are residing;
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see Section 9.5.1).
18. Un employment in the area;
The project will provide employment opportunities and recommendations have been included in ESA to give preference to local population (see Section 9.4).
19. Recruitment in Tarbela and GBHP projects from other parts of the country;
The project will provide employment opportunities for people from other parts of the country as well (see Section 9.4).
20. Restoration of the source of livelihood of fishermen; 21. Polluted drinking water;
This aspect has not been addressed in ESA.
22. Solid waste and sewerage disposal problems; 23. Seepage and high water table at Right Bank in Topi area;
Same as above.
24. Shortage of water and low water table in the areas downstream Ghazi barrage; 25. provision of electricity at subsides rates in the Project area; 26. Fear of road accidents during construction phase of the project
Same as above
27. Tree management plan.
Appropriate mitigation measures are included in the mitigation plan, particularly preparation and implementation of a tree plantation plan (see Section 8.4 and 8.5).
Suggestions and Recommendations forwarded by Workshop Participants 28. WAPDA should fix a quota in employment for local peoples in TDP and GBHPP;
WAPDA August 2011
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see Section 9.5.1).
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see Section 9.5.1).
It is beyond the jurisdiction of WAPDA. Appropriate mitigation measures in the form of preparing and implementing a traffic management plan are included in the mitigation plan (see Section 8.5 and 9.4).
The project will provide employment opportunities and recommendations have been
11-33
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Suggestions/Comments
Recommended Action included in ESA to give preference to local population (see Section 9.4).
29. Establishment of emergency unit with ambulance for local communities;
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see Section 9.5.1).
30. WAPDA should arrange clean drinking water in Project area; 31. Establishment of vocational training centre for women; 32. WAPDA should help in the up gradation of educational and health facilities in the Ghazi and Topi area; 33. Establishment of a heavy machinery training centre at Topi; 34. Civil department of WAPDA should work on proposal for the rehabilitation of drainage system at Right Bank and replacement of old water supply pipelines; 35. WAPDA may rehabilitate the old road near Ghazi and use during construction phase to avoid traffic hazards to local community;
Same as above.
36. WAPDA may establish recreational parks at Ghazi and Topi for local peoples;
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see Section 9.5.1). A public park can be added in the Social Assistance plan.
37. WAPDA may engage a NGO like GBTI to work with local communities for the implementation of the project in environmentally and socially safe way. Consultation with Women
This aspect will be considered during the project implementation.
38. Drinking water is contaminated with other particles and people have to use this contaminated water;
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see Section 9.5.1).
39. Problems of proper disposal of solid waste and sewage issues at Right Bank Colony;
The Social Assistance program under this project aims to address some of the community needs of the area (see Section 9.5.1).
40. Needs to introduce computer as a subject in the schools; 41. Lack of cold drinking water in summer in the school;
Same as above.
WAPDA August 2011
Same as above. Same as above.
Same as above. Same as above.
Appropriate mitigation measures in the form of preparing and implementing a traffic management plan are included in the mitigation plan (see Sections 8.4 and 8.5).
Same as above.
11-34
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Suggestions/Comments
Recommended Action
42. Lack of health facilities, especially for women in Civil Hospital Topi; 43. Seepage problems in Topi area due to Ghazi Barrage pond; 44. Inadequate building structure, lack of furniture, lack of teaching staff in the Girls Middle School at Pehur Hamlet; 45. Needs of a vocational training centre for women in the area.
Same as above. Same as above. Same as above.
Same as above.
11.11 Cost Estimates for Environmental Management and Monitoring The estimated costs for the environmental management and monitoring activities are set out in Table 11.7 below. Table 11.7:
Cost Estimates for Management and Monitoring Activities Description
Cost
Cost
Million PKR
Million US$
Project Component
0.29
C2
Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) 1
Landscaping Plan and Replanting Plan
24.65
2
Pollution Prevention Plan
*)
A
3
Waste Disposal Plan
*)
A
4
Drinking Water Management Plan
*)
A
5
Borrow Area Restoration Plan
*)
A
6
Traffic Management Plan
*)
A
7
Waste Disposal Plan
*)
A
8
Monitoring & Evaluation, Environmental Management
50.15
0.59
C2
9
Training and Capacity building
83.30
0.98
C2
10
Strengthening of WEC
90.00
1.06
11
Independent Panel of experts
24.00
0.28
E2
Social Impact Management Framework (SIMF) 12
Land acquisition/ temporary lease of land
*)
A
13
Workers health/safety/wellbeing Plan
*)
A
14
Monitoring & Evaluation workers health/safety/wellbeing
0.39
C2
15
Workers Accommodation Plan
*)
A
WAPDA August 2011
33.15
11-35
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Description
Cost
Cost
Million PKR
Million US$
Project Component
24.65
0.29
C1
16
Information and Communication Strategy
17
Addressing social legacy TDPGBHPP
1062.50
12.50
C1
18
Implementing Social Assistance Program
104.4
1.23
C1
1,496.80
17.61
Total ESMP and SIMF
*) in contractors budget
WAPDA August 2011
11-36
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Annex A:
Consultation Details
Table A.8: List of Women Participants in Scoping Consultation Meeting at Girls High School WAPDA Right Bank Colony Date: 10th August 2010 Mrs. Atia Begum
Headmistress
Jamila Hassan
School Teacher
Afra Bashra
School Teacher
Ms. Munaza
School Teacher
Summera Iqbal
School Teacher
Wakeela Naz
School Teacher
Kaneez Akhtar
Resident
Alia Zafar
Resident
Salma Shehnaz
Resident
Nobia Naveed
Resident
Summera Ammar
Resident
Zeenat bibi
Resident
Ghazala Naveed
Resident
Shazia
Resident
Shagufta Saeed
Resident
Mrs. Naveed
Resident
Ms. Zahida
Resident
Tayyaba Khan
Resident
Aqeeda Nasreen
Resident
Sadaf Naeem
Resident
Beghum Iqbal
Resident
WAPDA August 2011
A-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Shereen Taj
Resident
Sarwat Khan
Resident
Ayesha Hina
Resident
Nazia Gul
Resident
WAPDA August 2011
A-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table A. 9: Participants in WAPDA Consultation Meeting 10 August 2010 Name
Designation
Contact No.
1
S. Bashir Ahmad
R.E (E)
0342-9184105
2
Khurshid Khan
OE
0303-5120265
4
Asif Jan
OE
0334-9304782
5
Muhammad Farooq
Sr. Engineer
0334-8697544
6
Abdul Rahim
????
0321-9876393
7
Ghous Nawaz
PEIE-II
0332-5056159
8
Irshad Hussain Bangash
SSE
0346-9070696
9
Iftikhar Ahmad
Sub Engineer
0305-5727502
10
Shoiab Saleem
ASA
0300-5311157
11
Zohaib Hashim
Junior Engineer
0344-9019514
12
Usman Jamil
Junior Engineer
0344-9019514
13
Munir Ahmad
Junior Engineer
0345-5445661
14
Asif Saeed
Junior Engineer
0321-2059427
15
Mazhar Nouman
Lab Assistant
0345-9373301
16
Abdul Majid
Test Inspector
0345-6520280
17
Shamsuddin
Assistant Foreman
0333-7369246
18
Ihsan Ullah
Senior Engineer P&I-I
0344-9212080
19
Ashfaq Ahmad
JP&IE -II
0333-5324581
20
Imtiaz Ahmad
Junior Engineer
0313-9095171
21
Habib-ur-Rehman
Senior Engineer
0306-5510413
22
M. Zafar Khan
Resident Engineer
0312-5033481
23
Javed Akhtar
Senior Engineer
0300-5829739
24
Amin Ullah
JIE
0306-7058881
25
Khalid Khan
P.A to R.E (Mech)
0346-8999760
26
Raj Wali Khan
P.A to R.E (P)
0344-2829678
27
Khurshid Anwar
Project Director
0321-9897172
28
Muhammad Amin Khalid
RE (M)
29
Hameed Ullah
EME (P)-I
WAPDA August 2011
A-3
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table A.10: Participants
Initial Awareness Campaign (Scoping Stage) List of
Village/Settlement 1
Pehur Hamlet
2
(November 2010)
Person Contacted Muhammad Javed
24,
Bakhat Gul Jahangeer
4
Muhammad Waqas
5
Ijaz Ahmed
6
Usman Sher
7
Muddsar Iqbal
8
Paris Khan
9
Muhammad Rafique
10
Ghulam Qadir
11
Bahadar Sher
12
Allah Baksh
13
Siddique Ahmed
14
Fida Muhammad
Ghazi Hamlet
2
(November 2010
3
Syed Asif Ali Shah
25,
0300-5688606
0300-5394800
Muhammad Ali Shah Syed Sharaf Ali Shah
4
Abdul Rasheed
5
Muhammad Din
6
Ghazanfar Shah
7
Shabir Ahmed
8
Javed Iqbal
9
Aqil Shah
10
Muhammad Maskeen
WAPDA August 2011
0300-8585695
(Ex. Nazim Batakha Union Council)
3
1
Contact Number
03015037032 0300-5258117
A-4
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table A.11: Consultation
01
List of Officials Contacted During Institutional
Location
Officials Contacted
Project Office 4th Extension Tarbela
Mr. Khurshed Anwer, Project Director Office. 0995-662013 Cell. 0321-9897172 Mr. Munsif Shah, PA to Project Dorector Cell. 0301-5525180
02
Library Tarbela Project Offices
Mr. Rajab Khan
03
Power House Tarbela
Mr. Ahmed Waheed, Chief Engineer Mr. Muhammad Irfan, Senior Engineer Mr. Asif Jehan, Senior Engineer
04
05
Office of the XEN(civil) WAPDA
Mr. Sultan Nadeem, XEN (civil)
Colony Right Bank
Cell 0312-9064002
Dispensary ,WAPDA
Dr. Hizbullah, Senior Medical Officer
Colony Right Bank 06
Community Centre, WAPDA
Mr. Niaz Sardar Hussain, Incharge Community
Colony Right Bank
Centre/Dy.Director Admin Cell. 0301-8883014 Mr. Khalid Saeed, Care Taker Cell. 0301-8345117
07
Fisheries Department ,Tarbela
Mr. Jan Sher, Assistant Director
O8
Fisheries Department, Haripur
Mr. Muhammad Shafi Marwat, Deputy Director. Cell
(KP)
0346-7868651 Mr. Haydait Shah, Assistant Director Cell 0300-5996510
09
Forest Department, Haripur(KP)
Mr. Farhad Shah, SDFO Mr Safdar Rehman, Office Clerk Phone. 0995611846
10
Wild Life Department, Haripur
Mr. Javed Iqbal, Deputy Range Officer
(KP)
Cell. 0321-4868140 Mr. Abdul Rasheed Tanooli, Deputy Range Officer. Cell. 0346-9595078
11
Forest Department Ghazi (KP)
Mr. Abdul Rasheed, SDFO
12
Tehsil Municipal Administration ,Ghazi
Mr. Sajjad Haider, TMO
WAPDA August 2011
A-5
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Location
Officials Contacted Cell. 0300-5958563
13
Civil Hospital ,Ghazi
Dr. Qasim Asad, Medical Officer Cell. 0301-5471320 Ms. Rukhsana Ghous, Senior Nurse
14
Civil Hospital ,Topi
Dr. Arshad ul Islam, Senior M O
15
Girls High School, WAPDA Right Bank
Ms. Atia Beg, Principal
Colony
Mrs. Afia Bashura Mrs. Jameela Hassan
16
Boys High School, WAPDA Right Bank
Mr. Anwer Ahmed, Headmaster
Colony
Cell. 0314-9898725 Mr. Habib Ullah, Teacher
17
Govt. Girls High School, Pehur Hamlet
Ms. Wakeela Naz, Senior Teacher Ms. Talat Begham, Teacher
18
Govt. Boys High School, Pehur Hamlet
Mr. Muhammad Javed, Acting Headmaster Cell. 03009082446 Mr. Muhammad Bilal, Teacher
19
Govt. Boys Primary School, Pehur Hamlet
Mr. Iftekhar Ahmed, Headmaster
20
Govt. Dispensary , Pehur Hamlet
Dr. Muhammad Ikram, Incharge
21
Union Councils Office, Topi
Mr. Javed ahmed, Secretary Mr. Aqeel Ahmed, Supervisor NADRA Cell. 0336-9410879
22
Ghazi Bortha tarqiati Idara, Hattian
WAPDA August 2011
Mr. Tasswar Rasheed, Program Coordinator
A-6
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table A.12: List of Persons Contacted During Grass Root Consultation
Village / Settlement
Person Contacted
Contact Number
01
Syed Asif Ali Shah
0300-5394800
02
Muhammad Sarfraz Shah
03
Ghaznfer Shah
04
Shabir Ahmed
05
Javed Iqbal
06
Aqil Shah
07
Alf Din
08
Liaqat Ali
09
Ghazi Hamlet
Syed Shafat Ali shah
12
Muhammad Maskeen
13
Azhar Ali
14
Saeed Shah
15
Muhammad Ali Shah
16
Syed Sharaf Ali Shah
17
Abdul Rasheed
18
Muhammad Din
19
Muhammad Javed
20
Ghulam Qadir
21
Bahadar Sher
22
Taus Khan
23
Usman Sher
24
Allah Baksh
25
Siddique Ahmed
26
Sher Khan Pehur Hamlet
0300-5258117
Syed Azmat Ali Shah
10
27
0301-5037032
0300-8585695
0300-5688606
Muddsar Iqbal
28
Paris Khan
29
Muhammad Rafique
30
Bakhat Gul
31
Jahangeer
32
Muhammad Waqas
33
Ijaz Ahmed
34 35
WAPDA August 2011
A-7
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Village / Settlement
Person Contacted
Contact Number
36
Muhammad Javed
0300-9082446
37
Khan Muhammad
38
Allah Baksh
39
Siddique Ahmed
40
Fazal e waliat
41
Kafiat ur Rehman Boys High School Pehur Hamlet
42
Muntzar Khan
43
Fida Muhammad
44
Muhammad Javed
45
Usman Sher
46
Muhammad Shahzad
47
Iftekhar Ahmed
0344-9215199
48
Khalid Ghafoor
0313-9412721
49
Tanveer Alam
0345-9495220
50
Muhammad Ayub
51
Abdul Hameed
52
Saleem Bahadar
03005523695
0300-9086466
Topi House, Swabi Road Topi 53
Ayub Jan
54
Haji Naiz Muhammad
0300-5689998
55
Yasir Mahmood
0314-9995565
56
Muhammad Abdullah
57
Abdul Haq
58
Anwer Ahmed
033-9136976
59
Gohar Ali
0314-9898725
60
Javed Iqbal
0302-5685033
61
Habib Ullah
0346-5611386
Muhammad Asghar
0300-4875325
Ayaz Awan
034609804212
64
Ali Badsh
0301-5751645
65
Fakher e Alam
0300-9358165
66
Zia ul Haq
0303-5353235
67
Wisal Shah
0345-9491145
68
Waqar Hussan
0302-5470599
69
Umer Khaliq
0300-9712004
Nasar Iqbal
0300-9787113
62 63
70
Boys High School WAPDA Right Bank Colony
Darra Mohat
71
WAPDA August 2011
Abdul Sattar
A-8
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Village / Settlement
Person Contacted
Contact Number
72
Sultan Afzal
73
Bashir Khan
74
Jameel Rehman
75
Nazir Hussain
76
Farman Shah
77
Meraj Khan
78
Mohsin Shah
79
Shakir Nawaz
0303-5290611
80
Ashiq Hussain
0302-5306419
81
Khalid Zaman
0332-5727140
82
Sarzameen Khan
83
Rabaz Khan
84
Muhammad Sajjad
0308-8079313
0308-8582757
Kukar Chawa 85
Muslim Khan
86
Rizwan Khan
87
Jalil Rehman
88
Mir Haider
89
Asad Ghani
90
Shahras Khan
91
Mir Muhammad Afzal
92
Aizaz Afzal
93
Muhammad Ajmal
94
Ahmed Nawaz
95
0308-8569281
0306-8168237
0300-5809632
Naeem Khan Ghari Mera
96
Roshin Din
97
Muqdar Khan
98
Faisal Nawaz
99
Faisal Qadeer
100
Muhammad Naiz
101
Sardar Lal Khan
102
Muhammad Shahzad
0300-5813331
103
Muhammad Adnan
0313-5882582
Umer Khaliq
0300-9712004
104
Sobra City
105
Muhammad Sohail
106
Akhtar Javed
107
Aziz Ullah
WAPDA August 2011
0301-5751158
0301-8343290
A-9
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Village / Settlement
Person Contacted
Contact Number
108
Fazal-e-Subhan
109
Kareem Khan
0345-2994731
110
Sardar Babar Ali
0343-5257933
111
Bashir ahmed
0300-8306243
112
Muhammad Ilyas
0347-9342694
113
Dr.Ameer Khan
0300-5907301
Syed Niaz Hussain Shah
0300-9139466
115
Nayyar Iqbal
0346-5628747
116
Arsalan Ajmal
0313-5911838
117
Dilfraz Khan
0301-8765881
118
Rab Nawaz
0307-5338729
119
Orengzeb Khan
120
Jalat Khan
121
Tamraz Khan
122
Mukhtar Khan
114 Qazi Pur
123
Khabbal
Bukhtair Khan
124
Ejaz Khan
125
Yasin Khan
126
Khawas Khan
127
Taufail Khan
128
Ikram Ullah
129
Said Akbar
130
Abdul Qadoos
131
Taufail Ahmed
132
Javed Ahmed
0344-4141158
0342-9686533
0300-9343294
0314-9769529
Pontian 133
Waheed Khan
134
Gul Bahadar
135
Yasir Khan
136
Muhammad Idrees
137
Sabaz Ali
WAPDA August 2011
A-10
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table A.13: List of Participants for Consultation Workshops
1. List of Participants of Stakeholders Consultation Workshop at Ghazi Date: 24. 02. 2011 Name of Participants
Designation
Department/ Village
1.
Javed Iqbal
PRO (Protocol)
WPADA, Tarbela
2.
Fazli Amin
SE (S & E)
WAPDA, Tarbela
3.
Malik Fazl-i-Karim
G. STPC
Press
4.
Ammad Ali
Affectee
Khalo
5.
Naila Taseen
Sangi Foundation
Khalo Sungi Foundation
6.
Syed Kazim
Dir. Seismology
WAPDA Tarbela
7.
Naseer Iqbal
Ex- Nazim
Umerkhana
8.
Amjad Ali
President committee
9.
Muhammad Shahbaz
President
Tasbeh Press Club
10
Nasir Mohmmud
Inspector
TDP
11.
Israr Khan
SE (D& S)
WAPDA, TDP
12.
Amin Khan
ASE (D&S)
WAPDA, TDP
13.
Umaer Khaliq
Principal QPS
Ghazi
14.
Assad
Affectee
Dull Dara
15.
Shakir Nawaz
Affectee
Village Kukar Chowa
16.
Abul Kalam
Sr. Engineer
Tarbell 4th HP
17.
Waqas Ahmad
Affectee
Khalo
18.
Bashir Ahmad
Affectee
Village Qazipur
19.
Sajjad Haidar
TMO Ghazi
Local govt. deptt.
20.
Zahoor Ahmad
Teacher
Education Mian Dhari
21.
Syed Farman Shah
Chairman UCC
Mian Dhari
22.
Kamran
Affectee
Village Khbal
23.
Qasim Shah
Affectee
Ummer Khano
24.
Torab Khan
Affectee
Khano
25.
Sardar Shehzad
Affectee
Sobra City
26.
Shabbir Ahmad
Affectee
Ghazi Hamlet
27
Sher Khan
Affectee
Darra Muhat
WAPDA August 2011
village HADAF
A-11
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name of Participants
Designation
Department/ Village
28
Adeel Khan
ARY Reporter
Ghazi
29
Abdul Rashid
S.D.P.O
Forest Dept
30
M. Afsar
Affectee
Darra Mohat
31
S. Ghazanfar Ali shah
Affecters/NGO
Hamlet Ghazi
32
Mushtaq Malik
Affectees
Ghazi Hamlet
33
Mir Afzal Khan
Ex-chairman
Ghazi/Ghari Meera
34
Rab Nawaz
Affectees
Ghari Meera
35
Abid Ali Khan
Ex-Nazim Ghazi
Ghazi
36
Javed Iqbal
Journalist
Press
37
Hazrat Umar
G. M. Tarbell
WAPDA
38
Syed Munsif Shah
PA T4th Extension
WAPDA, Tarbela
39
Arshad khan
Team leader GBTI
GBTI
40
Adeel Nasir
-
Piplian
41
Faisal Zaman
Ex MPA
Ghazi
42
Khurshid
Ex Councellor
Ghazi
43
Prof. Khurshid
A.P
Govt. Degree College
44
Shahid Ali
Affectee
Ghazi
45
Rashid Zaman
Student
Khalo
46
Muhammad Idrees
Press/Bureau chief
Khndi
47
Abdul Hafeez
Sr. Sociologist
MMP
2. List for Participants of Stakeholders Consultation Workshop at Topi Date: 26. 02. 2011 Name
Designation
Department/Village
1.
Tamraiz Khan
Affectee
Village Khabal
2.
Ejaz
Affectee
Village Khabbal
3.
Sarzamin
Affectee
Galla
4.
M. Shareen
Affectee
Galla
5.
Khalid Ghafoor
YAD’s President
Topi/YAD organization
6.
Asad Aman
Foreseer
Forest Dept Swabi
7.
Mohammad Rafiq
General Librarian
Hamlet
WAPDA August 2011
A-12
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name
Designation
Department/Village
8.
Javed Khan
Ex-Nazim
Hamlet Pehur
9.
Akmal Zeb
Affectee
Thandkoi
10.
Iftikhar Ahmad
Primary School Teacher Education Pehur
11.
Yaser Mohammad
Affectee
Topi
12.
Azmat Ali
Journalist
Ashara Azar Swabi Time
13.
Momen Khan
Fisherman
Galla
14.
Saleh Mohammad
Fisherman
Galla
15.
Sardar Shehza
Afectees
Sobra
16.
Taufeeq Zaman
Chief Officer M. C. Topi
Topi Local Govt.
17.
M. Sajjad
In charge Encroachments
Corporation Toll
18.
Syed Anjum Shah
President/social organization
Tanzeem-e-Naujawanane-Topi
19.
Amjad Ali
Vice president
Press
20.
Niaz Mohammad
Affectee
Topi House, Topi
21.
Mohammad Asfan
Sr. Engineer
Tarbell power house
22.
Muhammad Shafiq
Admin officer
GIK Institute
23.
Javed Zaman
Affectee
Kotha
24.
Hafeez
Affectee
Topi
25.
Tanveer Alam
Politics
Topi
26.
Gul Hayat
Nazim
Union Council Topi
27.
Dr. Fazli Qadir
SMO
Health Dept. Topi
28.
Saryat Khan
Manager Warid
SAD/IDM
29.
Javed Ahmad
Primary School Teacher
Pontian
30.
Ikram-ullah
Primary School Teacher
Pontian
31.
Ahmed Waheed
C.E.(P)Tarbela
WAPDA
32.
Usman Sher
Manager Research
GIKI
33.
Khan Mohammad
School Teacher
Education
34.
Siddiq Ahmed
Primary School Teacher
Education
35.
Abdur Rasheed
Affectee
Pehur Hamlet
36.
Khaista Khan
Affectee
Pehur Hamlet
37.
Jehan Sher khan
WAPDA August 2011
WAPDA Tarbell\a
A-13
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name
Designation
Department/Village
38.
Abul kalam
Sr. Engineer Tarbell 4th
WAPDA
39.
S. Munsif Shah
PD Tarbela 4th
WAPDA
40.
Khurshid Anwar
Project Director
Tarbell WAPDA
41.
Zafar Mohammad
P.A
Tarbell WAPDA
42.
Arshad
Affectees
Nilab
43.
M. Saeed
President/Social organization
Islahi Jarga Topi
44.
Sajid Zaman
Fisherman
Batakara
45.
Waqar Ahmad
Social worker
Batakara
46.
Fayyaz Khalid
MFO T4 JVC
T4 Extension Project
47.
Shafqat Ali Malik
DPM
T4 Consultant JV
48.
Niaz Mohammad
Affectee
Khalo
49.
Abdul Hafeez
Sr. Sociologist
MMP
3. List of Participants of Stakeholders Workshop at Islamabad Date: 17.03.2011 Name Participants
of Designation
Department/ Organization
Contact No
1.
Dr. M. Mohsin Iqbal
Head Agriculture
Global Change 051-2077300 Impacts Study Center Islamabad
2.
Rashiq Ahhmer
A. A. E
Dept. of Archeology
3.
Rana Attia Dastgir
A.D (Ecology)
WAPDA 042Environment Cell, 35842653 Sunny view Lahore
4.
Khursheed Anwar
PD 4th Extension
WAPDA, Tarbela
0995-662013
5.
Dr. Ashraf Bodla
Chief Environmentalist
MM Pakistan
03004739866
6.
Azmat Beg
Principal Environmentalist
MM Pakistan Lahore
03334535623
7.
Prof. Dr. M. I Lone
Dir. Research
PMAS Arid University Rawalpindi
8.
Ghazanfar Ali
Head Sector
WAPDA August 2011
Water GCISC
051-2202694
Agri. 0333510784
03215573711
A-14
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name Participants
of Designation
9.
Tanveir Abbasi
Rizwan Manager
10.
Ashfaq A. Khawar
11.
Waseem Khan
12.
Dr. Waseem
13.
Ishteqaq Kokab
14.
Abdul Hafeez
15.
Safeguard Officer
Department/ Organization
Contact No
MM Pakistan
03015452005
ADD / SUO
03215827597
Ahmad Chairman
Pakistan Wildlife 03335214333 Foundation
Asst. Prof
Federal Directorate of 03335227389 Education WAPDA
03015710104
Sr. Sociologist
MM Pakistan
03334236494
Saadullah Ayaz
CC Coordinator
IUCN Pakistan
2271027
16.
Numair Aman
HSE
Laraib Energy
03005552418
17.
Asjad Imtiaz Ali
RRC
M/O Water Power
and 9244600
18.
Fareed Rokhany
EA ( C)
M/O Water Power
and 9244623
19.
Abdul Qadir Rafiq
ACD Environment
UNDP
8355641
20.
Qudsia Siddiqui
Env. JPSO
UNRCO
8355646
21.
Aneeza Rafique
Student
NUST
03434432841
22.
Dr. M. Anwar Beg
Professor
IESE, NUST
90854308
23.
Mariyam Siddiq
Student
IESE, NUST
24.
Hina Amber Haneef
Student
IESE, NUST
25.
Sameera Zaib
Environmentalist
Project Procurement
26.
P. M. Moshabbir
RSP Water
WRRI, PARC
27.
Dr. M. Azeem Khan
Director
Social Sciences Inst. / 03009716115 PARC, Islamabad
28.
Tanvir Mohmmud
National Prog. 7th Floor UNIDO Coordinator
03335678078
29.
Ayesha Aftab Butt
Programme Officer
8354814
30.
Iman Malik
Assistant Manager IESCO
31.
Dr. Ahmad Hussain
DPM, MEAs
Ministry Environment
32.
Ayesha Asghar
NUST Scholar
NUST
WAPDA August 2011
Ahmad Director (Envir.)
NARC
UNIDO
03459325118 / 9255074
of 9245605
A-15
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name Participants
of Designation
Department/ Organization
Contact No
33.
M. Hanif Shareef
Regional Manager
MM Pakistan
03008545493
34.
Zahoor Ahmad
RSA
MM Pakistan
03325513080
35.
Riffat Qamar
DG
W&C
0519250345
36.
Sher Afzal
AD impact)
37.
M. Omer Khalid
Envr. Specialist
World Bank
03335314736
38.
Col Aqil
Project Manager
MM Pakistan
03335324736
39.
M. Imran
Account Officer
MM Pakistan
03455070837
40.
Naeem-ul-Hassan
Admin Asst.
MMP
03015117949
41.
Ghulam Ali
BD Coordinator
MMP
03335518722
WAPDA August 2011
(Social IESCO
03212495221
A-16
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
4. List of Participants of Stakeholders Workshop at Peshawar 30. 03. 2011 Name
Designation
Department/Village
Contact No.
1
Sher Azam Khan
Dir (M&E)
P & D Deptt.
0333-9061578
2
Sajjad Ali
DFO (WL)
WLD. KP
0300-5910807
3
Nawaz Khattak
EDO Agri
Agri . Ext. Deptt
0300-5857393
4
Uman Ahad
AD (EIA)
EPA
0333-9481997
5
M. Younas Khan
Monitoring Inspector
EPA
0308-5875385
6
Jawad Ali
MI
EPA
0313-5216652
7
Shahid Hamid
CE TDP
WAPDA
0300-5795242
8
Ishtiqaq A. Kokab
Director
WAPDA Env. Cell
0301-5710104
9
Purdil Khan
Advisor
T 4th Extension Project 0308-5220025
10
Rana A. Dastagir
Ecologist
11
Khursheed Anwar
12
Syed Munsif Shah
13
Zahid Abbas
14
Gul Muhammad
15
Muhammad Shafiq
16
WAPDA Env. Cell
042-35842603
WAPDA
0321-9897172
WAPDA
0301-5525180
Assistant PD Irrigation 4th Extension
0333-9055123
PD Extension
4
th
Forest Department
0300-5615473
SSRO
Soil Survey of Pak
0333-9327424
Gauher Rehman
PM
MMP
091-5254188
17
M. Nasim Golra
P.D FORD
Irrigation
9213700
18
Jehangir Shah
S. SO
PCSIR, S&T
0300-5884194
19
Inayat-ur-Rehman
SO
PCSIR, Peshawar
0333-9613475
20
Turab Shah
Planning
MMP/Peshawar Branch
0332-9230940
21
Neelam Asad
E.T
EPA-KPK
9210148
22
Rubina Noor
AD
EPA-KPK
9210148
23
Taj Ali Khan
Prof
UET-Peshawar
0301-8993556
24
Ahmad Nawaz
A. A Eng
Archaeology Peshawar
0300-5822734
25
Muhammad Ismail Khan
A/C
Archaeology Peshawar
0300-5951342
WAPDA August 2011
A-17
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name
Designation
Department/Village
Contact No.
26
Gulshan
Photographer
Roznama Mashriq
0333-9142090
27
Mian Atiq Mahboob
AD(R&S)
EPA (RD Swat)
0333-9399400
28
Abul Kalam
Sr. Engr.
T 4th Ext. WAPDA
HP, 0345-5999964
29
Prof. Dr. Ikhtiar Khan
Prof
Inst. of chemical 0333-9322129 sciences Univ. of Peshawar
30
Prof Dr. Hasan M. Khan
Prof Director
31
Shakeel Chander
Advocate
32
Asif Shehzada
DD (P)
EPA .KP. Peshawar
091-9210282
33
Alamgir Sultan
Intern
EPA
0334-9035612
34
Abid Noor Afridi
Chief Water
P&D Department
35
Javed Khattak
SDO
Irrigation
0304-4478228
36
Iftikhar Ahmad
Engineer
NESPAK
0321-9819814
37
Mohsin Ali
GIS analyst
MMP
0345-4199534
38
Abdul Hafeez
Senior Sociologist
MMP
0333-4236494
39
Abuzar Afghan
Site inspector
MMP
0300-8010479
40
Basharat Ali
Office Assistant
MMP
0314-9909908
WAPDA August 2011
& NCE Physical
091-821848 0300-8590241
A-18
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table A.14: List of contacted women during grass root consultation Participant
Meeting Place
Ghazi Hamlet (left Bank) 1
Sartaj Beghum w/o Mehbob Ali Shah
2
Riffat Beghum w/o Akbar Khan
3
Nosheen Imran w/o Imran Khan
4
Noreen Nisar Ali d/o Nisar Ali
5
Tehmina Beghum w/o Niaz Muhammad
6
Fazal Jan w/o Allah Dita
7
Nasreen Beghum w/o Talib Hussain
8
Asma Bibi w/o Umer Hayat
9
Razia Beghum w/oAftab Khan
10
Misbah Khanam w/o Nadeem Iqbal
11
Shaheen Beghum w/o Hassan Zaib
12
Zahida Raheem d/o Raheem Khan
Residence of Nadeem Iqbal
Pehur Hamlet (Right Bank) 13
Talat Beghum w/o v
14
Shabana Beghum w/o Misal Khan
15
Salma Waris d/o Waris Khan
16
Saima Aseem d/o Aseem Khan
17
Shakeela Iqbal w/o Iqbal Khan
18
Taj Bibi w/o Munawar Khan
19
Fehmida Khan w/o Anwar Khan
20
Neelofar Anwar d/o Anwar Khan
21
Shehla Ibrar w/o Ibrar Khan
22
Naheed Gul w/o Muhammad Gul
23
Abida Bibi d/o Fazal dad
24
Rani Sajad w/o Sajad Khan
Residence of Sajjad Khan
Right Bank Colony (Right Bank) 25
Ayesha Naz w/o Sajid Ali
26
Kaneez Akhtar w/o Yousaf Masih
27
Alia Zafar w/o Muhammad Zafar
WAPDA August 2011
Ladies / Women Club
A-19
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Participant 28
Jamila Hassan w/o Muhammad Hassan
29
Salma Shehnaz /o Bashir Ahmad
30
Nobia Naveed w/o Saad Ahmed
31
Summera Ammar d/o Ammar Sher
32
Zeenat bibi w/o Fazal Mabood
33
Ghazala Naveed w/o Naveed Ahmed
34
Shazia w/o Hafeez-ur-rehman
35
Afra Bashra w/o Rana Hameed Ahmed
36
Shagufta Saeed w/o Sohail Azam
Meeting Place
Topi (Right Bank) 37
Sadaf Naeem d/o Sajad Naeem
38
Ayesha Hina d/o Muhammad Saeed
39
Nazia Gul d/o Waris Khan
40
Mariam Hadi Khan w/o Hadi Khan
41
Beghum Iqbal w/o Muhammad Iqbal
42
Aqeeda Nasreen w/o Sikandar Zaib
43
Shereen Taj w/o Momin Khan
44
Wakeela Naz w/o Tariq Akhtar
45
Sarwat Khan w/o Asal Khan
46
Fatima Zafar d/o Muhammad Zafar
47
Summera iqbal d/o Iqbal zafar
48
tayyaba khan w/o muhammad yousaf
Residence of Waris Khan
Darah Mohat (Left Bank) 49
Razia Umar w/o Umar Khitab
50
Sayyeda sattar w/o Sattar Khan
51
Nazreen Nazeer d/o Nazeer Ahmad
52
Shabana bibi w/o Ghulzar Khan
53
Gulmar Jan w/o Nazar Gul
54
Pashmena Jan w/o Mukhiar Khan
55
Absana Wazeer d/o Wazeer Rehman
56
Zeenat Pervaiz w/o Shafqat Khan
57
Zeton Dilwarshah w/o Dilwar shah
WAPDA August 2011
Residence of Wazeer Rehman
A-20
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Participant 58
Dilsana Nisar w/o Nisar Khan
59
Abida Bibi w/o Aslam Hayat
60
Jameela Khantoon w/o Dilafsan
Meeting Place
Qazi pur (Left Bank) Gulnaz Shafique w/o Muhammad 61
shaafique
62
Tazeem w/o Hidayat Ali Khan
63
Nabeela Azeem w/o Muhammad Azeem
64
Aarzi Irfan w/o Muhammad Irfan
65
Anwar Jan w/o Muhammad Saleem
66
Asmara Khan d/o Muhammad Ajmal
67
Arshia Usman w/o Usman Ali
68
Naheed Bukhshish w/o Bukhshish Ali
69
Aneesa Ali Khan w/o Junaid Ali Khan
Residence of Junaid Ali Khan
Shazia Tabassum w/o Muhammad 70
Naveed
Sobra City (Left Bank) 71
Nasreen Beghum w/o Lal Khan
72
Shazia Babar w/o Sardar Babar Ali
73
Haleema Aleem w/o Muhammad Aleem
74
Rukhsana Naveed w/o Naveed
Residence of Lal Khan
Khabbal (Right Bank) 75
Gul Naseen Khan w/o Fazal Khan
76
Wakhud Bedar d/o Rangzeb Khan
77
Fehmida Jalat Khan w/o Jalat Khan
78
Dilshad Rangzeb w/o Rangzeb Khan
Residence of Jalat khan
Kukar Chawa (Left Bank) 79
Zember Jan w/o Meer Wali
80
Shahida Perveen w/o Muhammad Fazil
81
Husanfia w/o Shah Fazil
82
Zakia Beghum w/o Muhammad Jameel
83
Azra Ashiq w/o Ashiq Hussain
84
Hajrah Beghum w/o Zamzameen
WAPDA August 2011
Residence of Ashiq Hussain
A-21
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Participant
Meeting Place
85
Khber Jan w/o Zeloam Khan
86
Hussan Naz d/o Muhammad Jameel
Pontian (Right Bank) 87
Beena Khan w/o Muhammad Ikram
88
Zar Pari w/o Syed Akbar
89
Shameeda Khan w/o Fida Muhammad
90
Shafa Rehman w/o Ali Rehman
91
Sabeena Ameer w/o Ameer Khan
92
Raheela Naz w/o Abdul Qadoos
93
Asia Khatoon w/o Abdul Qadir
94
Nasreen Afzal w/o Afzaal Khan
95
Gulsana Rafe Ullah w/o Rafe Ullah
96
Zoojan w/o Dilawar Shah
Residence of Syed Akbar
Table A.15: List of Participants of Public Hearing Venue: Officers Club WAPDA Right Bank Colony, Topi Date: June 23, 2011 Name
Designation and Address
Contact. No
1
Khursheed Anwar
P. D Tarbela 4th Ext.
0995-662013
2
Purdil Khan
Advisor WAPDA Tarbela 4th 0308-5220025 Ext
3
Dr. Amjad Ali Khan
D.D. (EIA) KP-EPA
4
Muhammad Khalid
5
Dr. Hussain Ahmad
Director KP- EPA
6
Farhea Irshad
Gender Specialist, o/o GM Land 99202735 Acquisition and Resettlement, WAPDA Lahore
7
M. Iqbal Shah
Anthropologist o/o GM Land 99202738 Acquisition and Resettlement, WAPDA Lahore
8
Maqbool Bangash
Social Development Specialist 042-99202738 o/o GM Land Acquisition and Resettlement, WAPDA Lahore
9
Ali Hussain
Assistant Live Stock Specialist
WAPDA August 2011
Omar Environmental Islamabad
0333-9322510 Specialist, 0333-5170767
0333-7599914
A-22
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name
Designation and Address
Contact. No
10
Kalam
Deputy Director T4th Extension
0345-5999964
11
Munazza Rafique
Agri,.Soil Specialist
0301-7053660
730,G.M (LA&R) House, Lahore 12
Samimo Panni
WAPDA
Assistant Anthropologist
0345-4013123
LA&R, WAPDA 13
Ahsan Shah
Assistant M&E LA&R, WAPDA
14
Malik Waseem Awan
Agronomist LA&R, WAPDA
15
Dr. Aftab Azhar
Irrigation WAPDA
16
Raheel Mustefa
Assistant Agronomist LA&R
17
Haris Basharat
Assistant Community 0321-8426969 Development Specialist
18
Ayaz-ul-Haq
Student Swabi
19
Iftekhar Mali,
MFO
0344-4370080
20
Asif Sahibzada
Kotha Village,Distt. Swabi
0938-271889
21
Zahir Hussain
S.O. Environment Department. 9211406 Peshawar
22
Said Kamal
D.F.O Wildlife Mardan
23
Hazrat Omar
G.M Tarbela
24
Amin-ul-haq
S.E. Tarbela
0345-9694678
25
Mir Farman Khan
S.E (R&L)
0345-9428326
26
Wazir-ur-rehman
Jr. Engineer
0301-9706377
27
Polail Khan
District Officer Social Welfare
0300-9052210
28
Javaid Iqbal
Protocol Officer TDP
0333-5059712
29
Saleem Shahzad
Office Assistant ACE
0300-5813331
30
Javed Ahmed
Primary Batakara
31
Ikram ullah
Primary School Teacher Pontia
0300-9343294
32
Muqaddam Khan
Dawn Correspondent
0301-8350258
33
Engr.Raz Muhammad
Tehsil Management 0345-7932460 Administration Swabi
34
Faseer
S.S.G WAPDA
WAPDA August 2011
Specialist
Specialist 0321-9621432 0321-5119979
LA&R, 0334-9955870 0300-5315110
(Environmentalist), 0301-8990542
School
0937-873606
Teacher
0301-5072019
A-23
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name
Designation and Address
Contact. No
35
Mushtaq Chaudhry
Driver
0332-5645874
36
Farman Shah
Mat
0345-9707720
37
Abdul Wahab
Assistant Ghazi
38
Muhammad Asim
Jr. Clerk
0301-8342582
39
Salim Khan
ATD
0334-9495312
40
Aziz ullah
Head Mali
-
41
Nisar Ahmad
ACO Swabi
0345-4744721
42
Zafran
Affectee/ Mali
0343-5974095
43
Zard Ali
Forest Guard
0345-59171904
44
Arslan Khan
Affectee/ Mali
45
Mazhar
Jang Newspaper
46
Sareen
Driver
0346-9801669
47
Ahmad Waheed
CECP
0346-5627230
48
S. Bashir Ahmad
RE (E)
0345-9184105
49
Sultan Zeb
Sub. Engineer
50
Rawind Ali
S.S
51
Abid Ahmad
Principal GDC Kotha Swabi
0302-5680813
52
Adeel Khan
ARY one World
0313-5045066
53
Wajid Ali
Old Affectee GHBP
0300-5333306
54
Noor Zaman
Old Affectee TDP
0347-5228818
55
Fareed Khan
Old Affectee GHBP
0300-8585695
56
Muhammad Adu Khan
Peon
0306-8307907
57
Meer Amin
Attendent
58
Zahid Hussain
Carpenter
59
Wajid Hussain
Jr. Engr.
60
Sultan Nadeem
XEN
61
Noor Muhammad
Sr. Photographer
62
M. Shahbaz
Correspondent Nawai Waqt
63
M. Rafiq
Old Affectee GHBP / Topi Hamlet
64
Taous Khan
Old Affectee GHBP / Topi Hamlet
WAPDA August 2011
Education
Officer 0312-9277792
0332-9411768
A-24
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name
Designation and Address
Contact. No
65
Gul
Old Affectee TDP/ Topi Hamlet
66
Malik Fazal Karim
G.S Tarbela Press Club Ghazi
67
Haji Jannat
Old Affectee TDP / Pehure Hamlet
68
Khaista Khan
Old Affectee TDP / Pehure Hamlet
69
Khursheed
Old Affectee TDP / Pehure Hamlet
70
Asad
Coli/Old Affectee GHBP
71
Fazal Hussain
Coli/ Old Affectee GHBP
72
Kh. Zahoor Ahmad
Coli/ Old Affectee GHBP
73
Sayed Farman Shah
Chairman U.C Qazipur
74
Gul Badhah
Former/ Affected person
0303-3180790
75
Sajid Ali
Affected person
0302-5137357
76
Mohammad Farooq
Sr. Engineer (SCADA)
0334-8697544
77
Gharis Nawaz
Sr. Engineer
0332-5056159
78
Azeem Khan
Driver/ Affected person
03345-616422
79
Sher Hussain Khan
Divisional Forest Officer Haripur 0346-69222003
0306-5041449
0300-9767063
0995611846 80
Firdoos Khan
Ex. Nazim (Ghazi Hamlet)
0344-9417288
81
M. Usman
Union Vice Chairman
0308-5671073
82
A.Munir
Sub Engineer
0300-5680298
83
Humayun Khan
Sr. Store person
84
Pervez Shah
Attendant
0345-8985152
85
Abdul Waheed
Affected person
0346-5594233
86
Shah Alam
Sr. Clerk
0334-5608213
87
Fazal Wahab
Affected person
03085597030
88
Aziz-ur-Rehman
Sr. Engineer (M)
0321-5217052
89
Naveed Ahmed
Driver/ Affected person
0345-9500891
90
Milmram Zeb Khan
Student/ Old Affectee TDP
0345-970595955
91
M.Naseem Khan
Sr. Engineer
033-9454331
92
Rehmat Shah
Sr. Engineer
0300-5840871
WAPDA August 2011
Keeper/
Affected 0345-9691744
A-25
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Name
Designation and Address
Contact. No
93
Faisal
Student/ Affected person
0345-5950350
94
Javeed Akhter
Sr. Engineer
0300-5829300
95
Ihsan-ulah
Sr. Engineer
0300-5196440
96
Qamar Zaman
Sr. Engineer
0300-5196440
97
Firdous Khan
Ex. Nazim (UC) Ghazi Hemlet.
0344-9417288
98
Sayed Nadeem Shah
Ghazi Hamlet/ Old Affectee TDP 0334-5363583
99
Abdul Rasheed
S.D.F.O Ghazi
0300-8350212
100
Shabir
Press Reporter
0301-5107983
101
Safder Khan
S.C Harripur Forest Division
0300-9195415
102
Naseer Ahmed
A.S.A
0345-6121357
103
Iqbal Shah
Joint Sectary L/Union
0346-9804978
104
Khanzad Shah
Bahria University Islamabad
0334-5524732
105
Naser Iqbal
Ex.Nazim Ghazi
0300-9787113
106
Umer Khalid
Organizer PTI
0300-9712004
WAPDA August 2011
A-26
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Annex B: Table B.1:
Lists of Flora and Fauna
Medicinal Plants of the Tarbela Area Species
1
Acacia modesta Wall.
Fa
Vernacular
mily
Name
Mimosaceae
Phulai
Medicinal Uses
Gum extracted from fruits is used as tonic and stimulant.
2
Acacia nilotica (L.) Delile
Mimosaceae
Kikar
Legume is used as tonic, and for treating dysentery and diabetes. Seeds are also used for making wine.
3
Ageratum conyziodes L
Asteraceae
Neel Kanthi
Leaves decoction is used for fever and as blood purifier.
4
Albizia lebbeck Benth
Mimosaceae
Sreeia
Seeds are used for curing the severe kidney infection. Leaves provide shade, which is considered as sacred for the treatment of various diseases.
Artemisia scoparia
5
Asteraceae
Chaho
Papilionaceae
Tindani
Leaves are anthelmintic
Waldst. & Kit. Astragalus psilocentros
leaves are grind and used for stomach problems such as ulcer. Dried plant is used
Fisch.
as fuel. 6
Boerhavia procumbens
Nyctaginaceae
It-Sit
Leaves used as tonic.
Papilionaceae
Chachra
Gum is mixed with sugar and milk used as
Banks ex Roxb. 7
Butea monosperma O.
tonic and also given for back ache after
Ktz
birth in women. 8
Buddleja asiatica Lour.
Buddlejaceae
Banna
Leaves, seeds and roots are purgative. The seeds are used as external application for skin diseases.
9
Calotropis procera (Ait.)
Asclepiadaceae
Aq
Whole plant extract is applied on dog bite. Latex is commonly used for ring worm and
Ait. f.
skin diseases. 10
Carissa opaca Stapf ex
Apocynaceae
Garanda
Haines 11
Cassia occidentalis L.
Leaves are palatable for goat and sheep. Fruit is edible and blood purifier.
Caesalpiniaceae
Kaswandi
Leaves, seeds and roots are purgative. The seeds are used as external application for skin diseases.
12
Dalbergia sissoo Roxb.
Pailionaceae
Shesham
Wood boiled with water is used as blood purifier, irritation, tumors and pimples and leprosy. Washing the hair with leaves increase the length of hairs and make them healthy.
WAPDA August 2011
B-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Species
13
Dodonaea viscosa (L.)
Fa
Vernacular
mily
Name
Sapindaceae
Sanatha
Medicinal Uses
Stem barks are anthelmintic and astringent. Leaves are used to heal
Jacq.
wounds and cracked skin. Wood oil is used for toothache 14
Ficus benghalensis L.
Moraceae
Bohar
Latex is highly aphrodisiac.
15
Ficus palmata Forssk.
Moraceae
Phugwara
Fruit is edible and laxative. It soothes the bee sting by simple rubbing on the skin.
Melia azedarach (L.)
16
Leliaceae
Draik
Pers. 17
Morus alba L.
Leaves and fruit powder are used as blood purifier, fever and diabetes.
Moraceae
Marrotch
Fresh fruit grind and used as tonic and throat irritation.
18
Morus nigra L.
Moraceae
Marrotch
Fresh fruit is ground and used as tonic and for cough and throat irritation.
19
Taraxacum officinalis
Asteraceae
Hund
Root is used is useful for heart disorders.
Rhamnaceae
Sezan
Leaves are used to cure scabies.
Rhamnaceae
Sezan
Leaves and fruit is used in gas trouble.
Webber Ziziphus nummularia
20
(Burm. f.) Wight & Arn. 21
Ziziphus mauritiana Lam.
Table B.2:
Vegetative Pattern at Different Locations of the Project Area
Location Vegetation of the powerhouse area (along slopes from base to 100 m above)
Vegetative Species Lantana camara, Leucaena leucocephala, Pinus roxburghii, Dodonaea viscosa, Acacia modesta and Acacia nilotica, Ficus spp., Morus spp., Dalbergia sissoo, Carissa opaca, Otostegia limbata, Maytenus royleana and Ziziphus mauritiana,
Vegetation at the downstream end point (Topi)
Acacia modesta and Dodonaea viscose, Colebrookea oppositifolia, Justicia adhatoda, Budleja asiatica, Lantana cammara, Segretia thea, Ageratum conyzoides, Carissa opaca and Otostegia limbata.
Vegetation of labor area Upstream: main Tarbela spill way (harbor area)
Parthenium hysterophorus and Lantana camara. Dodonaea-Acacia, Pinus roxburghii, Malvastrum coromandelianum, Saccharum benghalensis, Oxalis corniculata, Buddleja asiatica, Justicia adhatoda, Themeda anathera, Setaria glauca, Seteria italica, Heteropogon contortus, Saccharum spontaneum and Erioscirpus comosus.
WAPDA August 2011
B-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Location Vegetation at upstream end point
Vegetative Species Buddleja asiatica, Dodonaea viscose, Themeda anathera, Acacia modesta and Rumex hastatus, Malvastrum coromandelianum, Oxalis corniculata, Boerhavia procumbens, Trifolium repens and Micromeria biflora.
Vegetation at borrow area (Gandaf)
Ipomoea carnea, Justicia adhatoda, Grewia villosa, Broussonetia papyrifera and Melia azedarach.
Vegetation at borrow area (Dara)
Justicia-Themeda-Ziziphus, Acacia-Justicia, Solanum surretense, Solanum nigrum, Segretia thea, Artemisia scoparia, Verbascum thapsus, Maytenus royleana, Kikxia incana, Rumex dentatus, Melia azedarach, Albizia lebbeck, and Broussonetia papyrifera, Solanum surratense, Solanum nigrum, Cannabis sativa, Chenopodium ambrosoides, Cuscuta reflexa, Cynodon dactylon, Datura innoxia, Xanthium strumarium, Mentha royleana,
Vegetation along cultivated fields and villages
Zea mays and Triticum aestivum, Capsicum annuum, Abelmoschus esculentus, Luffa cylindrica, Cucurbita pepo, Juglans regia, Diospyros lotus, Morus nigra and Mangifera indica, Broussonetia papyrifera and Melia azedarach, Cannabis sativa, Urtica dioica, Conyza Canadensis, Amaranthus viridis, Bidens biternata, Commelina benghalensis,Fumaria indica, Erodium cicutarium, Geranium ocillatum.
Vegetation of Haripur
Acacia modesta, Acasia nilotica, Olea ferruginea, Capparis deciduas Juglans regia, Acacia modesta, Quercus incana, Dodonaea viscosa, Parrotiopsis jacquemontiana, Cedrella toona, Ailanthus altissima, Cotinus coggyria, Myrsine Africana,Lonicera quinquelocularis,Ficu palmata, Sagretia theezan, Anagallis arvensis, Acyranthes aspera, Taraxacum officinale, Oxalis corniculata, Papaver hybridum Trifolium repens, Solanum nigrum, Silybum marianu, etc.
Vegetation of Swabi
Acacia modesta, Ziziphyus mauritiana, Asparagus gracilus, Oxalis corniculata, Hypericum oblogifolium, Woodfordia fruticos, Typha domingensis, Mentha piperata, Artemisia scoparia
WAPDA August 2011
B-3
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Location Vegetation of Bellas (islands) downstream of Ghazi Barrage
Vegetative Species Trees:
Acacia modesta, Acacia nilotica, Ailanthus
altisissima, Broussonetia papyrifera, Dalbergia sissoo, Ficus virgata, Morus nigra, Ricinus communis, Tamarix aphylla, Tamarix indica, Zizyphus mauritiana.
Shrubs: Acacia hydaspica, Anisomeles indica, Calotropis procera, Dodonea viscose, Lantana camara, Mimosa rubicaulis, Nerium indicum, Ottostegia limbata, Seggeretia theezans, Vitex negundo, Withania somnifera, Xanthium strumarium, Zizyphus nummularia.
Herbs: Asparagus racemosus, Alhaji camelorum, Amaranthus viridis, Anagalis arvensis, Arenaria serpyllifolia, Argyrolobium roseum, Astragalus punjabicus, Astragalus scorpiurus, Blumea membrancea, Campanula canescens, Cannabis sativa, Carthamus oxycantha, Chenopodium album, Chenopodium murale, Chrozophora tinctoria, Commelina benghalnsis, Commelina benghalnsis, Conyza bonarriensis, Cousinea prolifera, Crotalarria medicaginea, Cuscuta europea, Cynoglossum lanceolatum, Diarthron vesiculosum, Erodium cicutarium, Eryngium coeruleum, Erythraea ramosissima, Euphorbia pilulifera, Euphorbia prosrtrata, Filago spathulata, Fumaria parviflora, Gastrocotyle hispida, Gnaphalium spathulatum, Heliotropium strigosum, Hydrilla verticillata, Indigofera linifolia, Kickxia rammosissima, Lactuca scariola, Launnea procumbens, Launnea procumbens, Linum strictum, Malcolmia cabulica, Malva neglecta, Mazus japonicus, Medicago ploymorpha, Melilotus alba, Melilotus indica, Mentha longifolia, Micromeria biflora, Mimulus strictus, Oxalis corniculatus, Onobrychis stewartii, Onopordum acanthium, Pentanema vestitum, Phagnalon spathulatum, Phylla nodiflora, Physalis minima, Polygala abyssinica, Polygonum barbatum, Polygonum plebeium, Potamogeton perfoliatus, Psammogeton biternatum, Ranunculus muricatus, Rostraria pumila, Rumes dentatus, Salix acmophylla, Salvia moorcroftiana, Salvia plebeian, Saussurea candicans, Serratula pellida, Serratula pellida, Solanum nigrum, Solanum surattense, Sonchus asper, Sonchus oleraceus, Stellaria media, Taraxacum sp., Trigonella incise, Verbasscum thapsus, Veronica agrestris, Veronica beccabunga, Veronica biloba, Vicia sativa, Vicoa vestita.
WAPDA August 2011
B-4
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table B.3:
List of Cultivated Plants in the Project Area Species
Family
Habit
Habitat
1
Dalbergia sissoo Roxb.
Papilionaceae
Tree
Dry conditions
2
Duranta repens L.
Verbenaceae
Tree
Dry conditions
3
Eucalyptus sp.
Myrtaceae
Tree
Cool and moist
4
Jasminum humile, L.
Oleaceae
Shrub
Msic conditions
5
Lagerstroemia indica L.
Myrtaceae
Tree
Dry places
6
Leucaena leucocephala
Tree
Dry
Oleaceae
Shrub
Dry places
Pinaceae
Tree
Xeric conditions
Tree
Mesic conditions
(Lam.) R. de Wit. 7
Ligustrum ovalifolium
Mimosaceae
Hassk. 8
Pinus roxburghii Sarg.
9
Pterospermum acerifolium L.
Table B.4:
Sterculiaceae
Plants Recommended for Cultivation at Different Locations.
Location Road sides
Vegetative Species Jacaranda mimosaefolia D. Don, Bauhinia purpurea Linn., Cassia fistula Linn. Delonix regia (Boj.) Raf., Lagerstroemia flosreginae Retz., Magnolia grandiflora Linn., Salix babylonica Linn., Mimusops elengi Linn. and Hibiscus rosa-sinensis,
Hill tops and upper slopes Lower hill slopes Spoil deposits
Pinus roxburghii, Grevillea striata, Acacia nilotica Acacia modesta, Ziziphus mauritiana Cassia fistula, Alestonia scholaris, Morus alba, Gravillea robusta, Bohimia variegata
Labor camps
Cestrum noctumum, Ficus elastic, Hibiscus sp. Rosa rubiginos, Rosa berifolia, Jasmine sp. Cestrum nocturnum, Lawsonia inermis
Powerhouse area
Cestrum nocturnum, Rosa berifolia,Verticillatasp. Rosa rubiginos
WAPDA August 2011
B-5
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Table B.5:
Bird Species Observed During Survey Common Name
Zoological Name
Family
1
Black Redstart
Phoenicurus ochruros
Muscicapidae
2
Eurasian Blackbird
Turdus merula
Muscicapidae
3
Blue-whistling Thrush
Myophonus caeruleus
Muscicapidae
4
Blue Rock Thrush
Montocola solitaries
Muscicapidae
5
Desert Wheatear
Oenanthe deserti
Muscicapidae
6
Plain Martin
Riparia diluta
Hirundinidae
7
Common Rose Finch
Carpodacus erythrinus
Fringillidae
8
Common Starling
Sturnus vulgaris
Sturnidae
9
Common Myna
Acridotheres tristris
Sturnidae
10
Bank Myna
Acridotheres ginginianus
Sturnidae
11
White Wagtail
Motacilla alba
Motacillidae
12
White Browed Wagtail
Motacilla maderaspatensis
Motacillidae
13
Golden Oriole
Oriolus oriolus
Oriolidae
14
Common Babbler
Turdoides caudatus
Sylviidae
15
Jungle Babbler
Turdoides striatus
Sylviidae
16
Common Chiffchaff
Phylloscopus collybita
Phyllooscopidae
17
Greenish Warbler
Phylloscopus trochiloides
Sylviidae
18
Crested Lark
Galerida cristata
Alaudidae
19
House Sparrow
Passer domestica
Passeridae
20
White-throated Kingfisher
Halcyon smyrnensis
Alcedinidae
21
Long Tail Shrike
Lanius schach
Laniidae
22
White-cheeked bulbul
Pycnonotus leucogenys
Pycnonotidae
23
Red-vented Bulbul
Pycnonotus cafer
Pycnonotidae
24
Black Kite
Milvus migrans
Accipitridae
25
Eurasian Sparrowhawk
Accipter nisus
Accipitridae
26
Common Kestrel
Falco tinnunculus
Falconidae
27
Black Francolin
Francolinus francolinus
Phasianidae
28
Grey Francolin
Francolinus pondicerianus
Phasianidae
29
Rock Pigeon
Columba livia
Columbidae
30
Oriental Turtle Dove
Streptopelia orintalis
Columbidae
31
Laughing Dove
Streptopelia senegalensis
Columbidae
32
Eurasian Collared Dove
Streptopelia decaocta
Columbidae
33
Common Sandpiper
Actitis hypoleucos
Scolopacidae
34
Little Stint
Calidris minuta
Scolopacidae
35
Eurasian Cuckoo
Cuculus canorus
Cuculidae
WAPDA August 2011
B-6
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Common Name
Zoological Name
Family
36
Common Hoope
Upupa epops
Upupidae
37
Mallard
Anus Platyrhynchos
Anatidae
38
Common Moorhen
Gallinula Choloropus
Rallidae
39
Common Coot
Fulica atra
Rallidae
40
Little Grebe
Tachybaptus ruficollis
Podicipedidae
41
Little Cormorant
Phalacrocorax niger
Phalacrocoracidae
42
Little Egret
Egretta garzetta
Ardeidae
43
Cattle Egret
Bubulcus ibis
Ardeidae
44
Pond Heron
Ardeola grayii
Ardeidae
45
Common Snipe
Gallinago Gallinago
Scolopacidae
46
Red-wattled Lapwing
Vanellusindicus
Caradriidae
47
Rufous Tree Pie
Dendrocitta vagabunda
Corvidae
48
House Crow
Corvus Splendens
Corvidae
49
Black Drongo
Dicrurus macrocercus
Corvidae
50
Blue Throat
Erithacus svecicus
Muscicapidae
51
Caspian Tern
Sterna caspia
Rallidae
52
Peedy filed Pipet
Anthus rufulus
Motacillidae
Table B.6:
Common Fish Species in the Tarbela Dam Reservoir
Local Name
Scientific Name
Indigenous Species Seenghara
Mystus seenghala
Seenghara
Mystus aor
Masher
Tor tor, Tor putitora
Mullah
Schizothorax spp.
Goonch
Bagarius bagarius
Sunnee
Cirrhinus reba
Daula Saul Mullee
Channa punctatus Channa marulius Wallago attu
Talapia
Oreochromis mosombica
Bam
Mastacembelus armatus
Pari
Notopterus notopterus
Sareeha Kharni
Labeo gonius Puntius sarana
Cultivated Species
WAPDA August 2011
B-7
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Local Name
Scientific Name
Mori
Cirrhinus mrigala
Rohu
Labeo rohita
Thaila
Catla catla
Grass carp
Ctenophary ngodon idella
Silver carp
Hypophthalmichthys molitrix
Gulfam
Cyprinus carpio
Source WAPDA Fisheries Unit, Tarbela
Table B.7:
Species of Tarbela and Ghazi Barrage Reservoirs Species
Family
Local Name
Endemic species 1
Notopterus notopterus (Pallas)
Notopteridae
Pari
2
Salmostoma bacaila (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Chilwa
3
Barilius vagra (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Chilwa
4
Danio devario (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Poongh
5
Schizothorax labiatus (McClelland)
Cyprinidae
Chun
6
Schizothoraz esocinus (Heckel)
Cyprinidae
Swati
7
Schizothorax plagistomus (Heckel)
Cyprinidae
Swati
8
Gara gotyla (Grey)
Cyprinidae
Pathar chatt
9
Aspidoparia morar (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Goloo
10
Crossochelius latius diplocheilus (Heckel)
Cyprinidae
Poonngh
11
Labeo dero (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Mori
12
Tor Putitora (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Mahasheer
13
Puntious sophore (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Chiddu
14
Punctius ticto (Hamilton)
Cyprinidae
Chiddu
15
Botia dayi (Hora)
Cobitidae
Chipper
16
Nemacheilus choprai (Hora)
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
17
Nemacheilus botia (Hamilton)
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
18
Nemacheilus alipidotus alipidotus (Mirza &
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
Banarescu) 19
Nemacheilus corica (Hamilton)
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
20
Nemacheilus stoliczkai (Steindachner)
Nemacheilidae
Zebra
21
Clupisoma murius naziri (Mirza & Awan)
Schilbeidae
22
Glyptothorax punjabiensis (Mirza & Kashmiri)
Sisoridae
Chotat Khagga
23
Glyptothorax platypogonoides (Bleeker)
Sisoridae
Chota Khagga
24
Gagta cenia (Hamilton)
Sisoridae
Peela Kingar
WAPDA August 2011
B-8
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment Species
Family
Local Name
25
Mystus tengara (Hamilton)
Bagridae
Kingar
26
Colisia lalius (Hamilton)
Belontidae
Kanghi
27
Mastacembelus armatus (Lecapede)
Mastacemblidae
Sanp Machli
28
Channa punctatus (Bloch)
Channidae
Dola
1
Channa marulia (Hamilton)
Channidae
Saul
2
Ctenopharyngodon idella (Valenceinnes)
Cyprinidae
Grass Carp
3
Hypophthalmichthys molitrix (Valenceinnes)
Cyprinidae
Silver Carp
4
Cyprinus carpio (Linnaeus)
Cyprinidae
Grass Carp
5
Oreochromis niloticus (Linnaeus)
Cichlidae
Toffee
Exotic Species
WAPDA August 2011
B-9
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Annex C.
Environmental Code of Practice
Introduction
The objective of preparation of the Environmental Code of Practices (ECP) is to address less significant environmental impacts and all general construction related impacts of the proposed project implementation. The ECPs will provide guidelines for best operating practices and environmental management guidelines to be followed by the contractors for sustainable management of all environmental issues. This ECP will be annexed in the general conditions of all the contracts carried out under the T4HP project. The list of ECPs prepared for the T4HP is given below:
ECP 1: Waste Management
ECP 2: Fuels and Hazardous Substances Management
ECP 3: Water Resources Management
ECP 4: Drainage Management
ECP 5: Soil Quality Management
ECP 6: Erosion and Sediment Control
ECP 7: Borrow Areas Development & Operation
ECP 8: Air Quality Management
ECP 9: Noise and Vibration Management
ECP 10: Protection of Flora
ECP 11: Protection of Fauna
ECP 12: Protection of Fisheries
ECP 13: Road Transport and Road Traffic Management
ECP 14: Construction Camp Management
ECP 15: Cultural and Religious Issues
ECP 16: Workers Health and Safety
The Contractor can also prepare a ‘Construction Environmental Action Plan’ (CEAP) demonstrating the manner in which the Contractor will comply with the requirements of ECPs and the mitigation measures proposed in the EMMP of the ESA Report. The CEAP will form the part of the contract documents and will be used as monitoring tool for compliance. Violation of the compliance requirements will be treated as non-compliance leading to the corrections or otherwise imposing penalty on the contractors.
WAPDA August 2011
C-1
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 1: Waste Management Project Activity/ Impact Source General Waste
Hazardous Waste
Environmental Impacts Soil and water pollution from the improper management of wastes and excess materials from the construction sites.
Health hazards and environmental impacts due to improper waste management practices
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines The Contractor shall: - Develop waste management plan for various specific waste streams (e.g., reusable waste, flammable waste, construction debris, food waste etc.) prior to commencing of construction and submit to WAPDA for approval. - Organize disposal of all wastes generated during construction in an environmentally acceptable manner. This will include consideration of the nature and location of disposal site, so as to cause less environmental impact. - Minimize the production of waste materials by 3R (Reduce, Recycle and Reuse) approach. - Segregate and reuse or recycle all the wastes, wherever practical. - Collect and transport non-hazardous wastes to all the approved disposal sites. - Train and instruct all personnel in waste management practices and procedures as a component of the environmental induction process. - Provide refuse containers at each worksite. - Request suppliers to minimize packaging where practicable. - Place a high emphasis on good housekeeping practices. - Maintain all construction sites in a cleaner, tidy and safe condition and provide and maintain appropriate facilities as temporary storage of all wastes before transportation and final disposal. The Contractor shall:
- Collect chemical wastes in 200 liter drums (or
-
WAPDA August 2011
similar sealed container), appropriately labeled for safe transport to an approved chemical waste depot. Store, transport and handle all chemicals avoiding potential environmental pollution. Store all hazardous wastes appropriately in bunded areas away from water courses. Make available Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for hazardous materials on-site during construction. Collect hydrocarbon wastes, including lube oils, for safe transport off-site for reuse, recycling, treatment or disposal at approved locations. Construct concrete or other impermeable flooring to prevent seepage in case of spills
C-2
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 2: Fuels and Hazardous Substance Management Project Activity/ Impact Source
Environmental Impacts
Fuels and Materials used in hazardous construction have a goods. potential to be a source of contamination. Improper storage and handling of fuels, lubricants, chemicals and hazardous goods/materials on-site, and potential spills from these goods may harm the environment or health of construction workers.
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
The Contractor shall:
- Prepare spill control procedures and submit the plan for WAPDA approval.
- Train the relevant construction personnel in -
-
-
-
-
WAPDA August 2011
handling of fuels and spill control procedures. Store dangerous goods in bunded areas on a top of a sealed plastic sheet away from watercourses. Refueling should occur only within bunded areas. Make available MSDS for chemicals and dangerous goods on-site. Transport waste of dangerous goods, which cannot be recycled, to a designated disposal site approved by EPA. Provide absorbent and containment material (e.g., absorbent matting) where hazardous material are used and stored and personnel trained in the correct use. Provide protective clothing, safety boots, helmets, masks, gloves, goggles, to the construction personnel, appropriate to materials in use. Make sure all containers, drums, and tanks that are used for storage are in good condition and are labeled with expiry date. Any container, drum, or tank that is dented, cracked, or rusted might eventually leak. Check for leakage regularly to identify potential problems before they occur. Store hazardous materials above flood plain level. Put containers and drums in temporary storages in clearly marked areas, where they will not be run over by vehicles or heavy machinery. The area should preferably slope or drain to a safe collection area in the event of a spill. Put containers and drums in permanent storage areas on an impermeable floor that slopes to a safe collection area in the event of a spill or leak. Take all precautionary measures when handling and storing fuels and lubricants, avoiding environmental pollution. Avoid the use of material with greater potential for contamination by substituting them with more environmentally friendly materials.
C-3
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 3: Water Resources Management Project Activity/ Impact Source
Environmental Impacts
Hazardous Water pollution from the Material and storage, handling and Waste disposal of hazardous materials and general construction waste, and accidental spillage
Discharge from During construction both construction surface and groundwater sites quality may be deteriorated due to construction activities in the river, sewerages from construction sites and work camps. The construction works will modify groundcover and topography changing the surface water drainage patterns, including infiltration and storage of storm water. The change in hydrological regime leads to increased rate of runoff and in sediment and contaminant loading, increased flooding, groundwater contamination, and effect habitat of fish and other aquatic biology. Soil Erosion Soil erosion and dust and siltation from the material stockpiles will increase the sediment and contaminant loading of surface water bodies.
WAPDA August 2011
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines The Contractor shall:
- Follow the management guidelines proposed in ECPs 1 and 2.
- Minimize the generation of sediment, oil and grease, excess nutrients, organic matter, litter, debris and any form of waste (particularly petroleum and chemical wastes). These substances must not enter waterways, storm water systems or underground water tables The Contractor shall:
- Install temporary drainage works (channels and bunds) in areas required for sediment and erosion control and around storage areas for construction materials - Install temporary sediment basins, where appropriate, to capture sediment-laden run-off from site - Divert runoff from undisturbed areas around the construction site - Stockpile materials away from drainage lines - Prevent all solid and liquid wastes entering waterways by collecting solid waste, oils, chemicals, bitumen spray waste and wastewaters from brick, concrete and asphalt cutting where possible and transport to a approved waste disposal site or recycling depot - Wash out ready-mix concrete agitators and concrete handling equipment at washing facilities off site or into approved bunded areas on site. Ensure that tires of construction vehicles are cleaned in the washing bay (constructed at the entrance of the construction site) to remove the mud from the wheels. This should be done in every exit of each construction vehicle to ensure the local roads are kept clean. The Contractor shall:
- Stabilize the cleared areas not used for construction activities with vegetation or appropriate surface water treatments as soon as practicable following earthwork to minimize erosion - Ensure that roads used by construction vehicles are swept regularly to remove sediment. - Water the material stockpiles, access roads and bare soils on an as required basis to minimize dust. Increase the watering frequency during
C-4
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activity/ Impact Source
Environmental Impacts
Construction Construction works in the activities in water bodies will increase water bodies sediment and contaminant loading, and effect habitat of fish and other aquatic biology.
Drinking water
Groundwater at shallow depths might be contaminated and hence not suitable for drinking purposes.
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines periods of high risk (e.g. high winds) The Contractor shall:
- Dewater sites by pumping water to a sediment basin prior to release off site – do not pump directly off site - Monitor the water quality in the runoff from the site or areas affected by dredge plumes, and improve work practices as necessary - Protect water bodies from sediment loads by silt screen or bubble curtains or other barriers - Minimize the generation of sediment, oil and grease, excess nutrients, organic matter, litter, debris and any form of waste (particularly petroleum and chemical wastes). These substances must not enter waterways, storm water systems or underground water tables. - Use environment friendly and non toxic slurry during construction of piles to discharge into the river. - Reduce infiltration of contaminated drainage through storm water management design - Do not discharge cement and water curing used for cement concrete directly into water courses and drainage inlets. The Contractor shall:
- Control the quality of groundwater to be used
-
Depletion and pollution of groundwater resources
-
-
WAPDA August 2011
for drinking water on the bases of NEQS and World Bank standards for drinking water. Safe and sustainable discharges are to be ascertained prior to selection of pumps. Tube wells will be installed with due regard for the surface environment, protection of groundwater from surface contaminants, and protection of aquifer cross contamination All tube wells, test holes, monitoring wells that are no longer in use or needed shall be properly decommissioned Install monitoring wells both upstream and downstream areas near construction yards and construction camps to regularly monitor and report on the water quality and water levels. Protect groundwater supplies of adjacent lands
C-5
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 4: Drainage Management Project Activity/ Impact Source Excavation and earth works, and construction yards
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
Lack of proper drainage for rainwater/liquid waste or wastewater owing to the construction activities harms environment in terms of water and soil contamination, and mosquito growth.
The Contractor shall:
- Prepare a program for prevent/avoid standing -
-
-
-
Ponding water
of Health hazards due to mosquito breeding
-
WAPDA August 2011
waters, which EMSU will verify in advance and confirm during implementation Provide alternative drainage for rainwater if the construction works/earth-fillings cut the established drainage line Establish local drainage line with appropriate silt collector and silt screen for rainwater or wastewater connecting to the existing established drainage lines already there. Rehabilitate road drainage structures immediately if damaged by contractors’ road transports. Build new drainage lines as appropriate and required for wastewater from construction yards connecting to the available nearby recipient water bodies. Ensure wastewater quality conforms to the relevant standards provided by EPA, before it being discharged into recipient water bodies. Ensure the internal roads/hard surfaces in the construction yards/construction camps that generate has storm water drainage to accommodate high runoff during downpour and that there is no stagnant water in the area at the end of the downpour. Construct wide drains instead of deep drains to avoid sand deposition in the drains that require frequent cleaning. Provide appropriate silt collector and silt screen at the inlet and manholes and periodically clean the drainage system to avoid drainage congestion Protect natural slopes of drainage channels to ensure adequate storm water drains. Regularly inspect and maintain all drainage channels to assess and alleviate any drainage congestion problem. Reduce infiltration of contaminated drainage through storm water management design Do not allow ponding of water especially near the waste storage areas and construction camps Discard all the storage containers that are capable of storing of water, after use or store them in inverted position
C-6
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 5: Soil Quality Management Project Activity/ Impact Source
Environmental Impacts
Storage of Spillage of hazardous hazardous and and toxic chemicals will toxic chemicals contaminate the soils
Construction Erosion from material stock construction material piles stockpiles may contaminate the soils
WAPDA August 2011
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines The Contractor shall:
- Strictly manage the wastes management plans proposed in ECP1 and storage of materials in ECP2 - Construct appropriate spill contaminant facilities for all fuel storage areas - Establish and maintain a hazardous materials register detailing the location and quantities of hazardous substances including the storage, use of disposals - Train personnel and implement safe work practices for minimizing the risk of spillage - Identify the cause of contamination, if it is reported, and contain the area of contamination. The impact may be contained by isolating the source or implementing controls around the affected site - Remediate the contaminated land using the most appropriate available method to achieve required commercial/industrial guideline validation results The Contractor shall:
- Protect the toe of all stockpiles, where erosion is likely to occur, with silt fences, straw bales or bunds
C-7
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 6: Erosion and Sediment Control Project Activity/ Impact Source Clearing of construction sites
Construction activities and material stockpiles
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
Cleared areas and slopes are susceptible for erosion of top soils, that affects the growth of vegetation which causes ecological imbalance.
The Contractor shall:
The impact of soil erosion are (i) Increased run off and sedimentation causing a greater flood hazard to the downstream, (ii) destruction of aquatic environment in nearby lakes, streams, and reservoirs caused by erosion and/or deposition of sediment damaging the spawning grounds of fish, and (iii) destruction of vegetation by burying or gullying.
WAPDA August 2011
- Reinstate and protect cleared areas as soon as possible.
- Mulch to protect batter slopes before planting - Cover unused area of disturbed or exposed surfaces immediately with mulch/grass turfings/tree plantations The Contractor shall:
- Locate stockpiles away from drainage lines - Protect the toe of all stockpiles, where erosion -
is likely to occur, with silt fences, straw bales or bunds Remove debris from drainage paths and sediment control structures Cover the loose sediments and water them if required Divert natural runoff around construction areas prior to any site disturbance Install protective measures on site prior to construction, for example, sediment traps Control drainage through a site in protected channels or slope drains Install ‘cut off drains’ on large cut/fill batter slopes to control water runoff speed and hence erosion Observe the performance of drainage structures and erosion controls during rain and modify as required.
C-8
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 7: Borrow Areas Development & Operation Project Activity/ Impact Source Development and operation of borrow areas
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
In case, the borrow pits developed by the Contractor, there will be impacts on local topography, landscaping and natural drainage.
The Contractor shall:
- Reuse excavated or disposed material available in the project area to the maximum extent possible - Identify borrow pits in consultation with the local governments and WAPDA. - Obtain the borrow material from: - barren land or land without tree cover outside the road reserve; - Do not dug the borrow pits within 5m of the toe of the final section of the road embankment. - Dig the borrow pits continuously. Ridges of not less than 8 m widths shall be left at intervals not exceeding 300 m and small drains should be cut through the ridges to facilitate drainage - Slope the bed level of the borrow pits, as far as possible, down progressively towards the nearest cross drain, if any, and do not lower it than the bed of the cross-drain, to ensure efficient drainage. . Follow the below for restoration of borrow areas are:
- Return stockpiled topsoil to the borrow pit if is used for agriculture;
- return stockpiled topsoil to the borrow pit and all worked areas to be stabilized through revegetation using local plants. - Control at each site by ensuring that base of the borrow pit drains into a sediment trap prior to discharging from the site.
WAPDA August 2011
C-9
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 8: Air Quality Management Project Activity/ Impact Source Construction vehicular traffic
Construction machinery
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
Air quality can be adversely affected by vehicle exhaust emissions and combustion of fuels.
The Contractor shall:
Air quality can be adversely affected by emissions from machinery and combustion of fuels.
- Fit vehicles with appropriate exhaust systems and emission control devices, in compliance with the NEQS. Maintain these devices in good working condition. - Operate the vehicles in a fuel efficient manner - Cover haul vehicles carrying dusty materials moving outside the construction site - Impose speed limits on all vehicle movement at the worksite to reduce dust emissions - Control the movement of construction traffic - Water construction materials prior to loading and transport - Service all vehicles regularly to minimize emissions - Limit the idling time of vehicles not more than 2 minutes The Contractor shall:
- Fit machinery with appropriate exhaust systems -
Construction activities
Dust generation from construction sites, material stockpiles and access roads is a nuisance in the environment and can be a health hazard.
-
-
-
WAPDA August 2011
and emission control devices. Maintain these devices in good working condition. Focus special attention on containing the emissions from generators Machinery causing excess pollution (e.g. visible smoke) will be banned from construction sites Service all equipment regularly to minimize emissions Water the material stockpiles, access roads and bare soils on an as required basis to minimize the potential for environmental nuisance due to dust. Increase the watering frequency during periods of high risk (e.g. high winds) Minimize the extent and period of exposure of the bare surfaces Reschedule earthwork activities or vegetation clearing activities, where practical, if necessary to avoid during periods of high wind and if visible dust is blowing off-site Restore disturbed areas as soon as practicable by vegetation/grass-turfing Store the cement in silos and minimize the emissions from silos by equipping them with filters.
C-10
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 9: Noise and Vibration Management Project Activity/ Impact Source Construction vehicular traffic
Construction machinery
Construction activity
WAPDA August 2011
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
Noise quality will be deteriorated due to vehicular traffic
The Contractor shall:
- Maintain all vehicles in order to keep it in good working order in accordance with manufactures maintenance procedures - Make sure all drivers will comply with the traffic codes concerning maximum speed limit, driving hours, etc. The Contractor shall:
Noise and vibration may have an impact on people, - Appropriately site all noise generating activities property, fauna, livestock to avoid noise pollution to local residents and the natural - Use the quietest available plant and equipment environment. - Modify equipment to reduce noise (for example, noise control kits, lining of truck trays or pipelines) - Maintain all equipment in order to keep it in good working order in accordance with manufactures maintenance procedures - Install acoustic enclosures around generators to reduce noise levels. - Fit high efficiency mufflers to appropriate construction equipment Noise and vibration may The Contractor shall: have an impact on people, - Notify adjacent residents prior to any typical property, fauna, livestock noise event outside of daylight hours and the natural - Educate the operators of construction environment. equipment on potential noise problems and the techniques to minimize noise emissions - Employ best available work practices on-site to minimize occupational noise levels - Install temporary noise control barriers where appropriate - Notify affected people if noisy activities will be undertaken, e.g. blasting - Plan activities on site and deliveries to and from site to minimize impact - Monitor and analyze noise and vibration results and adjust construction practices as required. - Avoid undertaking the noisiest activities, where possible, when working at night near the residential areas
C-11
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 10: Protection of Flora Project Activity/ Impact Source Vegetation clearance
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
Local flora are important to provide shelters for the birds, offer fruits and/or timber/fire wood, protect soil erosion and overall keep the environment very friendly to humanliving. As such damage to flora has wide range of adverse environmental impacts.
The Contractor shall:
- Reduce disturbance to surrounding vegetation - Use appropriate type and minimum size of -
-
-
-
WAPDA August 2011
machine to avoid disturbance to adjacent vegetations. Get approval from supervision consultant for clearance of vegetation. Make selective and careful pruning of trees where possible to reduce need of tree removal. Control noxious weeds by disposing of at designated dump site or burn on site. Clear only the vegetation that needs to be cleared in accordance with the plans. These measures are applicable to both the construction areas as well as to any associated activities such as sites for stockpiles, disposal of fill and construction of diversion roads, etc. Do not burn off cleared vegetation – where feasible, chip or mulch and reuse it for the rehabilitation of affected areas, temporary access tracks or landscaping. Mulch provides a seed source, can limit embankment erosion, retains soil moisture and nutrients, and encourages re-growth and protection from weeds. Return topsoil and mulched vegetation (in areas of native vegetation) to approximately the same area of the roadside it came from. Avoid work within the drip-line of trees to prevent damage to the tree roots and compacting the soil. Minimize the length of time the ground is exposed or excavation left open by clearing and re-vegetate the area at the earliest practically possible. Ensure excavation works occur progressively and re-vegetation done at the earliest Provide adequate knowledge to the workers regarding nature protection and the need of avoid felling trees during construction Supply appropriate fuel in the work caps to prevent fuel wood collection
C-12
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 11: Protection of Fauna Project Activity/ Impact Source Construction activities
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
The location of construction activities can result in the loss of wild life habitat and habitat quality,.
The Contractor shall:
Impact on migratory birds, its habitat and its active nests
- Limit the construction works within the designated sites allocated to the contractors
- check the site for animals trapped in, or in danger from site works and use a qualified person to relocate the animal The Contractor shall:
- Not be permitted to destruct active nests or eggs of migratory birds
- Minimize the tree removal during the bird
Vegetation clearance
Construction camps
WAPDA August 2011
Clearance of vegetation may impact shelter, feeding and/or breeding and/or physical destruction and severing of habitat areas
Illegal poaching
breeding season. If works must be continued during the bird breeding season, a nest survey will be conducted by a qualified biologist prior to commence of works to identify and located active nests - Minimize the release of oil, oil wastes or any other substances harmful to migratory birds to any waters or any areas frequented by migratory birds. The Contractor shall:
- Restrict the tree removal to the minimum required.
- Retain tree hollows on site, or relocate hollows, where appropriate - Leave dead trees where possible as habitat for fauna - Fell the hollow bearing trees in a manner which reduces the potential for fauna mortality. Felled trees will be inspected after felling for fauna and if identified and readily accessible will be removed and relocated or rendered assistance if injured. After felling, hollow bearing trees will remain unmoved overnight to allow animals to move of their own volition. - Provide adequate knowledge to the workers regarding protection of flora and fauna, and relevant government regulations and punishments for illegal poaching.
C-13
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 12: Protection of Fisheries Project Activity/ Impact Source
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
Construction activities in River
The main potential impacts to fisheries are hydrocarbon spills and leaks from boats and disposal of wastes into the river
The Contractor shall:
Construction activities on the land
The main potential impacts to aquatic flora and fauna River are increased suspended solids from earthworks erosion, sanitary discharge from work camps, and hydrocarbon spills
WAPDA August 2011
- Ensure that boats used in the project are well maintained and do not have oil leakage to contaminate river water. - Contain accidental spillage and make an emergency oil spill containment plan to be supported with enough equipments, materials and human resources - Do not dump wastes, be it hazardous or nonhazardous into the nearby water bodies or in the river The Contractor shall:
- follow mitigation measures proposed in ECP 3 : Water Resources Management and EC4: Drainage Management
C-14
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 13: Road Transport and Road Traffic Management Project Activity/ Impact Source Construction vehicular traffic
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
Increased traffic use of road by construction vehicles will affect the movement of normal road traffics and the safety of the road-users.
The Contractor shall:
- Prepare and submit a traffic management plan
-
-
-
Accidents and spillage of fuels and chemicals
-
WAPDA August 2011
to WAPDA for their approval at least 30 days before commencing work on any project component involved in traffic diversion and management. Include in the traffic management plan to ensure uninterrupted traffic movement during construction: detailed drawings of traffic arrangements showing all detours, temporary road, temporary diversions, necessary barricades, warning signs/lights, road signs, etc. Provide signs at strategic locations of the roads complying with the schedules of signs contained in the Pakistani Traffic Regulations. Install and maintain a display board at each important road intersection on the roads to be used during construction, which shall clearly show the following information in Urdu: Location: chainage and village name Duration of construction period Period of proposed detour/alternative route Suggested detour route map Name and contact address/telephone number of the concerned personnel Name and contact address/telephone number of the Contractor Inconvenience is sincerely regretted. Restrict truck deliveries, where practicable, to day time working hours. Restrict the transport of oversize loads. Operate road traffics/transport vehicles, if possible, to non-peak periods to minimize traffic disruptions. Enforce on-site speed limit
C-15
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 14: Construction Camp Management Project Activity/ Impact Source
Environmental Impacts
Siting and Location of construction camps
Campsites for construction workers are the important locations that have significant impacts such as health and safety hazards on local resources and infrastructure of nearby communities.
Construction Camp Facilities
Lack of proper infrastructure facilities, such as housing, water supply and sanitation facilities will increase pressure on the local services and generate substandard living standards and health hazards.
WAPDA August 2011
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines The Contractor shall:
- Locate the construction camps at areas which are acceptable from environmental, cultural or social point of view. - Consider the location of construction camps away from communities in order to avoid social conflict in using the natural resources such as water or to avoid the possible adverse impacts of the construction camps on the surrounding communities. - Submit to the PMU for approval a detailed layout plan for the development of the construction camp showing the relative locations of all temporary buildings and facilities that are to be constructed together with the location of site roads, fuel storage areas (for use in power supply generators), solid waste management and dumping locations, and drainage facilities, prior to the development of the construction camps. - Local authorities responsible for health, religious and security shall be duly informed on the set up of camp facilities so as to maintain effective surveillance over public health, social and security matters Contractor shall provide the following facilities in the campsites:
- Adequate housing for all workers - Safe and reliable water supply. Water supply from tube wells that meets the national standards - Hygienic sanitary facilities and sewerage system. The toilets and domestic waste water will be collected through a common sewerage. Provide separate latrines and bathing places for males and females with total isolation by wall or by location. Female toilets should be clearly marked in language understood by the persons using them to avoid miscommunication. The minimum number of toilet facilities required is one toilet for every ten persons. - Treatment facilities for sewerage of toilet and domestic wastes - Storm water drainage facilities. Both sides of roads are to be provided with shallow v drains to drain off storm water to a silt retention pond which shall be sized to provide a minimum of 20 minutes retention of storm water flow from the
C-16
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activity/ Impact Source
Disposal of waste
Environmental Impacts
Management of wastes is crucial to minimize impacts on the environment
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines whole site. Channel all discharge from the silt retention pond to natural drainage via a grassed swale at least 20 meters in length with suitable longitudinal gradient. - Paved internal roads. Ensure with grass/vegetation coverage to be made of the use of top soil that there is no dust generation from the loose/exposed sandy surface. Pave the internal roads of at least haring-bond bricks to suppress dusts and to work against possible muddy surface during monsoon. - Provide child crèches for women working on the construction site. The crèche should have facilities for dormitory, kitchen, indoor/outdoor play area. Schools should be attached to these crèches so that children are not deprived of education whose mothers are construction workers - Provide in-house community/common entertainment facilities. Dependence of local entertainment outlets by construction camps to be discouraged/prohibited to the extent possible. The Contractor shall:
- Ensure proper collection and disposal of solid -
-
-
WAPDA August 2011
wastes within the construction camps Insist waste separation by source; organic wastes in one pot and inorganic wastes in another pot at household level. Store inorganic wastes in a safe place within the household and clear organic wastes on daily basis to waste collector. Establish waste collection, transportation and disposal systems with the manpower and equipments/vehicles needed. Dispose organic wastes in a designated safe place on daily basis. At the end of the day cover the organic wastes with a thin layer of sand so that flies, mosquitoes, dogs, cats, rats, are not attracted. One may dig a large hole to put organic wastes in it; take care to protect groundwater from contamination by leachate formed due to decomposition. Cover the bed of the pit with impervious layer of materials (clayey, thin concrete) to protect groundwater from contamination. Locate the garbage pit/waste disposal site min 500 m away from the residence so that peoples are not disturbed with the odor likely to be produced from anaerobic decomposition of wastes at the waste dumping places. Encompass
C-17
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activity/ Impact Source
Environmental Impacts
Fuel supplies for cooking purposes
Illegal sourcing of fuel wood by construction workers will impact the natural flora and fauna
Health and Hygiene
There will be a potential for diseases to be transmitted including malaria, exacerbated by inadequate health and safety practices. There will be an increased risk of work crews spreading sexually transmitted infections and HIV/AIDS.
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines the waste dumping place by fencing and tree plantation to prevent children to enter and play with. - Do not establish site specific landfill sites. All solid waste will be collected and removed from the work camps and disposed in approval waste disposal sites. The Contractor shall:
- Provide fuel to the construction camps for their domestic purpose, in order to discourage them to use fuel wood or other biomass. - Make available alternative fuels like natural gas or kerosene on ration to the workforce to prevent them using biomass for cooking. - Conduct awareness campaigns to educate workers on preserving the protecting of biodiversity in the project area, and relevant government regulations and punishments on wildlife protection. The Contractor shall:
- Provide adequate health care facilities within construction sites.
- Provide first aid facility round the clock. -
-
-
WAPDA August 2011
Maintain stock of medicines in the facility and appoint fulltime designated first aider or nurse. Provide ambulance facility for the laborers during emergency to be transported to nearest hospitals. Initial health screening of the laborers coming from outside areas Train all construction workers in basic sanitation and health care issues and safety matters, and on the specific hazards of their work Provide HIV awareness programming, including STI (sexually transmitted infections) and HIV information, education and communication for all workers on regular basis Complement educational interventions with easy access to condoms at campsites as well as voluntary 18counseling and testing Provide adequate drainage facilities throughout camps to ensure that disease vectors habitats (stagnant water bodies, puddles) do not form. Regular mosquito repellant sprays in monsoon. Carryout short training sessions on best hygiene practices to be mandatorily participated by all workers. Place display boards at strategic locations within the camps containing messages on best hygienic practices
C-18
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activity/ Impact Source Safety
Site Restoration
Environmental Impacts In adequate safety facilities to the construction camps may create security problems and fire hazards
Restoration of the construction camps to original condition requires demolition of construction camps.
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines The Contractor shall:
- Provide appropriate security personnel (police / home guard or private security guards) and enclosures to prevent unauthorized entry in to the camp area. - Maintain register to keep track on a head count of persons present in the camp at any given time. - Encourage use of flameproof material for the construction of labor housing/site office. Ensure that these houses/rooms are of sound construction and capable of withstanding storms/cyclones. - Provide appropriate type of fire fighting equipments suitable for the construction camps - Display emergency contact numbers clearly and prominently at strategic places in camps. - Communicate the roles and responsibilities of laborers in case of emergency in the monthly meetings with contractors. The Contractor shall:
- Dismantle and remove from the site all facilities
-
-
-
WAPDA August 2011
established within the construction camp including the perimeter fence and lockable gates at the completion of the construction work. Dismantle camps in phases as the work decreases (do not wait for completion of the entire work. Give prior notice to the laborers before demolishing their camps/units Maintain the noise levels within the national standards during demolition activities Different contractors should be hired to demolish different structures to promote recycling or reuse of demolished material. Reuse the demolition debris to a maximum extent. Dispose remaining debris at the designated waste disposal site by WAPDA. Handover the construction camps with all built facilities as it is if agreement between both parties (contactor and land-owner) has been made so. Restore the site to its original condition or to an agreed condition with the landowner defined prior to the commencement of the works (in writing). Not make false promises to the laborers for future employment in O&M of the project.
C-19
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 15: Cultural and Religious Issues Project Activity/ Impact Source Construction activities near religious and cultural sites
WAPDA August 2011
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
Disturbance from The Contractor shall: construction works to - Communicate to the public through community the cultural and religious consultation and newspaper announcements sites, and contractors regarding the scope and schedule of construction, lack of knowledge on as well as certain construction activities causing cultural issues cause disruptions or access restriction. - Do not block access to cultural and religious social disturbances. sites, wherever possible - Restrict all construction activities within the foot prints of the construction sites. - Stop construction works that produce noise (particularly during prayer time) should there be any mosque/religious/educational institutions close to the construction sites and users make objections. - Take special care and use appropriate equipment when working next to a cultural/religious institution. - Stop work immediately and notify the site manager if, during construction, an archaeological or burial site is discovered. It is an offence to recommence work in the vicinity of the site until approval to continue is given by the PMU - Provide separate prayer facilities to the construction workers. - Show appropriate behavior with all construction workers especially women and elderly people - Allow the workers to participate in praying during construction time - Resolve cultural issues in consultation with local leaders and supervision consultants - Establish a mechanism that allows local people to raise grievances arising from the construction process. - Inform the local authorities responsible for health, religious and security duly informed before commencement of civil works so as to maintain effective surveillance over public health, social and security matters
C-20
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
ECP 16: Worker Health and Safety Project Activity/ Impact Source Best practices
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
Construction works may pose health and safety risks to the construction workers and site visitors leading to severe injuries and deaths. The population in the proximity of the construction site and the construction workers will be exposed to a number of (i) biophysical health risk factors, (e.g. noise, dust, chemicals, construction material, solid waste, waste water, vector transmitted diseases etc), (ii) risk factors resulting from human behavior (e.g. STD, HIV etc) and (iii) road accidents from construction traffic.
The Contractor shall:
Child and pregnant labor
- Implement suitable safety standards for all workers and site visitors which should not be less than those laid down on the international standards (e.g. International Labor Office guideline on ‘Safety and Health in Construction; World Bank Group’s ‘Environmental Health and Safety Guidelines’) and contractor’s own national standards or statutory regulations, in addition to complying with the national acts and rules of the Government of Pakistan - Provide the workers with a safe and healthy work environment, taking into account inherent risks in its particular construction activity and specific classes of hazards in the work areas, - Provide personal protection equipment (PPE) for workers, such as safety boots, helmets, masks, gloves, protective clothing, goggles, full-face eye shields, and ear protection. Maintain the PPE properly by cleaning dirty ones and replacing them with the damaged ones. - Safety procedures include provision of information, training and protective clothing to workers involved in hazardous operations and proper performance of their job - Appoint an environment, health and safety manager to look after the health and safety of the workers - Inform the local authorities responsible for health, religious and security duly informed before commencement of civil works and establishment of construction camps so as to maintain effective surveillance over public health, social and security matters The Contractor shall:
- not hire children of less than 14 years of age
Accidents
WAPDA August 2011
Lack of first aid facilities and health care facilities in the immediate vicinity will aggravate the health
and pregnant women or women who delivered a child within 8 preceding weeks, in accordance with the Pakistani Labor Laws and Employment of Child Act (1977). - Provide health care facilities and first aid facilities are readily available. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations should be easily accessible throughout the place of work - Document and report occupational accidents,
C-21
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activity/ Impact Source
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines diseases, and incidents.
conditions of the victims
- Prevent accidents, injury, and disease arising
Construction Camps
Lack of proper infrastructure facilities, such as housing, water supply and sanitation facilities will increase pressure on the local services and generate substandard living standards and health hazards.
from, associated with, or occurring in the course of work by minimizing, so far as reasonably practicable, the causes of hazards. In a manner consistent with good international industry practice. - Identify potential hazards to workers, particularly those that may be life-threatening and provide necessary preventive and protective measures. - Provide awareness to the construction drivers to strictly follow the driving rules - Provide adequate lighting in the construction area and along the roads The Contractor shall provide the following facilities in the campsites to improve health and hygienic conditions as mentioned in ECP 14 Construction Camp Management:
- Adequate ventilation facilities - Safe and reliable water supply. Water supply -
Water and sanitation facilities at the construction sites
WAPDA August 2011
Lack of Water sanitation facilities at construction sites cause inconvenience to the construction workers and affect their personal hygiene.
-
from deep tube wells that meets the national standards Hygienic sanitary facilities and sewerage system. The toilets and domestic waste water will be collected through a common sewerage. Treatment facilities for sewerage of toilet and domestic wastes Storm water drainage facilities. Recreational and social facilities Safe storage facilities for petroleum and other chemicals in accordance with ECP 2 Solid waste collection and disposal system in accordance with ECP1. Arrangement for trainings Paved internal roads. Security fence at least two m height. Sick bay and first aid facilities The contractor shall provide portable toilets at the construction sites, if about 25 people are working the whole day for a month. Location of portable facilities should be at least six m away from storm drain system and surface waters. These portable toilets should be cleaned once a day and all the sewerage should be pumped from the collection tank once a day and should be brought to the common septic tank for further treatment.
C-22
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Project Activity/ Impact Source
Environmental Impacts
Mitigation Measures/ Management Guidelines
- Contractor should provide bottled drinking Other ECPs
Potential risks on health and hygiene of construction workers and general public
water facilities to the construction workers at all the construction sites. The Contractor shall follow the following ECPs to reduce health risks to the construction workers and nearby community:
- ECP 2: Fuels and Hazardous Goods Management ECP 4: Drainage Management ECP 8: Air Quality Management ECP 9: Noise and Vibration Management ECP 13: Road Transport and Road Traffic Management The Contractor shall:
Trainings
WAPDA August 2011
Lack of awareness and basic knowledge in health care among the construction workforce, make them susceptible to potential diseases.
- Train all construction workers in basic sanitation and health care issues (e.g., how to avoid malaria and transmission of sexually transmitted infections (STI) HIV/AIDS. - Train all construction workers in general health and safety matters, and on the specific hazards of their work Training should consist of basic hazard awareness, site specific hazards, safe work practices, and emergency procedures for fire, evacuation, and natural disaster, as appropriate. - Commence the malaria, HIV/AIDS and STI education campaign before the start of the construction phase and complement it with by a strong condom marketing, increased access to condoms in the area as well as to voluntary counseling and testing. - Implement malaria, HIV/AIDS and STI education campaign targeting all workers hired, international and national, female and male, skilled, semi- and unskilled occupations, at the time of recruitment and thereafter pursued throughout the construction phase on ongoing and regular basis. This should be complemented by easy access to condoms at the workplace as well as to voluntary counseling and testing.
C-23
Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project Environmental and Social Assessment
Annex D.
WAPDA August 2011
IFC/WBG EHS Guidelines
D-1
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines
GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Environmental, Health, and Safety General Guidelines Introduction The Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines are technical reference documents with general and industry-specific examples of Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) 1. When one or more members of the World Bank Group are involved in a project, these EHS Guidelines are applied as required by their respective policies and standards. These General EHS Guidelines are designed to be used together with the relevant Industry Sector EHS Guidelines which provide guidance to users on EHS issues in specific industry sectors. For complex projects, use of multiple industry-sector guidelines may be necessary. A complete list of industry-sector guidelines can be found at: www.ifc.org/ifcext/enviro.nsf/Content/EnvironmentalGuidelines The EHS Guidelines contain the performance levels and measures that are generally considered to be achievable in new facilities by existing technology at reasonable costs. Application of the EHS Guidelines to existing facilities may involve the establishment of site-specific targets, with an appropriate timetable for achieving them. The applicability of the EHS Guidelines should be tailored to the hazards and risks established for each project on the basis of the results of an environmental assessment2 in which site-specific variables, such as host country context, assimilative capacity of the environment, and other project factors, are taken into account. The applicability of specific technical recommendations should be
1 Defined as the exercise of professional skill, diligence, prudence and foresight that
would be reasonably expected from skilled and experienced professionals engaged in the same type of undertaking under the same or similar circumstances globally. The circumstances that skilled and experienced professionals may find when evaluating the range of pollution prevention and control techniques available to a project may include, but are not limited to, varying levels of environmental degradation and environmental assimilative capacity as well as varying levels of financial and technical feasibility. 2 For IFC, such assessment is carried out consistent with Performance Standard 1, and for the World Bank, with Operational Policy 4.01.
APRIL 30, 2007
based on the professional opinion of qualified and experienced persons. When host country regulations differ from the levels and measures presented in the EHS Guidelines, projects are expected to achieve whichever is more stringent. If less stringent levels or measures than those provided in these EHS Guidelines are appropriate, in view of specific project circumstances, a full and detailed justification for any proposed alternatives is needed as part of the site-specific environmental assessment. This justification should demonstrate that the choice for any alternate performance levels is protective of human health and the environment. The General EHS Guidelines are organized as follows: 1. Environmental 1.1 Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality 1.2 Energy Conservation 1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality 1.4 Water Conservation 1.5 Hazardous Materials Management 1.6 Waste Management 1.7 Noise 1.8 Contaminated Land 2. Occupational Health and Safety 2.1 General Facility Design and Operation 2.2 Communication and Training 2.3 Physical Hazards 2.4 Chemical Hazards 2.5 Biological Hazards 2.6 Radiological Hazards 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 2.8 Special Hazard Environments 2.9 Monitoring 3. Community Health and Safety 3.1 Water Quality and Availability 3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure 3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) 3.4 Traffic Safety 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials 3.6 Disease Prevention 3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response 4. Construction and Decommissioning 4.1 Environment 4.2 Occupational Health & Safety 4.3 Community Health & Safety References and Additional Sources*
3 3 17 24 32 35 45 51 53 59 60 62 64 68 70 72 72 73 74 77 77 78 79 82 82 85 86 89 89 92 94 96
1
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines
GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION
WORLD BANK GROUP
General Approach to the Management of EHS Issues at the Facility or Project Level
people or to the environmental resources on which they depend. •
achieving an overall reduction of risk to human health and the
Effective management of environmental, health, and safety (EHS)
environment, focusing on the prevention of irreversible and / or
issues entails the inclusion of EHS considerations into corporate-
significant impacts.
and facility-level business processes in an organized, hierarchical approach that includes the following steps: •
•
or processes that avoid the need for EHS controls.
early as possible in the facility development or project cycle,
•
•
When impact avoidance is not feasible, incorporating
selection process, product design process, engineering
engineering and management controls to reduce or minimize
planning process for capital requests, engineering work
the possibility and magnitude of undesired consequences, for
orders, facility modification authorizations, or layout and
example, with the application of pollution controls to reduce
process change plans.
the levels of emitted contaminants to workers or environments.
Involving EHS professionals, who have the experience,
•
Preparing workers and nearby communities to respond to
competence, and training necessary to assess and manage
accidents, including providing technical and financial
EHS impacts and risks, and carry out specialized
resources to effectively and safely control such events, and
environmental management functions including the
restoring workplace and community environments to a safe
preparation of project or activity-specific plans and procedures
and healthy condition.
that incorporate the technical recommendations presented in this document that are relevant to the project. •
Favoring strategies that eliminate the cause of the hazard at its source, for example, by selecting less hazardous materials
Identifying EHS project hazards3 and associated risks4 as including the incorporation of EHS considerations into the site
Prioritizing risk management strategies with the objective of
•
Improving EHS performance through a combination of ongoing monitoring of facility performance and effective accountability.
Understanding the likelihood and magnitude of EHS risks, based on: o
The nature of the project activities, such as whether the project will generate significant quantities of emissions or effluents, or involve hazardous materials or processes;
o
The potential consequences to workers, communities, or the environment if hazards are not adequately managed, which may depend on the proximity of project activities to
3 Defined as “threats to humans and what they value” (Kates, et al., 1985). 4 Defined as “quantitative measures of hazard consequences, usually expressed as
conditional probabilities of experiencing harm” (Kates, et. al., 1985)
APRIL 30, 2007
2
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.0 Environmental 1.1
Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality the spatial characteristic of the source including point sources,
Applicability and Approach ...............................................3 Ambient Air Quality ..........................................................4 General Approach....................................................4 Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or Ecologically Sensitive Areas........................................................5 Point Sources ..................................................................5 Stack Height.............................................................5 Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines ....6 Fugitive Sources ..............................................................8 Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)........................8 Particulate Matter (PM).............................................8 Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) .........................9 Mobile Sources – Land-based ..........................................9 Greenhouse Gases (GHGs).............................................9 Monitoring......................................................................10 Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions...11
fugitive sources, and mobile sources and, further, by process, such as combustion, materials storage, or other industry sectorspecific processes. Where possible, facilities and projects should avoid, minimize, and control adverse impacts to human health, safety, and the environment from emissions to air. Where this is not possible, the generation and release of emissions of any type should be managed through a combination of: •
Energy use efficiency
•
Process modification
•
Selection of fuels or other materials, the processing of which may result in less polluting emissions
Applicability and Approach
•
This guideline applies to facilities or projects that generate
The selected prevention and control techniques may include one
emissions to air at any stage of the project life-cycle. It
or more methods of treatment depending on:
Application of emissions control techniques
complements the industry-specific emissions guidance presented in the Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS)
•
Regulatory requirements
Guidelines by providing information about common techniques for
•
Significance of the source
emissions management that may be applied to a range of industry
•
Location of the emitting facility relative to other sources
sectors. This guideline provides an approach to the management
•
Location of sensitive receptors
of significant sources of emissions, including specific guidance for
•
Existing ambient air quality, and potential for degradation of
assessment and monitoring of impacts. It is also intended to provide additional information on approaches to emissions management in projects located in areas of poor air quality, where
the airshed from a proposed project •
Technical feasibility and cost effectiveness of the available options for prevention, control, and release of emissions
it may be necessary to establish project-specific emissions standards. Emissions of air pollutants can occur from a wide variety of activities during the construction, operation, and decommissioning phases of a project. These activities can be categorized based on APRIL 30, 2007
3
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
Ambient Air Quality General Approach Projects with significant5,6 sources of air emissions, and potential for significant impacts to ambient air quality, should prevent or minimize impacts by ensuring that: •
•
WORLD BANK GROUP
additional, future sustainable development in the same airshed. 12 At facility level, impacts should be estimated through qualitative or quantitative assessments by the use of baseline air quality assessments and atmospheric dispersion models to assess potential ground level concentrations. Local atmospheric, climatic,
Emissions do not result in pollutant concentrations that reach
and air quality data should be applied when modeling dispersion,
or exceed relevant ambient quality guidelines and standards9
protection against atmospheric downwash, wakes, or eddy effects
by applying national legislated standards, or in their absence,
of the source, nearby13 structures, and terrain features. The
the current WHO Air Quality Guidelines10 (see Table 1.1.1),
dispersion model applied should be internationally recognized, or
or other internationally recognized sources11;
comparable. Examples of acceptable emission estimation and
Emissions do not contribute a significant portion to the
dispersion modeling approaches for point and fugitive sources are
attainment of relevant ambient air quality guidelines or standards. As a general rule, this Guideline suggests 25
Table 1.1.1: WHO Ambient Air Quality Guidelines 7,8
percent of the applicable air quality standards to allow Sulfur dioxide (SO2)
5 Significant sources of point and fugitive emissions are considered to be general
sources which, for example, can contribute a net emissions increase of one or more of the following pollutants within a given airshed: PM10: 50 tons per year (tpy); NOx: 500 tpy; SO2: 500 tpy; or as established through national legislation; and combustion sources with an equivalent heat input of 50 MWth or greater. The significance of emissions of inorganic and organic pollutants should be established on a project-specific basis taking into account toxic and other properties of the pollutant. 6 United States Environmental Protection Agency, Prevention of Significant Deterioration of Air Quality, 40 CFR Ch. 1 Part 52.21. Other references for establishing significant emissions include the European Commission. 2000. “Guidance Document for EPER implementation.” http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm ; and Australian Government. 2004. “National Pollutant Inventory Guide.” http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf 7 World Health Organization (WHO). Air Quality Guidelines Global Update, 2005. PM 24-hour value is the 99th percentile. 8 Interim targets are provided in recognition of the need for a staged approach to achieving the recommended guidelines. 9 Ambient air quality standards are ambient air quality levels established and published through national legislative and regulatory processes, and ambient quality guidelines refer to ambient quality levels primarily developed through clinical, toxicological, and epidemiological evidence (such as those published by the World Health Organization). 10 Available at World Health Organization (WHO). http://www.who.int/en 11 For example the United States National Ambient Air Quality Standards
(NAAQS) (http://www.epa.gov/air/criteria.html) and the relevant European Council Directives (Council Directive 1999/30/EC of 22 April 1999 / Council Directive 2002/3/EC of February 12 2002).
APRIL 30, 2007
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) Particulate Matter PM10
Averaging Period
Guideline value in µg/m3
24-hour
125 (Interim target-1) 50 (Interim target-2) 20 (guideline) 500 (guideline) 40 (guideline) 200 (guideline) 70 (Interim target-1) 50 (Interim target-2) 30 (Interim target-3) 20 (guideline)
10 minute 1-year 1-hour 1-year
24-hour
Particulate Matter PM2.5
1-year
24-hour
Ozone
8-hour daily maximum
150 (Interim target-1) 100 (Interim target-2) 75 (Interim target-3) 50 (guideline) 35 (Interim target-1) 25 (Interim target-2) 15 (Interim target-3) 10 (guideline) 75 (Interim target-1) 50 (Interim target-2) 37.5 (Interim target-3) 25 (guideline) 160 (Interim target-1) 100 (guideline)
12 US EPA Prevention of Significant Deterioration Increments Limits applicable to
non-degraded airsheds.
4
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
included in Annex 1.1.1. These approaches include screening
Point Sources
models for single source evaluations (SCREEN3 or AIRSCREEN),
Point sources are discrete, stationary, identifiable sources of
as well as more complex and refined models (AERMOD OR
emissions that release pollutants to the atmosphere. They are
ADMS). Model selection is dependent on the complexity and geo-
typically located in manufacturing or production plants. Within a
morphology of the project site (e.g. mountainous terrain, urban or
given point source, there may be several individual ‘emission
rural area).
points’ that comprise the point source.15
Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or Ecologically Sensitive Areas
Point sources are characterized by the release of air pollutants
Facilities or projects located within poor quality airsheds14, and
nitrogen oxides (NOx), sulfur dioxide (SO2), carbon monoxide
within or next to areas established as ecologically sensitive (e.g.
(CO), and particulate matter (PM), as well as other air pollutants
national parks), should ensure that any increase in pollution levels
including certain volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and metals
is as small as feasible, and amounts to a fraction of the applicable
that may also be associated with a wide range of industrial
short-term and annual average air quality guidelines or standards
activities.
as established in the project-specific environmental assessment. Suitable mitigation measures may also include the relocation of significant sources of emissions outside the airshed in question, use of cleaner fuels or technologies, application of comprehensive pollution control measures, offset activities at installations controlled by the project sponsor or other facilities within the same airshed, and buy-down of emissions within the same airshed. Specific provisions for minimizing emissions and their impacts in poor air quality or ecologically sensitive airsheds should be established on a project-by-project or industry-specific basis. Offset provisions outside the immediate control of the project sponsor or buy-downs should be monitored and enforced by the local agency responsible for granting and monitoring emission permits. Such provisions should be in place prior to final commissioning of the facility / project.
typically associated with the combustion of fossil fuels, such as
Emissions from point sources should be avoided and controlled according to good international industry practice (GIIP) applicable to the relevant industry sector, depending on ambient conditions, through the combined application of process modifications and emissions controls, examples of which are provided in Annex 1.1.2. Additional recommendations regarding stack height and emissions from small combustion facilities are provided below.
Stack Height The stack height for all point sources of emissions, whether ‘significant’ or not, should be designed according to GIIP (see Annex 1.1.3) to avoid excessive ground level concentrations due to downwash, wakes, and eddy effects, and to ensure reasonable diffusion to minimize impacts. For projects where there are multiple sources of emissions, stack heights should be established with due consideration to emissions from all other project sources, both point and fugitive. Non-significant sources of emissions,
13 “Nearby” generally considers an area within a radius of up to 20 times the stack
height. 14 An airshed should be considered as having poor air quality if nationally legislated air quality standards or WHO Air Quality Guidelines are exceeded significantly.
APRIL 30, 2007
15 Emission points refer to a specific stack, vent, or other discrete point of pollution
release. This term should not be confused with point source, which is a regulatory distinction from area and mobile sources. The characterization of point sources into multiple emissions points is useful for allowing more detailed reporting of emissions information.
5
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
including small combustion sources,16 should also use GIIP in stack design.
Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines Small combustion processes are systems designed to deliver electrical or mechanical power, steam, heat, or any combination of these, regardless of the fuel type, with a total, rated heat input capacity of between three Megawatt thermal (MWth) and 50 MWth. The emissions guidelines in Table 1.1.2 are applicable to small combustion process installations operating more than 500 hours per year, and those with an annual capacity utilization of more than 30 percent. Plants firing a mixture of fuels should compare emissions performance with these guidelines based on the sum of the relative contribution of each applied fuel17. Lower emission values may apply if the proposed facility is located in an ecologically sensitive airshed, or airshed with poor air quality, in order to address potential cumulative impacts from the installation of more than one small combustion plant as part of a distributed generation project.
16 Small combustion sources are those with a total rated heat input capacity of
50MWth or less. 17 The contribution of a fuel is the percentage of heat input (LHV) provided by this fuel multiplied by its limit value.
APRIL 30, 2007
6
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Table 1.1.2 - Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines (3MWth – 50MWth) – (in mg/Nm3 or as indicated) Combustion Technology / Fuel
Particulate Matter (PM)
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx)
Dry Gas, Excess O2 Content (%)
N/A
N/A
200 (Spark Ignition) 400 (Dual Fuel) 1,600 (Compression Ignition)
15
Engine Gas
50 or up to 100 if justified by project specific considerations (e.g. Economic feasibility of using lower ash content fuel, or adding secondary treatment to meet 50, and available environmental capacity of the site)
Liquid
Turbine Natural Gas =3MWth to < 15MWth
1.5 percent Sulfur or up to 3.0 percent Sulfur if justified by project specific considerations (e.g. Economic feasibility of using lower S content fuel, or adding secondary treatment to meet levels of using 1.5 percent Sulfur, and available environmental capacity of the site)
If bore size diameter [mm] < 400: 1460 (or up to 1,600 if justified to maintain high energy efficiency.)
15
If bore size diameter [mm] > or = 400: 1,850
N/A
N/A
42 ppm (Electric generation) 100 ppm (Mechanical drive)
15
Natural Gas =15MWth to < 50MWth
N/A
N/A
25 ppm
15
Fuels other than Natural Gas =3MWth to < 15MWth
N/A
0.5 percent Sulfur or lower percent Sulfur (e.g. 0.2 percent Sulfur) if commercially available without significant excess fuel cost
96 ppm (Electric generation) 150 ppm (Mechanical drive)
15
Fuels other than Natural Gas =15MWth to < 50MWth
N/A
0.5% S or lower % S (0.2%S) if commercially available without significant excess fuel cost
74 ppm
15
N/A
320
3
2000
460
3
2000
650
6
Boiler Gas Liquid Solid
N/A 50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental assessment 50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental assessment
Notes: -N/A/ - no emissions guideline; Higher performance levels than these in the Table should be applicable to facilities located in urban / industrial areas with degraded airsheds or close to ecologically sensitive areas where more stringent emissions controls may be needed.; MWth is heat input on HHV basis; Solid fuels include biomass; Nm 3 is at one atmosphere pressure, 0°C.; MWth category is to apply to the entire facility consisting of multiple units that are reasonably considered to be emitted from a common stack except for NOx and PM limits for turbines and boilers. Guidelines values apply to facilities operating more than 500 hours per year with an annual capacity utilization factor of more than 30 percent.
APRIL 30, 2007
7
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
Fugitive Sources
•
WORLD BANK GROUP
Implementing a leak detection and repair (LDAR) program that controls fugitive emissions by regularly monitoring to
Fugitive source air emissions refer to emissions that are
detect leaks, and implementing repairs within a predefined
distributed spatially over a wide area and not confined to a specific
time period.18
discharge point. They originate in operations where exhausts are not captured and passed through a stack. Fugitive emissions have the potential for much greater ground-level impacts per unit than stationary source emissions, since they are discharged and dispersed close to the ground. The two main types of fugitive
For VOC emissions associated with handling of chemicals in open vats and mixing processes, the recommended prevention and control techniques include: •
solvents;
emissions are Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) and particulate matter (PM). Other contaminants (NOx, SO2 and CO)
Substitution of less volatile substances, such as aqueous
•
Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent
are mainly associated with combustion processes, as described
treatment of gas stream by removing VOCs with control
above. Projects with potentially significant fugitive sources of
devices such as condensers or activated carbon absorption;
emissions should establish the need for ambient quality
•
Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent treatment with destructive control devices such as:
assessment and monitoring practices.
o
Catalytic Incinerators: Used to reduce VOCs from
Open burning of solid wastes, whether hazardous or non-
process exhaust gases exiting paint spray booths,
hazardous, is not considered good practice and should be
ovens, and other process operations
avoided, as the generation of polluting emissions from this type of
o
source cannot be controlled effectively.
gas stream by passing the stream through a combustion chamber where the VOCs are burned in air at
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)
temperatures between 700º C to 1,300º C
The most common sources of fugitive VOC emissions are
o
associated with industrial activities that produce, store, and use
Enclosed Oxidizing Flares: Used to convert VOCs into CO2 and H2O by way of direct combustion
VOC-containing liquids or gases where the material is under pressure, exposed to a lower vapor pressure, or displaced from an
Thermal Incinerators: Used to control VOC levels in a
•
Use of floating roofs on storage tanks to reduce the
enclosed space. Typical sources include equipment leaks, open
opportunity for volatilization by eliminating the headspace
vats and mixing tanks, storage tanks, unit operations in
present in conventional storage tanks.
wastewater treatment systems, and accidental releases. Equipment leaks include valves, fittings, and elbows which are subject to leaks under pressure. The recommended prevention and control techniques for VOC emissions associated with equipment leaks include: •
Particulate Matter (PM) The most common pollutant involved in fugitive emissions is dust or particulate matter (PM). This is released during certain operations, such as transport and open storage of solid materials, and from exposed soil surfaces, including unpaved roads.
Equipment modifications, examples of which are presented in Annex 1.1.4;
18 For more information, see Leak Detection and Repair Program (LDAR), at:
http://www.ldar.net
APRIL 30, 2007
8
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Recommended prevention and control of these emissions sources
programs. In the absence of these, the following approach should
include:
be considered:
•
•
Use of dust control methods, such as covers, water suppression, or increased moisture content for open
operators should implement the manufacturer recommended
materials storage piles, or controls, including air extraction
engine maintenance programs;
and treatment through a baghouse or cyclone for material •
Regardless of the size or type of vehicle, fleet owners /
•
Drivers should be instructed on the benefits of driving
handling sources, such as conveyors and bins;
practices that reduce both the risk of accidents and fuel
Use of water suppression for control of loose materials on
consumption, including measured acceleration and driving
paved or unpaved road surfaces. Oil and oil by-products is
within safe speed limits;
not a recommended method to control road dust. Examples
•
Operators with fleets of 120 or more units of heavy duty
of additional control options for unpaved roads include those
vehicles (buses and trucks), or 540 or more light duty
summarized in Annex 1.1.5.
vehicles21 (cars and light trucks) within an airshed should
Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) Several chemicals are classified as ozone depleting substances
consider additional ways to reduce potential impacts including: o
(ODSs) and are scheduled for phase-out under the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer.19 No new
alternatives o
systems or processes should be installed using CFCs, halons, 1,1,1-trichloroethane, carbon tetrachloride, methyl bromide or
regulations.20
Converting high-use vehicles to cleaner fuels, where feasible
o
HBFCs. HCFCs should only be considered as interim / bridging alternatives as determined by the host country commitments and
Replacing older vehicles with newer, more fuel efficient
Installing and maintaining emissions control devices, such as catalytic converters
o
Implementing a regular vehicle maintenance and repair program
Mobile Sources – Land-based
Greenhouse Gases (GHGs)
Similar to other combustion processes, emissions from vehicles
Sectors that may have potentially significant emissions of
include CO, NOx, SO2, PM and VOCs. Emissions from on-road
greenhouse gases (GHGs)22 include energy, transport, heavy
and off-road vehicles should comply with national or regional
industry (e.g. cement production, iron / steel manufacturing, aluminum smelting, petrochemical industries, petroleum refining, fertilizer manufacturing), agriculture, forestry and waste
19 Examples include: chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs); halons; 1,1,1-trichloroethane
(methyl chloroform); carbon tetrachloride; hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs); hydrobromofluorocarbons (HBFCs); and methyl bromide. They are currently used in a variety of applications including: domestic, commercial, and process refrigeration (CFCs and HCFCs); domestic, commercial, and motor vehicle air conditioning (CFCs and HCFCs); for manufacturing foam products (CFCs); for solvent cleaning applications (CFCs, HCFCs, methyl chloroform, and carbon tetrachloride); as aerosol propellants (CFCs); in fire protection systems (halons and HBFCs); and as crop fumigants (methyl bromide). 20 Additional information is available through the Montreal Protocol Secretariat web site available at: http://ozone.unep.org/
APRIL 30, 2007
management. GHGs may be generated from direct emissions
21 The selected fleet size thresholds are assumed to represent potentially
significant sources of emissions based on individual vehicles traveling 100,000 km / yr using average emission factors. 22 The six greenhouse gases that form part of the Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change include carbon dioxide (C02); methane (CH4); nitrous oxide (N 2O); hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs); perfluorocarbons (PFCs); and sulfur hexafluoride (SF 6).
9
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
from facilities within the physical project boundary and indirect
decisions to be made based on the data and the consequences of
emissions associated with the off-site production of power used by
making an incorrect decision, the time and geographic
the project.
boundaries, and the quality of data needed to make a correct
Recommendations for reduction and control of greenhouse gases
decision.25 The air quality monitoring program should consider the following elements:
include: •
Carbon financing;23
•
Enhancement of energy efficiency (see section on
•
should reflect the pollutants of concern associated with project processes. For combustion processes, indicator
‘Energy Conservation’); •
parameters typically include the quality of inputs, such as the
Protection and enhancement of sinks and reservoirs of
sulfur content of fuel.
greenhouse gases; •
Promotion of sustainable forms of agriculture and
Monitoring parameters: The monitoring parameters selected
•
Baseline calculations: Before a project is developed, baseline
forestry;
air quality monitoring at and in the vicinity of the site should
Promotion, development and increased use of
be undertaken to assess background levels of key pollutants,
renewable forms of energy;
in order to differentiate between existing ambient conditions
•
Carbon capture and storage technologies;24
and project-related impacts.
•
Limitation and / or reduction of methane emissions
•
•
Monitoring type and frequency: Data on emissions and
through recovery and use in waste management, as well
ambient air quality generated through the monitoring program
as in the production, transport and distribution of energy
should be representative of the emissions discharged by the
(coal, oil, and gas).
project over time. Examples of time-dependent variations in the manufacturing process include batch process
Monitoring
manufacturing and seasonal process variations. Emissions
Emissions and air quality monitoring programs provide information
from highly variable processes may need to be sampled
that can be used to assess the effectiveness of emissions
more frequently or through composite methods. Emissions
management strategies. A systematic planning process is
monitoring frequency and duration may also range from
recommended to ensure that the data collected are adequate for
continuous for some combustion process operating
their intended purposes (and to avoid collecting unnecessary
parameters or inputs (e.g. the quality of fuel) to less frequent,
data). This process, sometimes referred to as a data quality objectives process, defines the purpose of collecting the data, the 23 Carbon financing as a carbon emissions reduction strategy may include the host
government-endorsed Clean Development Mechanism or Joint Implementation of the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change. 24 Carbon dioxide capture and storage (CCS) is a process consisting of the separation of CO2 from industrial and energy-related sources; transport to a storage location; and long-term isolation from the atmosphere, for example in geological formations, in the ocean, or in mineral carbonates (reaction of CO2 with metal oxides in silicate minerals to produce stable carbonates). It is the object of intensive research worldwide (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), Special Report, Carbon Dioxide Capture and Storage (2006).
APRIL 30, 2007
monthly, quarterly or yearly stack tests. •
Monitoring locations: Ambient air quality monitoring may consists of off-site or fence line monitoring either by the project sponsor, the competent government agency, or by collaboration between both. The location of ambient air
25 See, for example, United States Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance on Systematic Planning Using the Data Quality Objectives Process EPA QA/G-4, EPA/240/B-06/001 February 2006.
10
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY quality monitoring stations should be established based on
o
consistently and significantly better than the required
estimate potential impact to the receiving airshed from an
levels, frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can
emissions source taking into consideration such aspects as
be reduced from annual to every two or three years. o
prevailing wind directions.
Emission Monitoring: None
Boilers with capacities between =20 MWth and < 50 MWth
Sampling and analysis methods: Monitoring programs should
o
Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For
apply national or international methods for sample collection
gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be
and analysis, such as those published by the International
calculated based on fuel quality certification (if no SO2
Organization for Standardization,26 the European Committee
control equipment is used)
for Standardization,27 or the U.S. Environmental Protection
o
Emission Monitoring: SO2. Plants with SO2 control
Agency.28 Sampling should be conducted by, or under, the
equipment: Continuous. NOx: Continuous monitoring of
supervision of trained individuals. Analysis should be
either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using
conducted by entities permitted or certified for this purpose.
combustion parameters. PM: Continuous monitoring of
Sampling and analysis Quality Assurance / Quality Control
either PM emissions, opacity, or indicative PM
(QA/QC) plans should be applied and documented to ensure
emissions using combustion parameters / visual
that data quality is adequate for the intended data use (e.g.,
monitoring.
method detection limits are below levels of concern).
•
Monitoring reports should include QA/QC documentation.
Additional recommended monitoring approaches for turbines: o
Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions •
If Annual Stack Emission Testing demonstrates results
the results of scientific methods and mathematical models to
the location of potentially affected communities and
•
WORLD BANK GROUP
only for gaseous fuel-fired turbines).
Additional recommended monitoring approaches for boilers:
o
If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g.
Boilers with capacities between =3 MWth and < 20 MWth: o
Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx and SO2 (NOx
Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For
less than 75 percent) better than the required levels,
gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be
frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be
calculated based on fuel quality certification if no SO2
reduced from annual to every two or three years.
control equipment is used.
o
Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using combustion parameters.SO2: Continuous monitoring if
26 An on-line catalogue of ISO standards relating to the environment, health
protection, and safety is available at: http://www.iso.org/iso/en/CatalogueListPage.CatalogueList?ICS1=13&ICS2=&ICS 3=&scopelist= 27 An on-line catalogue of European Standards is available at:
http://www.cen.eu/catweb/cwen.htm . 28 The National Environmental Methods Index provides a searchable clearinghouse of U.S. methods and procedures for both regulatory and nonregulatory monitoring purposes for water, sediment, air and tissues, and is available at http://www.nemi.gov/.
APRIL 30, 2007
SO2 control equipment is used. •
Additional recommended monitoring approaches for engines: o
Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx ,SO2 and PM (NOx only for gaseous fuel-fired diesel engines).
11
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY o
WORLD BANK GROUP
If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g. less than 75 percent) better than the required levels, frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be reduced from annual to every two or three years.
o
Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using combustion parameters. SO2: Continuous monitoring if SO2 control equipment is used. PM: Continuous monitoring of either PM emissions or indicative PM emissions using operating parameters.
APRIL 30, 2007
12
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.1 – Air Emissions Estimation and Dispersion Modeling Methods The following is a partial list of documents to aid in the estimation of air emissions from various processes and air dispersion models: Australian Emission Estimation Technique Manuals http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/ Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook, UN / ECE / EMEP and the European Environment Agency http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm Emission factors and emission estimation methods, US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning & Standards http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief Guidelines on Air Quality Models (Revised), US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 2005 http://www.epa.gov/scram001/guidance/guide/appw_05.pdf Frequently Asked Questions, Air Quality Modeling and Assessment Unit (AQMAU), UK Environment Agency http://www.environmentagency.gov.uk/subjects/airquality/236092/?version=1&lang=_e OECD Database on Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals http://www.olis.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf/
APRIL 30, 2007
13
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.2 – Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies Principal Sources and Issues
General Prevention / Process Modification Approach
Control Options
Reduction Efficiency (%)
Gas Condition
Comments
Fabric Filters
99 - 99.7%
Dry gas, temp 90%
Sorbent Injection
30% - 70%
Calcium or lime is injected into the flue gas and the SO2 is adsorbed onto the sorbent
Dry Flue Gas Desulfurization
70%-90%
Can be regenerable or throwaway.
Wet Flue Gas Desulfurization
>90%
Produces gypsum as a by-product
Precondition gas to remove large particles. Efficiency dependent on resistivity of particle. Achievable outlet concentration of 23 mg/Nm3
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) Mainly produced by the combustion of fuels such as oil and coal and as a by-product from some chemical production or wastewater treatment processes.
APRIL 30, 2007
Control system selection is heavily dependent on the inlet concentration. For SO2 concentrations in excess of 10%, the stream is passed through an acid plant not only to lower the SO2 emissions but also to generate high grade sulfur for sale. Levels below 10% are not rich enough for this process and should therefore utilize absorption or ‘scrubbing,’ where SO2 molecules are captured into a liquid phase or adsorption, where SO2 molecules are captured on the surface of a solid adsorbent.
Alternate fuels may include low sulfur coal, light diesel or natural gas with consequent reduction in particulate emissions related to sulfur in the fuel. Fuel cleaning or beneficiation of fuels prior to combustion is another viable option but may have economic consequences.
14
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.2: Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies (continued) Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) Associated with combustion of fuel. May occur in several forms of nitrogen oxide; namely nitric oxide (NO), nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and nitrous oxide (N2O), which is also a greenhouse gas. The term NOx serves as a composite between NO and NO2 and emissions are usually reported as NOx. Here the NO is multiplied by the ratio of molecular weights of NO2 to NO and added to the NO2 emissions. Means of reducing NOx emissions are based on the modification of operating conditions such as minimizing the resident time at peak temperatures, reducing the peak temperatures by increasing heat transfer rates or minimizing the availability of oxygen.
Percent Reduction by Fuel Type
Comments
Combustion modification (Illustrative of boilers)
Coal
Oil
Gas
Low-excess-air firing
10–30
10–30
10–30
Staged Combustion
20–50
20–50
20–50
Flue Gas Recirculation
N/A
20–50
20–50
Water/Steam Injection
N/A
10–50
N/A.
Low-NOx Burners
30–40
30–40
30–40
Flue Gas Treatment
Coal
Oil
Gas
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
60–90
60–90
60–90
N/A
30–70
30–70
Selective Non-Catalytic Reduction (SNCR)
These modifications are capable of reducing NOx emissions by 50 to 95%. The method of combustion control used depends on the type of boiler and the method of firing fuel.
Flue gas treatment is more effective in reducing NOx emissions than are combustion controls. Techniques can be classified as SCR, SNCR, and adsorption. SCR involves the injection of ammonia as a reducing agent to convert NOx to nitrogen in the presence of a catalyst in a converter upstream of the air heater. Generally, some ammonia slips through and is part of the emissions. SNCR also involves the injection of ammonia or urea based products without the presence of a catalyst.
Note: Compiled by IFC based on inputs from technical experts.
APRIL 30, 2007
15
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY Annex 1.1.3 - Good International Industry Practice (GIIP)
WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.4 - Examples of VOC Emissions Controls
Stack Height (Based on United States 40 CFR, part 51.100 (ii)). HG = H + 1.5L; where
Equipment Type
Modification
HG = GEP stack height measured from the ground level elevation at the base of the stack
Approximate Control Efficiency (%)
Seal-less design
10029
Closed-vent system
9030
Dual mechanical seal with barrier fluid maintained at a higher pressure than the pumped fluid
100
Closed-vent system
90
Dual mechanical seal with barrier fluid maintained at a higher pressure than the compressed gas
100
H = Height of nearby structure(s) above the base of the stack. L = Lesser dimension, height (h) or width (w), of nearby
Pumps
structures “Nearby structures” = Structures within/touching a radius of 5L but less than 800 m.
Projected width (w)
Compressors
Stack
Closed-vent system Pressure Relief Devices
1.5*L
Rupture disk assembly
100
Valves
Seal-less design
100
Connectors
Weld together
100
Open-ended Lines
Blind, cap, plug, or second valve
100
Sampling Connections
Closed-loop sampling
100
HG
h H
Maximum 5*L
Variable31
Note: Examples of technologies are provided for illustrative purposes. The availability and applicability of any particular technology will vary depending on manufacturer specifications.
29 Seal-less equipment can be a large source of emissions in the event of equipment failure. 30 Actual efficiency of a closed-vent system depends on percentage of vapors collected and efficiency of control device to which the vapors are routed. 31 Control efficiency of closed vent-systems installed on a pressure relief device may be lower than other closed-vent systems.
APRIL 30, 2007
16
Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.1.5 - Fugitive PM Emissions Controls
Control Type
Control Efficiency
Chemical Stabilization
0% - 98%
Hygroscopic salts Bitumens/adhesives
60% - 96%
Surfactants
0% - 68%
Wet Suppression – Watering
12% - 98%
Speed Reduction
0% - 80%
Traffic Reduction
Not quantified
Paving (Asphalt / Concrete)
85% - 99%
Covering with Gravel, Slag, or "Road Carpet"
30% - 50%
Vacuum Sweeping
0% - 58%
Water Flushing/Broom Sweeping
0% - 96%
APRIL 30, 2007
17
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.2 Energy Conservation should also evaluate energy conservation opportunities arising Applicability and Approach .............................................18 Energy Management Programs...............................18 Energy Efficiency....................................................18 Process Heating.............................................................19 Heating Load Reduction .........................................19 Heat Distribution Systems.......................................19 Energy Conversion System Efficiency Improvements20 Process Cooling.............................................................20 Load Reduction......................................................21 Energy Conversion.................................................21 Refrigerant Compression Efficiency ........................23 Refrigeration System Auxiliaries..............................23 Compressed Air Systems...............................................24 Load reduction .......................................................24 Distribution.............................................................24
from manufacturing process modifications.
Energy Management Programs Energy management programs should include the following elements: •
principal energy flows within a facility at unit process level •
Preparation of mass and energy balance;
•
Definition and regular review of energy performance targets, which are adjusted to account for changes in major influencing factors on energy use
•
taken to reduce energy use
This guideline applies to facilities or projects that consume •
appropriate levels
systems and heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems specific emissions guidance presented in the Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines by providing information about common techniques for energy conservation that may be applied to a range of industry sectors. Energy management at the facility level should be viewed in the context of overall consumption patterns, including those associated with production processes and supporting utilities, as
Regular review of targets, which may include comparison with benchmark data, to confirm that targets are set at
systems, such as motors, pumps, and fans; compressed air (HVAC); and lighting systems. It complements the industry-
Regular comparison and monitoring of energy flows with performance targets to identify where action should be
Applicability and Approach energy in process heating and cooling; process and auxiliary
Identification, and regular measurement and reporting of
Energy Efficiency For any energy-using system, a systematic analysis of energy efficiency improvements and cost reduction opportunities should include a hierarchical examination of opportunities to: •
Demand/Load Side Management by reducing loads on the energy system
•
Supply Side Management by:
well as overall impacts associated with emissions from power
o
Reduce losses in energy distribution
sources. The following section provides guidance on energy
o
Improve energy conversion efficiency
management with a focus on common utility systems often
o
Exploit energy purchasing opportunities
representing technical and financially feasible opportunities for
o
Use lower-carbon fuels
improvement in energy conservation. However, operations
APRIL 30, 2007
18
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION Common opportunities in each of these areas are summarized
WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Process Heating
Review opportunities to schedule work flow to limit the need for process reheating between stages
below.32 •
Operate furnaces/ovens at slight positive pressure, and maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the heated
Process heating is vital to many manufacturing processes,
system, thereby reducing the energy required to heat
including heating for fluids, calcining, drying, heat treating, metal
unnecessary air to system operating temperature
heating, melting, melting agglomeration, curing, and forming33.
•
Reduce radiant heat losses by sealing structural openings and keep viewing ports closed when not in use
In process heating systems, a system heat and mass balance will show how much of the system’s energy input provides true process heating, and quantify fuel used to satisfy energy losses caused by excessive parasitic loads, distribution, or conversion
•
operating capacity •
following techniques are often valuable and cost-effective.
Heating Load Reduction •
Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat losses through furnace/oven etc. structure
•
Recover heat from hot process or exhaust streams to reduce system loads
•
• •
In intermittently-heated systems, consider use of low
Consider use of high emissivity coatings of high temperature insulation, and consequent reduction in
losses. Examination of savings opportunities should be directed by the results of the heat and mass balance, though the
Where possible, use the system for long runs close to or at
process temperature •
Near net weight and shape heat designs
•
Robust Quality assurance on input material
•
Robust Scheduled maintenance programs
Heat Distribution Systems Heat distribution in process heating applications typically takes place through steam, hot water, or thermal fluid systems. Losses can be reduced through the following actions:
thermal mass insulation to reduce energy required to heat
•
Promptly repair distribution system leaks
the system structure to operating temperature
•
Avoid steam leaks despite a perceived need to get steam
Control process temperature and other parameters
through the turbine. Electricity purchase is usually cheaper
accurately to avoid, for example, overheating or overdrying
overall, especially when the cost to treat turbine-quality
Examine opportunities to use low weight and/or low
boiler feed water is included. If the heat-power ratio of the
thermal mass product carriers, such as heated shapers,
distribution process is less than that of power systems,
kiln cars etc.
opportunities should be considered to increase the ratio; for example, by using low-pressure steam to drive absorption
Additional guidance on energy efficiency is available from sources such as Natural Resources Canada (NRCAN http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/newbuildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20); the European Union (EUROPA. http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm ), and United States Department of Energy (US DOE, http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html).
cooling systems rather than using electrically-driven vapor-
32
compression systems. •
Regularly verify correct operation of steam traps in steam systems, and ensure that traps are not bypassed. Since
33 US DOE. http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html
APRIL 30, 2007
19
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION steam traps typically last approximately 5 years, 20% •
•
gases should be no more than 20 K above steam
Insulate distribution system vessels, such as hot wells and
temperature) •
from flue gases to pre-heat boiler feed water or combustion
Insulate all steam, condensate, hot water and thermal fluid
air •
diameter pipe, in addition to insulating all hot valves and flanges
•
Adopt automatic (continuous) boiler blowdown
In steam systems, return condensate to the boiler house
•
Recover heat from blowdown systems through flash steam
water and valuable beyond its heat content alone
•
recovery or feed-water preheat •
Use flash steam recovery systems to reduce losses due to evaporation of high-pressure condensate
•
Do not supply excessive quantities of steam to the deaerator
•
With fired heaters, consider opportunities to recover heat to
Consider steam expansion through a back-pressure turbine
combustion air through the use of recuperative or
rather than reducing valve stations
regenerative burner systems
Eliminate distribution system losses by adopting point-of-
•
use heating systems
Energy Conversion System Efficiency Improvements The following efficiency opportunities should be examined for process furnaces or ovens, and utility systems, such as boilers and fluid heaters: •
Consider reverse osmosis or electrodialysis feed water treatment to minimize the requirement for boiler blowdown
for re-use, since condensate is expensive boiler-quality •
In steam boiler systems, use economizers to recover heat
water storage tanks distribution pipework, down to and including 1” (25 mm)
•
Maintain clean heat transfer surfaces; in steam boilers, flue
should be replaced or repaired annually de-aerators, in steam systems and thermal fluid or hot •
WORLD BANK GROUP
Regularly monitor CO, oxygen or CO2 content of flue
For systems operating for extended periods (> 6000 hours/year), cogeneration of electrical power, heat and /or cooling can be cost effective
•
Oxy Fuel burners
•
Oxygen enrichment/injection
•
Use of turbolators in boilers
•
Sizing design and use of multiple boilers for different load configurations
•
Fuel quality control/fuel blending
gases to verify that combustion systems are using the • •
minimum practical excess air volumes
Process Cooling
Consider combustion automation using oxygen-trim
The general methodology outlined above should be applied to
controls
process cooling systems. Commonly used and cost-effective
Minimize the number of boilers or heaters used to meet
measures to improve process cooling efficiency are described
loads. It is typically more efficient to run one boiler at 90%
below.
of capacity than two at 45%. Minimize the number of boilers kept at hot–standby •
Use flue dampers to eliminate ventilation losses from hot boilers held at standby
APRIL 30, 2007
20
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Load Reduction
o
Planting trees as thermal shields around buildings
•
o
Installing timers and/or thermostats and/or
Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat gains through
enthalpy-based control systems
cooling system structure and to below-ambient temperature o
refrigerant pipes and vessels •
Control process temperature accurately to avoid overcooling
•
Operate cooling tunnels at slight positive pressure and maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the cooled system, thus reducing the energy required to cool this unnecessary air to system operating temperature
•
Examine opportunities to pre-cool using heat recovery to a process stream requiring heating, or by using a higher temperature cooling utility
•
In cold and chill stores, minimize heat gains to the cooled space by use of air curtains, entrance vestibules, or rapidly opening/closing doors. Where conveyors carry products into chilled areas, minimize the area of transfer openings, for example, by using strip curtains
•
Energy Conversion The efficiency of refrigeration service provision is normally discussed in terms of Coefficient of Performance (“COP”), which is the ratio of cooling duty divided by input power. COP is maximized by effective refrigeration system design and increased refrigerant compression efficiency, as well as minimization of the temperature difference through which the system works and of auxiliary loads (i.e. those in addition to compressor power demand) used to operate the refrigeration system. System Design •
provided by cooling towers or dry air coolers, may be
example, those due to evaporator fans, other machinery,
appropriate, perhaps supplemented by refrigeration in
defrost systems and lighting in cooled spaces, circulation (e.g. chilled water, brines, glycols) •
Do not use refrigeration for auxiliary cooling duties, such as compressor cylinder head or oil cooling
•
While not a thermal load, ensure there is no gas bypass of the expansion valve since this imposes compressor load while providing little effective cooling
•
If process temperatures are above ambient for all, or part, of the year, use of ambient cooling systems, such as
Quantify and minimize “incidental” cooling loads, for
fans in cooling tunnels, or secondary refrigerant pumps
Installing ventilation heat recovery systems34
summer conditions. •
Most refrigeration systems are electric-motor driven vapor compression systems using positive displacement or centrifugal compressors. The remainder of this guideline relates primarily to vapor-compression systems. However, when a cheap or free heat source is available (e.g. waste heat from an engine-driven generator—low-pressure steam
In the case of air conditioning applications, energy efficiency techniques include: o
Placing air intakes and air-conditioning units in cool, shaded locations
o
Improving building insulation including seals, vents, windows, and doors
APRIL 30, 2007
34 More information on HVAC energy efficiency can be found at the British
Columbia Building Corporation (Woolliams, 2002. http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategi es_guide.pdf), NRCAN’s EnerGuide (http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N) and NRCAN’s Energy Star Programs (http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&pri ntview=N#AC ), and the US Energy Star Program (http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines).
21
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION
•
that has passed through a back-pressure turbine),
temperature is indicative of an appropriately sized
absorption refrigeration may be appropriate.
evaporator. When cooling liquids, 2K between leaving
Exploit high cooling temperature range: precooling by
liquid and evaporating temperatures can be achieved,
ambient and/or ‘high temperature’ refrigeration before final
though a 4K difference is generally indicative of a
cooling can reduce refrigeration capital and running costs.
generously-sized evaporator.
High cooling temperature range also provides an
•
•
Keep the evaporator clean. When cooling air, ensure
opportunity for countercurrent (cascade) cooling, which
correct defrost operation. In liquid cooling, monitor
reduces refrigerant flow needs.
refrigerant/process temperature differences and compare
Keep ‘hot’ and ‘cold’ fluids separate, for example, do not
with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger
mix water leaving the chiller with water returning from
contamination by scale or oil.
cooling circuits. •
WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Ensure oil is regularly removed from the evaporator, and that oil additions and removals balance.
In low-temperature systems where high temperature differences are inevitable, consider two-stage or compound
•
Avoid the use of back-pressure valves.
compression, or economized screw compressors, rather
•
Adjust expansion valves to minimize suction superheat
than single-stage compression. Minimizing Temperature Differences
consistent with avoidance of liquid carry-over to compressors. •
A vapor-compression refrigeration system raises the
Ensure that an appropriate refrigerant charge volume is present.
temperature of the refrigerant from somewhat below the lowest process temperature (the evaporating temperature) to provide
Reducing Condensing Temperature
process cooling, to a higher temperature (the condensing
•
Consider whether to use air-cooled or evaporation-based
temperature), somewhat above ambient, to facilitate heat
cooling (e.g. evaporative or water cooled condensers and
rejection to the air or cooling water systems. Increasing
cooling towers). Air-cooled evaporators usually have
evaporating temperature typically increases compressor cooling
higher condensing temperatures, hence higher compressor
capacity without greatly affecting power consumption. Reducing
energy use, and auxiliary power consumption, especially in
condensing temperature increases evaporator cooling capacity
low humidity climates. If a wet system is used, ensure
and substantially reduces compressor power consumption.
adequate treatment to prevent growth of legionella
Elevating Evaporating Temperature •
bacteria. •
Whichever basic system is chosen, select a relatively large
Select a large evaporator to permit relatively low
condenser to minimize differences between condensing
temperature differences between process and evaporating
and the heat sink temperatures. Condensing temperatures
temperatures. Ensure that energy use of auxiliaries (e.g.
with air cooled or evaporative condensers should not be
evaporator fans) does not outweigh compression savings.
more than 10K above design ambient condition, and a 4K
In air-cooling applications, a design temperature difference
approach in a liquid-cooled condenser is possible.
of 6-10 K between leaving air temperature and evaporating APRIL 30, 2007
22
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION •
•
•
•
•
WORLD BANK GROUP
Avoid accumulation of non-condensable gases in the
Refrigerant Compression Efficiency
condenser system. Consider the installation of refrigerated
•
Some refrigerant compressors and chillers are more
non-condensable purgers, particularly for systems
efficient than others offered for the same duty. Before
operating below atmospheric pressure.
purchase, identify the operating conditions under which the
Keep condensers clean and free from scale. Monitor
compressor or chiller is likely to operate for substantial
refrigerant/ambient temperature differences and compare
parts of its annual cycle. Check operating efficiency under
with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger
these conditions, and ask for estimates of annual running
contamination.
cost. Note that refrigeration and HVAC systems rarely run
Avoid liquid backup, which restricts heat transfer area in
for extended periods at design conditions, which are
condensers. This can be caused by installation errors such
deliberately extreme. Operational efficiency under the most
as concentric reducers in horizontal liquid refrigerant pipes,
commonly occurring off-design conditions is likely to be
or “up and over” liquid lines leading from condensers.
most important.
In multiple condenser applications, refrigerant liquid lines
•
Compressors lose efficiency when unloaded. Avoid
should be connected via drop-leg traps to the main liquid
operation of multiple compressors at part-load conditions.
refrigerant line to ensure that hot gases flow to all
Note that package chillers can gain coefficient of
condensers.
performance (COP) when slightly unloaded, as loss of
Avoid head pressure control to the extent possible. Head
compressor efficiency can be outweighed by the benefits of
pressure control maintains condensing temperature at, or
reduced condensing and elevated evaporating
near, design levels. It therefore prevents reduction in
temperature. However, it is unlikely to be energy efficient
compressor power consumption, which accompanies
to operate a single compressor-chiller at less than 50% of
reduced condensing temperature, by restricting condenser
capacity.
capacity (usually by switching off the condenser, or cooling
•
Consider turndown efficiency when specifying chillers.
tower fans, or restricting cooling water flow) under
Variable speed control or multiple compressor chillers can
conditions of less severe than design load or ambient
be highly efficient at part loads.
temperature conditions. Head pressure is often kept higher
•
Use of thermal storage systems (e.g., ice storage) can
than necessary to facilitate hot gas defrost or adequate
avoid the need for close load-tracking and, hence, can
liquid refrigerant circulation. Use of electronic rather than
avoid part-loaded compressor operation.
thermostatic expansion valves, and liquid refrigerant
•
pumps can permit effective refrigerant circulation at much
Refrigeration System Auxiliaries
reduced condensing temperatures.
Many refrigeration system auxiliaries (e.g. evaporator fans and
Site condensers and cooling towers with adequate spacing
chilled water pumps) contribute to refrigeration system load, so
so as to prevent recirculation of hot air into the tower.
reductions in their energy use have a double benefit. General energy saving techniques for pumps and fans, listed in the next section of these guidelines, should be applied to refrigeration auxiliaries.
APRIL 30, 2007
23
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
Additionally, auxiliary use can be reduced by avoidance of part-
o
Implement systems for systematic identification and repair of leaks
load operation and in plant selection (e.g. axial fan evaporative condensers generally use less energy than equivalent
o
All condensate drain points should be trapped. Do not leave drain valves continuously ‘cracked open’
centrifugal fan towers). o Under extreme off-design conditions, reduction in duty of cooling
Train workers never to direct compressed air against their bodies or clothing to dust or cool themselves
system fans and pumps can be worthwhile, usually when the
down.
lowest possible condensing pressure has been achieved.
Compressed Air Systems Compressed air is the most commonly found utility service in industry, yet in many compressed air systems, the energy contained in compressed air delivered to the user is often 10%
Distribution •
Monitor pressure losses in filters and replace as appropriate
•
Use adequately sized distribution pipework designed to minimize pressure losses
or less of energy used in air compression. Savings are often possible through the following techniques:
Load reduction •
Examine each true user of compressed air to identify the air volume needed and the pressure at which this should be delivered.
•
Do not mix high volume low pressure and low volume high pressure loads. Decentralize low volume high-pressure applications or provide dedicated low-pressure utilities, for example, by using fans rather than compressed air.
•
Review air use reduction opportunities, for example: o
Use air amplifier nozzles rather than simple open-pipe compressed air jets
o
Consider whether compressed air is needed at all
o
Where air jets are required intermittently (e.g. to propel product), consider operating the jet via a process-related solenoid valve, which opens only when air is required
o
Use manual or automatically operated valves to isolate air supply to individual machines or zones that are not in continuous use
APRIL 30, 2007
24
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality • Applicability and Approach......................................25 General Liquid Effluent Quality.......................................26 Discharge to Surface Water....................................26 Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems.....................26 Land Application of Treated Effluent........................27 Septic Systems ......................................................27 Wastewater Management...............................................27 Industrial Wastewater .............................................27 Sanitary Wastewater ..............................................29 Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations .30 Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations..30 Occupational Health and Safety Issues in Wastewater Treatment Operations.............................................30 Monitoring......................................................................30
Applicability and Approach
Understand the quality, quantity, frequency and sources of liquid effluents in its installations. This includes knowledge about the locations, routes and integrity of internal drainage systems and discharge points
•
Plan and implement the segregation of liquid effluents principally along industrial, utility, sanitary, and stormwater categories, in order to limit the volume of water requiring specialized treatment. Characteristics of individual streams may also be used for source segregation.
•
Identify opportunities to prevent or reduce wastewater pollution through such measures as recycle/reuse within their facility, input substitution, or process modification (e.g. change of technology or operating conditions/modes).
•
Assess compliance of their wastewater discharges with the
This guideline applies to projects that have either direct or indirect
applicable: (i) discharge standard (if the wastewater is
discharge of process wastewater, wastewater from utility
discharged to a surface water or sewer), and (ii) water quality
operations or stormwater to the environment. These guidelines
standard for a specific reuse (e.g. if the wastewater is reused
are also applicable to industrial discharges to sanitary sewers that
for irrigation).
discharge to the environment without any treatment. Process wastewater may include contaminated wastewater from utility
Additionally, the generation and discharge of wastewater of any
operations, stormwater, and sanitary sewage. It provides
type should be managed through a combination of:
information on common techniques for wastewater management, water conservation, and reuse that can be applied to a wide range of industry sectors. This guideline is meant to be complemented by the industry-specific effluent guidelines presented in the
•
generation •
wastewater, sanitary (domestic) sewage, or stormwater should incorporate the necessary precautions to avoid, minimize, and control adverse impacts to human health, safety, or the environment.
Process modification, including waste minimization, and reducing the use of hazardous materials to reduce the load of
Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines. Projects with the potential to generate process
Water use efficiency to reduce the amount of wastewater
pollutants requiring treatment •
If needed, application of wastewater treatment techniques to further reduce the load of contaminants prior to discharge, taking into consideration potential impacts of cross-media transfer of contaminants during treatment (e.g., from water to air or land)
In the context of their overall ESHS management system, facilities should: APRIL 30, 2007
25
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
When wastewater treatment is required prior to discharge, the
the receiving water into consideration, should also influence the
level of treatment should be based on:
acceptable pollution loadings and effluent discharge quality. Additional considerations that should be included in the setting of
• •
Whether wastewater is being discharged to a sanitary sewer
project-specific performance levels for wastewater effluents
system, or to surface waters
include:
National and local standards as reflected in permit requirements and sewer system capacity to convey and treat
•
• • •
•
Process wastewater treatment standards consistent with
wastewater if discharge is to sanitary sewer
applicable Industry Sector EHS Guidelines. Projects for
Assimilative capacity of the receiving water for the load of
which there are no industry-specific guidelines should
contaminant being discharged wastewater if discharge is to
reference the effluent quality guidelines of an industry sector
surface water
with suitably analogous processes and effluents;
Intended use of the receiving water body (e.g. as a source of
•
Compliance with national or local standards for sanitary
drinking water, recreation, irrigation, navigation, or other)
wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the indicative
Presence of sensitive receptors (e.g., endangered species)
guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater
or habitats
discharges shown in Table 1.3.1 below ;
Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) for the relevant
•
Temperature of wastewater prior to discharge does not result in an increase greater than 3°C of ambient temperature at
industry sector
the edge of a scientifically established mixing zone which
General Liquid Effluent Quality
takes into account ambient water quality, receiving water use and assimilative capacity among other considerations.
Discharge to Surface Water Discharges of process wastewater, sanitary wastewater,
Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems
wastewater from utility operations or stormwater to surface water
Discharges of industrial wastewater, sanitary wastewater,
should not result in contaminant concentrations in excess of local
wastewater from utility operations or stormwater into public or
ambient water quality criteria or, in the absence of local criteria,
private wastewater treatment systems should:
other sources of ambient water quality.35 Receiving water use36 and assimilative capacity37, taking other sources of discharges to
•
Meet the pretreatment and monitoring requirements of the sewer treatment system into which it discharges.
35 An example is the US EPA National Recommended Water Quality Criteria
•
Not interfere, directly or indirectly, with the operation and
http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/criteria/wqcriteria.html
maintenance of the collection and treatment systems, or
36 Examples of receiving water uses as may be designated by local authorities
pose a risk to worker health and safety, or adversely impact
include: drinking water (with some level of treatment), recreation, aquaculture, irrigation, general aquatic life, ornamental, and navigation. Examples of healthbased guideline values for receiving waters include World Health Organization (WHO) guidelines for recreational use (http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/guidelines/en/index.html) 37 The assimilative capacity of the receiving water body depends on numerous
factors including, but not limited to, the total volume of water, flow rate, flushing rate of the water body and the loading of pollutants from other effluent sources in APRIL 30, 2007
the area or region. A seasonally representative baseline assessment of ambient water quality may be required for use with established scientific methods and mathematical models to estimate potential impact to the receiving water from an effluent source.
26
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY characteristics of residuals from wastewater treatment •
•
WORLD BANK GROUP
Properly designed and installed in accordance with local
operations.
regulations and guidance to prevent any hazard to public
Be discharged into municipal or centralized wastewater
health or contamination of land, surface or groundwater.
treatment systems that have adequate capacity to meet local
•
Well maintained to allow effective operation.
regulatory requirements for treatment of wastewater
•
Installed in areas with sufficient soil percolation for the design
generated from the project. Pretreatment of wastewater to meet regulatory requirements before discharge from the
wastewater loading rate. •
Installed in areas of stable soils that are nearly level, well
project site is required if the municipal or centralized
drained, and permeable, with enough separation between the
wastewater treatment system receiving wastewater from the
drain field and the groundwater table or other receiving
project does not have adequate capacity to maintain
waters.
regulatory compliance.
Wastewater Management
Land Application of Treated Effluent
Wastewater management includes water conservation,
The quality of treated process wastewater, wastewater from utility
wastewater treatment, stormwater management, and wastewater
operations or stormwater discharged on land, including wetlands,
and water quality monitoring.
should be established based on local regulatory requirements. . Where land is used as part of the treatment system and the
Industrial Wastewater
ultimate receptor is surface water, water quality guidelines for
Industrial wastewater generated from industrial operations
surface water discharges specific to the industry sector process
includes process wastewater, wastewater from utility operations,,
should
apply.38
Potential impact on soil, groundwater, and surface
runoff from process and materials staging areas, and
water, in the context of protection, conservation and long term
miscellaneous activities including wastewater from laboratories,
sustainability of water and land resources should be assessed
equipment maintenance shops, etc.. The pollutants in an industrial
when land is used as part of any wastewater treatment system.
wastewater may include acids or bases (exhibited as low or high pH), soluble organic chemicals causing depletion of dissolved
Septic Systems
oxygen, suspended solids, nutrients (phosphorus, nitrogen),
Septic systems are commonly used for treatment and disposal of
heavy metals (e.g. cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury,
domestic sanitary sewage in areas with no sewerage collection
nickel, zinc), cyanide, toxic organic chemicals, oily materials, and
networks, Septic systems should only be used for treatment of
volatile materials. , as well as from thermal characteristics of the
sanitary sewage, and unsuitable for industrial wastewater
discharge (e.g., elevated temperature). Transfer of pollutants to
treatment. When septic systems are the selected form of
another phase, such as air, soil, or the sub-surface, should be
wastewater disposal and treatment, they should be:
minimized through process and engineering controls.
38 Additional guidance on water quality considerations for land application is
Process Wastewater – – Examples of treatment approaches
available in the WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and Greywater. Volume 2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html
typically used in the treatment of industrial wastewater are
APRIL 30, 2007
summarized in Annex 1.3.1. While the choice of treatment 27
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
technology is driven by wastewater characteristics, the actual
account ambient water quality, receiving water use, potential
performance of this technology depends largely on the adequacy
receptors and assimilative capacity among other
of its design, equipment selection, as well as operation and
considerations;
maintenance of its installed facilities. Adequate resources are
•
Minimizing use of antifouling and corrosion inhibiting
required for proper operation and maintenance of a treatment
chemicals by ensuring appropriate depth of water intake and
facility, and performance is strongly dependent on the technical
use of screens. Least hazardous alternatives should be used
ability and training of its operational staff. One or more treatment
with regards to toxicity, biodegradability, bioavailability, and
technologies may be used to achieve the desired discharge
bioaccumulation potential. Dose applied should accord with
quality and to maintain consistent compliance with regulatory
local regulatory requirements and manufacturer
requirements. The design and operation of the selected
recommendations;
wastewater treatment technologies should avoid uncontrolled air
•
Testing for residual biocides and other pollutants of concern
emissions of volatile chemicals from wastewaters. Residuals from
should be conducted to determine the need for dose
industrial wastewater treatment operations should be disposed in
adjustments or treatment of cooling water prior to discharge.
compliance with local regulatory requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be consistent with protection of public health
Stormwater Management - Stormwater includes any surface
and safety, and conservation and long term sustainability of water
runoff and flows resulting from precipitation, drainage or other
and land resources.
sources. Typically stormwater runoff contains suspended sediments, metals, petroleum hydrocarbons, Polycyclic Aromatic
Wastewater from Utilities Operations - Utility operations such
Hydrocarbons (PAHs), coliform, etc. Rapid runoff, even of
as cooling towers and demineralization systems may result in high
uncontaminated stormwater, also degrades the quality of the
rates of water consumption, as well as the potential release of
receiving water by eroding stream beds and banks. In order to
high temperature water containing high dissolved solids, residues
reduce the need for stormwater treatment, the following principles
of biocides, residues of other cooling system anti-fouling agents,
should be applied:
etc. Recommended water management strategies for utility operations include:
•
Stormwater should be separated from process and sanitary wastewater streams in order to reduce the volume of
•
Adoption of water conservation opportunities for facility cooling systems as provided in the Water Conservation
wastewater to be treated prior to discharge •
section below; •
Use of heat recovery methods (also energy efficiency
Surface runoff from process areas or potential sources of contamination should be prevented
•
Where this approach is not practical, runoff from process and
improvements) or other cooling methods to reduce the
storage areas should be segregated from potentially less
temperature of heated water prior to discharge to ensure the
contaminated runoff
discharge water temperature does not result in an increase
•
Runoff from areas without potential sources of contamination
greater than 3°C of ambient temperature at the edge of a
should be minimized (e.g. by minimizing the area of
scientifically established mixing zone which takes into
impermeable surfaces) and the peak discharge rate should
APRIL 30, 2007
28
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY
•
WORLD BANK GROUP
be reduced (e.g. by using vegetated swales and retention
medical infirmaries, water softening etc. may also be discharged
ponds);
to the sanitary wastewater treatment system. Recommended
Where stormwater treatment is deemed necessary to protect
sanitary wastewater management strategies include:
the quality of receiving water bodies, priority should be given to managing and treating the first flush of stormwater runoff
•
with selected treatment option (e.g. septic system which can
where the majority of potential contaminants tend to be
only accept domestic sewage);
present; •
When water quality criteria allow, stormwater should be
•
sewer systems;
for meeting water needs at the facility; Oil water separators and grease traps should be installed
•
for sanitary wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the
workshops, parking areas, fuel storage and containment
indicative guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater
areas. Sludge from stormwater catchments or collection and treatment systems may contain elevated levels of pollutants
discharges shown in Table 1.3.1; •
If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to either a septic system, or where land is used as part of the
and should be disposed in compliance with local regulatory
treatment system, treatment to meet applicable national or
requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be
local standards for sanitary wastewater discharges is
consistent with protection of public health and safety, and
required.
conservation and long term sustainability of water and land resources.
If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to surface water, treatment to meet national or local standards
and maintained as appropriate at refueling facilities,
•
Segregation and pretreatment of oil and grease containing effluents (e.g. use of a grease trap) prior to discharge into
managed as a resource, either for groundwater recharge or •
Segregation of wastewater streams to ensure compatibility
•
Sludge from sanitary wastewater treatment systems should be disposed in compliance with local regulatory
Sanitary Wastewater
requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be
Sanitary wastewater from industrial facilities may include effluents
consistent with protection of public health and safety, and
from domestic sewage, food service, and laundry facilities serving
conservation and long term sustainability of water and land
site employees. Miscellaneous wastewater from laboratories,
resources.
APRIL 30, 2007
29
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
or a non-hazardous waste and managed accordingly as described
Table 1.3.1 Indicative Values for Treated Sanitary Sewage Discharges a Pollutants
in the Waste Management section of this document.
Occupational Health and Safety Issues in Wastewater Treatment Operations
Units
Guideline Value
pH
pH
6 –9
BOD
mg/l
30
COD
mg/l
125
Total nitrogen
mg/l
10
managed. Examples of these hazards include the potential for
Total phosphorus
mg/l
2
trips and falls into tanks, confined space entries for maintenance
Oil and grease
mg/l
10
operations, and inhalation of VOCs, bioaerosols, and methane,
Total suspended solids
mg/l
50
Total coliform bacteria
MPN b / 100 ml
400a
Notes: a Not applicable to centralized, municipal, wastewater treatment systems which are included in EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation. b MPN = Most Probable Number
Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations
Wastewater treatment facility operators may be exposed to physical, chemical, and biological hazards depending on the design of the facilities and the types of wastewater effluents
contact with pathogens and vectors, and use of potentially hazardous chemicals, including chlorine, sodium and calcium hypochlorite, and ammonia. Detailed recommendations for the management of occupational health and safety issues are presented in the relevant section of this document. Additional guidance specifically applicable to wastewater treatment systems is provided in the EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation.
Air emissions from wastewater treatment operations may include hydrogen sulfide, methane, ozone (in the case of ozone
Monitoring
disinfection), volatile organic compounds (e.g., chloroform
A wastewater and water quality monitoring program with adequate
generated from chlorination activities and other volatile organic
resources and management oversight should be developed and
compounds (VOCs) from industrial wastewater), gaseous or
implemented to meet the objective(s) of the monitoring program.
volatile chemicals used for disinfection processes (e.g., chlorine
The wastewater and water quality monitoring program should
and ammonia), and bioaerosols. Odors from treatment facilities
consider the following elements:
can also be a nuisance to workers and the surrounding community. Recommendations for the management of emissions
•
Monitoring parameters: The parameters selected for
are presented in the Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality
monitoring should be indicative of the pollutants of concern
section of this document and in the EHS Guidelines for Water and
from the process, and should include parameters that are
Sanitation.
regulated under compliance requirements;
Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations
•
Monitoring type and frequency: Wastewater monitoring
Sludge from a waste treatment plant needs to be evaluated on a
should take into consideration the discharge characteristics
case-by-case basis to establish whether it constitutes a hazardous
from the process over time. Monitoring of discharges from processes with batch manufacturing or seasonal process variations should take into consideration of time-dependent
APRIL 30, 2007
30
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
variations in discharges and, therefore, is more complex than monitoring of continuous discharges. Effluents from highly variable processes may need to be sampled more frequently or through composite methods. Grab samples or, if automated equipment permits, composite samples may offer more insight on average concentrations of pollutants over a 24-hour period. Composite samplers may not be appropriate where analytes of concern are short-lived (e.g., quickly degraded or volatile). •
Monitoring locations: The monitoring location should be selected with the objective of providing representative monitoring data. Effluent sampling stations may be located at the final discharge, as well as at strategic upstream points prior to merging of different discharges. Process discharges should not be diluted prior or after treatment with the objective of meeting the discharge or ambient water quality standards.
•
Data quality: Monitoring programs should apply internationally approved methods for sample collection, preservation and analysis. Sampling should be conducted by or under the supervision of trained individuals. Analysis should be conducted by entities permitted or certified for this purpose. Sampling and Analysis Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) plans should be prepared and, implemented. QA/QC documentation should be included in monitoring reports.
APRIL 30, 2007
31
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY
WORLD BANK GROUP
Annex 1.3.1 - Examples of Industrial Wastewater Treatment Approaches
pH
Pollutant/Parameter
Control Options / Principle Chemical, Equalization
Common End of Pipe Control Technology Acid/Base addition, Flow equalization
Oil and Grease / TPH
Phase separation
Dissolved Air Floatation, oil water separator, grease trap
TSS - Settleable
Settling, Size Exclusion
Sedimentation basin, clarifier, centrifuge, screens
TSS - Non-Settleable
Floatation, Filtration - traditional and tangential
Dissolved air floatation, Multimedia filter, sand filter, fabric filter, ultrafiltration, microfiltration
Hi - BOD (> 2 Kg/m3)
Biological - Anaerobic
Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid
Lo - BOD (< 2 Kg/m3)
Biological - Aerobic, Facultative
Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid
COD - Non-Biodegradable
Oxidation, Adsorption, Size Exclusion
Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Membranes
Metals - Particulate and Soluble
Coagulation, flocculation, precipitation, size exclusion
Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential
Inorganics / Non-metals
Coagulation, flocculation, precipitation, size exclusion, Oxidation, Adsorption
Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential, Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation
Organics - VOCs and SVOCs
Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic, Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation
Biological : Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid; Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon Biological : Attached growth; Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon Aerobic/Anoxic biological treatment, chemical hydrolysis and air stripping, chlorination, ion exchange
Temperature
Capture – Active or Passive; Biological; Adsorption, Oxidation Biological Nutrient Removal, Chemical, Physical, Adsorption Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic, Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation Evaporative Cooling
TDS
Concentration, Size Exclusion
Evaporation, crystallization, Reverse Osmosis
Active Ingredients/Emerging Contaminants
Adsorption, Oxidation, Size Exclusion, Concentration
Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Ion Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization
Emissions – Odors and VOCs Nutrients Color
Radionuclides Pathogens Toxicity
APRIL 30, 2007
Adsorption,Size Exclusion, Concentration Disinfection, Sterilization Adsorption, Oxidation, Size Exclusion, Concentration
Biological Aerobic, Chemical oxidation, Activated Carbon Surface Aerators, Flow Equalization
Ion Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization Chlorine, Ozone, Peroxide, UV, Thermal Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Evaporation, crystallization, Reverse Osmosis
32
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WATER CONSERVATION
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.4 Water Conservation Applicability and Approach .............................................33 Water Monitoring and Management................................33 Process Water Reuse and Recycling..............................33 Building Facility Operations ............................................34 Cooling Systems............................................................34 Heating Systems............................................................34
Applicability and Approach
Water Monitoring and Management The essential elements of a water management program involve: •
Identification, regular measurement, and recording of principal flows within a facility;
•
Definition and regular review of performance targets, which
Water conservation programs should be implemented
are adjusted to account for changes in major factors
commensurate with the magnitude and cost of water use.
affecting water use (e.g. industrial production rate);
These programs should promote the continuous reduction in water consumption and achieve savings in the water
•
targets to identify where action should be taken to reduce
pumping, treatment and disposal costs. Water conservation measures may include water monitoring/management
Regular comparison of water flows with performance water use.
Water measurement (metering) should emphasize areas of
techniques; process and cooling/heating water recycling,
greatest water use. Based on review of metering data,
reuse, and other techniques; and sanitary water conservation
‘unaccounted’ use–indicating major leaks at industrial facilities–
techniques.
could be identified.
General recommendations include:
Process Water Reuse and Recycling
•
Storm/Rainwater harvesting and use
Opportunities for water savings in industrial processes are
•
Zero discharge design/Use of treated waste water to be
highly industry-specific. However, the following techniques have
included in project design processes
all been used successfully, and should be considered in
Use of localized recirculation systems in
conjunction with the development of the metering system
plant/facility/shops (as opposed to centralized
described above.
•
recirculation system), with provision only for makeup water •
Use of dry process technologies e.g. dry quenching
•
Process water system pressure management
•
Project design to have measures for adequate water
•
Washing Machines: Many washing machines use large quantities of hot water. Use can increase as nozzles become enlarged due to repeated cleaning and /or wear. Monitor machine water use, compare with specification, and replace nozzles when water and heat use reaches
collection, spill control and leakage control system
levels warranting such work. •
Water reuse: Common water reuse applications include countercurrent rinsing, for example in multi-stage washing
APRIL 30, 2007
33
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WATER CONSERVATION
•
WORLD BANK GROUP
and rinsing processes, or reusing waste water from one
the facility, whether sanitary or including other activities
process for another with less exacting water
such as showering or catering
requirements. For example, using bleaching rinse water
•
Regularly maintain plumbing, and identify and repair leaks
for textile washing, or bottle-washer rinse water for
•
Shut off water to unused areas
bottle crate washing, or even washing the floor. More
•
Install self-closing taps, automatic shut-off valves, spray
sophisticated reuse projects requiring treatment of water
nozzles, pressure reducing valves, and water conserving
before reuse are also sometimes practical.
fixtures (e.g. low flow shower heads, faucets, toilets,
Water jets/sprays: If processes use water jets or sprays
urinals; and spring loaded or sensored faucets)
(e.g. to keep conveyors clean or to cool product) review
•
when needed
the accuracy of the spray pattern to prevent unnecessary water loss. •
Flow control optimization: Industrial processes sometimes require the use of tanks, which are refilled to control losses. It is often possible to reduce the rate of water supply to such tanks, and sometimes to reduce tank levels to reduce spillage. If the process uses water
Operate dishwashers and laundries on full loads, and only
•
Install water-saving equipment in lavatories, such as lowflow toilets
Cooling Systems Water conservation opportunities in cooling systems include: •
towers rather than once-through cooling systems
cooling sprays, it may be possible to reduce flow while maintaining cooling performance. Testing can
•
If hoses are used in cleaning, use flow controls to restrict wasteful water flow
o
of water sprayed from hosepipes o
Using flow timers and limit switches to control water use
o
Using ‘clean-up’ practices rather than hosing down
Building Facility Operations Consumption of building and sanitary water is typically less than that used in industrial processes. However, savings can readily be identified, as outlined below: •
accumulation of dissolved solids •
Use of air cooling rather than evaporative cooling, although this may increase electricity use in the
Consider the use of high pressure, low volume cleaning systems rather than using large volumes
Limiting condenser or cooling tower blowdown to the minimum required to prevent unacceptable
determine the optimum balance. o
Use of closed circuit cooling systems with cooling
cooling system •
Use of treated waste water for cooling towers
•
Reusing/recycling cooling tower blowdown
Heating Systems Heating systems based on the circulation of low or medium pressure hot water (which do not consume water) should be closed. If they do consume water, regular maintenance should be conducted to check for leaks. However, large quantities of water may be used by steam systems, and this can be reduced by the following measures:
Compare daily water use per employee to existing benchmarks taking into consideration the primary use at
APRIL 30, 2007
34
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WATER CONSERVATION •
WORLD BANK GROUP
Repair of steam and condensate leaks, and repair of all failed steam traps
•
Return of condensate to the boilerhouse, and use of heat exchangers (with condensate return) rather than direct steam injection where process permits
•
Flash steam recovery
•
Minimizing boiler blowdown consistent with maintaining acceptably low dissolved solids in boiler water. Use of reverse osmosis boiler feed water treatment substantially reduces the need for boiler blowdown
•
Minimizing deaerator heating
APRIL 30, 2007
35
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.5 Hazardous Materials Management When a hazardous material is no longer usable for its original Applicability and Approach .............................................36 General Hazardous Materials Management....................37 Hazard Assessment ...............................................37 Management Actions..............................................37 Release Prevention and Control Planning ............38 Occupational Health and Safety ...........................38 Process Knowledge and Documentation ..............39 Preventive Measures..............................................39 Hazardous Materials Transfer..............................39 Overfill Protection................................................39 Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention.............40 Control Measures...................................................40 Secondary Containment (Liquids) ........................40 Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection..............41 Underground Storage Tanks (USTs) ....................41 Management of Major Hazards.......................................42 Management Actions..............................................42 Preventive Measures..............................................43 Emergency Preparedness and Response ...............44 Community Involvement and Awareness.................44
purpose and is intended for disposal, but still has hazardous properties, it is considered a hazardous waste (see Section 1.4). This guidance is intended to be applied in conjunction with traditional occupational health and safety and emergency preparedness programs which are included in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health and Safety Management, and Section 3.7 on Emergency Preparedness and Response. Guidance on the Transport of Hazardous Materials is provided in Section 3.5. This section is divided into two main subsections: General Hazardous Materials Management: Guidance applicable to all projects or facilities that handle or store any quantity of hazardous materials. Management of Major Hazards: Additional guidance for projects or
Applicability and Approach These guidelines apply to projects that use, store, or handle any quantity of hazardous materials (Hazmats), defined as materials
facilities that store or handle hazardous materials at, or above, threshold quantities39, and thus require special treatment to prevent accidents such as fire, explosions, leaks or spills, and to prepare and respond to emergencies.
that represent a risk to human health, property, or the environment due to their physical or chemical characteristics. Hazmats can be
The overall objective of hazardous materials management is to
classified according to the hazard as explosives; compressed
avoid or, when avoidance is not feasible, minimize uncontrolled
gases, including toxic or flammable gases; flammable liquids;
releases of hazardous materials or accidents (including explosion
flammable solids; oxidizing substances; toxic materials;
and fire) during their production, handling, storage and use. This
radioactive material; and corrosive substances. Guidance on the
objective can be achieved by:
transport of hazardous materials is covered in Section 3 of this document.
39 For examples, threshold quantities should be those established for emergency
planning purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection of Environment (Title Threshold quantities are provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 68, 112, and 355).
APRIL 30, 2007
36
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT •
•
Establishing hazardous materials management priorities
WORLD BANK GROUP
•
The types and amounts of hazardous materials present in the
based on hazard analysis of risky operations identified
project. This information should be recorded and should
through Social and Environmental Assessment;
include a summary table with the following information:
Where practicable, avoiding or minimizing the use of
o
hazardous materials. For example, non-hazardous materials
the Hazmat
have been found to substitute asbestos in building materials,
o
PCBs in electrical equipment, persistent organic pollutants o
substances in refrigeration systems;
fire or explosion; Using engineering controls (containment, automatic alarms, and shut-off systems) commensurate with the nature of Implementing management controls (procedures, inspections, communications, training, and drills) to address residual risks that have not been prevented or controlled through engineering measures.
General Hazardous Materials Management Projects which manufacture, handle, use, or store hazardous
o
Quantity of Hazmat used per month
o
Characteristic(s) that make(s) the Hazmat hazardous (e.g. flammability, toxicity)
•
Analysis of potential spill and release scenarios using available industry statistics on spills and accidents where
hazard; •
Internationally accepted regulatory reporting threshold quantity or national equivalent40 of the Hazmat
Preventing uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials to the environment or uncontrolled reactions that might result in
•
Classification (e.g. code, class or division) of the Hazmat
(POPs) in pesticides formulations, and ozone depleting •
Name and description (e.g. composition of a mixture) of
available •
Analysis of the potential for uncontrolled reactions such as fire and explosions
•
Analysis of potential consequences based on the physicalgeographical characteristics of the project site, including aspects such as its distance to settlements, water resources, and other environmentally sensitive areas
materials should establish management programs that are
Hazard assessment should be performed by specialized
commensurate with the potential risks present. The main
professionals using internationally-accepted methodologies such
objectives of projects involving hazardous materials should be the
as Hazardous Operations Analysis (HAZOP), Failure Mode and
protection of the workforce and the prevention and control of
Effects Analysis (FMEA), and Hazard Identification (HAZID).
releases and accidents. These objectives should be addressed by integrating prevention and control measures, management actions, and procedures into day-to-day business activities. Potentially applicable elements of a management program include the following:
Management Actions The management actions to be included in a Hazardous Materials Management Plan should be commensurate with the level of
Hazard Assessment The level of risk should be established through an on-going assessment process based on: APRIL 30, 2007
40 Threshold quantities are provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency.
Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 68, 112, and 355).
37
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
potential risks associated with the production, handling, storage,
external resources for equipment and personnel, if
and use of hazardous materials.
necessary, to supplement internal resources •
Description of response activities in the event of a spill,
Release Prevention and Control Planning
release, or other chemical emergency including:
Where there is risk of a spill of uncontrolled hazardous materials,
o
Internal and external notification procedures
facilities should prepare a spill control, prevention, and
o
Specific responsibilities of individuals or groups
countermeasure plan as a specific component of their Emergency
o
Decision process for assessing severity of the release,
Preparedness and Response Plan (described in more detail in
and determining appropriate actions
Section 3.7). The plan should be tailored to the hazards
o
Facility evacuation routes
associated with the project, and include:
o
Post-event activities such as clean-up and disposal,
•
incident investigation, employee re-entry, and
Training of operators on release prevention, including drills
restoration of spill response equipment.
specific to hazardous materials as part of emergency preparedness response training •
Implementation of inspection programs to maintain the mechanical integrity and operability of pressure vessels, tanks, piping systems, relief and vent valve systems, containment infrastructure, emergency shutdown systems, controls and pumps, and associated process equipment
•
Preparation of written Standard Operating Procedures
•
The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should address applicable, essential elements of occupational health and safety management as described in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health and Safety, including: •
Job safety analysis to identify specific potential occupational
(SOPs) for filling USTs, ASTs or other containers or
hazards and industrial hygiene surveys, as appropriate, to
equipment as well as for transfer operations by personnel
monitor and verify chemical exposure levels, and compare
trained in the safe transfer and filling of the hazardous
with applicable occupational exposure standards41
material, and in spill prevention and response •
Occupational Health and Safety
•
Hazard communication and training programs to prepare
SOPs for the management of secondary containment
workers to recognize and respond to workplace chemical
structures, specifically the removal of any accumulated fluid,
hazards. Programs should include aspects of hazard
such as rainfall, to ensure that the intent of the system is not
identification, safe operating and materials handling
accidentally or willfully defeated
procedures, safe work practices, basic emergency
Identification of locations of hazardous materials and
procedures, and special hazards unique to their jobs.
associated activities on an emergency plan site map •
Documentation of availability of specific personal protective equipment and training needed to respond to an emergency
•
Documentation of availability of spill response equipment sufficient to handle at least initial stages of a spill and a list of
APRIL 30, 2007
41 Including: Threshold Limit Value (TLV®) occupational exposure guidelines and
Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs®), American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), http://www.acgih.org/TLV/; U.S. National Institute for Occupational Health and Safety (NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/npg/; Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs), U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARD S&p_id=9992; Indicative Occupational Exposure Limit Values, European Union, http://europe.osha.eu.int/good_practice/risks/ds/oel/; and other similar sources.
38
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT Training should incorporate information from Material Safety Data
Sheets42
(MSDSs) for hazardous materials being
handled. MSDSs should be readily accessible to employees in their local language. • •
Preventive Measures Hazardous Materials Transfer Uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials may result from small cumulative events, or from more significant equipment
Definition and implementation of permitted maintenance
failure associated with events such as manual or mechanical
activities, such as hot work or confined space entries
transfer between storage systems or process equipment.
Provision of suitable personal protection equipment (PPE)
Recommended practices to prevent hazardous material releases
(footwear, masks, protective clothing and goggles in
from processes include:
appropriate areas), emergency eyewash and shower stations, ventilation systems, and sanitary facilities •
WORLD BANK GROUP
•
materials in tanks (e.g., all acids use one type of connection,
Monitoring and record-keeping activities, including audit
all caustics use another), and maintaining procedures to
procedures designed to verify and record the effectiveness of prevention and control of exposure to occupational hazards, and maintaining accident and incident investigation reports
prevent addition of hazardous materials to incorrect tanks •
to ensure safe transfer • •
materials containers at connection points or other possible
Written process safety parameters (i.e., hazards of the
overflow points.
chemical substances, safety equipment specifications, safe operation ranges for temperature, pressure, and other applicable parameters, evaluation of the consequences of
Provision of secondary containment, drip trays or other overflow and drip containment measures, for hazardous
facility ES/OHS MS and include: •
Regular inspection, maintenance and repair of fittings, pipes and hoses
The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should be incorporated into, and consistent with, the other elements of the
Use of transfer equipment that is compatible and suitable for the characteristics of the materials transferred and designed
on file for a period of at least five years
Process Knowledge and Documentation
Use of dedicated fittings, pipes, and hoses specific to
Overfill Protection Overfills of vessels and tanks should be prevented as they are
deviations, etc.)
among the most common causes of spills resulting in soil and
•
Written operating procedures
water contamination, and among the easiest to prevent.
•
Compliance audit procedures
Recommended overfill protection measures include: •
Prepare written procedures for transfer operations that includes a checklist of measures to follow during filling operations and the use of filling operators trained in these procedures
42 MSDSs are produced by the manufacturer, but might not be prepared for
chemical intermediates that are not distributed in commerce. In these cases, employers still need to provide workers with equivalent information.
APRIL 30, 2007
•
Installation of gauges on tanks to measure volume inside
•
Use of dripless hose connections for vehicle tank and fixed connections with storage tanks 39
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT •
Provision of automatic fill shutoff valves on storage tanks to
WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Prohibition of all sources of ignition from areas near flammable storage tanks
prevent overfilling •
Use of a catch basin around the fill pipe to collect spills
•
Use of piping connections with automatic overfill protection
Control Measures
(float valve)
Secondary Containment (Liquids)
Pumping less volume than available capacity into the tank or
A critical aspect for controlling accidental releases of liquid
vessel by ordering less material than its available capacity
hazardous materials during storage and transfer is the provision of
Provision of overfill or over pressure vents that allow
secondary containment. It is not necessary for secondary
controlled release to a capture point
containment methods to meet long term material compatibility as
• •
with primary storage and piping, but their design and construction
Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention
should hold released materials effectively until they can be
Reactive, flammable, and explosive materials should also be
detected and safely recovered. Appropriate secondary
managed to avoid uncontrolled reactions or conditions resulting in
containment structures consist of berms, dikes, or walls capable of
fire or explosion. Recommended prevention practices include:
containing the larger of 110 percent of the largest tank or 25%
•
percent of the combined tank volumes in areas with above-ground
Storage of incompatible materials (acids, bases, flammables, oxidizers, reactive chemicals) in separate areas, and with containment facilities separating material storage areas
•
Provision of material-specific storage for extremely hazardous or reactive materials
• •
Use of flame arresting devices on vents from flammable
and will be made of impervious, chemically resistant material. Secondary containment design should also consider means to prevent contact between incompatible materials in the event of a release.
storage containers
Other secondary containment measures that should be applied
Provision of grounding and lightning protection for tank
depending on site-specific conditions include:
farms, transfer stations, and other equipment that handles flammable materials •
tanks with a total storage volume equal or greater than 1,000 liters
•
in areas with surfaces sufficiently impervious to avoid loss to
Selection of materials of construction compatible with
the environment and sloped to a collection or a containment
products stored for all parts of storage and delivery systems,
structure not connected to municipal wastewater/stormwater
and avoiding reuse of tanks for different products without checking material compatibility •
Storage of hazardous materials in an area of the facility separated from the main production works. Where proximity is unavoidable, physical separation should be provided using structures designed to prevent fire, explosion, spill, and other emergency situations from affecting facility operations
Transfer of hazardous materials from vehicle tanks to storage
collection system •
Where it is not practical to provide permanent, dedicated containment structures for transfer operations, one or more alternative forms of spill containment should be provided, such as portable drain covers (which can be deployed for the duration of the operations), automatic shut-off valves on storm water basins, or shut off valves in drainage or sewer facilities, combined with oil-water separators
APRIL 30, 2007
40
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT •
•
•
Storage of drummed hazardous materials with a total volume
Underground Storage Tanks (USTs)45
equal or greater than 1,000 liters in areas with impervious
Although there are many environmental and safety advantages of
surfaces that are sloped or bermed to contain a minimum of
underground storage of hazardous materials, including reduced
25 percent of the total storage volume
risk of fire or explosion, and lower vapor losses into the
Provision of secondary containment for components (tanks,
atmosphere, leaks of hazardous materials can go undetected for
pipes) of the hazardous material storage system, to the
long periods of time with potential for soil and groundwater
extent feasible
contamination. Examples of techniques to manage these risks
Conducting periodic (e.g. daily or weekly) reconciliation of
include:
tank contents, and inspection of visible portions of tanks and piping for leaks; •
WORLD BANK GROUP
Use of double-walled, composite, or specially coated storage and piping systems particularly in the use of underground
•
materials •
detecting leaks between the two walls.
for steel tanks •
containment, particularly in high-risk locations43. Leak detection is especially important in situations where secondary containment is not feasible or practicable, such as in long pipe runs. Acceptable
lines that direct any leaked product to monitoring ports at the lowest point of the liner or structure •
Use of automatic pressure loss detectors on pressurized or long distance piping
•
Use of approved or certified integrity testing methods on
•
Considering the use of SCADA 44 if financially feasible
Reconciling tank contents by measuring the volume in store with the expected volume, given the stored quantity at last stocking, and deliveries to and withdrawals from the store
•
Testing integrity by volumetric, vacuum, acoustic, tracers, or other means on all tanks at regular intervals
•
piping or tank systems, at regular intervals •
Monitoring the surface above any tank for indications of soil movement
leak detection methods include: •
For new installations, installing impermeable liners or structures (e.g., concrete vaults) under and around tanks and
Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection Leak detection may be used in conjunction with secondary
Assessing local soil corrosion potential, and installing and maintaining cathodic protection (or equivalent rust protection)
storage tanks (USTs) and underground piping. If doublewalled systems are used, they should provide a means of
Avoiding use of USTs for storage of highly soluble organic
Considering the monitoring groundwater of quality down gradient of locations where multiple USTs are in use
•
Evaluating the risk of existing UST in newly acquired facilities to determine if upgrades are required for USTs that will be continued to be used, including replacement with new
43
High-risk locations are places where the release of product from the storage system could result in the contamination of drinking water source or those located in water resource protection areas as designated by local authorities.
systems or permanent closure of abandoned USTs. Ensuring that new USTs are sited away from wells,
44 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 45 Additional details on the management of USTs is provided in the EHS
Guidelines for Retail Petroleum Stations.
APRIL 30, 2007
41
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
reservoirs and other source water protection areas and
the prevention measures (see below) should be conducted at
floodplains, and maintained so as to prevent corrosion.
least every three years and should include:
Management of Major Hazards
o
Preparation of a report of the findings
o
Determination and documentation of the appropriate
In addition to the application of the above-referenced guidance on
response to each finding
prevention and control of releases of hazardous materials, projects involving production, handling, and storage of hazardous materials at or above threshold limits46 should prepare a
o •
Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected
Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable information about site hazards and the steps needed to
Hazardous Materials Risk Management Plan, in the context of its
prevent accidental releases. An incident investigation
overall ES/OHS MS, containing all of the elements presented
mechanism should include procedures for:
below.47 The objective of this guidance is the prevention and control of catastrophic releases of toxic, reactive, flammable, or
o
Initiation of the investigation promptly
explosive chemicals that may result in toxic, fire, or explosion
o
Summarizing the investigation in a report
hazards.48
o
Addressing the report findings and recommendations
o
A review of the report with staff and contractors
Management Actions •
prevention of accidents.
The technical basis for changes in processes and operations
Employee Participation: A written plan of action should describe an active employee participation program for the
Management of Change: These procedures should address: o
•
•
•
Contractors: There should be a mechanism for contractor
o
The impact of changes on health and safety
control which should include a requirement for them to
o
Modification to operating procedures
develop hazard materials management procedures that meet
o
Authorization requirements
the requirements of the hazardous materials management
o
Employees affected
plan. Their procedures should be consistent with those of
o
Training needs
the contracting company and the contractor workforce should
Compliance Audit: A compliance audit is a way to evaluate
undergo the same training. Additionally, procedures should
compliance with the prevention program requirements for
require that contractors are:
each process. A compliance audit covering each element of
o
Provided with safety performance procedures and safety and hazard information
46 Threshold quantities should be those established for emergency planning
purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 300-399 and 700 to 789). 47 For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance
Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Risk Management Manual. Washington, D.C. December 2000. 48 The approach to the management of major hazards is largely based on an approach to Process Safety Management developed by the American Institute of Chemical Engineers.
APRIL 30, 2007
o
Observe safety practices
o
Act responsibly
o
Have access to appropriate training for their employees
o
Ensure that their employees know process hazards and applicable emergency actions
42
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT Prepare and submit training records for their employees
initial startup, normal operations, temporary operations,
to the contracting company
emergency shutdown, emergency operations, normal
Inform their employees about the hazards presented by
shutdown, and start-up following a normal or emergency
their work
shutdown or major change). These SOPs should include
o
Assess trends of repeated similar incidents
special considerations for Mazmats used in the process or
o
Develop and implement procedures to manage repeated
operations (e.g. temperature control to prevent emissions of
similar incidents
a volatile hazardous chemical; diversion of gaseous
o
o
•
Training: Project employees should be provided training on Hazmat management. The training program should include:
discharges of hazardous pollutants from the process to a temporary storage tank in case of emergency).
o
A list of employees to be trained
Other procedures to be developed include impacts of
o
Specific training objectives
deviations, steps to avoid deviations, prevention of chemical
o
Mechanisms to achieve the objectives (i.e., hands-on
exposure, exposure control measures, and equipment
workshops, videos, etc.)
inspections.
o
The means to determine whether the training program is effective
o
Training procedures for new hires and refresher courses for existing employees
Preventive Measures The purpose of preventive measures is to ensure that safetyrelated aspects of the process and equipment are considered, limits to be placed on the operations are well known, and accepted standards and codes are adopted, where they apply. •
WORLD BANK GROUP
Mechanical Integrity of process equipment, piping and instrumentation: Inspection and maintenance procedures should be developed and documented to ensure mechanical integrity of equipment, piping, and instrumentation and prevent uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials from the project. These procedures should be included as part of the project SOPs. The specific process components of major interest include pressure vessels and storage tanks, piping systems, relief and vent systems and devices, emergency shutdown systems, controls, and pumps. Recommended
Process Safety Information: Procedures should be prepared
aspects of the inspection and maintenance program include:
for each hazardous materials and include:
o
Developing inspection and maintenance procedures
o
Establishing a quality assurance plan for equipment,
o
Compilation of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
o
Identification of maximum intended inventories and safe upper/lower parameters
o
maintenance materials, and spare parts o
Documentation of equipment specifications and of codes and standards used to design, build and operate
maintenance procedures o
Operating Procedures: SOPs should be prepared for each
Conducting equipment, piping, and instrumentation inspections and maintenance
the process •
Conducting employee training on the inspection and
o
Identifying and correcting identified deficiencies
step of all processes or operations within the project (e.g.
APRIL 30, 2007
43
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT o
Evaluating the inspection and maintenance results and,
incorporated into and consistent with, the facility’s overall ES/OHS
if necessary, updating the inspection and maintenance
MS, should be prepared to cover the following:49
procedures o •
WORLD BANK GROUP
Reporting the results to management.
•
o
Informing the public and emergency response agencies
Hot Work Permit: Hot work operations – such as brazing,
o
Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment
torch-cutting, grinding, soldering, and welding – are
o
Taking emergency response actions
associated with potential health, safety, and property hazards
o
Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan to reflect changes, and ensuring that employees are
resulting from the fumes, gases, sparks, and hot metal and
informed of such changes
radiant energy produced during hot work. Hot work permit is required for any operation involving open flames or producing
•
Emergency Equipment: Procedures should be prepared for
heat and/or sparks. The section of SOPs on hot work should
using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining the emergency
include the responsibility for hot work permitting, personal
response equipment.
protection equipment (PPE), hot work procedures, personnel training, and recordkeeping. •
Planning Coordination: Procedures should be prepared for:
•
Training: Employees and contractors should be trained on emergency response procedures.
Pre-Start Review: Procedures should be prepared to carry out pre-start reviews when a modification is significant
Community Involvement and Awareness
enough to require a change in safety information under the
When hazardous materials are in use above threshold quantities,
management of change procedure. The procedures should:
the management plan should include a system for community
o
o
o
o
Confirm that the new or modified construction and/or
awareness, notification and involvement that should be
equipment meet design specifications
commensurate with the potential risks identified for the project
Ensure that procedures for safety, operation,
during the hazard assessment studies. This should include
maintenance, and emergency are adequate
mechanisms for sharing the results of hazard and risk assessment
Include a process hazard assessment, and resolve or
studies in a timely, understandable and culturally sensitive manner
implement recommendations for new process
with potentially affected communities that provides a means for
Ensure that training for all affected employees is being
public feedback. Community involvement activities should include:
conducted
Emergency Preparedness and Response When handling hazardous materials, procedures and practices should be developed allowing for quick and efficient responses to
•
Availability of general information to the potentially affected community on the nature and extent of project operations, and the prevention and control measures in place to ensure no effects to human health
accidents that could result in human injury or damage to the environment. An Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan,
APRIL 30, 2007
49 For a comprehensive treatment of the development of emergency response
plans in conjunction with communities refer to the Awareness and Preparedness for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines available at: http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html
44
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT •
WORLD BANK GROUP
The potential for off-site effects to human health or the environment following an accident at planned or existing hazardous installations
•
Specific and timely information on appropriate behavior and safety measures to be adopted in the event of an accident including practice drills in locations with higher risks
•
Access to information necessary to understand the nature of the possible effect of an accident and an opportunity to contribute effectively, as appropriate, to decisions concerning hazardous installations and the development of community emergency preparedness plans.
APRIL 30, 2007
45
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT
1.6 Waste Management Applicability and Approach .............................................46 General Waste Management..........................................47 Waste Management Planning .................................47 Waste Prevention...................................................47 Recycling and Reuse..............................................48 Treatment and Disposal..........................................48 Hazardous Waste Management......................................48 Waste Storage .......................................................48 Transportation........................................................49 Treatment and Disposal..........................................49 Commercial or Government Waste Contractors....49 Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste ..................50 Monitoring..............................................................50
WORLD BANK GROUP
residual waste from industrial operations, such as boiler slag, clinker, and fly ash. Hazardous waste shares the properties of a hazardous material (e.g. ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity, or toxicity), or other physical, chemical, or biological characteristics that may pose a potential risk to human health or the environment if improperly managed. Wastes may also be defined as “hazardous” by local regulations or international conventions, based on the origin of the waste and its inclusion on hazardous waste lists, or based on its characteristics. Sludge from a waste treatment plant, water supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility, and other discarded
Applicability and Approach These guidelines apply to projects that generate, store, or handle any quantity of waste across a range of industry sectors. It is not intended to apply to projects or facilities
material, including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous material resulting from industrial operations needs to be evaluated on a case-by-case basis to establish whether it constitutes a hazardous or a non-hazardous waste.
where the primary business is the collection, transportation,
Facilities that generate and store wastes should practice the
treatment, or disposal of wastes. Specific guidance for these
following:
types of facilities is presented in the Environmental Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Waste Management
•
Establishing waste management priorities at the outset of activities based on an understanding of potential
Facilities.
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) risks and
A waste is any solid, liquid, or contained gaseous material
impacts and considering waste generation and its
that is being discarded by disposal, recycling, burning or
consequences
incineration. It can be byproduct of a manufacturing process
•
Establishing a waste management hierarchy that
or an obsolete commercial product that can no longer be
considers prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery,
used for intended purpose and requires disposal.
recycling, removal and finally disposal of wastes. •
Solid (non-hazardous) wastes generally include any garbage, refuse. Examples of such waste include domestic trash and garbage; inert construction / demolition materials; refuse,
Avoiding or minimizing the generation waste materials, as far as practicable
•
Where waste generation cannot be avoided but has been minimized, recovering and reusing waste
such as metal scrap and empty containers (except those previously used to contain hazardous materials which should, in principle, be managed as a hazardous waste); and APRIL 30, 2007
46
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT •
Where waste can not be recovered or reused, treating,
WORLD BANK GROUP
•
site storage
destroying, and disposing of it in an environmentally sound manner
Definition of procedures and operational controls for on-
•
Definition of options / procedures / operational controls for treatment and final disposal
General Waste Management The following guidance applies to the management of non-
Waste Prevention
hazardous and hazardous waste. Additional guidance
Processes should be designed and operated to prevent, or
specifically applicable to hazardous wastes is presented
minimize, the quantities of wastes generated and hazards
below. Waste management should be addressed through a
associated with the wastes generated in accordance with the
Waste management system that addresses issues linked to
following strategy:
waste minimization, generation, transport, disposal, and monitoring.
Waste Management Planning Facilities that generate waste should characterize their waste
•
or toxic materials, or with those where processing generates lower waste volumes •
including modification of design of the production
generation rates, or according to local regulatory waste management strategies should include: •
•
Instituting good housekeeping and operating practices, including inventory control to reduce the amount of waste resulting from materials that are out-of-date, off-
and design activities, including during equipment
specification, contaminated, damaged, or excess to
modifications and process alterations, to identify
plant needs
opportunities, and necessary treatment, storage, and
•
Instituting procurement measures that recognize opportunities to return usable materials such as
disposal infrastructure
containers and which prevents the over ordering of
Collection of data and information about the process
materials
and waste streams in existing facilities, including characterization of waste streams by type, quantities, •
process, operating conditions, and process controls50
Review of new waste sources during planning, siting,
expected waste generation, pollution prevention
•
Applying manufacturing process that convert materials efficiently, providing higher product output yields,
according to composition, source, types of wastes produced, requirements. Effective planning and implementation of
Substituting raw materials or inputs with less hazardous
•
Minimizing hazardous waste generation by implementing stringent waste segregation to prevent the
and potential use/disposition
commingling of non-hazardous and hazardous waste to
Establishment of priorities based on a risk analysis that
be managed
takes into account the potential EHS risks during the waste cycle and the availability of infrastructure to manage the waste in an environmentally sound manner •
Definition of opportunities for source reduction, as well as reuse and recycling
APRIL 30, 2007
50 Examples of waste prevention strategies include the concept of Lean
Manufacturing found at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/minimize/lean.htm
47
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
Recycling and Reuse
wastes; properly designed, permitted and operated
In addition to the implementation of waste prevention
landfills or incinerators designed for the respective type
strategies, the total amount of waste may be significantly
of waste; or other methods known to be effective in the
reduced through the implementation of recycling plans, which
safe, final disposal of waste materials such as
should consider the following elements:
bioremediation.
•
Evaluation of waste production processes and identification of potentially recyclable materials
•
Identification and recycling of products that can be reintroduced into the manufacturing process or industry activity at the site
•
Hazardous wastes should always be segregated from nonhazardous wastes. If generation of hazardous waste can not be prevented through the implementation of the above general waste management practices, its management
Investigation of external markets for recycling by other
should focus on the prevention of harm to health, safety, and
industrial processing operations located in the
the environment, according to the following additional
neighborhood or region of the facility (e.g., waste
principles:
exchange) •
Hazardous Waste Management
Establishing recycling objectives and formal tracking of
•
with the management of any generated hazardous
waste generation and recycling rates •
Providing training and incentives to employees in order to meet objectives
Understanding potential impacts and risks associated waste during its complete life cycle
•
Ensuring that contractors handling, treating, and disposing of hazardous waste are reputable and
Treatment and Disposal
legitimate enterprises, licensed by the relevant
If waste materials are still generated after the implementation
regulatory agencies and following good international
of feasible waste prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery and
industry practice for the waste being handled
recycling measures, waste materials should be treated and disposed of and all measures should be taken to avoid potential impacts to human health and the environment. Selected management approaches should be consistent with
•
Ensuring compliance with applicable local and international regulations51
Waste Storage
the characteristics of the waste and local regulations, and
Hazardous waste should be stored so as to prevent or
may include one or more of the following:
control accidental releases to air, soil, and water resources in
•
area location where: On-site or off-site biological, chemical, or physical treatment of the waste material to render it nonhazardous prior to final disposal
•
Treatment or disposal at permitted facilities specially designed to receive the waste. Examples include:
51 International requirements may include host-country commitments
under the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of
Hazardous Waste and their disposal (http://www.basel.int/) and Rotterdam Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for Certain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in International Trade (http://www.pic.int/)
composting operations for organic non-hazardous APRIL 30, 2007
48
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT •
Waste is stored in a manner that prevents the
WORLD BANK GROUP
•
commingling or contact between incompatible wastes,
emergency plans to address their accidental release
and allows for inspection between containers to monitor
(additional information on Emergency Plans in provided
leaks or spills. Examples include sufficient space
in Section 3 of this document)
between incompatibles or physical separation such as
•
walls or containment curbs • •
•
•
Transportation
Secondary containment systems should be constructed
On-site and Off-site transportation of waste should be
with materials appropriate for the wastes being
conducted so as to prevent or minimize spills, releases, and
contained and adequate to prevent loss to the
exposures to employees and the public. All waste
environment
containers designated for off-site shipment should be
Secondary containment is included wherever liquid
secured and labeled with the contents and associated
wastes are stored in volumes greater than 220 liters.
hazards, be properly loaded on the transport vehicles before
The available volume of secondary containment should
leaving the site, and be accompanied by a shipping paper
be at least 110 percent of the largest storage container,
(i.e., manifest) that describes the load and its associated
or 25 percent of the total storage capacity (whichever is
hazards, consistent with the guidance provided in Section 3.4
greater), in that specific location
on the Transport of Hazardous Materials.
Provide adequate ventilation where volatile wastes are
special management actions, conducted by employees who have received specific training in handling and storage of hazardous wastes: Provision of readily available information on chemical compatibility to employees, including labeling each container to identify its contents Limiting access to hazardous waste storage areas to employees who have received proper training •
Treatment and Disposal In addition to the recommendations for treatment and disposal applicable to general wastes, the following issues specific to hazardous wastes should be considered:
Commercial or Government Waste Contractors In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned waste vendors (taking into consideration proximity and transportation requirements), facilities generating waste should consider using: •
Have the technical capability to manage the waste in a
Clearly identifying (label) and demarcating the area,
manner that reduces immediate and future impact to the
including documentation of its location on a facility map
environment
or site plan •
piping of hazardous waste
wind and rain
Hazardous waste storage activities should also be subject to
•
Avoiding underground storage tanks and underground
Store in closed containers away from direct sunlight,
stored.
•
Preparing and implementing spill response and
Conducting periodic inspections of waste storage areas
•
Have all required permits, certifications, and approvals, of applicable government authorities
and documenting the findings APRIL 30, 2007
49
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT •
WORLD BANK GROUP
Have been secured through the use of formal
are generated and stored on site, monitoring activities
procurement agreements
should include: o
In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned
indications of loss
waste disposal operators (taking into consideration proximity o
and transportation requirements), project sponsors should
o
Installing on-site waste treatment or recycling
required and employing the practice of keeping
As a final option, constructing facilities that will provide
locks and safety equipment in standby position
for the environmental sound long-term storage of
when the area is not occupied)
wastes on-site (as described elsewhere in the General EHS Guidelines) or at an alternative appropriate
o
Checking the operability of emergency systems
o
Documenting results of testing for integrity,
location up until external commercial options become
emissions, or monitoring stations (air, soil vapor, or
available
groundwater) o
Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste
materials in storage
quantities by many projects through a variety of activities • •
Tracking of waste generation trends by type and amount of waste generated, preferably by facility departments
lubricating oil; used batteries (such as nickel-cadmium or lead acid); and lighting equipment, such as lamps or lamp
Regular audits of waste segregation and collection practices
Examples of these types of wastes include: spent solvents and oily rags, empty paint cans, chemical containers; used
Documenting any changes to the storage facility, and any significant changes in the quantity of
Hazardous waste materials are frequently generated in small such as equipment and building maintenance activities.
Verification of locks, emergency valves, and other safety devices for easy operation (lubricating if
processes •
Identification of cracks, corrosion, or damage to tanks, protective equipment, or floors
consider using: •
Inspection of vessels for leaks, drips or other
•
Characterizing waste at the beginning of generation of a
ballasts. These wastes should be managed following the
new waste stream, and periodically documenting the
guidance provided in the above sections.
characteristics and proper management of the waste, especially hazardous wastes
Monitoring
•
amount of waste generated and its destination
Monitoring activities associated with the management of hazardous and non-hazardous waste should include: •
Regular visual inspection of all waste storage collection and storage areas for evidence of accidental releases and to verify that wastes are properly labeled and stored. When significant quantities of hazardous wastes
APRIL 30, 2007
Keeping manifests or other records that document the
•
Periodic auditing of third party treatment, and disposal services including re-use and recycling facilities when significant quantities of hazardous wastes are managed by third parties. Whenever possible, audits should include site visits to the treatment storage and disposal location
50
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT •
WORLD BANK GROUP
Regular monitoring of groundwater quality in cases of Hazardous Waste on site storage and/or pretreatment and disposal
•
Monitoring records for hazardous waste collected, stored, or shipped should include: o
Name and identification number of the material(s) composing the hazardous waste
o
Physical state (i.e., solid, liquid, gaseous or a combination of one, or more, of these)
o
Quantity (e.g., kilograms or liters, number of containers)
o
Waste shipment tracking documentation to include, quantity and type, date dispatched, date transported and date received, record of the originator, the receiver and the transporter
o
Method and date of storing, repacking, treating, or disposing at the facility, cross-referenced to specific manifest document numbers applicable to the hazardous waste
o
Location of each hazardous waste within the facility, and the quantity at each location
APRIL 30, 2007
51
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
barrier. Barriers should be located as close to the
1.7 Noise
source or to the receptor location to be effective
Applicability
•
Installing vibration isolation for mechanical equipment
This section addresses impacts of noise beyond the property
•
Limiting the hours of operation for specific pieces of
boundary of the facilities. Worker exposure to noise is
equipment or operations, especially mobile sources
covered in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health and Safety.
operating through community areas
Prevention and Control Noise prevention and mitigation measures should be applied
•
advantage of distance and shielding •
where predicted or measured noise impacts from a project facility or operations exceed the applicable noise level
• •
•
Selecting equipment with lower sound power levels
•
Installing silencers for fans
•
Installing suitable mufflers on engine exhausts and compressor components
•
Installing acoustic enclosures for equipment casing radiating noise
•
Reducing project traffic routing through community areas wherever possible
•
emissions depend on the source and proximity of receptors. Noise reduction options that should be considered include:
Taking advantage of the natural topography as a noise buffer during facility design
sources is to implement noise control measures at source.53 Methods for prevention and control of sources of noise
Siting permanent facilities away from community areas if possible
guideline at the most sensitive point of reception.52 The preferred method for controlling noise from stationary
Re-locating noise sources to less sensitive areas to take
Planning flight routes, timing and altitude for aircraft (airplane and helicopter) flying over community areas
•
Developing a mechanism to record and respond to complaints
Noise Level Guidelines Noise impacts should not exceed the levels presented in Table 1.7.1, or result in a maximum increase in background levels of 3 dB at the nearest receptor location off-site.
Improving the acoustic performance of constructed buildings, apply sound insulation
•
Installing acoustic barriers without gaps and with a continuous minimum surface density of 10 kg/m2 in order to minimize the transmission of sound through the
52 A point of reception or receptor may be defined as any point on the
premises occupied by persons where extraneous noise and/or vibration are received. Examples of receptor locations may include: permanent or seasonal residences; hotels / motels; schools and daycares; hospitals and nursing homes; places of worship; and parks and campgrounds. 53 At the design stage of a project, equipment manufacturers should provide
design or construction specifications in the form of “Insertion Loss Performance” for silencers and mufflers, and “Transmission Loss Performance” for acoustic enclosures and upgraded building construction.
APRIL 30, 2007
52
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE MANAGEMENT
WORLD BANK GROUP
m to any reflecting surface (e.g., wall). In general, the noise
Table 1.7.1- Noise Level
Guidelines 54
level limit is represented by the background or ambient noise
One Hour L Aeq (dBA)
Receptor
Daytime 07:00 - 22:00
Nighttime 22:00 - 07:00
Residential; institutional; educational55
55
45
Industrial; commercial
70
70
levels that would be present in the absence of the facility or noise source(s) under investigation.
Highly intrusive noises, such as noise from aircraft flyovers and passing trains, should not be included when establishing background noise levels.
Monitoring Noise monitoring56 may be carried out for the purposes of establishing the existing ambient noise levels in the area of the proposed or existing facility, or for verifying operational phase noise levels. Noise monitoring programs should be designed and conducted by trained specialists. Typical monitoring periods should be sufficient for statistical analysis and may last 48 hours with the use of noise monitors that should be capable of logging data continuously over this time period, or hourly, or more frequently, as appropriate (or else cover differing time periods within several days, including weekday and weekend workdays). The type of acoustic indices recorded depends on the type of noise being monitored, as established by a noise expert. Monitors should be located approximately 1.5 m above the ground and no closer than 3 54 Guidelines values are for noise levels measured out of doors. Source:
Guidelines for Community Noise, World Health Organization (WHO), 1999. 55 For acceptable indoor noise levels for residential, institutional, and
educational settings refer to WHO (1999).
56 Noise monitoring should be carried out using a Type 1 or 2 sound level
meter meeting all appropriate IEC standards.
APRIL 30, 2007
53
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
1.8 Contaminated Land •
The liability that it may pose to the polluter/business owners (e.g., cost of remediation, damage of business
Applicability and Approach .............................................54 Risk Screening ..............................................................55 Interim Risk Management ..............................................56 Detailed Risk Assessment..............................................56 Permanent Risk Reduction Measures.............................57 Occupational Health and Safety Considerations..............59
reputation and/or business-community relations) or affected parties (e.g. workers at the site, nearby property owners). Contamination of land should be avoided by preventing or
Applicability and Approach This section provides a summary of management approaches for land contamination due to anthropogenic releases of hazardous materials, wastes, or oil, including naturally occurring substances. Releases of these materials
controlling the release of hazardous materials, hazardous wastes, or oil to the environment. When contamination of land is suspected or confirmed during any project phase, the cause of the uncontrolled release should be identified and corrected to avoid further releases and associated adverse impacts.
may be the result of historic or current site activities,
Contaminated lands should be managed to avoid the risk to
including, but not limited to, accidents during their handling
human health and ecological receptors. The preferred strategy
and storage, or due to their poor management or disposal.
for land decontamination is to reduce the level of contamination
Land is considered contaminated when it contains hazardous materials or oil concentrations above background or naturally occurring levels. Contaminated lands may involve surficial soils or subsurface soils that, through leaching and transport, may affect groundwater, surface water, and adjacent sites. Where subsurface contaminant sources include volatile substances, soil vapor may also become a transport and exposure medium, and create potential for contaminant infiltration of
at the site while preventing the human exposure to contamination. To determine whether risk management actions are warranted, the following assessment approach should be applied to establish whether the three risk factors of ‘Contaminants’, ‘Receptors’, and ‘Exposure Pathways’ co-exist, or are likely to co-exist, at the project site under current or possible future land use: •
Contaminant(s): Presence of hazardous materials, waste, or oil in any environmental media at potentially hazardous
indoor air spaces of buildings.
concentrations Contaminated land is a concern because of: •
•
plants, and other living organisms with the contaminants of
The potential risks to human health and ecology (e.g. risk of cancer or other human health effects, loss of ecology);
Receptor(s): Actual or likely contact of humans, wildlife, concern
•
Exposure pathway(s): A combination of the route of migration of the contaminant from its point of release (e.g., leaching into potable groundwater) and exposure routes
APRIL 30, 2007
54
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND (e.g., ingestion, transdermal absorption), which would
WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Identification of the location of suspected highest level of
allow receptor(s) to come into actual contact with
contamination through a combination of visual and
contaminants
historical operational information; •
Sampling and testing of the contaminated media (soils or water) according to established technical methods applicable to suspected type of contaminant57,58;
•
Evaluation of the analytical results against the local and national contaminated sites regulations. In the absence of such regulations or environmental standards, other sources of risk-based standards or guidelines should be consulted to obtain comprehensive criteria for screening soil concentrations of pollutants.59
•
Verification of the potential human and/or ecological receptors and exposure pathways relevant to the site in question
FIGURE 1.8.1: Inter-Relationship of Contaminant Risk Factors
The outcome of risk-screening may reveal that there is no overlap between the three risk-factors as the contaminant levels identified are below those considered to pose a risk to human
When the three risk factors are considered to be present (in
health or the environment. Alternatively, interim or permanent
spite of limited data) under current or foreseeable future conditions, the following steps should be followed (as described in the remaining parts of this section): 1)
Risk screening;
2)
Interim risk management;
3)
Detailed quantitative risk assessment; and
4)
Permanent risk reduction measures.
Risk Screening This step is also known as “problem formulation” for environmental risk assessment. Where there is potential evidence of contamination at a site, the following steps are recommended:
APRIL 30, 2007
57 BC MOE. http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance 58 Massachusetts Department of Environment.
http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup
59 These may include the USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs).
http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm. These RBCs are considered acceptable for specific land use and contaminant exposure scenarios as they have been developed by governments using risk assessment techniques for use as general targets in the site remediation. Separate PRGs have been developed or adopted for soil, sediment or groundwater, and often a distinction is made between land uses (as noted earlier) because of the need for more stringent guidelines for residential and agricultural versus commercial/industrial landuse. The RBC Tables contains Reference Doses (RfDs) and Cancer Slope Factors (CSFs) for about 400 chemicals. These toxicity factors have been combined with “standard” exposure scenarios to calculate RBCs--chemical concentrations corresponding to fixed levels of risk (i.e., a Hazard Quotient (HQ) of 1, or lifetime cancer risk of 1E-6, whichever occurs at a lower concentration) in water, air, fish tissue, and soil for individual chemical substances. The primary use of RBCs is for chemical screening during baseline risk assessment (see EPA Regional Guidance EPA/903/R-93-001, “Selecting Exposure Routes and Contaminants of Concern by Risk-Based Screening”). Additional useful soil quality guidelines can also be obtained from Lijzen et al. 2001.
55
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
risk reduction measures may need to be taken with, or
strategies that yield acceptable health risks, while achieving low
without, more detailed risk assessment activities, as
level contamination on-site. An assessment of contaminant
described below.
risks needs to be considered in the context of current and future land use, and development scenarios (e.g., residential,
Interim Risk Management
commercial, industrial, and urban parkland or wilderness use).
Interim risk management actions should be implemented at
A detailed quantitative risk assessment builds on risk screening
any phase of the project life cycle if the presence of land
(problem formulation). It involves first, a detailed site
contamination poses an “imminent hazard”, i.e., representing
investigation to identify the scope of contamination.61 Site
an immediate risk to human health and the environment if
investigation programs should apply quality assurance/quality
contamination were allowed to continue, even a short period
control (QA/QC) measures to ensure that data quality is
of time. Examples of situations considered to involve
adequate for the intended data use (e.g., method detection
imminent hazards include, but are not restricted to:
limits are below levels of concern). The site investigation in turn
•
Presence of an explosive atmosphere caused by
should be used to develop a conceptual site model of how and
contaminated land
where contaminants exist, how they are transported, and where
Accessible and excessive contamination for which short-
routes of exposure occur to organisms and humans. The risk
term exposure and potency of contaminants could result
factors and conceptual site model provide a framework for
in acute toxicity, irreversible long term effects,
assessing contaminant risks.
•
sensitization, or accumulation of persistent biocumulative and toxic substances •
Concentrations of pollutants at concentrations above the Risk Based Concentrations (RBCs60) or drinking water standards in potable water at the point of abstraction
Appropriate risk reduction should be implemented as soon as practicable to remove the condition posing the imminent
Human or ecological risk assessments facilitate risk management decisions at contaminated sites. Specific risk assessment objectives include: •
(e.g., children, adults, fish, wildlife) •
As an alternative to complying with numerical standards or preliminary remediation goals, and depending on local regulatory requirements, a detailed site-specific, environmental risk assessment may be used to develop
60 For example, USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs).
http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm.
APRIL 30, 2007
Determining if contaminants are present at levels that pose potential human health and/or ecological concerns (e.g.,
hazard.
Detailed Risk Assessment
Identifying relevant human and ecological receptors
levels above applicable regulatory criteria based on health or environmental risk considerations) •
Determining how human or ecological receptors are exposed to the contaminants (e.g., ingestions of soil, dermal contact, inhalation of dust)
61 Examples include processes defined by the American Society of Testing and
Materials (ASTM) Phase II ESA Process; the British Columbia Ministry of Environment Canada (BC MOE) http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance); and the Massachusetts Department of Environment http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup.
56
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND •
Identifying the types of adverse effects that might result
•
Identifying the preferred technologies (including
from exposure to the contaminants (e.g., effect on target
engineering controls) needed to implement the conceptual
organ, cancer, impaired growth or reproduction) in the
risk reduction measures
absence of regulatory standards •
WORLD BANK GROUP
•
reduction measures are effective
Quantifying the magnitude of health risks to human and ecological receptors based on a quantitative analysis of
Developing a monitoring plan to ascertain whether risk
•
Considering the need and appropriateness for institutional
contaminant exposure and toxicity (e.g. calculate
controls (e.g. deed restriction, land use restrictions) as part
lifetime cancer risk or ratios of estimated exposure rates
of a comprehensive approach
compared to safe exposure rates) •
•
•
Determining how current and proposed future land use
Permanent Risk Reduction Measures
influence the predicted risks (e.g. change of land use
The risk factors and conceptual site model within the
from industrial to residential with more sensitive
contaminant risk approach described also provide a basis to
receptors such as children)
manage and mitigate environmental contaminant health risks.
Quantifying the potential environmental and/or human
The underlying principle is to reduce, eliminate, or control any or
health risks from off-site contaminant migration (e.g.,
all of the three risk factors illustrated in Figure 1.8.1. A short list
consider if leaching and groundwater transport, or
of examples of risk mitigation strategies is provided below,
surface water transport results in exposure at adjacent
although actual strategies should be developed based on site-
lands/receptors)
specific conditions, and the practicality of prevailing factors and
Determining if the risk is likely to remain stable,
site constraints. Regardless of the management options
increase, or decrease with time in the absence of any
selected, the action plan should include, whenever possible,
remediation (e.g., consider if the contaminant is
contaminant source reduction (i.e., net improvement of the site)
reasonably degradable and likely to remain in place, or
as part of the overall strategy towards managing health risks at
be transported to other media)62
contaminated sites, as this alone provides for improved
Addressing these objectives provides a basis to develop and
environmental quality.
implement risk reduction measures (e.g., clean-up, on-site
Figure 1.8.2 presents a schematic of the inter-relationship of risk
controls) at the site. If such a need exists, the following
factors and example strategies to mitigate contaminant health
additional objectives become relevant:
risk by modifying the conditions of one or more risk factors to
•
Determining where, and in what conceptual manner, risk
ultimately reduce contaminant exposure to the receptor. The
reduction measures should be implemented
selected approach should take into consideration the technical and financial feasibility (e.g. operability of a selected technology given the local availability of technical expertise and equipment
62 An example of a simplified quantitative risk assessment method is the
ASTM E1739-95(2002) Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Applied at Petroleum Release Sites and the ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1 Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at chemical release sites).
APRIL 30, 2007
and its associated costs). Example risk mitigation strategies for contaminant source and exposure concentrations include: 57
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND •
Soil, sediment, and sludge:
Installation (during building construction) of an
In situ biological treatment (aerobic or anaerobic)
impermeable barrier below the building and/or an
o
In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., soil vapor
alternative flow pathway for soil vapor beneath
extraction with off-gas treatment, chemical
building foundations (e.g., porous media and
oxidation)
ventilation to shunt vapors away from building)
o
o
o
In situ thermal treatment (e.g., steam injection, 6-
Example risk mitigation strategies for receptors include:
phase heating)
•
Limiting or preventing access to contaminant by receptors
Ex situ biological treatment (e.g., excavation and
(actions targeted at the receptor may include signage with
composting)
instructions, fencing, or site security)
Ex situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g.,
•
Imposing health advisory or prohibiting certain practices
excavation and stabilization)
leading to exposure such as fishing, crab trapping, shellfish
Ex situ thermal treatment (e.g., excavation and
collection
thermal desorption or incineration)
•
Educating receptors (people) to modify behavior in order to
o
Containment (e.g. landfill)
reduce exposure (e.g., improved work practices, and use of
o
Natural attenuation
protective clothing and equipment)
o
Other treatment processes
Groundwater, surface water, and leachate: o
In situ biological treatment (aerobic and/or aerobic)
o
In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., air sparging, zero-valent iron permeable reactive barrier)
o
treatment) o
Containment (e.g., slurry wall or sheet pile barrier)
o
Natural attenuation
o
Other treatment processes
Soil vapor intrusion: o
o
Example risk mitigation strategies for exposure pathways include: •
Providing an alternative water supply to replace, for example, a contaminated groundwater supply well
•
Capping contaminated soil with at least 1m of clean soil to prevent human contact, as well as plant root or small
Ex situ biological, physical, and or chemical treatment (i.e., groundwater extraction and
•
o
o
o
•
WORLD BANK GROUP
mammal penetration into contaminated soils •
Paving over contaminated soil as an interim measure to negate the pathway of direct contact or dust generation and inhalation
•
Using an interception trench and pump, and treat technologies to prevent contaminated groundwater from discharging into fish streams
Soil vapor extraction to reduce VOC contaminant
The above-reference containment measures should also be
source in soil
considered for immediate implementation in situations where
Installation of a sub-slab depressurization system
source reduction measures are expected to take time.
to prevent migration of soil vapor into the building o
Creating a positive pressure condition in buildings
APRIL 30, 2007
58
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND
WORLD BANK GROUP
Occupational Health and Safety Considerations Investigation and remediation of contaminated lands requires that workers be mindful of the occupational exposures that could arise from working in close contact with contaminated soil or other environmental media (e.g., groundwater, wastewater, sediments, and soil vapor). Occupational health and safety precautions should be exercised to minimize exposure, as described in Section 2 on Occupational Health and Safety. In addition, workers on contaminated sites should receive special health and safety training specific to contaminated site investigation and remediation activities.63
FIGURE 1.8.2: Inter-Relationship of Risk Factors and Management Options
63 For example, US Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA)
regulations found at 40 CFR 1910.120. http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STAN DARDS&p_id=9765
APRIL 30, 2007
59
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
2.0 Occupational Health and Safety Applicability and Approach......................................60 2.1 General Facility Design and Operation......................61 Integrity of Workplace Structures..........................61 Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown ................61 Workspace and Exit.............................................61 Fire Precautions ..................................................62 Lavatories and Showers.......................................62 Potable Water Supply ..........................................62 Clean Eating Area ...............................................62 Lighting...............................................................62 Safe Access........................................................62 First Aid...............................................................63 Air Supply............................................................63 Work Environment Temperature...........................63 2.2 Communication and Training....................................63 OHS Training ......................................................63 Visitor Orientation................................................63 New Task Employee and Contractor Training.......63 Basic OHS Training .............................................64 Area Signage ......................................................64 Labeling of Equipment.........................................64 Communicate Hazard Codes ...............................64 2.3 Physical Hazards .....................................................64 Rotating and Moving Equipment...........................65 Noise ..................................................................65 Vibration..............................................................65 Electrical .............................................................66 Eye Hazards........................................................67 Welding / Hot Work..............................................67 Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic..............67 Working Environment Temperature......................68 Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling.68 Working at Heights ..............................................68 Illumination..........................................................69 2.4 Chemical Hazards....................................................69 Air Quality ...........................................................70 Fire and Explosions .............................................70 Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals.........71 Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)..................71 2.5 Biological Hazards....................................................71 2.6 Radiological Hazards................................................73 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).......................73 2.8 Special Hazard Environments...................................74 Confined Space...................................................74 Lone and Isolated Workers ..................................75 2.9 Monitoring................................................................75 Accidents and Diseases monitoring......................76
Applicability and Approach Employers and supervisors are obliged to implement all reasonable precautions to protect the health and safety of workers. This section provides guidance and examples of reasonable precautions to implement in managing principal risks to occupational health and safety. Although the focus is placed on the operational phase of projects, much of the guidance also applies to construction and decommissioning activities. Companies should hire contractors that have the technical capability to manage the occupational health and safety issues of their employees, extending the application of the hazard management activities through formal procurement agreements. Preventive and protective measures should be introduced according to the following order of priority: •
Eliminating the hazard by removing the activity from the work process. Examples include substitution with less hazardous chemicals, using different manufacturing processes, etc;
•
Controlling the hazard at its source through use of engineering controls. Examples include local exhaust ventilation, isolation rooms, machine guarding, acoustic insulating, etc;
•
Minimizing the hazard through design of safe work systems and administrative or institutional control measures. Examples include job rotation, training safe work procedures, lock-out and tag-out, workplace monitoring, limiting exposure or work duration, etc.
•
Providing appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) in conjunction with training, use, and maintenance of the PPE.
The application of prevention and control measures to occupational hazards should be based on comprehensive job APRIL 30, 2007
60
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
safety or job hazard analyses. The results of these analyses
Table 2.1.1. Risk Ranking Table to Classify Worker Scenarios Based on Likelihood and Consequence
should be prioritized as part of an action plan based on the likelihood and severity of the consequence of exposure to the identified hazards. An example of a qualitative risk ranking or
Consequences
analysis matrix to help identify priorities is described in Table 2.1.1. Likelihood
2.1 General Facility Design and Operation
A. Almost certain
Integrity of Workplace Structures
B. Likely
Permanent and recurrent places of work should be designed and
Insignificant
CatasMinor Moderate Major trophic
1
2
3
4
5
L
M
E
E
E
L
M
H
E
E
L
M
H
E
E
L
L
M
H
E
L
L
M
H
H
equipped to protect OHS: •
C. Moderate
Surfaces, structures and installations should be easy to clean and maintain, and not allow for accumulation of hazardous
D. Unlikely
compounds. •
Buildings should be structurally safe, provide appropriate
E. Rare
protection against the climate, and have acceptable light and noise conditions. •
Legend
Fire resistant, noise-absorbing materials should, to the extent
E: extreme risk; immediate action required
feasible, be used for cladding on ceilings and walls.
H: high risk; senior management attention needed
•
Floors should be level, even, and non-skid.
M: moderate risk; management responsibility should be specified
•
Heavy oscillating, rotating or alternating equipment should be
L: low risk; manage by routine procedures
located in dedicated buildings or structurally isolated sections.
Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown •
•
area designated for safe refuge, if appropriate. Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be developed for project or process shut-down, including an evacuation plan. Drills to practice the procedure and plan should also be undertaken annually.
APRIL 30, 2007
The space provided for each worker, and in total, should be adequate for safe execution of all activities, including
Work place structures should be designed and constructed to withstand the expected elements for the region and have an
•
Workspace and Exit
transport and interim storage of materials and products. •
Passages to emergency exits should be unobstructed at all times. Exits should be clearly marked to be visible in total darkness. The number and capacity of emergency exits should be sufficient for safe and orderly evacuation of the greatest number of people present at any time, and there should be a minimum two exits from any work area.
61
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Facilities also should be designed and built taking into
Potable Water Supply
account the needs of disabled persons.
•
provided from a fountain with an upward jet or with a sanitary
Fire Precautions The workplace should be designed to prevent the start of fires through the implementation of fire codes applicable to industrial
means of collecting the water for the purposes of drinking •
Equipping facilities with fire detectors, alarm systems, and
•
meet drinking water quality standards
fire-fighting equipment. The equipment should be maintained
Clean Eating Area
in good working order and be readily accessible. It should be
•
poisonous by ingestion, suitable arrangements are to be
equipment installed, physical and chemical properties of
made for provision of clean eating areas where workers are
substances present, and the maximum number of people
not exposed to the hazardous or noxious substances
Provision of manual firefighting equipment that is easily
Lighting
accessible and simple to use
•
light and be supplemented with sufficient artificial illumination
visible
to promote workers’ safety and health, and enable safe equipment operation. Supplemental ‘task lighting’ may be required where specific visual acuity requirements should be
accessible to the public (See Section 3.3).
Lavatories and Showers
met. •
artificial light source to ensure safe shut-down, evacuation, etc.
work in the facility and allowances made for segregated facilities, or for indicating whether the toilet facility is “In Use” or “Vacant”. Toilet facilities should also be provided with adequate supplies of hot and cold running water, soap, and
Safe Access •
ingestion and skin contamination may occur, facilities for
and appropriate access •
Equipment and installations requiring servicing, inspection, and/or cleaning should have unobstructed, unrestricted, and
showering and changing into and out of street and work clothes should be provided.
Passageways for pedestrians and vehicles within and outside buildings should be segregated and provide for easy, safe,
hand drying devices. Where workers may be exposed to substances poisonous by
Emergency lighting of adequate intensity should be installed and automatically activated upon failure of the principal
Adequate lavatory facilities (toilets and washing areas) should be provided for the number of people expected to
•
Workplaces should, to the degree feasible, receive natural
Fire and emergency alarm systems that are both audible and
The IFC Life and Fire Safety Guideline should apply to buildings
•
Where there is potential for exposure to substances
adequate for the dimensions and use of the premises,
present. •
Water supplied to areas of food preparation or for the purpose of personal hygiene (washing or bathing) should
settings. Other essential measures include: •
Adequate supplies of potable drinking water should be
ready access •
Hand, knee and foot railings should be installed on stairs, fixed ladders, platforms, permanent and interim floor openings, loading bays, ramps, etc.
APRIL 30, 2007
62
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Openings should be sealed by gates or removable chains
microorganisms. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning
•
Covers should, if feasible, be installed to protect against
(HVAC) and industrial evaporative cooling systems should be
falling items
equipped, maintained and operated so as to prevent growth
Measures to prevent unauthorized access to dangerous
and spreading of disease agents (e.g. Legionnella
areas should be in place
pneumophilia) or breeding of vectors (e.g. mosquitoes and
•
flies) of public health concern.
First Aid •
•
The employer should ensure that qualified first-aid can be
Work Environment Temperature
provided at all times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations
•
should be easily accessible throughout the place of work
facilities should, during service hours, be maintained at a
Eye-wash stations and/or emergency showers should be
level appropriate for the purpose of the facility.
provided close to all workstations where immediate flushing with water is the recommended first-aid response •
Where the scale of work or the type of activity being carried out so requires, dedicated and appropriately equipped firstaid room(s) should be provided. First aid stations and rooms
2.2 Communication and Training OHS Training •
the basic site rules of work at / on the site and of personal
protection against direct contact with blood and other body fluids Remote sites should have written emergency procedures in
protection and preventing injury to fellow employees. •
procedures for fire, evacuation, and natural disaster, as
the point at which patient care can be transferred to an
appropriate. Any site-specific hazard or color coding in use
appropriate medical facility.
•
Sufficient fresh air should be supplied for indoor and confined work spaces. Factors to be considered in ventilation design
should be thoroughly reviewed as part of orientation training.
Visitor Orientation •
orientation and control program should be established to
related emissions. Air distribution systems should be
ensure visitors do not enter hazard areas unescorted.
designed so as not to expose workers to draughts Mechanical ventilation systems should be maintained in good working order. Point-source exhaust systems required for maintaining a safe ambient environment should have local indicators of correct functioning. •
If visitors to the site can gain access to areas where hazardous conditions or substances may be present, a visitor
include physical activity, substances in use, and process-
•
Training should consist of basic hazard awareness, sitespecific hazards, safe work practices, and emergency
place for dealing with cases of trauma or serious illness up to
Air Supply
Provisions should be made to provide OHS orientation training to all new employees to ensure they are apprised of
should be equipped with gloves, gowns, and masks for
•
The temperature in work, rest room and other welfare
New Task Employee and Contractor Training •
The employer should ensure that workers and contractors, prior to commencement of new assignments, have received adequate training and information enabling them to
Re-circulation of contaminated air is not acceptable. Air inlet filters should be kept clean and free of dust and
APRIL 30, 2007
63
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
understand work hazards and to protect their health from
•
Signage should be in accordance with international
hazardous ambient factors that may be present.
standards and be well known to, and easily understood by
The training should adequately cover:
workers, visitors and the general public as appropriate.
o
Knowledge of materials, equipment, and tools
o
Known hazards in the operations and how they are controlled
Labeling of Equipment •
All vessels that may contain substances that are hazardous
o
Potential risks to health
as a result of chemical or toxicological properties, or
o
Precautions to prevent exposure
temperature or pressure, should be labeled as to the
o
Hygiene requirements
contents and hazard, or appropriately color coded.
o
Wearing and use of protective equipment and clothing
o
Appropriate response to operation extremes, incidents
should be labeled with the direction of flow and contents of
and accidents
the pipe, or color coded whenever the pipe passing through a
•
Similarly, piping systems that contain hazardous substances
wall or floor is interrupted by a valve or junction device.
Basic OHS Training •
A basic occupational training program and specialty courses
Communicate Hazard Codes
should be provided, as needed, to ensure that workers are
•
oriented to the specific hazards of individual work
outside the facility at emergency entrance doors and fire
assignments. Training should generally be provided to
emergency connection systems where they are likely to
management, supervisors, workers, and occasional visitors
come to the attention of emergency services personnel.
to areas of risks and hazards. •
•
Information regarding the types of hazardous materials
Workers with rescue and first-aid duties should receive
stored, handled or used at the facility, including typical
dedicated training so as not to inadvertently aggravate
maximum inventories and storage locations, should be
exposures and health hazards to themselves or their co-
shared proactively with emergency services and security
workers. Training would include the risks of becoming
personnel to expedite emergency response when needed.
infected with blood–borne pathogens through contact with •
Copies of the hazard coding system should be posted
•
Representatives of local emergency and security services
bodily fluids and tissue.
should be invited to participate in periodic (annual)
Through appropriate contract specifications and monitoring,
orientation tours and site inspections to ensure familiarity
the employer should ensure that service providers, as well as
with potential hazards present.
contracted and subcontracted labor, are trained adequately before assignments begin.
2.3 Physical Hazards Physical hazards represent potential for accident or injury or
Area Signage
illness due to repetitive exposure to mechanical action or work
•
Hazardous areas (electrical rooms, compressor rooms, etc),
activity. Single exposure to physical hazards may result in a wide
installations, materials, safety measures, and emergency
range of injuries, from minor and medical aid only, to disabling,
exits, etc. should be marked appropriately.
catastrophic, and/or fatal. Multiple exposures over prolonged
APRIL 30, 2007
64
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
periods can result in disabling injuries of comparable significance
Noise
and consequence.
Noise limits for different working environments are provided in
Rotating and Moving Equipment Injury or death can occur from being trapped, entangled, or struck
Table 2.3.1. •
85 dB(A) for a duration of more than 8 hours per day without
by machinery parts due to unexpected starting of equipment or
hearing protection. In addition, no unprotected ear should be
unobvious movement during operations. Recommended
exposed to a peak sound pressure level (instantaneous) of
protective measures include: •
more than 140 dB(C). Designing machines to eliminate trap hazards and ensuring that extremities are kept out of harm’s way under normal
•
dB(A), the peak sound levels reach 140 dB(C), or the
considerations include two-hand operated machines to
average maximum sound level reaches 110dB(A). Hearing
prevent amputations or the availability of emergency stops
protective devices provided should be capable of reducing
dedicated to the machine and placed in strategic locations. Where a machine or equipment has an exposed moving part or exposed pinch point that may endanger the safety of any
sound levels at the ear to at least 85 dB(A). •
protection can be obtained, but less easily managed, by
and protected by, a guard or other device that prevents
limiting the duration of noise exposure. For every 3 dB(A)
access to the moving part or pinch point. Guards should be
increase in sound levels, the ‘allowed’ exposure period or
designed and installed in conformance with appropriate machine safety
Turning off, disconnecting, isolating, and de-energizing
duration should be reduced by 50 percent.65 •
isolation of the noise source, and other engineering controls
guarded moving parts, or in which energy can be stored (e.g. maintenance, in conformance with a standard such as CSA Z460 Lockout or equivalent ISO or ANSI standard •
Prior to the issuance of hearing protective devices as the final control mechanism, use of acoustic insulating materials,
(Locked Out and Tagged Out) machinery with exposed or compressed air, electrical components) during servicing or
Although hearing protection is preferred for any period of noise exposure in excess of 85 dB(A), an equivalent level of
worker, the machine or equipment should be equipped with,
standards.64
The use of hearing protection should be enforced actively when the equivalent sound level over 8 hours reaches 85
operating conditions. Examples of proper design
•
No employee should be exposed to a noise level greater than
should be investigated and implemented, where feasible •
Periodic medical hearing checks should be performed on workers exposed to high noise levels
Designing and installing equipment, where feasible, to enable
Vibration
routine service, such as lubrication, without removal of the
Exposure to hand-arm vibration from equipment such as hand and
guarding devices or mechanisms
power tools, or whole-body vibrations from surfaces on which the worker stands or sits, should be controlled through choice of equipment, installation of vibration dampening pads or devices, and limiting the duration of exposure. Limits for vibration and
64 For example: CSA Z432.04 Safe Guarding of Machinery, CSA Z434 Robot
Safety, ISO 11161 Safety of Machinery – Integrated Manufacturing Systems or ISO 14121 Safety of Machinery – Principals of Risk Management or equivalent ANSI standard.
APRIL 30, 2007
65 The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 2006
65
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
action values, (i.e. the level of exposure at which remediation
•
warning signs
should be initiated) are provided by the ACGIH 66. Exposure levels should be checked on the basis of daily exposure time and data
Marking all energized electrical devices and lines with
•
Locking out (de-charging and leaving open with a controlled locking device) and tagging-out (warning sign placed on the
provided by equipment manufacturers.
lock) devices during service or maintenance
Electrical
•
Exposed or faulty electrical devices, such as circuit breakers,
Checking all electrical cords, cables, and hand power tools for frayed or exposed cords and following manufacturer recommendations for maximum permitted operating voltage
Table 2.3.1. Noise Limits for Various Working Environments
of the portable hand tools •
Double insulating / grounding all electrical equipment used in environments that are, or may become, wet; using equipment
Location /activity
Equivalent level LAeq,8h
Maximum LAmax,fast
with ground fault interrupter (GFI) protected circuits •
Heavy Industry (no demand for oral communication)
85 dB(A)
110 dB(A)
Protecting power cords and extension cords against damage from traffic by shielding or suspending above traffic areas
•
Appropriate labeling of service rooms housing high voltage equipment (‘electrical hazard’) and where entry is controlled
Light industry (decreasing demand for oral communication)
50-65 dB(A)
Open offices, control rooms, service counters or similar
45-50 dB(A)
Individual offices (no disturbing noise)
40-45 dB(A)
Classrooms, lecture halls
35-40 dB(A)
-
Hospitals
30-35 dB(A)
40 dB(A)
110 dB(A)
or prohibited (see also Section 3 on Planning, Siting, and Design); •
-
Establishing “No Approach” zones around or under high voltage power lines in conformance with Table 2.3.2
•
Rubber tired construction or other vehicles that come into direct contact with, or arcing between, high voltage wires
-
may need to be taken out of service for periods of 48 hours and have the tires replaced to prevent catastrophic tire and wheel assembly failure, potentially causing serious injury or
panels, cables, cords and hand tools, can pose a serious risk to workers. Overhead wires can be struck by metal devices, such as
death; •
Conducting detailed identification and marking of all buried electrical wiring prior to any excavation work
poles or ladders, and by vehicles with metal booms. Vehicles or grounded metal objects brought into close proximity with overhead wires can result in arcing between the wires and the object, without actual contact. Recommended actions include:
66 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007
66
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
Table 2.3.2. No Approach Zones for High Voltage Power Lines Nominal phase-to-phase voltage rating 750 or more volts, but no more than 150,000 volts
Minimum distance 3 meters
•
Provisions should be made for persons who have to wear prescription glasses either through the use overglasses or prescription hardened glasses.
Welding / Hot Work Welding creates an extremely bright and intense light that may
More than 150,000 volts, but no more than 250,000 4.5 meters volts
seriously injur a worker’s eyesight. In extreme cases, blindness
More than 250,000 volts
which prolonged exposure can cause serious chronic diseases.
6 meters
may result. Additionally, welding may produce noxious fumes to Recommended measures include:
Eye Hazards
•
Provision of proper eye protection such as welder goggles
Solid particles from a wide variety of industrial operations, and / or
and/or a full-face eye shield for all personnel involved in, or
a liquid chemical spray may strike a worker in the eye causing an
assisting, welding operations. Additional methods may
eye injury or permanent blindness. Recommended measures
include the use of welding barrier screens around the specific
include:
work station (a solid piece of light metal, canvas, or plywood
•
designed to block welding light from others). Devices to
Use of machine guards or splash shields and/or face and eye
extract and remove noxious fumes at the source may also be
protection devices, such as safety glasses with side shields, goggles, and/or a full face shield. Specific Safe Operating Procedures (SOPs) may be required for use of sanding and grinding tools and/or when working around liquid chemicals. Frequent checks of these types of equipment prior to use to ensure mechanical integrity is also good practice. Machine and equipment guarding should conform to standards published by organizations such as CSA, ANSI and ISO (see also Section 2.3 on Rotating and Moving Equipment and 2.7 on Personal Protective Equipment). •
Moving areas where the discharge of solid fragments, liquid, or gaseous emissions can reasonably be predicted (e.g. discharge of sparks from a metal cutting station, pressure relief valve discharge) away from places expected to be occupied or transited by workers or visitors. Where machine or work fragments could present a hazard to transient workers or passers-by, extra area guarding or proximity restricting systems should be implemented, or PPE required for transients and visitors.
APRIL 30, 2007
required. •
Special hot work and fire prevention precautions and Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be implemented if welding or hot cutting is undertaken outside established welding work stations, including ‘Hot Work Permits, stand-by fire extinguishers, stand-by fire watch, and maintaining the fire watch for up to one hour after welding or hot cutting has terminated. Special procedures are required for hotwork on tanks or vessels that have contained flammable materials.
Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic Poorly trained or inexperienced industrial vehicle drivers have increased risk of accident with other vehicles, pedestrians, and equipment. Industrial vehicles and delivery vehicles, as well as private vehicles on-site, also represent potential collision scenarios. Industrial vehicle driving and site traffic safety practices include:
67
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Training and licensing industrial vehicle operators in the safe
•
Use of protective clothing
operation of specialized vehicles such as forklifts, including
•
Providing easy access to adequate hydration such as
safe loading/unloading, load limits
drinking water or electrolyte drinks, and avoiding
•
Ensuring drivers undergo medical surveillance
consumption of alcoholic beverages
•
Ensuring moving equipment with restricted rear visibility is
•
•
outfitted with audible back-up alarms
Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling
Establishing rights-of-way, site speed limits, vehicle
Injuries due to ergonomic factors, such as repetitive motion, over-
inspection requirements, operating rules and procedures
exertion, and manual handling, take prolonged and repeated
(e.g. prohibiting operation of forklifts with forks in down
exposures to develop, and typically require periods of weeks to
position), and control of traffic patterns or direction
months for recovery. These OHS problems should be minimized
Restricting the circulation of delivery and private vehicles to
or eliminated to maintain a productive workplace. Controls may
defined routes and areas, giving preference to ‘one-way’
include:
circulation, where appropriate
•
Working Environment Temperature Exposure to hot or cold working conditions in indoor or outdoor
operational and maintenance workers in mind •
against other occupational hazards can accentuate and aggravate heat-related illnesses. Extreme temperatures in permanent work environments should be avoided through implementation of engineering controls and ventilation. Where this is not possible, such as during short-term outdoor work, temperature-related stress management procedures should be implemented which include: •
Monitoring weather forecasts for outdoor work to provide
Use of mechanical assists to eliminate or reduce exertions required to lift materials, hold tools and work objects, and
environments can result temperature stress-related injury or death. Use of personal protective equipment (PPE) to protect
Facility and workstation design with 5th to 95th percentile
requiring multi-person lifts if weights exceed thresholds •
Selecting and designing tools that reduce force requirements and holding times, and improve postures
•
Providing user adjustable work stations
•
Incorporating rest and stretch breaks into work processes, and conducting job rotation
•
Implementing quality control and maintenance programs that reduce unnecessary forces and exertions
•
Taking into consideration additional special conditions such as left handed persons
advance warning of extreme weather and scheduling work •
•
accordingly
Working at Heights
Adjustment of work and rest periods according to
Fall prevention and protection measures should be implemented
temperature stress management procedures provided by
whenever a worker is exposed to the hazard of falling more than
ACGIH 67, depending on the temperature and workloads
two meters; into operating machinery; into water or other liquid;
Providing temporary shelters to protect against the elements
into hazardous substances; or through an opening in a work
during working activities or for use as rest areas
surface. Fall prevention / protection measures may also be warranted on a case-specific basis when there are risks of falling
67 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007
from lesser heights. Fall prevention may include:
68
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
Installation of guardrails with mid-rails and toe boards at the
supplemented with dedicated work station illumination, as needed.
edge of any fall hazard area
The minimum limits for illumination intensity for a range of
•
Proper use of ladders and scaffolds by trained employees
locations/activities appear in Table 2.3.3.
•
Use of fall prevention devices, including safety belt and
Controls should include:
•
lanyard travel limiting devices to prevent access to fall hazard area, or fall protection devices such as full body harnesses used in conjunction with shock absorbing lanyards or selfretracting inertial fall arrest devices attached to fixed anchor
•
emission •
Appropriate training in use, serviceability, and integrity of the
•
IR radiation and high intensity visible light should also be
Inclusion of rescue and/or recovery plans, and equipment to respond to workers after an arrested fall
Taking precautions to minimize and control optical radiation including direct sunlight. Exposure to high intensity UV and
necessary PPE •
Undertaking measures to eliminate glare / reflections and flickering of lights
point or horizontal life-lines •
Use of energy efficient light sources with minimum heat
controlled •
Controlling laser hazards in accordance with equipment
Illumination
specifications, certifications, and recognized safety
Work area light intensity should be adequate for the general
standards. The lowest feasible class Laser should be applied
purpose of the location and type of activity, and should be
to minimize risks.
2.4 Chemical Hazards Table 2.3.3. Minimum Limits For Workplace Illumination Intensity Location / Activity
Chemical hazards represent potential for illness or injury due to single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure to toxic,
Light Intensity
corrosive, sensitizing or oxidative substances. They also
Emergency light
10 lux
represent a risk of uncontrolled reaction, including the risk of fire
Outdoor non working areas
20 lux
Simple orientation and temporary visits (machine storage, garage, warehouse)
50 lux
Workspace with occasional visual tasks only 100 lux (corridors, stairways, lobby, elevator, auditorium, etc.) Medium precision work (simple assembly, rough machine works, welding, packing, etc.)
200 lux
Precision work (reading, moderately difficult assembly, sorting, checking, medium bench and machine works, etc.), offices.
500 lux
High precision work (difficult assembly, sewing, color 1,000 – 3,000 inspection, fine sorting etc.) lux
APRIL 30, 2007
and explosion, if incompatible chemicals are inadvertently mixed. Chemical hazards can most effectively be prevented through a hierarchical approach that includes: •
Replacement of the hazardous substance with a less hazardous substitute
•
Implementation of engineering and administrative control measures to avoid or minimize the release of hazardous substances into the work environment keeping the level of exposure below internationally established or recognized limits
•
Keeping the number of employees exposed, or likely to become exposed, to a minimum
69
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Communicating chemical hazards to workers through
•
Where ambient air contains several materials that have
labeling and marking according to national and internationally
similar effects on the same body organs (additive effects),
recognized requirements and standards, including the
taking into account combined exposures using calculations
International Chemical Safety Cards (ICSC), Materials Safety
recommended by the ACGIH 69
Data Sheets (MSDS), or equivalent. Any means of written
•
Where work shifts extend beyond eight (8) hours, calculating
communication should be in an easily understood language
adjusted workplace exposure criteria recommended by the
and be readily available to exposed workers and first-aid
ACGIH 70
personnel •
Training workers in the use of the available information (such
Fire and Explosions
as MSDSs), safe work practices, and appropriate use of PPE
Fires and or explosions resulting from ignition of flammable
Air Quality Poor air quality due to the release of contaminants into the work place can result in possible respiratory irritation, discomfort, or illness to workers. Employers should take appropriate measures
materials or gases can lead to loss of property as well as possible injury or fatalities to project workers. Prevention and control strategies include: •
materials. Further, flammables storage area should be:
to maintain air quality in the work area. These include: •
Storing flammables away from ignition sources and oxidizing
o
Remote from entry and exit points into buildings
Maintaining levels of contaminant dusts, vapors and gases in
o
Away from facility ventilation intakes or vents
the work environment at concentrations below those
o
Have natural or passive floor and ceiling level ventilation
recommended by the ACGIH 68 as TWA-TLV’s (threshold limit
•
and explosion venting
value)—concentrations to which most workers can be
o
Use spark-proof fixtures
exposed repeatedly (8 hours/day, 40 hrs/week, week-after-
o
Be equipped with fire extinguishing devices and self-
week), without sustaining adverse health effects.
closing doors, and constructed of materials made to
Developing and implementing work practices to minimize
withstand flame impingement for a moderate period of
release of contaminants into the work environment including:
time
o
Direct piping of liquid and gaseous materials
o
Minimized handling of dry powdered materials;
containers and additional mechanical floor level ventilation if
o
Enclosed operations
materials are being, or could be, dispensed in the storage
o
Local exhaust ventilation at emission / release points
area
o
Vacuum transfer of dry material rather than mechanical or pneumatic conveyance
o
Indoor secure storage, and sealed containers rather
•
•
Providing bonding and grounding of, and between,
Where the flammable material is mainly comprised of dust, providing electrical grounding, spark detection, and, if needed, quenching systems
than loose storage
69 ACGIH, 2005. 68 ACGIH, 2005
APRIL 30, 2007
70 ACGIH, 2005.
70
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
•
Defining and labeling fire hazards areas to warn of special
Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)
rules (e.g. prohibition in use of smoking materials, cellular
The use of asbestos containing materials (ACM) should be
phones, or other potential spark generating equipment)
avoided in new buildings or as a new material in remodeling or
Providing specific worker training in handling of flammable
renovation activities. Existing facilities with ACM should develop
materials, and in fire prevention or suppression
an asbestos management plan which clearly identifies the
Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals
locations where the ACM is present, its condition (e.g. whether it is in friable form with the potential to release fibers), procedures
Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals present similar
for monitoring its condition, procedures to access the locations
hazards and require similar control measures as flammable
where ACM is present to avoid damage, and training of staff who
materials. However, the added hazard of these chemicals is that
can potentially come into contact with the material to avoid
inadvertent mixing or intermixing may cause serious adverse
damage and prevent exposure. The plan should be made
reactions. This can lead to the release of flammable or toxic
available to all persons involved in operations and maintenance
materials and gases, and may lead directly to fires and
activities. Repair or removal and disposal of existing ACM in
explosions. These types of substances have the additional hazard
buildings should only be performed by specially trained
of causing significant personal injury upon direct contact,
personnel71 following host country requirements, or in their
regardless of any intermixing issues. The following controls should be observed in the work environment when handling such
absence, internationally recognized procedures.72
chemicals:
2.5 Biological Hazards
•
Corrosive, oxidizing and reactive chemicals should be
Biological agents represent potential for illness or injury due to
segregated from flammable materials and from other
single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure. Biological
chemicals of incompatible class (acids vs. bases, oxidizers
hazards can be prevented most effectively by implementing the
vs. reducers, water sensitive vs. water based, etc.), stored in
following measures:
ventilated areas and in containers with appropriate secondary containment to minimize intermixing during spills •
Workers who are required to handle corrosive, oxidizing, or reactive chemicals should be provided with specialized training and provided with, and wear, appropriate PPE (gloves, apron, splash suits, face shield or goggles, etc).
•
Where corrosive, oxidizing, or reactive chemicals are used, handled, or stored, qualified first-aid should be ensured at all times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations should be easily accessible throughout the place of work, and eye-wash stations and/or emergency showers should be provided close to all workstations where the recommended first-aid response is immediate flushing with water
APRIL 30, 2007
•
If the nature of the activity permits, use of any harmful biological agents should be avoided and replaced with an agent that, under normal conditions of use, is not dangerous or less dangerous to workers. If use of harmful agents can not be avoided, precautions should be taken to keep the risk of exposure as low as possible and maintained below internationally established and recognized exposure limits.
71 Training of specialized personnel and the maintenance and removal methods
applied should be equivalent to those required under applicable regulations in the United States and Europe (examples of North American training standards are available at: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/asbestos/training.html) 72 Examples include the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E 1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects; E 2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys; and E 2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of Installed Asbestos Cement Products.
71
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
•
Work processes, engineering, and administrative controls
The employer should at all times encourage and enforce the
should be designed, maintained, and operated to avoid or
highest level of hygiene and personal protection, especially for
minimize release of biological agents into the working
activities employing biological agents of Groups 3 and 4 above.
environment. The number of employees exposed or likely to
Work involving agents in Groups 3 and 4 should be restricted only
become exposed should be kept at a minimum.
to those persons who have received specific verifiable training in
The employer should review and assess known and
working with and controlling such materials.
suspected presence of biological agents at the place of work
•
and implement appropriate safety measures, monitoring,
Areas used for the handling of Groups 3 and 4 biological agents
training, and training verification programs.
should be designed to enable their full segregation and isolation in
Measures to eliminate and control hazards from known and
emergency circumstances, include independent ventilation
suspected biological agents at the place of work should be
systems, and be subject to SOPs requiring routine disinfection
designed, implemented and maintained in close co-operation
and sterilization of the work surfaces.
with the local health authorities and according to recognized HVAC systems serving areas handling Groups 3 and 4 biological
international standards.
agents should be equipped with High Efficiency Particulate Air Biological agents should be classified into four •
•
groups73:
(HEPA) filtration systems. Equipment should readily enable their
Group 1: Biological agents unlikely to cause human disease,
disinfection and sterilization, and maintained and operated so as
and consequently only require controls similar to those
to prevent growth and spreading of disease agents, amplification
required for hazardous or reactive chemical substances;
of the biological agents, or breeding of vectors e.g. mosquitoes
Group 2: Biological agents that can cause human disease
and flies of public health concern.
and are thereby likely to require additional controls, but are unlikely to spread to the community; •
Group 3: Biological agents that can cause severe human disease, present a serious hazard to workers, and may present a risk of spreading to the community, for which there usually is effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are thereby likely to require extensive additional controls;
•
Group 4: Biological agents that can cause severe human disease, are a serious hazard to workers, and present a high risk of spreading to the community, for which there is usually no effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are thereby likely to require very extensive additional controls.
73 World Health Organization (WHO) Classification of Infective Microorganisms by
Risk Group (2004).
APRIL 30, 2007
72
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
2.6 Radiological Hazards
preferred method for controlling exposure is shielding and
Radiation exposure can lead to potential discomfort, injury or
limiting the radiation source. Personal protective equipment
serious illness to workers. Prevention and control strategies
is supplemental only or for emergency use. Personal
include: •
In the case of both ionizing and non-ionizing radiation, the
protective equipment for near-infrared, visible and ultraviolet
Places of work involving occupational and/or natural
range radiation can include appropriate sun block creams,
exposure to ionizing radiation should be established and
with or without appropriate screening clothing.
operated in accordance with recognized international safety standards and guidelines.74 The acceptable effective dose limits appear Table 2.6.1. •
Exposure to non-ionizing radiation (including static magnetic fields; sub-radio frequency magnetic fields; static electric fields; radio frequency and microwave radiation; light and
2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) provides additional protection to workers exposed to workplace hazards in conjunction with other facility controls and safety systems.
near-infrared radiation; and ultraviolet radiation) should be controlled to internationally recommended limits75.
PPE is considered to be a last resort that is above and beyond the other facility controls and provides the worker with an extra level of personal protection. Table 2.7.1 presents general examples of
Table 2.6.1. Acceptable Effective Dose Limits for Workplace Radiological Hazards
Exposure
Workers (min.19 years of age)
Five consecutive year average – effective dose
20 mSv/year
Single year exposure – effective dose
50 mSv/year
Equivalent dose to the lens of the eye Equivalent dose to the extremities (hands, feet) or the skin
Apprentices and students (16-18 years of age)
occupational hazards and types of PPE available for different purposes. Recommended measures for use of PPE in the workplace include: •
Active use of PPE if alternative technologies, work plans or procedures cannot eliminate, or sufficiently reduce, a hazard or exposure
•
Identification and provision of appropriate PPE that offers adequate protection to the worker, co-workers, and
6 mSv/year
occasional visitors, without incurring unnecessary inconvenience to the individual
150 mSv/year
50 mSv/year
500 mSv/year
150 mSv/year
•
Proper maintenance of PPE, including cleaning when dirty and replacement when damaged or worn out. Proper use of PPE should be part of the recurrent training programs for employees
74 International Basic Safety Standard for protection against Ionizing Radiation and
for the Safety of Radiation Sources and its three interrelated Safety Guides. IAEA. http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160
75 For example ACGIH (2005) and International Commission for Non-Ionizing
Radiation (ICNIRP). APRIL 30, 2007
73
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
by recognized organizations76.
Selection of PPE should be based on the hazard and risk ranking described earlier in this section, and selected according to criteria on performance and testing established
2.8 Special Hazard Environments Special hazard environments are work situations where all of the
Table 2.7.1. Summary of Recommended Personal Protective Equipment According to Hazard Objective
Workplace Hazards
Suggested PPE
previously described hazards may exist under unique or especially hazardous circumstances. Accordingly, extra precautions or rigor in application of precautions is required.
Confined Space A confined space is defined as a wholly or partially enclosed
Eye and face protection
Flying particles, molten metal, liquid chemicals, gases or vapors, light radiation.
Safety Glasses with side-shields, protective shades, etc.
Head protection
Falling objects, inadequate height clearance, and overhead power cords.
Plastic Helmets with top and side impact protection.
Hearing protection
Noise, ultra-sound.
Hearing protectors (ear plugs or ear muffs).
hazards that could trap or engulf the person.77
Foot protection
Falling or rolling objects, pointed objects. Corrosive or hot liquids.
Safety shoes and boots for protection against moving & falling objects, liquids and chemicals.
Confined spaces can occur in enclosed or open structures or
from a confined space. Recommended management approaches
which a hazardous atmosphere could develop as a result of the
Hazardous materials, cuts or lacerations, vibrations, extreme temperatures.
Gloves made of rubber or synthetic materials (Neoprene), leather, steel, insulating materials, etc.
Respiratory protection
Dust, fogs, fumes, mists, gases, smokes, vapors.
Facemasks with appropriate filters for dust removal and air purification (chemicals, mists, vapors and gases). Single or multi-gas personal monitors, if available.
Body/leg protection
Extreme temperatures, hazardous materials, biological agents, cutting and laceration.
contents, location or construction of the confined space or due to work done in or around the confined space. A “permit-required” confined space is one that also contains physical or atmospheric
Hand protection
Oxygen deficiency
space not designed or intended for human occupancy and in
locations. Serious injury or fatality can result from inadequate preparation to enter a confined space or in attempting a rescue include: •
Engineering measures should be implemented to eliminate, to the degree feasible, the existence and adverse character of confined spaces.
•
Permit-required confined spaces should be provided with permanent safety measures for venting, monitoring, and
Portable or supplied air (fixed lines). On-site rescue equipment.
rescue operations, to the extent possible. The area adjoining an access to a confined space should provide ample room
Insulating clothing, body suits, aprons etc. of appropriate materials.
for emergency and rescue operations. Examples include the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), http://www.ansi.org/; National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health76 (NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html; Canadian Standards Association76 (CSA), http://www.csa.ca/Default.asp?language=english; Mine Safety and Health Administration76 (MSHA), http://www.msha.gov.
76
77 US OSHA CFR 1910.146
APRIL 30, 2007
74
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
•
Access hatches should accommodate 90% of the worker
persons capable of providing aid and assistance, for continuous
population with adjustments for tools and protective clothing.
periods exceeding one hour. The worker is therefore at increased
The most current ISO and EN standards should be consulted
risk should an accident or injury occur.
for design specifications;
•
Prior to entry into a permit-required confined space: o
o
o
o
•
or isolated circumstances, Standard Operating Procedures
Process or feed lines into the space should be
(SOPs) should be developed and implemented to ensure all
disconnected or drained, and blanked and locked-out.
PPE and safety measures are in place before the worker
Mechanical equipment in the space should be
starts work. SOPs should establish, at a minimum, verbal
disconnected, de-energized, locked-out, and braced, as
contact with the worker at least once every hour, and ensure
appropriate.
the worker has a capability for summoning emergency aid.
The atmosphere within the confined space should be
•
If the worker is potentially exposed to highly toxic or corrosive
tested to assure the oxygen content is between 19.5
chemicals, emergency eye-wash and shower facilities should
percent and 23 percent, and that the presence of any
be equipped with audible and visible alarms to summon aid
flammable gas or vapor does not exceed 25 percent of
whenever the eye-wash or shower is activated by the worker
its respective Lower Explosive Limit (LEL).
and without intervention by the worker.
If the atmospheric conditions are not met, the confined space should be ventilated until the target safe
2.9 Monitoring
atmosphere is achieved, or entry is only to be
Occupational health and safety monitoring programs should verify
undertaken with appropriate and additional PPE.
the effectiveness of prevention and control strategies. The selected indicators should be representative of the most
Safety precautions should include Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA), life lines, and safety watch workers stationed outside the confined space, with rescue and first aid equipment readily available.
•
Where workers may be required to perform work under lone
Before workers are required to enter a permit-required
significant occupational, health, and safety hazards, and the implementation of prevention and control strategies. The occupational health and safety monitoring program should include: •
Safety inspection, testing and calibration: This should include regular inspection and testing of all safety features and
confined space, adequate and appropriate training in
hazard control measures focusing on engineering and
confined space hazard control, atmospheric testing, use of
personal protective features, work procedures, places of
the necessary PPE, as well as the serviceability and integrity
work, installations, equipment, and tools used. The
of the PPE should be verified. Further, adequate and
inspection should verify that issued PPE continues to provide
appropriate rescue and / or recovery plans and equipment should be in place before the worker enters the confined
adequate protection and is being worn as required. All
space.
instruments installed or used for monitoring and recording of working environment parameters should be regularly tested and calibrated, and the respective records maintained.
Lone and Isolated Workers A lone and isolated worker is a worker out of verbal and line of sight communication with a supervisor, other workers, or other APRIL 30, 2007
•
Surveillance of the working environment: Employers should document compliance using an appropriate combination of
75
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
portable and stationary sampling and monitoring instruments.
•
Monitoring and analyses should be conducted according to
encourage workers to report to management all:
internationally recognized methods and standards.
o
Occupational injuries and near misses
Monitoring methodology, locations, frequencies, and
o
Suspected cases of occupational disease
parameters should be established individually for each
o
Dangerous occurrences and incidents
project following a review of the hazards. Generally, monitoring should be performed during commissioning of
•
misses should be investigated with the assistance of a
liability period, and otherwise repeated according to the
person knowledgeable/competent in occupational safety. The
monitoring plan.
investigation should:
Surveillance of workers health: When extraordinary protective measures are required (for example, against
o
Establish what happened
biological agents Groups 3 and 4, and/or hazardous
o
Determine the cause of what happened
compounds), workers should be provided appropriate and
o
Identify measures necessary to prevent a recurrence
relevant health surveillance prior to first exposure, and at
•
All reported occupational accidents, occupational diseases, dangerous occurrences, and incidents together with near
facilities or equipment and at the end of the defect and
•
The systems and the employer should further enable and
•
Occupational accidents and diseases should, at a minimum,
regular intervals thereafter. The surveillance should, if
be classified according to Table 2.10.1. Distinction is made
deemed necessary, be continued after termination of the
between fatal and non-fatal injuries. The two main categories
employment.
are divided into three sub-categories according to time of
Training: Training activities for employees and visitors should
death or duration of the incapacity to work. The total work
be adequately monitored and documented (curriculum,
hours during the specified reporting period should be
duration, and participants). Emergency exercises, including
reported to the appropriate regulatory agency.
fire drills, should be documented adequately. Service
Table 2.9.1. Occupational Accident Reporting
providers and contractors should be contractually required to submit to the employer adequate training documentation before start of their assignment.
Accidents and Diseases monitoring •
a. Fatalities
(number)
a.1 Immediate
The employer should establish procedures and systems for
a.2 Within a month
reporting and recording:
a.3 Within a year
o
Occupational accidents and diseases
o
Dangerous occurrences and incidents
b. Non-fatal injuries (number) 78 b.1 Less than one
c. Total time lost non-fatal injuries (days)
day b.2 Up to 3 days b.3 More than 3 days
c.1 Category b.2 c.2 Category b.3
These systems should enable workers to report immediately to their immediate supervisor any situation they believe presents a serious danger to life or health. 78 The day on which an incident occurs is not included in b.2 and b.3.
APRIL 30, 2007
76
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
3.0 Community Health and Safety 3.1 Water Quality and Availability ...................................77 Water Quality.........................................................77 Water Availability....................................................77 3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure ..................78 3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) ......................................79 Applicability and Approach......................................79 Specific Requirements for New Buildings................79 L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval.................80 Specific Requirements for Existing Buildings ...........81 Other Hazards........................................................81 3.4 Traffic Safety............................................................81 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials .............................82 General Hazardous Materials Transport..................82 Major Transportation Hazards.................................83 3.6 Disease Prevention..................................................85 Communicable Diseases........................................85 Vector-Borne Diseases...........................................85 3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response .................86 Communication Systems ........................................86 Emergency Resources ...........................................87 Training and Updating ............................................87 Business Continuity and Contingency .....................88 Applicability and Approach......................................89
impoundment should prevent adverse impacts to the quality and availability of groundwater and surface water resources.
Water Quality Drinking water sources, whether public or private, should at all times be protected so that they meet or exceed applicable national acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of WHO Guidelines for Drinking-Water Quality. Air emissions, wastewater effluents, oil and hazardous materials, and wastes should be managed according to the guidance provided in the respective sections of the General EHS Guidelines with the objective of protecting soil and water resources. Where the project includes the delivery of water to the community or to users of facility infrastructure (such as hotel hosts and hospital patients), where water may be used for drinking, cooking, washing, and bathing, water quality should comply with national acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of with WHO Drinking Water Guidelines. Water quality for more
This section complements the guidance provided in the preceding environmental and occupational health and safety sections, specifically addressing some aspects of project activities taking place outside of the traditional project boundaries, but nonetheless related to the project operations, as may be applicable on a project basis. These issues may arise at any stage of a project life cycle and can have an impact beyond the life of the project.
3.1 Water Quality and Availability Groundwater and surface water represent essential sources of drinking and irrigation water in developing countries, particularly in rural areas where piped water supply may be limited or unavailable and where available resources are collected by the
sensitive well-being-related demands such as water used in health care facilities or food production may require more stringent, industry-specific guidelines or standards, as applicable. Any dependency factors associated with the deliver of water to the local community should be planned for and managed to ensure the sustainability of the water supply by involving the community in its management to minimize the dependency in the long-term.
Water Availability The potential effect of groundwater or surface water abstraction for project activities should be properly assessed through a combination of field testing and modeling techniques, accounting for seasonal variability and projected changes in demand in the project area.
consumer with little or no treatment. Project activities involving wastewater discharges, water extraction, diversion or APRIL 30, 2007
77
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
Project activities should not compromise the availability of water
project structures should be designed in accordance with
for personal hygiene needs and should take account of potential
engineering and design criteria mandated by site-specific
future increases in demand. The overall target should be the
risks, including but not limited to seismic activity, slope
availability of 100 liters per person per day although lower levels
stability, wind loading, and other dynamic loads
may be used to meet basic health requirements.79 Water volume
•
Application of locally regulated or internationally recognized
requirements for well-being-related demands such as water use in
building codes80 to ensure structures are designed and
health care facilities may need to be higher.
constructed in accordance with sound architectural and
3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure Hazards posed to the public while accessing project facilities may
engineering practice, including aspects of fire prevention and response •
Engineers and architects responsible for designing and constructing facilities, building, plants and other structures
include:
should certify the applicability and appropriateness of the
•
Physical trauma associated with failure of building structures
structural criteria employed.
•
Burns and smoke inhalation from fires
International codes, such as those compiled by the International
•
Injuries suffered as a consequence of falls or contact with
Code Council (ICC) 81, are intended to regulate the design,
heavy equipment
construction, and maintenance of a built environment and contain
•
Respiratory distress from dust, fumes, or noxious odors
detailed guidance on all aspects of building safety, encompassing
•
Exposure to hazardous materials
methodology, best practices, and documenting compliance.
Reduction of potential hazards is best accomplished during the
Depending on the nature of a project, guidance provided in the
design phase when the structural design, layout and site
ICC or comparable codes should be followed, as appropriate, with
modifications can be adapted more easily. The following issues
respect to:
should be considered and incorporated as appropriate into the
•
Existing structures
•
Soils and foundations
Inclusion of buffer strips or other methods of physical
•
Site grading
separation around project sites to protect the public from
•
Structural design
major hazards associated with hazardous materials incidents
•
Specific requirements based on intended use and occupancy
or process failure, as well as nuisance issues related to
•
Accessibility and means of egress
noise, odors, or other emissions
•
Types of construction
Incorporation of siting and safety engineering criteria to
•
Roof design and construction
prevent failures due to natural risks posed by earthquakes,
•
Fire-resistant construction
tsunamis, wind, flooding, landslides and fire. To this end, all
•
Flood-resistant construction
planning, siting, and design phases of a project: •
•
79 World Health Organization (WHO) defines 100 liters/capita/day as the amount
required to meet all consumption and hygiene needs. Additional information on lower service levels and potential impacts on health are described in “Domestic Water Quantity, Service Level and Health” 2003. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/diseases/wsh0302/en/index.html APRIL 30, 2007
80 ILO-OSH, 2001. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/
safework/cops/english/download/e000013.pdf 81
ICC, 2006.
78
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Construction materials
codes, local fire department regulations, local legal/insurance
•
Interior environment
requirements, and in accordance with an internationally accepted
•
Mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems
life and fire safety (L&FS) standard. The Life Safety Code82, which
•
Elevators and conveying systems
provides extensive documentation on life and fire safety
•
Fire safety systems
provisions, is one example of an internationally accepted standard
•
Safeguards during construction
and may be used to document compliance with the Life and Fire
•
Encroachments into public right-of-way
Safety objectives outlined in these guidelines. With regard to
Although major design changes may not be feasible during the operation phase of a project, hazard analysis can be undertaken
these objectives: •
Project sponsors’ architects and professional consulting
to identify opportunities to reduce the consequences of a failure or
engineers should demonstrate that affected buildings meet
accident. Illustrative management actions, applicable to
these life and fire safety objectives.
hazardous materials storage and use, include: •
•
designed and installed using appropriate prescriptive
inventory management and process changes to greatly
standards and/or performance based design, and sound
reduce or eliminate the potential off-site consequences of a
engineering practices. Life and fire safety design criteria for all existing buildings should incorporate all local building codes and fire
potential consequences of an accidental off-site release
department regulations.
Improving shut-down and secondary containment to reduce reduce the release duration
•
•
Modifying process or storage conditions to reduce the
the amount of material escaping from containment and to •
Life and fire safety systems and equipment should be
Reducing inventories of hazardous materials through
release •
•
These guidelines apply to buildings that are accessible to the public. Examples of such buildings include:
Reducing the probability that releases will occur through
•
Health and education facilities
improved site operations and control, and through
•
Hotels, convention centers, and leisure facilities
improvements in maintenance and inspection
•
Retail and commercial facilities
Reducing off-site impacts of releases through measures
•
Airports, other public transport terminals, transfer facilities
intended to contain explosions and fires, alert the public, provide for evacuation of surrounding areas, establish safety
Specific Requirements for New Buildings
zones around a site, and ensure the provision of emergency
The nature and extent of life and fire safety systems required will
medical services to the public
depend on the building type, structure, construction, occupancy, and exposures. Sponsors should prepare a Life and Fire Safety
3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) Applicability and Approach All new buildings accessible to the public should be designed, constructed, and operated in full compliance with local building APRIL 30, 2007
Master Plan identifying major fire risks, applicable codes, standards and regulations, and mitigation measures. The Master 82 US NFPA.
http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target% 5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search
79
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
Plan should be prepared by a suitably qualified professional, and
Compartmentation
adequately cover, but not be limited to, the issues addressed
Compartmentation involves all measures to prevent or slow the
briefly in the following points. The suitably qualified professional
spread of fire and smoke, including:
selected to prepare the Master Plan is responsible for a detailed
•
Separations
•
Fire walls
•
Floors
Fire Prevention
•
Doors
Fire prevention addresses the identification of fire risks and
•
Dampers
ignition sources, and measures needed to limit fast fire and smoke
•
Smoke control systems
treatment of the following illustrative, and all other required, issues.
development. These issues include:
Fire Suppression and Control
•
Fuel load and control of combustibles
•
Ignition sources
•
Interior finish flame spread characteristics
•
Interior finish smoke production characteristics
•
Automatic sprinkler systems
•
Human acts, and housekeeping and maintenance
•
Manual portable extinguishers
•
Fire hose reels
Means of Egress
Fire suppression and control includes all automatic and manual fire protection installations, such as:
Means of Egress includes all design measures that facilitate a
Emergency Response Plan
safe evacuation by residents and/or occupants in case of fire or
An Emergency Response Plan is a set of scenario–based
other emergency, such as:
procedures to assist staff and emergency response teams during real life emergency and training exercises. This chapter of the Fire
•
Clear, unimpeded escape routes
•
Accessibility to the impaired/handicapped
•
Marking and signing
•
Emergency lighting
Detection and Alarm Systems
and Life Safety Master Plan should include an assessment of local fire prevention and suppression capabilities.
Operation and Maintenance Operation and Maintenance involves preparing schedules for mandatory regular maintenance and testing of life and fire safety
These systems encompass all measures, including
features to ensure that mechanical, electrical, and civil structures
communication and public address systems needed to detect a
and systems are at all times in conformance with life and fire
fire and alert:
safety design criteria and required operational readiness.
•
Building staff
•
Emergency response teams
L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval
•
Occupants
•
•
Civil defense
A suitably qualified professional prepares and submits a Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) Master Plan, including preliminary drawings and specifications, and certifies that the design
APRIL 30, 2007
80
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
meets the requirements of these L&FS guidelines. The
earthquakes, tsunamis, floods, windstorms, and fires from
findings and recommendations of the review are then used to
surrounding areas).
establish the conditions of a Corrective Action Plan and a •
the criteria mandated by situation-, climatic-, and geology-
The suitably qualified professional conducts a review as part
specific location risks (e.g. seismic activity, wind loading, and
of the project completion test at the time of life and fire safety
other dynamic loads). •
Structural engineers and architects responsible for facilities,
construction of these systems has been carried out in
buildings, plants and structures should certify the applicability
accordance with the accepted design. The findings and
and appropriateness of the design criteria employed.
recommendations of the review are used as the basis for
•
National or regional building regulations typically contain fire
establishing project completion or to establish the conditions
safety codes and standards83 or these standards are found in
of a Pre-Completion Corrective Action Plan and a time frame
separate Fire Codes.84,85 Generally, such codes and
for implementing the changes.
regulations incorporate further compliance requirements with
Specific Requirements for Existing Buildings All life and fire safety guideline requirements for new buildings apply to existing buildings programmed for renovation. A suitably qualified professional conducts a complete life and fire safety review of existing buildings slated for renovation. The findings and recommendations of the review are used as the basis to establish the scope of work of a Corrective Action Plan and a time frame for implementing the changes. •
All such structures should be designed in accordance with
time frame for implementing the changes.
systems testing and commissioning, and certifies that
•
•
If it becomes apparent that life and fire safety conditions are deficient in an existing building that is not part of the project or that has not been programmed for renovation, a life and fire safety review of the building may be conducted by a suitably qualified professional. The findings and
respect to methodology, practice, testing, and other codes and standards86. Such nationally referenced material constitutes the acceptable fire life safety code.
3.4 Traffic Safety Traffic accidents have become one of the most significant causes of injuries and fatalities among members of the public worldwide. Traffic safety should be promoted by all project personnel during displacement to and from the workplace, and during operation of project equipment on private or public roads. Prevention and control of traffic related injuries and fatalities should include the adoption of safety measures that are protective of project workers and of road users, including those who are most vulnerable to road traffic accidents87. Road safety initiatives proportional to the scope and nature of project activities should include:
recommendations of the review are used as the basis to establish the scope of work of a Corrective Action Plan and a
83 For example, Australia, Canada, South Africa, United Kingdom
time frame for implementing the changes.
84 Réglementation Incendie [des ERP]
Other Hazards •
Facilities, buildings, plants, and structures should be situated to minimize potential risks from forces of nature (e.g.
APRIL 30, 2007
85 USA NFPA, 2006. 86 Prepared by National Institutes and Authorities such as American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM), British Standards (BS), German Institute of Standardization (DIN), and French Standards (NF) 87 Additional information on vulnerable users of public roads in developing countries is provided by Peden et al., 2004.
81
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Adoption of best transport safety practices across all aspects
•
of project operations with the goal of preventing traffic
Employing safe traffic control measures, including road signs and flag persons to warn of dangerous conditions
accidents and minimizing injuries suffered by project personnel and the public. Measures should include: o
Emphasizing safety aspects among drivers
o
Improving driving skills and requiring licensing of drivers
o
Adopting limits for trip duration and arranging driver
3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials General Hazardous Materials Transport •
compliance with local laws and international requirements
rosters to avoid overtiredness o
o
•
Projects should have procedures in place that ensure applicable to the transport of hazardous materials, including:
Avoiding dangerous routes and times of day to reduce the risk of accidents
o
IATA requirements89 for air transport
Use of speed control devices (governors) on trucks, and
o
IMDG Code90 sea transport
remote monitoring of driver actions
o
UN Model Regulations91 of other international standards as well as local requirements for land transport
Regular maintenance of vehicles and use of manufacturer o
approved parts to minimize potentially serious accidents
Host-country commitments under the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of
caused by equipment malfunction or premature failure.
Hazardous Waste and their disposal and Rotterdam
Where the project may contribute to a significant increase in traffic
Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for
along existing roads, or where road transport is a significant
Certain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in
component of a project, recommended measures include:
International Trade, if applicable to the project activities
•
Minimizing pedestrian interaction with construction vehicles
•
Collaboration with local communities and responsible
(Hazmats) should include:
authorities to improve signage, visibility and overall safety of
o
•
The procedures for transportation of hazardous materials
Proper labeling of containers, including the identify and
roads, particularly along stretches located near schools or
quantity of the contents, hazards, and shipper contact
other locations where children may be present. Collaborating
information
with local communities on education about traffic and •
•
o
Providing a shipping document (e.g. shipping manifest)
pedestrian safety (e.g. school education campaigns)88
that describes the contents of the load and its
Coordination with emergency responders to ensure that
associated hazards in addition to the labeling of the
appropriate first aid is provided in the event of accidents
containers. The shipping document should establish a
Using locally sourced materials, whenever possible, to
chain-of-custody using multiple signed copies to show
minimize transport distances. Locating associated facilities
that the waste was properly shipped, transported and
such as worker camps close to project sites and arranging
received by the recycling or treatment/disposal facility
worker bus transport to minimizing external traffic 89 IATA, 2005. www.iata.org 90 IMO. www.imo.org/safety 88Additional sources of information for implementation of road safety measures is available at WHO, 1989, Ross et al., 1991, Tsunokawa and Hoban, 1997, and OECD, 1999
APRIL 30, 2007
91 United Nations. Transport of Dangerous Goods - Model Regulations. 14th
Revised Edition. Geneva 2005. http://www.unece.org/trans/danger/publi/unrec/rev14/14files_e.html
82
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
o
Ensuring that the volume, nature, integrity and
materials, including environmental management systems
transport are appropriate for the type and quantity of
used by the company and its contractors
o
Ensuring adequate transport vehicle specifications
o
Training employees involved in the transportation of hazardous materials regarding proper shipping procedures and emergency procedures
o
The existing criteria for the safe transportation of hazardous
protection of packaging and containers used for hazardous material and modes of transport involved
o
•
This review should cover the management actions, preventive measures and emergency response procedures described below. The hazard assessment helps to determine what additional measures may be required to complete the plan.
Using labeling and placarding (external signs on
Management Actions
transport vehicles), as required
•
Providing the necessary means for emergency response
Management of Change: These procedures should address: o
on call 24 hours/day
The technical basis for changes in hazardous materials offered for transportation, routes and/or procedures
Major Transportation Hazards
o
The potential impact of changes on health and safety
Guidance related to major transportation hazards should be
o
Modification required to operating procedures
implemented in addition to measures presented in the preceding
o
Authorization requirements
section for preventing or minimizing the consequences of
o
Employees affected
catastrophic releases of hazardous materials, which may result in
o
Training needs
toxic, fire, explosion, or other hazards during transportation.
•
Compliance Audit: A compliance audit evaluates compliance with prevention requirements for each transportation route or
In addition to these aforementioned procedures, projects which
for each hazardous material, as appropriate. A compliance
transport hazardous materials at or above the threshold
audit covering each element of the prevention measures (see
quantities92 should prepare a Hazardous Materials Transportation
below) should be conducted at least every three years. The
Plan containing all of the elements presented below93.
audit program should include:
Hazard Assessment
o
Preparation of a report of the findings
The hazard assessment should identify the potential hazard
o
Determination and documentation of the appropriate response to each finding
involved in the transportation of hazardous materials by reviewing: o •
The hazard characteristics of the substances identified during the screening stage
•
The history of accidents, both by the company and its contractors, involving hazardous materials transportation
92 Threshold quantities for the transport of hazardous materials are found in the UN – Transport of Dangerous Goods – Model Regulations cited above. 93
For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Transportation Manual. Washington, D.C. December 2000.
APRIL 30, 2007
•
Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected.
Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable information about transportation hazards and the steps needed to prevent accidental releases. The implementation of incident investigation procedures should ensure that: o
Investigations are initiated promptly
o
Summaries of investigations are included in a report
o
Report findings and recommendations are addressed 83
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
o •
•
Reports are reviewed with staff and contractors
Employee Participation: There should be a written plan of
The plan should include procedures to implement preventive
action regarding the implementation of active employee
measures specific to each hazardous material offered for
participation in the prevention of accidents.
transportation, including:
Contractors: The plan should include procedures to ensure that: o
The contractor is provided with safety performance procedures and safety and hazard information
•
Preventive Measures
o
Contractors observe safety practices
o
Verify that the contractor acts responsibly
•
Classification and segregation of hazardous materials in warehouses and transport units
•
Packaging and packaging testing
•
Marking and labeling of packages containing hazardous materials
•
Handling and securing packages containing hazardous materials in transport units
The plan should also include additional procedures to ensure
•
Marking and placarding of transport units
the contractors will:
•
Documentation (e.g. bills of lading)
•
Application of special provisions, as appropriate
o
Ensure appropriate training for their employees
o
Ensure their employees know process hazards and applicable emergency actions
Emergency Preparedness and Response
o
Prepare and submit training records
It is important to develop procedures and practices for the
o
Inform employees about the hazards presented by their
handling of hazardous materials that allow for quick and efficient
work
responses to accidents that may result in injury or environmental
Training: Good training programs on operating procedures will provide the employees with the necessary information to understand how to operate safely and why safe operations
damage. The sponsor should prepare an Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan that should cover: •
are needed. The training program should include:
Planning Coordination: This should include procedures for: o
Informing the public and emergency response agencies
o
The list of employees to be trained
o
Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment
o
Specific training objectives
o
Taking emergency response actions
o
Mechanisms to achieve objectives (i.e. hands-on
o
Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan
o
workshops, videos, etc.)
to reflect changes and ensuring that the employees are
Means to determine the effectiveness of the training
informed of such changes
program o
Training procedures for new hires and refresher
•
Emergency Equipment: The plan should include procedures for using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining emergency
programs
response equipment. •
Training: Employees should be trained in any relevant procedures
APRIL 30, 2007
84
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
access to medical treatment, confidentiality and appropriate
3.6 Disease Prevention Communicable Diseases
care, particularly with respect to migrant workers •
Promoting collaboration with local authorities to enhance
Communicable diseases pose a significant public health threat
access of workers families and the community to public
worldwide. Health hazards typically associated with large
health services and promote immunization
development projects are those relating to poor sanitation and living conditions, sexual transmission and vector-borne infections.
Vector-Borne Diseases
Communicable diseases of most concern during the construction
Reducing the impact of vector-borne disease on the long-term
phase due to labor mobility are sexually-transmitted diseases
health of workers is best accomplished through implementation of
(STDs), such as HIV/AIDS. Recognizing that no single measure
diverse interventions aimed at eliminating the factors that lead to
is likely to be effective in the long term, successful initiatives
disease. Project sponsors, in close collaboration with community
typically involve a combination of behavioral and environmental
health authorities, can implement an integrated control strategy for
modifications.
mosquito and other arthropod-borne diseases that might involve:
Recommended interventions at the project level include94:
•
• •
improvements and elimination of breeding habitats close to
Providing surveillance and active screening and treatment of
human settlements
workers
•
Elimination of unusable impounded water
Preventing illness among workers in local communities by:
•
Increase in water velocity in natural and artificial channels
•
Considering the application of residual insecticide to
o
Undertaking health awareness and education initiatives, for example, by implementing an information strategy to
dormitory walls
reinforce person-to-person counseling addressing
•
Implementation of integrated vector control programs
systemic factors that can influence individual behavior
•
Promoting use of repellents, clothing, netting, and other
as well as promoting individual protection, and protecting others from infection, by encouraging condom
barriers to prevent insect bites •
Use of chemoprophylaxis drugs by non-immune workers and
use
collaborating with public health officials to help eradicate
o
Training health workers in disease treatment
disease reservoirs
o
Conducting immunization programs for workers in local communities to improve health and guard against infection
o •
Prevention of larval and adult propagation through sanitary
•
populations to prevent disease reservoir spread •
Providing health services
Collaboration and exchange of in-kind services with other control programs in the project area to maximize beneficial
Providing treatment through standard case management in on-site or community health care facilities. Ensuring ready
Monitoring and treatment of circulating and migrating
effects •
Educating project personnel and area residents on risks, prevention, and available treatment
Additional sources of information on disease prevention include IFC, 2006; UNDP, 2000, 2003; Walley et al., 2000; Kindhauser, 2003; Heymann, 2004. 94
APRIL 30, 2007
•
Monitoring communities during high-risk seasons to detect and treat cases 85
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Distributing appropriate education materials
Alarm bells, visual alarms, or other forms of communication
•
Following safety guidelines for the storage, transport, and
should be used to reliably alert workers to an emergency. Related
distribution of pesticides to minimize the potential for misuse,
measures include:
spills, and accidental human exposure
•
3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response
Testing warning systems at least annually (fire alarms monthly), and more frequently if required by local regulations, equipment, or other considerations
•
Installing a back-up system for communications on-site with
An emergency is an unplanned event when a project operation
off-site resources, such as fire departments, in the event that
loses control, or could lose control, of a situation that may result in
normal communication methods may be inoperable during an
risks to human health, property, or the environment, either within
emergency
the facility or in the local community. Emergencies do not normally include safe work practices for frequent upsets or events
Community Notification
that are covered by occupational health and safety.
If a local community may be at risk from a potential emergency
All projects should have an Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan that is commensurate with the risks of the facility
arising at the facility, the company should implement communication measures to alert the community, such as:
and that includes the following basic elements:
•
Audible alarms, such as fire bells or sirens
•
Administration (policy, purpose, distribution, definitions, etc)
•
Fan out telephone call lists
•
Organization of emergency areas (command centers,
•
Vehicle mounted speakers
medical stations, etc)
•
Communicating details of the nature of the emergency
•
Roles and responsibilities
•
Communicating protection options (evacuation, quarantine)
•
Communication systems
•
Providing advise on selecting an appropriate protection
•
Emergency response procedures
•
Emergency resources
•
Training and updating
•
Checklists (role and action list and equipment checklist)
•
Business Continuity and Contingency
option
Media and Agency Relations Emergency information should be communicated to the media through: •
A trained, local spokesperson able to interact with relevant
Additional information is provided for key components of the
stakeholders, and offer guidance to the company for
emergency plan, as follows below.
speaking to the media, government, and other agencies
Communication Systems Worker notification and communication
APRIL 30, 2007
•
Written press releases with accurate information, appropriate level of detail for the emergency, and for which accuracy can be guaranteed
86
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
Emergency Resources
•
limitations, and cost of these resources, for both site-specific
Finance and Emergency Funds •
A mechanism should be provided for funding emergency
emergencies, and community or regional emergencies •
activities.
additional resources may need to be maintained on-site
The company should consider the level of local fire fighting
Mutual Aid
capacity and whether equipment is available for use at the
Mutual aid agreements decrease administrative confusion and
facility in the event of a major emergency or natural disaster.
provide a clear basis for response by mutual aid providers.
If insufficient capacity is available, fire fighting capacity should be acquired that may include pumps, water supplies,
•
Medical Services The company should provide first aid attendants for the facility as well as medical equipment suitable for the
personnel and specialized equipment.
Contact List •
should include the name, description, location, and contact
likely to be required prior to transportation to hospital.
details (telephone, email) for each of the resources, and be maintained annually.
Availability of Resources case of an emergency include: •
The emergency preparedness facilities and emergency response plans require maintenance, review, and updating to account for
funding, expert knowledge, and materials that may be
changes in equipment, personnel, and facilities. Training
required to respond to emergencies. The list should include
programs and practice exercises provide for testing systems to
personnel with specialized expertise for spill clean-up, flood
ensure an adequate level of emergency preparedness. Programs
control, engineering, water treatment, environmental science,
should:
to the identified emergency
•
Tracking and managing the costs associated with emergency resources
APRIL 30, 2007
Identify training needs based on the roles and responsibilities, capabilities and requirements of personnel
Providing personnel who can readily call up resources, as required
•
Training and Updating
Maintaining a list of external equipment, personnel, facilities,
etc., or any of the functions required to adequately respond •
The company should develop a list of contact information for all internal and external resources and personnel. The list
personnel, type of operation, and the degree of treatment
Appropriate measures for managing the availability of resources in
Where appropriate, mutual aid agreements should be maintained with other organizations to allow for sharing of
trucks, and training for personnel.
•
Considering if external resources are unable to provide sufficient capacity during a regional emergency and whether
Fire Services •
Considering the quantity, response time, capability,
in an emergency •
Develop a training plan to address needs, particularly for fire fighting, spill response, and evacuation
87
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Conduct annual training, at least, and perhaps more frequent training when the response includes specialized equipment, procedures, or hazards, or when otherwise mandated
•
Provide training exercises to allow personnel the opportunity to test emergency preparedness, including: o
Desk top exercises with only a few personnel, where the contact lists are tested and the facilities and communication assessed
o
Response exercises, typically involving drills that allow for testing of equipment and logistics
o
Debrief upon completion of a training exercise to assess what worked well and what aspects require improvement
o
Update the plan, as required, after each exercise. Elements of the plan subject to significant change (such as contact lists) should be replaced
o
Record training activities and the outcomes of the training
Business Continuity and Contingency Measures to address business continuity and contingency include: •
Identifying replacement supplies or facilities to allow business continuity following an emergency. For example, alternate sources of water, electricity, and fuel are commonly sought.
•
Using redundant or duplicate supply systems as part of facility operations to increase the likelihood of business continuity.
•
Maintaining back-ups of critical information in a secure location to expedite the return to normal operations following an emergency.
APRIL 30, 2007
88
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP
4.0 Construction and Decommissioning 4.1 Environment.............................................................89 Noise and Vibration ................................................89 Soil Erosion............................................................89 Air Quality..............................................................90 Solid Waste............................................................90 Hazardous Materials...............................................91 Wastewater Discharges..........................................91 Contaminated Land ................................................91 4.2 Occupational Health and Safety................................92 4.3 Community Health and Safety ..................................94 General Site Hazards .............................................94 Disease Prevention ................................................94 Traffic Safety..........................................................95
planned during periods of the day that will result in least disturbance •
Using noise control devices, such as temporary noise barriers and deflectors for impact and blasting activities, and exhaust muffling devices for combustion engines.
•
Avoiding or minimizing project transportation through community areas
Soil Erosion Soil erosion may be caused by exposure of soil surfaces to rain and wind during site clearing, earth moving, and excavation activities. The mobilization and transport of soil particles may, in
Applicability and Approach This section provides additional, specific guidance on prevention and control of community health and safety impacts that may occur during new project development, at the end of the project life-cycle, or due to expansion or modification of existing project facilities. Cross referencing is made to various other sections of the General EHS Guidelines.
turn, result in sedimentation of surface drainage networks, which may result in impacts to the quality of natural water systems and ultimately the biological systems that use these waters. Recommended soil erosion and water system management approaches include:
Sediment mobilization and transport •
4.1 Environment{ TC "4.1 Environment" \f C \l "2" }
Reducing or preventing erosion by: o
Scheduling to avoid heavy rainfall periods (i.e., during the dry season) to the extent practical
o
Noise and Vibration
Contouring and minimizing length and steepness of slopes
During construction and decommissioning activities, noise and
o
Mulching to stabilize exposed areas
vibration may be caused by the operation of pile drivers, earth
o
Re-vegetating areas promptly
moving and excavation equipment, concrete mixers, cranes and
o
Designing channels and ditches for post-construction flows
the transportation of equipment, materials and people. Some recommended noise reduction and control strategies to consider in areas close to community areas include: •
o •
Lining steep channel and slopes (e.g. use jute matting)
Reducing or preventing off-site sediment transport through
Planning activities in consultation with local communities so
use of settlement ponds, silt fences, and water treatment,
that activities with the greatest potential to generate noise are
and modifying or suspending activities during extreme rainfall and high winds to the extent practical.
APRIL 30, 2007
89
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP
Clean runoff management
Air Quality
•
Segregating or diverting clean water runoff to prevent it
Construction and decommissioning activities may generate
mixing with water containing a high solids content, to
emission of fugitive dust caused by a combination of on-site
minimize the volume of water to be treated prior to release
excavation and movement of earth materials, contact of construction machinery with bare soil, and exposure of bare soil
Road design
and soil piles to wind. A secondary source of emissions may
•
Limiting access road gradients to reduce runoff-induced
include exhaust from diesel engines of earth moving equipment,
erosion
as well as from open burning of solid waste on-site. Techniques to
Providing adequate road drainage based on road width,
consider for the reduction and control of air emissions from
surface material, compaction, and maintenance
construction and decommissioning sites include:
•
Disturbance to water bodies •
watercourse crossings
equipment (water suppression, bag house, or cyclone) •
cycles of valued flora and fauna (e.g., migration, spawning,
enclosures and covers, and increasing the moisture content •
For in-stream works, using isolation techniques such as berming or diversion during construction to limit the exposure of disturbed sediments to moving water
•
Consider using trenchless technology for pipeline crossings (e.g., suspended crossings) or installation by directional drilling
Structural (slope) stability •
Providing effective short term measures for slope stabilization, sediment control and subsidence control until long term measures for the operational phase can be implemented
•
Providing adequate drainage systems to minimize and control infiltration
Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust
etc.) •
Minimizing dust from open area sources, including storage piles, by using control measures such as installing
Restricting the duration and timing of in-stream activities to lower low periods, and avoiding periods critical to biological
Minimizing dust from material handling sources, such as conveyors and bins, by using covers and/or control
Depending on the potential for adverse impacts, installing free-spanning structures (e.g., single span bridges) for road
•
•
from vehicle movements •
Selectively removing potential hazardous air pollutants, such as asbestos, from existing infrastructure prior to demolition
•
Managing emissions from mobile sources according to Section 1.1
•
Avoiding open burning of solid (refer to solid waste management guidance in Section 1.6)
Solid Waste Non-hazardous solid waste generated at construction and decommissioning sites includes excess fill materials from grading and excavation activities, scrap wood and metals, and small concrete spills. Other non-hazardous solid wastes include office, kitchen, and dormitory wastes when these types of operations are part of construction project activities. Hazardous solid waste includes contaminated soils, which could potentially be encountered on-site due to previous land use activities, or small
APRIL 30, 2007
90
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP
amounts of machinery maintenance materials, such as oily rags,
Wastewater Discharges
used oil filters, and used oil, as well as spill cleanup materials from
Construction and decommissioning activities may include the
oil and fuel spills. Techniques for preventing and controlling non-
generation of sanitary wastewater discharges in varying quantities
hazardous and hazardous construction site solid waste include
depending on the number of workers involved. Adequate portable
those already discussed in Section 1.6.
or permanent sanitation facilities serving all workers should be
Hazardous Materials Construction and decommissioning activities may pose the
provided at all construction sites. Sanitary wastewater in construction and other sites should be managed as described in Section 1.3.
potential for release of petroleum based products, such as lubricants, hydraulic fluids, or fuels during their storage, transfer,
Contaminated Land
or use in equipment. These materials may also be encountered
Land contamination may be encountered in sites under
during decommissioning activities in building components or
construction or decommissioning due to known or unknown
industrial process equipment. Techniques for prevention,
historical releases of hazardous materials or oil, or due to the
minimization, and control of these impacts include:
presence of abandoned infrastructure formerly used to store or
•
Providing adequate secondary containment for fuel storage
handle these materials, including underground storage tanks.
tanks and for the temporary storage of other fluids such as
Actions necessary to manage the risk from contaminated land will
lubricating oils and hydraulic fluids,
depend on factors such as the level and location of contamination,
Using impervious surfaces for refueling areas and other fluid
the type and risks of the contaminated media, and the intended
transfer areas
land use. However, a basic management strategy should include:
Training workers on the correct transfer and handling of fuels
•
• • • •
and chemicals and the response to spills
protecting the safety and health of occupants of the site, the
Providing portable spill containment and cleanup equipment
surrounding community, and the environment post
on site and training in the equipment deployment
construction or post decommissioning
Assessing the contents of hazardous materials and
•
Understanding the historical use of the land with regard to
petroleum-based products in building systems (e.g. PCB
the potential presence of hazardous materials or oil prior to
containing electrical equipment, asbestos-containing building
initiation of construction or decommissioning activities
materials) and process equipment and removing them prior
•
Preparing plans and procedures to respond to the discovery
to initiation of decommissioning activities, and managing their
of contaminated media to minimize or reduce the risk to
treatment and disposal according to Sections 1.5 and 1.6 on
health, safety, and the environment consistent with the
Hazardous Materials and Hazardous Waste Management,
approach for Contaminated Land in Section 1.6
respectively •
Managing contaminated media with the objective of
•
Preparation of a management plan to manage obsolete,
Assessing the presence of hazardous substances in or on
abandoned, hazardous materials or oil consistent with the
building materials (e.g., polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos-
approach to hazardous waste management described in
containing flooring or insulation) and decontaminating or
Section 1.6.
properly managing contaminated building materials
APRIL 30, 2007
91
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP
Successful implementation of any management strategy may
•
Implementing good house-keeping practices, such as the
require identification and cooperation with whoever is responsible
sorting and placing loose construction materials or demolition
and liable for the contamination.
debris in established areas away from foot paths
4.2 Occupational Health and Safety{ TC "4.2 Occupational Health and Safety" \f C \l "2" } Over-exertion Over-exertion, and ergonomic injuries and illnesses, such as repetitive motion, over-exertion, and manual handling, are among the most common causes of injuries in construction and decommissioning sites. Recommendations for their prevention and control include: •
Training of workers in lifting and materials handling techniques in construction and decommissioning projects, including the placement of weight limits above which
•
Cleaning up excessive waste debris and liquid spills regularly
•
Locating electrical cords and ropes in common areas and marked corridors
•
Work in Heights Falls from elevation associated with working with ladders, scaffolding, and partially built or demolished structures are among the most common cause of fatal or permanent disabling injury at construction or decommissioning sites. If fall hazards exist, a fall protection plan should be in place which includes one or more of the following aspects, depending on the nature of the fall hazard95: •
pounds, when working at heights equal or greater than two
Planning work site layout to minimize the need for manual
meters or at any height if the risk includes falling into
transfer of heavy loads •
operating machinery, into water or other liquid, into
Selecting tools and designing work stations that reduce force
hazardous substances, or through an opening in a work
requirements and holding times, and which promote improved postures, including, where applicable, user adjustable work stations •
surface •
support 5000 pounds (also described in this section in
such as job rotations and rest or stretch breaks
Working at Heights above), as well as fall rescue procedures to deal with workers whose fall has been successfully
Slips and Falls
arrested. The tie in point of the fall arresting system should
Slips and falls on the same elevation associated with poor materials, liquid spills, and uncontrolled use of electrical cords and ropes on the ground, are also among the most frequent cause of
Training and use of personal fall arrest systems, such as full body harnesses and energy absorbing lanyards able to
Implementing administrative controls into work processes,
housekeeping, such as excessive waste debris, loose construction
Training and use of temporary fall prevention devices, such as rails or other barriers able to support a weight of 200
mechanical assists or two-person lifts are necessary •
Use of slip retardant footwear
also be able to support 5000 pounds •
Use of control zones and safety monitoring systems to warn workers of their proximity to fall hazard zones, as well as
lost time accidents at construction and decommissioning sites. Recommended methods for the prevention of slips and falls from,
95 Additional information on identification of fall hazards and design of protection
or on, the same elevation include:
systems can be found in the United States Occupational Health and Safety Administration’s (US OSHA) web site: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/fallprotection/index.html
APRIL 30, 2007
92
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP
securing, marking, and labeling covers for openings in floors,
a turn while moving. Techniques for the prevention and control of
roofs, or walking surfaces
these impacts include:
Struck By Objects
•
machine operation, and walking areas, and controlling
Construction and demolition activities may pose significant
vehicle traffic through the use of one-way traffic routes,
hazards related to the potential fall of materials or tools, as well as
establishment of speed limits, and on-site trained flag-people
ejection of solid particles from abrasive or other types of power
wearing high-visibility vests or outer clothing covering to
tools which can result in injury to the head, eyes, and extremities. Techniques for the prevention and control of these hazards include: •
•
direct traffic •
•
Ensuring the visibility of personnel through their use of high visibility vests when working in or walking through heavy
Using a designated and restricted waste drop or discharge
equipment operating areas, and training of workers to verify
zones, and/or a chute for safe movement of wastes from
eye contact with equipment operators before approaching the
upper to lower levels
operating vehicle
Conducting sawing, cutting, grinding, sanding, chipping or
•
chiseling with proper guards and anchoring as applicable •
Planning and segregating the location of vehicle traffic,
Maintaining clear traffic ways to avoid driving of heavy
Ensuring moving equipment is outfitted with audible back-up alarms
•
Using inspected and well-maintained lifting devices that are
equipment over loose scrap
appropriate for the load, such as cranes, and securing loads
Use of temporary fall protection measures in scaffolds and
when lifting them to higher job-site elevations.
out edges of elevated work surfaces, such as hand rails and •
toe boards to prevent materials from being dislodged
Dust
Evacuating work areas during blasting operations, and using
•
blast mats or other means of deflection to minimize fly rock or
as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust
ejection of demolition debris if work is conducted in proximity
from vehicle movements
to people or structures •
Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such
Wearing appropriate PPE, such as safety glasses with side
•
PPE, such as dusk masks, should be used where dust levels are excessive
shields, face shields, hard hats, and safety shoes
Confined Spaces and Excavations Moving Machinery
Examples of confined spaces that may be present in construction
Vehicle traffic and use of lifting equipment in the movement of
or demolition sites include: silos, vats, hoppers, utility vaults,
machinery and materials on a construction site may pose
tanks, sewers, pipes, and access shafts. Ditches and trenches
temporary hazards, such as physical contact, spills, dust,
may also be considered a confined space when access or egress
emissions, and noise. Heavy equipment operators have limited
is limited. In addition to the guidance provided in Section 2.8 the
fields of view close to their equipment and may not see
occupational hazards associated with confined spaces and
pedestrians close to the vehicle. Center-articulated vehicles create
excavations in construction and decommissioning sites should be
a significant impact or crush hazard zone on the outboard side of
prevented according to the following recommendations:
APRIL 30, 2007
93
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP
•
Controlling site-specific factors which may contribute to
respirators, clothing/protective suits, gloves and eye
excavation slope instability including, for example, the use of
protection
excavation dewatering, side-walls support, and slope gradient adjustments that eliminate or minimize the risk of collapse, entrapment, or drowning •
Providing safe means of access and egress from excavations, such as graded slopes, graded access route, or stairs and ladders
•
Avoiding the operation of combustion equipment for prolonged periods inside excavations areas where other workers are required to enter unless the area is actively ventilated
Other Site Hazards Construction and decommissioning sites may pose a risk of exposure to dust, chemicals, hazardous or flammable materials, and wastes in a combination of liquid, solid, or gaseous forms, which should be prevented through the implementation of project-
4.3 Community Health and Safety{ TC "4.3 Community Health and Safety" \f C \l "2" } General Site Hazards Projects should implement risk management strategies to protect the community from physical, chemical, or other hazards associated with sites under construction and decommissioning. Risks may arise from inadvertent or intentional trespassing, including potential contact with hazardous materials, contaminated soils and other environmental media, buildings that are vacant or under construction, or excavations and structures which may pose falling and entrapment hazards. Risk management strategies may include: •
Restricting access to the site, through a combination of
specific plans and other applicable management practices,
institutional and administrative controls, with a focus on high
including:
risk structures or areas depending on site-specific situations,
•
waste materials from tanks, vessels, processing equipment or contaminated land as a first step in decommissioning activities to allow for safe excavation, construction, dismantling or demolition •
Use of specially trained personnel to identify and selectively remove potentially hazardous materials in building elements prior to dismantling or demolition including, for example, insulation or structural elements containing asbestos and Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs), electrical components containing mercury96
•
including fencing, signage, and communication of risks to the
Use of specially trained personnel to identify and remove
local community •
Removing hazardous conditions on construction sites that cannot be controlled affectively with site access restrictions, such as covering openings to small confined spaces, ensuring means of escape for larger openings such as trenches or excavations, or locked storage of hazardous materials
Disease Prevention Increased incidence of communicable and vector-borne diseases attributable to construction activities represents a potentially
Use of waste-specific PPE based on the results of an
serious health threat to project personnel and residents of local
occupational health and safety assessment, including
communities. Recommendations for the prevention and control of
96 Additional information on the management and removal of asbestos containing
communicable and vector-borne diseases also applicable to
building materials can be found in ASTM Standard E2356 and E1368
APRIL 30, 2007
94
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP
construction phase activities are provided in Section 3.6 (Disease Prevention).
Traffic Safety Construction activities may result in a significant increase in movement of heavy vehicles for the transport of construction materials and equipment increasing the risk of traffic-related accidents and injuries to workers and local communities. The incidence of road accidents involving project vehicles during construction should be minimized through a combination of education and awareness-raising, and the adoption of procedures described in Section 3.4 (Traffic Safety).
APRIL 30, 2007
95
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES WORLD BANK GROUP
References and Additional Sources ATSDR (Agency for Toxic Substance and Disease Registry). Quick Reference Pocket Guide for Toxicological Profiles. http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/toxguides/ (accessed May 19, 2006).
Chavasse, D.C. and H.H. Yap, eds. 1997. Chemical Methods for the Control of Vectors and Pests of Public Health Importance. Geneva, Switzerland: World Health Organization.
ATSDR. 2005. Top 20 Hazardous Substances 2005. http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/cxcx3.html (accessed May 19, 2006).
Dockrill, Paul and Frank Friedrich. 2001. “Boilers and Heaters: Improving Energy Efficiency.” NRCAN. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/boilersheaters.pdf
Air and Waste Management Association (AWMA). 2000. Air Pollution Engineering Manual, Second Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.. New York, NY. ACGIH (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists). 2005. Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances in the Work Environment. Cincinnati:ACGIH. ANSI (American National Standards Institute). Homepage. http://www.ansi.org/ (accessed May 19, 2006). ADB. 2003. Road Safety Audit for Road Projects: An Operational Tool. Asian Development Bank, Manila.
Environment Canada, 2005. Hazardous Waste. http://www.atl.ec.gc.ca/pollution/hazardouswaste.html (accessed May 19, 2006). European Commission. 2000. “Guidance Document for EPER implementation.” Directorate-General for Environment. http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm European Council Directive 91/271 of 21 May 1991 concerning urban wastewater treatment (http://ec.europa.eu/environment/water/waterurbanwaste/info/docs_en.htm)
American Petroleum Institute, Management of Process Hazards (R.P. 750).
EPER (European Pollutant Emission Register). Homepage. http://www.eper.cec.eu.int/eper/default.asp (accessed May 19, 2006).
Assum, T. 1998. Road Safety in Africa: Appraisal of Road Safety Initiatives in Five African Countries. Working Paper No. 33. The World Bank and United Nations Economic Commission for Africa.
EREC (European Renewable Energy Council). 2006. Renewable Energy Sources. http://www.erec-renewables.org/sources/default.htm (accessed April 24, 2006).
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E1739-95(2002) Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Applied at Petroleum Release Sites ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1 Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at chemical release sites). ASTM E 1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects ASTM E 2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys ASTM E 2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of Installed Asbestos Cement Products. Australian Government. NPI Industry Reporting. Department of the Environment and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/ Australian Government. 2004. “National Pollutant Inventory Guide.” Department Of Environment and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf Awareness and Preparedness for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines available at: http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html Bringezu, Stefan and Helmut Schutz. 2001. “Material use indicators for the European Union, 1980-1997 – Economy-side material flow accounts and balances and derived indicators of resource use.” European Commission. http://www.belspo.be/platformisd/Library/Material%20use%20Bringezu.PDF BC MOE (BC Ministry of Environment). Guidance on Contaminated Sites. http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance/ (accessed May 18, 2006) CIWMB (California Integrated Waste Management Board). “Sustainable Materials”. State Training Manual. http://www.ciwmb.ca.gov/GreenBuilding/Training/StateManual/Materials.doc (accessed May 18, 2006) CCPS (Center for Chemical Process Safety). Homepage. American Institute of Chemical Engineers. www.aiche.org/ccps (accessed May 18, 2006) CCPS. 1992. Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures. American Institute of Chemical Engineers.
APRIL 30, 2007
EUROPA. Summaries of Legislation: Air Pollution. http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm (accessed March 25, 2006) Fairman, Robyn, Carl D.Mead, and W. Peter Williams. 1999. “Environmental Risk Assessment - Approaches, Experiences and Information Sources”. London: Monitoring and Assessment Research Centre, King's College,. http://reports.eea.eu.int/GH-07-97-595-EN-C2/en FAO (Food and Agriculture Organization). 1995. “Guidelines on Good Labeling Practices for Pesticides.” Rome: FAO. http://ecoport.org/Resources/Refs/Pesticid/Guides/guides.htm FAO. 1985. “Guidelines for the Packaging and Storage of Pesticides.” Rome: FAO http://www.fao.org/ag/AGP/AGPP/Pesticid/Code/Download/pacstor.doc Francey, R., J. Pickford and R. Reed. 1992. “A Guide to the Development of Onsite Sanitation.” Geneva: World Health Organization. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/hygiene/envsan/onsitesan/en/print.html GVRD (Greater Vancouver Regional District). 1999. Caring for our Waterways: Liquid Waste Management Plan Stage 2, Discussion Document. 136 pp. GVRD. 2001. “Liquid Waste Management Plan.” Greater Vancouver: Stormwater Management Technical Advisory Task Group. http://www.gvrd.bc.ca/sewerage/lwmp_feb2001/lwmp_plan_feb2001.pdf IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America). Homepage. http://www.iesna.org/ (accessed May 18, 2006) Industry Canada. Eco-efficiency. http://strategis.ic.gc.ca/epic/internet/ineeee.nsf/en/Home (accessed May 18, 2006) IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change). National Greenhouse Gas Inventories Program. http://www.ipcc-nggip.iges.or.jp/ (accessed May 18, 2006) ILO-OSH (International Labour Organization – Occupational Safety and Health). 2001. “Guidelines on Occupational Safety & Health Management Systems”. Geneva: International Labour Office. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/safework/cops/english/download /e000013.pdf ICC (International Code Council). 2006. “International Building Code”. Falls Church, Virginia: ICC.
96
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES WORLD BANK GROUP
IATA (International Air Transport Association). 2005. “Dangerous Goods Regulations Manual.” Geneva: IATA. http://www.iata.org/ps/publications/9065.htm (accessed May 18, 2006) IAEA (International Atomic Energy Agency). International Basic Safety Standard for protection against Ionizing Radiation and for the Safety of Radiation Sources http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160 (accessed May 19, 2006). IHS 1996. ISO 9613 – Acoustics – Attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors – Part 2: General method of calculation. http://engineers.ihs.com/document/abstract/XVNLCAAAAAAAAAAA (accessed May 19, 2006). IMO (International Maritime Organization). International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code. http://www.imo.org/Safety/mainframe.asp?topic_id=158 (accessed May 18, 2006) ISO (International Organization for Standardization). Quality and Environmental Management. http://www.iso.org/iso/en/iso9000-14000/index.html (accessed May 18, 2006) IOMC (Inter-Organization Programme for the Sound Management of Chemicals. 2001. “The WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and Guidelines to Classification 2000-2002.” International Program on Chemical Safety. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2002/a76526.pdf Kates, R., Hohenemser, C., and J. Kasperson, Editors. 1985. Perilous Progress: Management the Hazards of Technology. Westview Press, London. Knowlton, R. Ellis. 1992. A Manual of Hazard & Operability Studies. Chemetics International. LDAR (Leak Detection and Repair Professionals). http://www.ldar.net/ (accessed May 18, 2006). Lijzen, J.P.A., A.J. Baars, P.F. Otte, M.G.J. Rikken, F.A. Swartjes, E.M.J. Verbruggen and A.P. van Wezel. 2001. Technical evaluation of the Intervention Values for Soil/sediment and Groundwater - Human and ecotoxicological risk assessment and derivation of risk limits for soil, aquatic sediment and groundwater. RIVM report 711701 023. Netherlands National Institute of Public Health and the Environment. http://www.rivm.nl/bibliotheek/rapporten/711701023.pdf
NRCAN. 2004. “EnerGuide for Industry: Your guide to selecting energy-efficient industrial equipment”. Office of Energy Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/Energuide-industry/EGIbrochure-e.cfm NRCAN. Energy Star® - Heating, Cooling and Ventilation. Office of Energy Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&printvie w=N#AC (accessed April 9, 2006) NRCAN. Technical Factsheet CanMOST – Canadian Motor Selection Tool. Office of Energy Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/canadian-motor/index.cfm (accessed May 18, 2006) NRCAN. 2005a. “Team up for Energy Savings - Compressed Air.” Office of Energy Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/compressed-air.pdf NRCAN. 2005b. Team up for Energy Savings – Lighting.” Office of Energy Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/light.pdf NRCAN. 2006a. Model National Energy Code for Buildings (MNECB) for the Commercial Building Incentive Program. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/newbuildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20 (accessed March 24, 2006) NRCAN. 2006b. Office of Energy Efficiency General Database. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/infosource/PDFs (accessed March 24, 2006) NRCAN. 2006c. Office of Energy Efficiency – Industry Projects Database. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/home/index.cfm?act=category&cate gory=07&PrintView=N&Text=N (accessed March 24, 2006) NRCAN. 2006d. Energy Efficiency Regulations and Standards for Industry – Canada’s Energy Efficiency Regulations. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/industrial/regulations-standards/index.cfm?attr=24 (accessed April 24, 2006) New Zealand Ministry of the Environment. 2004. “Contaminated Land Management Guidelines No.5: Site Investigation and Analysis of Soils.” Federal Government of New Zealand. http://www.mfe.govt.nz/publications/hazardous/contaminated-land-mgmtguidelines-no5/index.html
Massachusetts Department of Environment. Cleanup Sites and Spills. http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup (accessed May 19, 2006).
North American Energy Working Group. “North American Energy Efficiency Standards and Labeling.”
MSHA (Mine Safety and Health Administration). Homepage. http://www.msha.gov/ (accessed May 19, 2006).
Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). Database on Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals. http://appli1.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf
NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health). Center for Disease Control and Prevention – Department of Health and Human Services. http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html (accessed May 18, 2006)
OECD. 1999. Safety Strategies for Rural Roads. Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development, Paris. www.oecd.org/dataoecd/59/2/2351720.pdf
National Research Council of Canada, 2005. Building Codes. http://www.nrccnrc.gc.ca/doingbusiness/codes_e.html (accessed May 18, 2006). NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). Electric Motors – Factsheet 6. Office of Energy Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/regulations/html/Factsheet6.cfm?text=N&printview=N (accessed May 18, 2006) NRCAN. Energy-Efficient Motor Systems Assessment Guide. Office of Energy Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/cipec/ieep/newscentre/motor_system/introduction.cfm?text= N&printview=N (accessed May 18, 2006) NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). EnerGuide Program. Office of Energy Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N (accessed March 24, 2006)
APRIL 30, 2007
OHSAS. 2000. OHSAS 18002:2000. Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems - Guidelines for the Implementation of OHSAS 18001. OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration). Emergency Standards. http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/evacuation/standards_card.html (accessed May 18, 2006) OSHA. Safety and Health Topics - Toxic Metals. http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/metalsheavy/ (accessed May 19, 2006) Peden, Margie, David Sleet, Adnan Hyder and Colin Mathers, eds. 2004. “World Report on Road Traffic Injury Prevention.” Geneva: World Health Organization. http://www.who.int/world-health-day/2004/infomaterials/world_report/en/ PDEP (Pennsylvania Department of Environment Protection). Official Recycled Product Guide. http://www.dep.state.pa.us/wm_apps/recycledproducts/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
97
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES WORLD BANK GROUP
PTCL (Physical and Theoretical Chemistry Lab). Safety (MSDS) data for benzo(a)pyrene. http://www.physchem.ox.ac.uk/MSDS/BE/benzo(a)pyrene.html (accessed May 18, 2006)
(US DOE). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers – Combustion. http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/combustion.html#opp1 (accessed April 30, 2006).
Prokop, Gundula. 2002. “Second Technical Workshop on Contaminated Sites Workshop Proceedings and Follow-up.” European Environment Agency. http://reports.eea.europa.eu/technical_report_2002_76/en/Tech76.pdf
US DOE (US Department of Energy). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers – Process Heating Systems. http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html (accessed April 30, 2006).
Ritter, L., K.R. Solomon, J. Forget, M. Stemeroff and C.O’Leary. “An Assessment Report on: DDT-Aldrin-Dieldrin-Endrin-Chlordane, Heptachlor-Hexachlorobenzene, Mirex-Toxaphene, Polychlorinated Biphenyls, Dioxins and Furans.” International Programme on Chemical Safety. http://www.pops.int/documents/background/assessreport/en/ritteren.pdf (accessed May 18, 2006) Ross A, Baguley C, Hills B, McDonald M, Solcock D.1991. “Towards Safer Roads in Developing Countries: A Guide for Planners and Engineers.” Berkshire: Transport and Road Research Laboratory.
US DOE. Industry Plant Managers and Engineers – Steam Boilers. http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/steam.html (accessed April 30, 2006). US DOE. Industrial Technologies Program – Best Practices. http://www1.eere.energy.gov/industry/bestpractices/ (accessed April 30, 2006) US DOE. “The Big Picture on Process Heating”. Industrial Technologies Program – Best Practices. http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/em_proheat_bigpict.pdf (accessed April 30, 2006).
Rushbrook, P. and M. Pugh. 1998. “Solid Waste Landfills in Middle- and LowerIncome Countries: A Technical Guide to Planning, Design, and Operation.” World Bank. http://wwwwds.worldbank.org/external/default/WDSContentServer/IW3P/IB/2002/12/06/0000 94946_02112104104987/Rendered/PDF/multi0page.pdf
US DOE. 2005. “Improve Motor System Efficiency for a Broader Range of Motors with MotorMaster+ International.” Industrial Technologies Program. http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/mmplus_international.pdf
SCPOP (Stockholm Convention on POPs). Guidance Documents. http://www.pops.int/documents/guidance/ (accessed May 19, 2006)
US DOT (US Department of Transportation). HAZMATS Regulations. http://hazmat.dot.gov/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
Tsunokawa, Koji and Christopher Hoban, eds. 1997. “Roads and the Environment: A Handbook.” Washington, D.C.: World Bank. http://www.worldbank.org/transport/publicat/reh/toc.htm
US Energy Star Program. Guidelines for Energy Management. http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines (accessed April 24, 2006)
UK Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs. http://www.defra.gov.uk/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
US Energy Star Program. Tools and Resources. http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=tools_resources.bus_energy_management _tools_resources (accessed April 9, 2006)
UK Environment Agency. Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment (CLEA). http://www.environmentagency.gov.uk/subjects/landquality/113813/672771/?version=1&lang=_e (accessed May 18, 2006)
US EPA (US Environmental Protection Agency). Air Compliance Advisor. http://www.epa.gov/ttn/ecas/ACA.htm (accessed May 18, 2006)
UN/ECE (United Nations/Economic Commission for Europe). United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods Model Regulations. http://www.unece.org/trans/ (accessed May 18, 2006) UN/ECE. The Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook. http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm (accessed May 18, 2006). UNEP (United Nation Environment Program). Secretariat of the Basel Convention on Hazardous Waste Management. http://www.basel.int/index.html (accessed May 18, 2006) UNEP. Persistant Organic Pollutants. http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
US EPA. Ambient Air Monitoring QA Program. http://www.epa.gov/airprogm/oar/oaqps/qa/index.html#guidance (accessed May 19, 2006). US EPA. Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines – Product Fact Sheets. http://www.epa.gov/cpg/factshts.htm (accessed May 18, 2006) US EPA. EPA Guidance. Environmentally Preferable Purchasing. http://www.epa.gov/oppt/epp/pubs/guidance/guidancepage.htm (accessed May 18, 2006) US EPA. Hazardous Waste. http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/osw/hazwaste.htm (accessed May 19, 2006). US EPA. Hazardous Waste Identification. http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/id/id.htm#id (accessed May 19, 2006).
UNEP. Country contributions: Information on the regulatory status of POPs; bans, restrictions, and/or other legal permitted uses. http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/POPs_Inc/INC_3/inf-english/inf3-9/sect5.pdf (accessed May 18, 2006).
US EPA. Major Environmental Laws. Laws and Regulations. http://www.epa.gov/epahome/laws.htm (accessed May 18, 2006)
UNEP. 1993. Cleaner Production Worldwide Volume 1. http://www.uneptie.org/PC/cp/library/catalogue/regional_reports.htm .
US EPA. Performance Track Assistance. National Environmental Performance Track. http://www.epa.gov/performancetrack/ptrackassist.htm (accessed May 18, 2006)
UNEP. 1997. The Environmental Management of Industrial Estates. Industry and Environment, United Nations Environment Programme.
US EPA 40 CFR Part 133, Secondary Treatment Regulation (http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_02/40cfr133_02.html)
US DOE. Building Toolbox – Boilers. Building Technologies Program. http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/components/hvac/boilers.html (accessed April 30, 2006)
US EPA. Persistant Organic Pollutants (POPs). http://www.epa.gov/oppfead1/international/pops.htm (accessed May 19, 2006)
US DOE. 2002. Heating and Cooling Equipment Selection. Office of Building Technology, State and Community Programs – Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy. http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/documents/pdfs/26459.pdf
APRIL 30, 2007
US EPA. Pollution Prevention Highlights. http://www.epa.gov/p2/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
98
Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES WORLD BANK GROUP
US EPA. Region 9 Preliminary Remediation Goals. http://www.epa.gov/region9/waste/sfund/prg/ (accessed May 19, 2006). US EPA. Technology Transfer Network Clearinghouse for Inventories and Emissions Factors. http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief/ US EPA. Waste Minimization. http://www.epa.gov/wastemin/ (accessed May 19, 2006). US EPA. 1991. Technical support document for water quality-based toxic control. Washington, DC.: Office of Water Enforcement and Permits, Office of Water Regulations and Standards.
WHO. 2000a. Guidelines for the Purchase of Public Health Pesticides. WHO/CDS/WHOPES/2000.1. Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and Eradication, World Health Organization. WHO. 2000b. Air Quality Guidelines for Europe. Geneva:WHO. http://www.euro.who.int/document/e71922.pdf WHO. 2000. Towards an Assessment of the Socioeconomic Impact of Arsenic Poisoning in Bangladesh. WHO/SDE/WSH/00.4. World Health Organization. WHO. 2001. Chemistry and Specifications of Pesticides. Technical Report Series 899. Geneva: WHO.
US EPA. 2004. National Recommended Water Quality Criteria. Washington. DC: United States Office of Water. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Science and Technology (4304T).
WHO. 2003. “Draft Guidelines for the Management of Public Health Pesticides.” Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and Eradication, World Health Organization. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2003/WHO_CDS_WHOPES_2003.7.pdf
US EPA. 2005. Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA). Pesticides Re-registration. http://www.epa.gov/oppad001/reregistration/cca/ (accessed May 18, 2006)
WHO. 2004. Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality - Volume 1 Recommendations. Geneva: WHO. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/GDWQ2004web.pdf
US EPA. 2006. 40CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, section 302.4, Designation of Hazardous Substances. http://ecfr.gpoaccess.gov/cgi/t/text/textidx?c=ecfr&sid=a1d39cb9632558b450b2d09e45b5ca78&rgn=div8&view=text&nod e=40:27.0.1.1.2.0.1.4&idno=40 USGS (US Geological Survey). 2000. Recycled Aggregates—Profitable Resource Conservation. USGS Fact Sheet FS–181–99. http://pubs.usgs.gov/fs/fs-018199/fs-0181-99so.pdf US NFPA (US National Fire Protection Association). 2006. 101- Life Safety Code Handbook. http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target% 5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search (accessed May 19, 2006). US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR 1910.119 App A, Threshold Quantities. US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29CFR Part 1910.120, Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Standard.
WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and Greywater. Volume 2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html WHO. 2005. Guidelines for drinking-water quality. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq3/en/ (accessed May 18, 2006) Woolliams, J. 2002. “Planning, Design and Construction Strategies for Green Buildings.” Eco-City Planning Company. http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategies_g uide.pdf Yassi, A. et al. 1998. Basic Environmental Health. WHO/EHG/98.19. Office of Global and Integrated Environmental Health, World Health Organization, Geneva. Zaim, M. 2002. Global Insecticide Use for Vector-Borne Disease Control. WHO/CDS/WHOPES/GCDPP/2002.2. Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and Eradication, World Health Organization.
US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR Part 1910.119. WHO. 1987. Technology for Water Supply and Sanitation in Developing Countries. Technical Report Series No. 742. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1989. New Approaches to Improve Road Safety. Technical Report 781b. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1993. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 1: Recommendations. 2nd Edition. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1994. Operation and Maintenance of Urban Water Supply and Sanitation Systems: A Guide for Managers. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1996. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 2: Health Criteria and Other Supporting Information. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1997. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 3: Surveillance and Control of Community Supplies. World Health Organization, Geneva. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq2v1/en/index2.html (accessed May 18, 2006) WHO. 1999. Draft Specifications for Bacterial Larvicides for Public Health Use. WHO/CDS/CPC/WHOPES/99.2. Communicable Diseases Prevention and Control, WHO Pesticide Evaluation Scheme, World Health Organization. WHO. 1999. Prevention and Control of Dengue and Dengue Haemorrhagic Fever: Comprehensive Guidelines. WHO Regional Publication, SEARO No. 29. Regional Office for South-East Asia, World Health Organization, New Delhi. WHO. 1999. Safety of Pyrethroid-Treated Mosquito Nets. WHO/CDS/CPE/WHOPES/99.5. World Health Organization, Geneva.
APRIL 30, 2007
99
View more...
Comments
